Schemes of Work
- Lesson - Reactions of metals Lesson Plan Lesson Title
-
- TBA
-
- T:
-
-
- Lesson - Reactions of metals Lesson Plan Lesson Title
-
- Use of amount of substance in relation to volumes of gases (Chemistry only) (HT only)
-
- B1.1
- Lesson 01 - What is the difference between a eukaryote and a prokaryote cell? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Plant and animal cells (eukaryotic cells) have a cell membrane, cytoplasm and genetic material enclosed in a nucleus.
- Suggested Activity:
Recall structure of plant and animal cells as teams with whiteboards.
- Suggested Activity:
- Bacteria have cytoplasm and a cell membrane surrounded by a cell wall.
- Suggested Activity:
GF - Justify why the majority of disease causing organisms are prokaryotic.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of the scale and size of cells and be able to make order of magnitude calculations, including the use of standard form.
- Bacterial cells (prokaryotic cells) are much smaller in comparison.
- In bacteria the genetic material is not enclosed in a nucleus. It is a single DNA loop and there may be one or more small rings of DNA called plasmids.
- Suggested Activity:
Use plasticine to make a model of a bacteria cell.
Extension: make a model (scaled up) of an animal cell to visualise difference in size.Equipment Required:
Plasticine.
- Suggested Activity:
- Plant and animal cells (eukaryotic cells) have a cell membrane, cytoplasm and genetic material enclosed in a nucleus.
- Lesson 02 - How is a plant cell different from an animal cell? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Most animal cells have the following parts:
- a nucleus
- cytoplasm
- a cell membrane
- mitochondria
- ribosomes. - In addition to the parts found in animal cells, plant cells often have:
- chloroplasts
- a permanent vacuole filled with cell sap
- cell wall- Suggested Activity:
Explore structure of animal and plant cells using models
Equipment Required:
Models of animal and plant cells
- Suggested Activity:
- Plant and algal cells also have a cell wall made of cellulose, which strengthens the cell.
- Students should be able to explain how the main sub-cellular structures, including the nucleus, cell membranes, mitochondria, chloroplasts in plant cells and plasmids in bacterial cells are related to their functions.
- Students should be able to use estimations and explain when they should be used to judge the relative size or area of sub-cellular structures.
- Most animal cells have the following parts:
- Lesson 03 - Why are there different types of animal cells? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Cells may be specialised to carry out a particular function:
sperm cells, nerve cells and muscle cells in animals.- Suggested Activity:
Specialised cell Chinese whispers.
Equipment Required:
Pictures of specialised cells
- Suggested Activity:
- Nerve cells have a long shape can conduct electricity so the can send messages between places in the body.
- Muscle cells have:
- a long shape so they can contract causing movement
- lots of mitochondria to gain enough energy through respiration. - Sperm cells have:
- a pointed head to be streamlined and to poke into the egg cell
- tail to swim
- lots of mitrocondria to generate the energy to swim. - Cells may be specialised to carry out a particular function:
root hair cells, xylem and phloem cells in plants. - Root hair cells have a large surface area to absorb water and nutrients.
- Xylem cells in plants have:
- no cytoplasm or other organelles,
- no cell walls on the end, so they form a tube
- cell walls strengthened with waterproof lignin
To:
- transport water around the plant
- to strengthen the plant - Phloem cells in plants have:
- no cytoplasm or other organelles,
- open ends with sieve plates between cells
To:
- transport 'phood' around the plant - Students should be able to, when provided with appropriate information, explain how the structure of different types of cell relate to their function in a tissue, an organ or organ system, or the whole organism.
- Suggested Activity:
Observe examples of specialised cells under a microscope
Equipment Required:
Microscopes
Slides of specialised cells
- Suggested Activity:
- Cells may be specialised to carry out a particular function:
- Lesson 04 - How have microscopes developed over time? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to understand how microscopy techniques have developed over time
- This means that electron microscopes can be used to study cells in much finer detail. This has enabled biologists to see and understand many more sub-cellular structures.
- Students should be able to explain how electron microscopy has increased understanding of sub-cellular structures. Limited to the differences in magnification and resolution.
- Suggested Activity:
View images created by an electron microscope compared to a light microscope.
Students to independently come up with the differences between microscope imaging.Equipment Required:
Pictures of images taken by an electron microscope and images taken by a light microscope.
- Suggested Activity:
- An electron microscope has much higher magnification and resolving power than a light microscope.
- Suggested Activity:
EW - Evaluate an electron microscope against a light microscope.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to understand how microscopy techniques have developed over time
- Lesson 05 - How are microscopes used to calculate sizes of specimens? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to carry out calculations involving
magnification, real size and image size using the formula:
magnification = size of image x
size of real object
* Use prefixes centi, milli, micro and nano.- Suggested Activity:
Use pre-made slides of cells and graticules to calculate the real size of the cells.
Equipment Required:
Microscopes. Pre-made slides of cells. Graticules.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to use prefixes centi, milli, micro and nano.
- Students should be able to express answers in standard form if appropriate
- Students should be able to carry out calculations involving
- Lesson 06 - How are light microscopes used to observe and record eukaryotes? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required Practical 1 - Microscopy (AT skills 1,7)
- Suggested Activity:
AQA Biology Required Practical 1 - Microscopy
Equipment Required:
AQA Biology Required Practical 1 - Microscopy
Microscopes
Onion & knife
Iodine
slides
cover slips
- Suggested Activity:
- Required Practical 1 - Microscopy (AT skills 1,7)
- Lesson 07 - What effect do disinfectants and antibiotics have on bacteria growth? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Biology only) Required Practical 2 - Microbiology (Biology only) (AT skills 1,3,4,8)
- (Biology only) Bacteria multiply by simple cell division (binary fission) as often as once every 20 minutes if they have enough nutrients and a suitable temperature.
- (Biology only) Bacteria can be grown in a nutrient broth solution or as colonies on an agar gel plate.
- (Biology only) Uncontaminated cultures of microorganisms are required for investigating the action of disinfectants and antibiotics.
- (Biology only) Students should be able to describe how to prepare an uncontaminated culture using aseptic technique.
- (Biology only) They should be able to explain why petri dishes and culture media must be sterilised before use
- (Biology only) They should be able to explain why inoculating loops used to transfer microorganisms to the media must be sterilised by passing them through a flame
- (Biology only) They should be able to explain why the lid of the Petri dish should be secured with adhesive tape and stored upside down
- (Biology only) They should be able to explain why in school laboratories, cultures should generally be incubated at 25?C.
- Suggested Activity:
AQA Biology Required Practical 2 - Microbiology
Equipment Required:
AQA Biology Required Practical 2 - Microbiology
- Suggested Activity:
- (Biology only) Required Practical 2 - Microbiology (Biology only) (AT skills 1,3,4,8)
- Lesson 08 - How is the cross-sectional area of a zone of inhibition calculated? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Biology only) Students should be able to calculate cross-sectional areas of colonies or
clear areas around colonies using πr². - (Biology only) Students should be able to calculate the number of bacteria in a
population after a certain time if given the mean division time. - (Biology only) Students should be able to express the answer in standard form.
- Suggested Activity:
Review and use agar plates from AQA Biology Required Practical 2 - Microbiology to calculate cross-sectional areas
Equipment Required:
Agar plates from AQA Biology Required Practical 2 - Microbiology
- Suggested Activity:
- (Biology only) Students should be able to calculate cross-sectional areas of colonies or
- Lesson 09 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
-
- Suggested Activity:
B1.1 Exam Questions (Foundation)
B1.1 Exam Questions (Higher & Separates)
- Suggested Activity:
-
- Lesson 10 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
-
- Suggested Activity:
B1.1 Exam Questions Mark Scheme (Foundation)
B1.1 Exam Questions Mark Scheme (Higher)
B1.1 PiXL Intervention Resources
- Suggested Activity:
-
- Lesson 01 - What is the difference between a eukaryote and a prokaryote cell? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- B1.2
- Lesson 01 - How do we replace old and damaged cells? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The nucleus of a cell contains chromosomes made of DNA molecules.
- Each chromosome carries a large number of genes.
- In body cells the chromosomes are normally found in pairs.
- Suggested Activity:
Quiz pupils about their knowledge of DNA and chromosomes, testing keywords.
GF: question as to why chromosomes exist in pairs.
- Suggested Activity:
- Cells divide in a series of stages called the cell cycle.
- Students should be able to describe the stages of the cell cycle, including mitosis.
- During the cell cycle the genetic material is doubled and then divided into two identical cells.
- Before a cell can divide it needs to grow and increase the number of sub-cellular structures such as ribosomes and mitochondria. The DNA replicates to form two copies of each chromosome.
- Suggested Activity:
Flow diagram of the stages of the cell cycle describing the key points of each stage. Have flow diagram cycle round.
- Suggested Activity:
- In mitosis one set of chromosomes is pulled to each end of the cell and the nucleus divides.
- Finally the cytoplasm and cell membranes divide to form two identical cells.
- Students need to understand the three overall stages of the cell cycle but do not need to know the different phases of the mitosis stage.
- Cell division by mitosis is important in the growth and development of multicellular organisms.
- Students should be able to recognise and describe situations in given contexts where mitosis is occurring.
- Suggested Activity:
Stretch: Describe/Draw annotate what happens to the replicated chromosomes during mitosis.
Challenge: Explain how mitosis makes sure that the division results in two genetically identical daughter cells.
GF: Explain why it is important that cell division is a very controlled process.
- Suggested Activity:
- The nucleus of a cell contains chromosomes made of DNA molecules.
- Lesson 02 - What increases the risk of getting cancer? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- There are also genetic risk factors for some cancers.
- Students should be able to describe cancer as the result of changes in cells that lead to uncontrolled growth and division.
- Suggested Activity:
Explore the treatments used for cancer, discuss how these work.
- Suggested Activity:
- Benign tumours are growths of abnormal cells which are contained in one area, usually within a membrane.
- Benign tumours do not invade other parts of the body.
- Malignant tumour cells are cancers.
- Malignant tumours invade neighbouring tissues and spread to different parts of the body in the blood where they form secondary tumours.
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OcigJn8UJNQ
Describe the difference between malignant and benign tumours.
Explain how cancers can spread to other parts of the body.
- Suggested Activity:
- Scientists have identified lifestyle risk factors for various types of cancer.
- Suggested Activity:
Analyse data on biological and lifestyle factors linked to forms of cancer.
GF/EW: Evaluate how well different factors can be limited to decrease the chance of getting cancer.
- Suggested Activity:
- There are also genetic risk factors for some cancers.
- Lesson 03 - What are stem cells and how can we use them? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Most types of animal cell differentiate at an early stage.
- As an organism develops, cells differentiate to form different types of cells.
- As a cell differentiates it acquires different sub-cellular structures to enable it to carry out a certain function. It has become a specialised cell.
- Students should be able to explain the importance of cell differentiation.
- In mature animals, cell division is mainly restricted to repair and replacement.
- Suggested Activity:
Stretch - recall why new cells need to be made
Challenge - Explain why multicellular organisms are made of different types of cell?
- Suggested Activity:
- A stem cell is an undifferentiated cell of an organism which is capable of giving rise to many more cells of the same type, and from which certain other cells can arise from differentiation.
- Students should be able to describe the function of stem cells in embryos, in adult animals and in the meristems in plants.
- Stem cells from human embryos can be cloned and made to differentiate into most different types of human cells.
- Stem cells from adult bone marrow can form many types of cells including blood cells.
- Knowledge and understanding of stem cell techniques are not required.
- Suggested Activity:
Double bubble stem cells and specialised cells.
- Suggested Activity:
- Treatment with stem cells may be able to help conditions such as diabetes and paralysis.
- In therapeutic cloning an embryo is produced with the same genes as the patient.
- Stem cells from the embryo are not rejected by the patient?s body so they may be used for medical treatment.
- The use of stem cells has potential risks such as transfer of viral infection, and some people have ethical or religious objections.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Discuss the ethical issues surrounding the use of artificial embryonic stem cells in people
- Suggested Activity:
- (WS) Evaluate the practical risks and benefits, as well as social and ethical issues, of the use of stem cells in medical research and treatments.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Evaluate the practical risks and benefits, as well as social and ethical issues, of the use of stem cells in medical research and treatments.
- Suggested Activity:
- Most types of animal cell differentiate at an early stage.
- Lesson 04 - How can we use meristem tissue? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Meristem tissue in plants can differentiate into any type of plant cell, throughout the life of the plant.
- Suggested Activity:
THIS PRACTICAL IS FOR HIGHER CLASSES, as it requires strict aseptic technicques!!
- Suggested Activity:
- Stem cells from meristems in plants can be used to produce clones of plants quickly and economically.
- Crop plants with special features such as disease resistance can be cloned to produce large numbers of identical plants for farmers.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Research the uses of meristem cells by humans.
GF: Evaluate the use of cloned plants to selective breeding of plants.
GF: You are now in charge of all scientific research funding in the UK, you have to select one programme to receive all the available money which would you select, human stem cells or meristems?
- Suggested Activity:
- Stem cells from meristems in plants are used. Rare species can be cloned to protect from extinction.
- Suggested Activity:
Practical: Cauliflower Cloning - Tissue Culture and Micropropagation
https://www.saps.org.uk/secondary/teaching-resources/706-cauliflower-cloning-tissue-culture-and-micropropagation
PROBABLY BEST FOR HIGHER ABILITY AS REQUIRES ASEPTIC TECHNIQUEEquipment Required:
HIGHER ONLY: CAULIFLOWER CLONING
Each student/pair requires:
'Diluvials' or small sterilised glass jars containing medium (MS, 20g/l sucrose, 2.5mg/l Kinetin, 0.032% SDICN – see media prep notes)
White ceramic tiles / chopping board
Forceps
Scalpel
0.5% Solution Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate (SDICN) in small glass jar with cap (for sterilising forceps)
10ml 0.5% SDICN solution in Universal bottle (28ml glass bottle) with screw cap. (1 x 4g Milton tablet in 160ml DI water, 2 in 320ml, 4 in 640ml or 5 in 800ml - see media prep notes)
Petri dish
Safety glasses and disposable gloves
Lab coat
Students/pairs require access to:
70% ethanol for wiping down surfaces
paper towels
Cauliflower curd (the white 'floret' part) cut into 10mm3 pieces. Curd should be taken from a fresh, whole cauliflower, not ready-prepared cauliflower pieces.
Glass or plastic beaker for waste solutions
- Suggested Activity:
- Meristem tissue in plants can differentiate into any type of plant cell, throughout the life of the plant.
- Lesson 05 - What is diffusion? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Substances may move into and out of cells across the cell membranes via diffusion.
- Diffusion is the spreading out of the particles of any substance in solution, or particles of a gas, resulting in a net movement from an area of higher concentration to an area of lower concentration.
- Suggested Activity:
Activity 1:
Dropping food colouring into beakers of water to see the diffusion. (could vary temperature of water to see how it affects the rate)
Activity 2:
Spraying perfume in corner of the room. Hands up when they can smell it.Equipment Required:
Activity 1:
food colouring pipettes
250mL beakers
thermometers
kettles
ice
timers
Activity 2:
perfume spray
- Suggested Activity:
- Some of the substances transported in and out of cells by diffusion are oxygen and carbon dioxide in gas exchange.
- Some of the substances transported in and out of cells by diffusion are the waste product urea from cells into the blood plasma for excretion in the kidney.
- Explain how the difference in concentrations (concentration gradient) affect the rate of diffusion.
- Explain how the difference in the temperature affect the rate of diffusion.
- Explain how the surface area of the membrane affect the rate of diffusion.
- Suggested Activity:
Task 1: What factors could affect the rate of diffusion?
Task 2: Draw sketch graphs for the different factors that can affect the rate of diffusion
SUPER CHALLENGE:Explain, using examples from nature how factors can affect the rate of diffusion.
CHALLENGE:Explain how each factor affects the rate of diffusion in terms of particles.
STRETCH:Describe the factors that can affect the rate of diffusion in terms of particles.
- Suggested Activity:
- Substances may move into and out of cells across the cell membranes via diffusion.
- Lesson 06 - How is osmosis different to diffusion? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Osmosis is the diffusion of water from a dilute solution to a concentrated solution through a partially permeable membrane.
- Suggested Activity:
http://highered.mheducation.com/sites/0072495855/student_view0/chapter2/animation__how_osmosis_works.html
- Suggested Activity:
- (WS) Recognise, draw and interpret diagrams that model osmosis.
- Suggested Activity:
A single layer of plant cells is placed on a microscope slide and either distilled water or 5% sodium chloride solution is added to the cells. Osmosis will occur resulting in either turgid cells or plasmolysed cells.
http://www.nuffieldfoundation.org/practical-biology/observing-osmosis-plasmolysis-and-turgor-plant-cellsEquipment Required:
per group:
Microscope
Microscope slides, 1 per specimen
Cover slips, 1 per specimen
Distilled water
Salt solution (sodium chloride) 5% w/v
Teat pipettes
Forceps
Pieces of filter paper
per class:
Red onion, cut into slices approximately 1 cm wide, 1 or 2
Alternatives:
Rhubarb stem
Ivy-leaved toadflax (Cymbalaria muralis)
Cladophora (a filamentous alga)
Video microscope (if available)
- Suggested Activity:
- (MS) Students should be able to:
? use simple compound measures of rate of water uptake
- ? use percentages
- ? calculate percentage gain and loss of mass of plant tissue.
- (MS) Students should be able to plot, draw and interpret appropriate graphs.
- Osmosis is the diffusion of water from a dilute solution to a concentrated solution through a partially permeable membrane.
- Lesson 07 - How does surface area affect transport? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
-
- Water may move across cell membranes via osmosis.
- Suggested Activity:
Set up cubes of agar jelly and see how far liquid penetrates them by diffusion over five minutes. Calculate surface area to volume ratio for cubes of different sizes and consider the problems faced by large organisms.
Equipment Required:
Each Group:
Beaker 100 cm3,
Ruler,
Stopclocks
Agar cubes 2 cm x 2cm,
Agar cubes 1 cm x 1 cm,
Agar cubes 0.5 cm x 0.5 cm,
Hydrochloric acid, 0.1 M,
20ml cylinders
- Suggested Activity:
- A single-celled organism has a relatively large surface area to volume ratio.
- Having a large surface area to volume allows sufficient transport of molecules into and out of the cell to meet the needs of the organism.
- Students should be able to calculate and compare surface area to volume ratios. (MS)
- Students should be able to explain the need for exchange surfaces in terms of surface area to volume ratio.
- Students should be able to explain why multicellular organisms have transport systems in terms of surface area to volume ration
- Students should be able to explain how the small intestine and lungs in mammals are adapted for exchanging materials.
- Students should be able to explain how the gills in fish are adapted for exchanging materials.
- Students should be able to explain how the leaves in plants are adapted for exchanging materials.
- In multicellular organisms, surfaces and organ systems are specialised for exchanging materials.
- Specalised surfaces allow sufficient molecules to
be transported into and out of cells for the organism?s needs.- Suggested Activity:
Research adaptations lungs, gills and leaves, describing the chemicals exchanged with directions, adaptations these organs have to carry out the exchange and explain how these adaptations help to maximise the exchange.
- Suggested Activity:
- The effectiveness of an exchange surface is increased by:
? having a large surface area
? a membrane that is thin, to provide a short diffusion path
? (in animals) having an efficient blood supply
? (in animals, for gaseous exchange) being ventilated.- Suggested Activity:
Explain why larger organisms need increasingly more complex exchange surfaces.
- Suggested Activity:
-
- Lesson 08 - How does active transport work? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Active transport moves substances from a more dilute solution to a more concentrated solution (against a concentration gradient).
- Active transport requires energy from respiration.
- Active transport allows mineral ions to be absorbed into plant root hairs from very dilute solutions in the soil.
- Plants require ions for healthy growth.
- Active transport also allows sugar molecules to be absorbed from lower concentrations in the gut into the blood which has a higher sugar concentration.
- Suggested Activity:
Venn Diagram to sort conditions between diffusion, osmosis and active transport (passive, uses energy, against concentration gradient, across a membrane, movement of water et.c)
- Suggested Activity:
- Sugar molecules are used for cell respiration.
- Suggested Activity:
Describe the exchange that takes place in the small intestine.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe how substances are transported into and out of cells by diffusion, osmosis and active transport
- Suggested Activity:
Explain why villi cells need a high number of mitochondria / why so much active transport needs to take place in the small intestines.
- Suggested Activity:
students should be able to explain the differences between the three processes.- Suggested Activity:
GF: Evaluate whether it is worth the small intestines using energy to actively transport sugar into the blood.
- Suggested Activity:
- Active transport moves substances from a more dilute solution to a more concentrated solution (against a concentration gradient).
- Lesson 09 - Required Practical - Osmosis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- To plan and carry out the first part of the osmosis in potato practical.
- To collect data from the osmosis in potato practical, draw graphs and make conclusions.
- To plan and carry out the first part of the osmosis in potato practical.
- Lesson 10 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Assessment
- Assessment
- Lesson 11 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Reflection
- Reflection
- Lesson 01 - How do we replace old and damaged cells? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- B1.3
- Lesson 01 - What are the levels of organisation? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Cells are the basic building blocks of all living organisms.
- Suggested Activity:
http://www.htwins.net/scale2/
Equipment Required:
x
- Suggested Activity:
- A tissue is a group of cells with a similar structure and function.
- Organs are aggregations of tissues performing specific functions.
- Organs are organised into organ systems, which work together to form organisms.
- Students should be able to develop an understanding of size and scale in relation to cells, tissues, organs and systems.
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IYSlId-Ri7Q
Use examples from the digestive system to go from cell to organ system, giving the role of each part.
http://www.siumed.edu/~dking2/erg/gicells.htm
e.g. goblet cells in small intestine http://www.siumed.edu/~dking2/erg/gicells.htm#goblet
- Suggested Activity:
- Cells are the basic building blocks of all living organisms.
- Lesson 02 - What is the role of the digestive system? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The digestive system is an example of an organ system in which several organs work together to digest and absorb food.
- Suggested Activity:
Identify the organs of the digestive system, the order and the role of each organ and which enzymes are created in each.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to relate knowledge of enzymes to Metabolism.
- The products of digestion are used to build new carbohydrates, lipids and proteins. Some glucose is used in respiration.
- Bile is made in the liver and stored in the gall bladder.
- [Bile] is alkaline to neutralise hydrochloric acid from the stomach.
- [Bile] also emulsifies fat to form small droplets which increases the surface area.
- The alkaline conditions and large surface area increase the rate of fat breakdown by lipase.
- Suggested Activity:
Describe the role of bile in aiding digestion.
Explain why emulsifying fats makes digestion more effective
E/W - Describe how a burger is broken down into fatty acids, glycerol, amino acids and sugars in the blood.
- Suggested Activity:
- The digestive system is an example of an organ system in which several organs work together to digest and absorb food.
- Lesson 03 - Required Practical - Food Tests Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required Practical 4 - Food Tests (AT skills 2,8)
- Suggested Activity:
Foods to be tested
pestle & mortars
filter paper
conical flasks
test tubes
Benedicts soln, iodine,
Biuret soln
Ethanol (fats)
kettles
Pipettes
Forceps
10ml cylinders
SUDAN lll DOESNT WORK- USE ETHANOLEquipment Required:
Foods to be tested
pestle & mortars
filter paper
conical flasks
test tubes
Benedicts soln, iodine,
Biuret soln,
Ethanol (fats)
kettles
Pipettes
Forceps
10ml cylinders
SUDAN lll DOESNT WORK- USE ETHANOL
- Suggested Activity:
- Required Practical 4 - Food Tests (AT skills 2,8)
- Lesson 04 - How do enzymes aid in digestion? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe the nature of enzyme molecules and relate their activity to temperature and pH changes.
- Students should be able to carry out rate calculations for chemical reactions.
- Enzymes catalyse specific reactions in living organisms due to the shape of their active site.
- Students should be able to use the ?lock and key theory? as a simplified model to explain enzyme action.
- Students should be able to recall the sites of production and the action of amylase, proteases and lipases.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo: how the rate of the catalase reaction can be measured using a gas syringe or inverted cylinder of water and timer to prepare for the Required practical next lesson.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to understand simple word equations but no chemical symbol equations are required.
- Digestive enzymes convert food into small soluble molecules that can be absorbed into the bloodstream.
- Carbohydrases break down carbohydrates to simple sugars.
- Amylase is a carbohydrase which breaks down starch.
- Proteases break down proteins to amino acids.
- Lipases break down lipids (fats) to glycerol and fatty acids.
- Suggested Activity:
Describe the role of different enzymes in the digestive system including the substrates and products as well as their locations in the body.
Explain why pepsin (protease) works in the stomach but trypsin (from the small intestine) wouldn't and vice versa
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the nature of enzyme molecules and relate their activity to temperature and pH changes.
- Lesson 05 - Required Practical - Enzymes and pH Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required Practical 5 - pH and Enzyme Action (Continuous Sampling Technique) (AT skills 1,2,5,8)
- Suggested Activity:
Amylase soln 1%
starch soln 1%,
iodine soln
water bath 40c 2 racks
thermometers
stopclock
pipettes
10ml cylinders
spotting tiles
test tubes
pH Range (4, 7, 9)
1. Measure 10 cm3 of starch solution using the 10 cm3 plastic syringe and place into the boiling tube.
2. Measure 1 cm3 of buffer solution using the 1 cm3 plastic syringe then add this to the starch solution.
3. Measure 1 cm3 of amylase solution using the 1 cm3 plastic syringe then add this to the test tube.
4. Place both tubes into the beaker of water to warm up.
5. Put one drop of iodine solution into each well of the spotting tile.
6. Add the amylase solution to the starch solution and mix.
7. Take out a drop of the starch amylase mixture and add to a well in the spotting tile.
8. Repeat this every 30 seconds until there is no change in colour or 5 minutes has passed.
9. Repeat steps 1 to 8 for different pH values.Equipment Required:
Amylase soln 1%
starch soln 1%,
iodine soln
water bath 40c 2 racks
thermometers
stopclock
pipettes
10ml cylinders
spotting tiles
test tubes
Buffer solns. Phs(4, 7, 9)
Kettles
Beakers
- Suggested Activity:
- Required Practical 5 - pH and Enzyme Action (Continuous Sampling Technique) (AT skills 1,2,5,8)
- Lesson 06 - How are the heart and the lungs adapted to circulate oxygen and carbon dioxide around the body? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should know the structure and functioning of the human heart and lungs
- Suggested Activity:
Pluck dissection
Equipment Required:
pluck
dissection kit
rubber tube for blowing up lungs
- Suggested Activity:
- how lungs are adapted for gaseous exchange.
- Suggested Activity:
Describe the movement of gases from the air to the blood.
Explain the ways in which the lungs are adapted for rapid gas exchange with the blood.
GF: Compare and contrast the structure and function of lungs to the gills.
- Suggested Activity:
- The heart is an organ that pumps blood around the body in a double circulatory system.
- The right ventricle pumps blood to the lungs where gas exchange takes place. The left ventricle pumps blood around the rest of the body.
- Suggested Activity:
Heart Dissection
Equipment Required:
Class dissection kits hearts for 1 between 2
- Suggested Activity:
- Knowledge of the lungs is restricted to the trachea, bronchi, alveoli and the capillary network surrounding the alveoli.
- The natural resting heart rate is controlled by a group of cells located in the right atrium that act as a pacemaker.
- Knowledge of the blood vessels associated with the heart is limited to the aorta, vena cava, pulmonary artery, pulmonary vein and coronary arteries. Knowledge of the names of the heart valves is not required.
- Suggested Activity:
Describe the movement of the blood from the lungs to the heart, around the body and back to the lungs.
Explain the advantages of having a double circulatory system compared to a single circulatory system.
Explain why the left ventricle muscle is larger than the right ventricle.
- Suggested Activity:
- Artificial pacemakers are electrical devices used to correct irregularities in the heart rate.
- Suggested Activity:
Explain how an artificial pacemaker keeps someone alive.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should know the structure and functioning of the human heart and lungs
- Lesson 07 - What are the components and functions of blood? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Blood is a tissue consisting of plasma, in which the red blood cells, white blood cells and platelets are suspended.
- Students should know the functions of each of these blood components.
- (WS) Evaluate risks related to use of blood products.
- Students should be able to recognise different types of blood cells in a photograph or diagram, and explain how they are adapted to their functions.
- Suggested Activity:
Describe or match up the components of the blood with the role they have.
- Suggested Activity:
- The body contains three different types of blood vessel:
? arteries
? veins
? capillaries. - Students should be able to explain how the structure of these vessels relates to their functions.
- Students should be able to use simple compound measures such as rate and carry out rate calculations for blood flow.
- Suggested Activity:
Compare the structure of the 3 types of vessel.
Venn Diagram of the 3 types and factors of them e.g: transport blood, wall one cell thick, contains valves, permeable, impermeable etc.
Explain why the walls of the blood vessels are different by linking their structure to their function.
- Suggested Activity:
- Blood is a tissue consisting of plasma, in which the red blood cells, white blood cells and platelets are suspended.
- Lesson 08 - How can cardiovascular problems be treated? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of treating cardiovascular diseases by drugs, mechanical devices or transplant.
- In coronary heart disease layers of fatty material build up inside the coronary arteries, narrowing them.
- The layers of fatty material reduces the flow of blood through the coronary arteries, resulting in a lack of oxygen for the heart muscle.
- Stents are used to keep the coronary arteries open.
- Statins are widely used to reduce blood cholesterol levels which slows down the rate of fatty material deposit.
- In some people heart valves may become faulty, preventing the valve from opening fully, or the heart valve might develop a leak.
- Students should understand the consequences of faulty valves.
- Faulty heart valves can be replaced using biological or mechanical valves.
- In the case of heart failure a donor heart, or heart and lungs can be
transplanted. - Artificial hearts are occasionally used to keep patients alive whilst waiting for a heart transplant, or to allow the heart to rest as an aid to recovery.
- Suggested Activity:
Describe the different ways in which CVD can be treated.
Link the form of treatment to the stage of CVD/condition of patient.
GF: Evaluate the provision of treatment for CVD compared to education about preventative measures.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of treating cardiovascular diseases by drugs, mechanical devices or transplant.
- Lesson 09 - What can affect your health? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe the relationship between health and disease and the interactions between different types of disease.
- Health is the state of physical and mental well-being.
- Diseases, both communicable and non-communicable, are major causes of ill health. Other factors including diet, stress and life situations may have a profound effect on both physical and mental health.
- Different types of disease may interact. Defects in the immune system mean that an individual is more likely to suffer from infectious diseases
- Viruses living in cells can be the trigger for cancers.
- Immune reactions initially caused by a pathogen can trigger allergies such as skin rashes and asthma.
- Severe physical ill health can lead to depression and other mental illness.
- Students should be able to translate disease incidence information between graphical and numerical forms, construct and interpret frequency tables and diagrams, bar charts and histograms, and use a scatter diagram to identify a correlation between two variables. (MS)
- Students should understand the principles of sampling as applied to scientific data, including epidemiological data. (MS)
- Suggested Activity:
Explain how physical and mental health can influence each other.
Explain how infections can lead to other conditions.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the relationship between health and disease and the interactions between different types of disease.
- Lesson 10 - What are risk factors? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Risk factors are linked to an increased rate of a disease.
They can be:
? aspects of a person?s lifestyle
? substances in the person?s body or environment. - (WS) Interpret data about risk factors for specified diseases.
- A causal mechanism has been proven for some risk factors, but not in
others.
? The effects of diet, smoking and exercise on cardiovascular disease.
? Obesity as a risk factor for Type 2 diabetes.
? The effect of alcohol on the liver and brain function.
? The effect of smoking on lung disease and lung cancer.
? The effects of smoking and alcohol on unborn babies.
? Carcinogens, including ionising radiation, as risk factors in cancer. - Many diseases are caused by the interaction of a number of factors.
- Students should be able to understand the principles of sampling as applied to scientific data in terms of risk factors.
- Students should be able to translate information between graphical and numerical forms; and extract and interpret information from charts, graphs and tables in terms of risk factors. (MS)
- Students should be able to use a scatter diagram to identify a correlation between two variables in terms of risk factors.
- Suggested Activity:
Collect, present and analyse data about health risks and diseases, looking for correlations.
Evaluate the relevance of BMI (possibly against the waist to hip ratio).
- Suggested Activity:
- Risk factors are linked to an increased rate of a disease.
- Lesson 12 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
-
- Lesson 01 - What are the levels of organisation? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- B1.4
- Lesson 01 - How are leaf tissues related to their function? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain how the structures of plant tissues are related to their functions.
- Suggested Activity:
Card sort or virtual tour of the leaf tissue.
- Suggested Activity:
- Plant tissues include:
- epidermal tissues
- palisade mesophyll
- spongy mesophyll
- xylem and phloem
- meristem tissue found at the growing tips of shoots and roots. - The leaf is a plant organ. Knowledge limited to epidermis, palisade and spongy mesophyll, xylem and phloem, and guard cells surrounding stomata.
- Students should be able to explain how the structures of plant tissues are related to their functions.
- Lesson 02 - How are specialised plant cells adapted to their function? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain how the structure of root hair cells, xylem and phloem are adapted to their functions.
- Suggested Activity:
Hot-seating 'who am I?' Students are allocated one of the specialised cells and they are hot - seated and the other students have to guess what they are.
In groups build models of root hair cells, xylem, phloem with fact sheets to support (if needed)Equipment Required:
modelling equipment (6 boxes)
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain the effect of changing temperature, humidity, air movement and light intensity on the rate of transpiration.
- Suggested Activity:
Show transpiration using potometer
Equipment Required:
Transpiration demo
Celery translocation demo potometer
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to understand and use simple compound measures such as the rate of transpiration.
- Students should be able to translate information between graphical and numerical form
- Students should be able to plot and draw appropriate graphs, selecting appropriate scales for axes
- Students should be able to extract and interpret information from graphs, charts and tables.
- The roots, stem and leaves form a plant organ system for transport of substances around the plant.
- Students should be able to describe the process of transpiration and translocation, including the structure and function of the stomata.
- Root hair cells are adapted for the efficient uptake of water by osmosis, and mineral ions by active transport.
- Suggested Activity:
EW - Describe and explain the functions of the root hair cells, xylem and phloem and how they are specialised to do them.
- Suggested Activity:
- Xylem tissue transports water and mineral ions from the roots to the stems and leaves. It is composed of hollow tubes strengthened by lignin adapted for the transport of water in the transpiration stream.
- The role of stomata and guard cells are to control gas exchange and water loss.
- Phloem tissue transports dissolved sugars from the leaves to the rest of the plant for immediate use or storage. The movement of food molecules through phloem tissue is called translocation.
- Detailed structure of phloem tissue or the mechanism of transport is not required.
- Students should be able to explain how the structure of root hair cells, xylem and phloem are adapted to their functions.
- Lesson 03 - What is the reaction of photosynthesis? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Photosynthesis is represented by the equation:
(light above arrow)
carbon dioxide + water -> glucose + oxygen - Students should be able to describe photosynthesis as an endothermic reaction in which energy is transferred from the environment to the chloroplasts by light.
- Suggested Activity:
use the students to model photosynthesis by getting someone to be the sun and handing the energy (heat pack) over to show endothermic.
Equipment Required:
Heat packs
- Suggested Activity:
- The glucose produced in photosynthesis may be:
? used for respiration
? converted into insoluble starch for storage
? used to produce fat or oil for storage
? used to produce cellulose, which strengthens the cell wall
? used to produce amino acids for protein synthesis.- Suggested Activity:
Circus task
- Suggested Activity:
- To produce proteins, plants also use nitrate ions that are absorbed from the soil.
- Photosynthesis is represented by the equation:
- Lesson 04 - What factors affect the rate of photosynthesis? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain the effects of temperature, light intensity, carbon dioxide concentration, and the amount of chlorophyll on the rate of photosynthesis.
- Suggested Activity:
Graphing from data and describing the trends. Then link to the explanation.
Use the students to model and pair off every time a collision occurs to show that even as you increase one type of student (molecule) the reaction must stop increasing at some point.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to measure and calculate rates of photosynthesis (MS)
- Suggested Activity:
Observe the impact of plant growth with varying conditions that will limit the rate of photosynthesis.
Equipment Required:
From lesson 1 equipment - plants in different environments to limit the light by placing in the dark and one in the light.
The carbon dioxide (place in a seal box or fish tank) and one in normal air.
For changing number of chloroplasts have plants with varying surface area / number of leaves on the plant
- Suggested Activity:
- students should be able to extract and interpret graphs of photosynthesis rate involving one limiting factor (MS)
- Students should be able to plot and draw appropriate graphs selecting appropriate scale for axes (MS)
- Students should be able to translate information between graphical and numeric form. (MS)
- (HT only) These factors interact and any one of them may be the factor that limits photosynthesis.
- (HT only) Students should be able to explain graphs of photosynthesis rate involving two or three factors and decide which is the limiting factor.
- (HT only) Students should understand and use inverse proportion ? the inverse square law and light intensity in the context of photosynthesis.
- (HT only) Limiting factors are important in the economics of enhancing the conditions in greenhouses to gain the maximum rate of photosynthesis while still maintaining profit.
- * Use data to relate limiting factors to the cost effectiveness of adding heat, light or carbon dioxide to greenhouses.
- Students should be able to explain the effects of temperature, light intensity, carbon dioxide concentration, and the amount of chlorophyll on the rate of photosynthesis.
- Lesson 05 - Required Practical - Photosynthesis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required Practical 6 - Photosynthesis (AT skills 1,2,3,4,5)
- Suggested Activity:
Plan for half the lesson. Then carry out.
Equipment Required:
Elodea-freshly cut ends,
Boiling tubes
0.2% sodium hydrogen carbonate soln
lamps
metre rules
stopclocks
- Suggested Activity:
- Required Practical 6 - Photosynthesis (AT skills 1,2,3,4,5)
- Lesson 06 - What is the reaction of respiration? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe cellular respiration as an exothermic reaction which is continuously occurring in living cells.
- Suggested Activity:
Screaming Jelly Baby
Show the reaction is exothermic by modelling with the students and have them giving the heat packs to 'the environment'.Equipment Required:
Screaming Jelly Baby
Heat packs
- Suggested Activity:
- The energy transferred supplies all the energy needed for living processes.
- Suggested Activity:
Recap MRSGREN.
- Suggested Activity:
- Respiration in cells can take place aerobically (using oxygen) or anaerobically (without oxygen), to transfer energy.
- Students should be able to compare the processes of aerobic and anaerobic respiration with regard to the need for oxygen, the differing products and the relative amounts of energy transferred.
- Organisms need energy for:
? chemical reactions to build larger molecules
? movement
? keeping warm. - Aerobic respiration is represented by the equation:
glucose oxygen --> carbon dioxide water - Students should recognise the chemical symbols: C6H12O6 , O2 , CO2 and H2O.
- Students should be able to describe cellular respiration as an exothermic reaction which is continuously occurring in living cells.
- Lesson 07 - How is anaerobic respiration different and when is it used? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Anaerobic respiration in muscles is represented by the equation:
glucose -> lactic acid- Suggested Activity:
GF Why is it important to warm up and warm down before and after vigorous exercise?
- Suggested Activity:
- As the oxidation of glucose is incomplete in anaerobic respiration much less energy is transferred than in aerobic respiration.
- Anaerobic respiration in plant and yeast cells is represented by the equation:
glucose -> ethanol carbon dioxide - Anaerobic respiration in yeast cells is called fermentation and has economic importance in the manufacture of bread and alcoholic drinks
- During exercise the human body reacts to the increased demand for energy.
- Suggested Activity:
Slow mo of Usain Bolt - point out how he holds his breath - ask how he can possibly keep energy going to his muscles without O2.
- Suggested Activity:
- The heart rate, breathing rate and breath volume increase during exercise to supply the muscles with more oxygenated blood.
- The incomplete oxidation of glucose causes a build up of lactic acid and creates an oxygen debt.
- During long periods of vigorous activity muscles become fatigued and stop contracting efficiently.
- (HT only) Blood flowing through the muscles transports the lactic acid to the liver where it is converted back into glucose.
- (HT only) Oxygen debt is the amount of extra oxygen the body needs after exercise to react with the accumulated lactic acid and remove it from the cells.
- If insufficient oxygen is supplied anaerobic respiration takes place in muscles.
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate how the type of sugar affects the rate of anaerobic respiration.
IV - sugar
DV - Time
CV - conc / vol of solution (50mL) / amount of yeast (50mL) / same starting temperature (35%) half kettle water and half tap water.
Mix yeast and sugar solution in a conical flask, cover with balloon to compare the rate of the carbon dioxide production (qualitative)Equipment Required:
Set up one teacher demo before the lesson (to see bigger difference)
conical flasks
glucose solution x 6
sucrose solution x 6
yeast solution
balloons
pipettes
kettles
large beakers
- Suggested Activity:
- Metabolism is the sum of all the reactions in a cell or the body.
- The energy transferred by respiration in cells is used by the organism for the continual enzyme controlled processes of metabolism that synthesise new molecules.
- Metabolism includes: a) conversion of glucose to starch, glycogen and cellulose, b) the formation of lipid molecules from a molecule of glycerol and three molecules of fatty acids. C) ? the use of glucose and nitrate ions to form amino acids which in turn are used to synthesise proteins. d) respiration. e) breakdown of excess proteins to form urea for excretion
- Be able to explain the importance of sugars, amino acids, fatty acids and glycerol in the synthesis and breakdown of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids.
- Anaerobic respiration in muscles is represented by the equation:
- Lesson 01 - How are leaf tissues related to their function? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- B1.5
- Lesson 01 - What is a pathogen? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Pathogens are microorganisms that cause infectious disease.
- Suggested Activity:
Microbe blind date activity.
Students not involved answer the questions on the work sheet. (found in T drive)
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the non-specific defence systems of the human body against pathogens, including the:
- skin
- nose
- trachea and bronchi
- stomach.- Suggested Activity:
Label an outline of the human body with the bodies natural defences
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain the role of the immune system in the defence against disease.
- If a pathogen enters the body the immune system tries to destroy the pathogen.
- White blood cells help to defend against pathogens by:
- phagocytosis
- antibody production
- antitoxin production.- Suggested Activity:
Model the effects of white blood cells using plasticine or MWB. Take photos and stick into students books.
Equipment Required:
plasticine
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how diseases caused by viruses, bacteria, protists and fungi are spread in animals and plants.
- Suggested Activity:
Put glitter onto your hand and greeting students at the door see how the glitter transmits around the classroom.
Each student gets a test tube of water except for one who gets a weak acid. Students swap with 3 others in the room. Then work backwards to try and establish who started with the disease. Test with Universal indicator solution or paper to see they have the disease (red means infected)Equipment Required:
glitter in a box (SNK likes proper glitter not glitter glue)
one test tube per each student of water
1 test tube given to teacher to have acid in
UI bottles x 6 (minimum)
pipettes
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how the spread of diseases can be reduced or prevented.
- Suggested Activity:
Watch this video before showing a class. Consider if it is appropriate, in particular with any ASD students in the class.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ffhi1CPzT48
GF: What effect could non vaccination have on socio-economical issues (think NHS, nurseries)
- Suggested Activity:
- Pathogens may be viruses, bacteria, protists or fungi.
- Suggested Activity:
.
- Suggested Activity:
- Pathogens may infect plants or animals and can be spread by direct contact, by water or by air.
- Bacteria and viruses may reproduce rapidly inside the body.
- Bacteria may produce poisons (toxins) that damage tissues and make us feel ill.
- Viruses live and reproduce inside cells, causing cell damage.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: (Construct a matrix map) To compare fungi, virus, bacteria and protists to include size, site of reproduction and effects in the body
- Suggested Activity:
- Pathogens are microorganisms that cause infectious disease.
- Lesson 02 - What effect can pathogens have on organisms? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Measles is a viral disease showing symptoms of fever and a red skin rash. Measles is a serious illness that can be fatal if complications arise. For this reason most young children are vaccinated against measles.
- The measles virus is spread by inhalation of droplets from sneezes and coughs.
- Suggested Activity:
Show an image of a student with measles and ask students to consider how it is transmitted.
- Suggested Activity:
- HIV initially causes a flu-like illness. Unless successfully controlled with antiretroviral drugs the virus attacks the body's immune cells.
- Suggested Activity:
Split students into teams and allocate them a virus disease to research and either create a presentation or a poster to display for a market place fact collecting activity. Their presentations should include:
1. How the disease is transmitted
2. The effects of the disease
3. How the spread of the disease can be prevented
- Suggested Activity:
- Late stage HIV infection, or AIDS, occurs when the body's immune system becomes so badly damaged it can no longer deal with other infections or cancers.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Why will HIV never be truly eradicated?
- Suggested Activity:
- HIV is spread by sexual contact or exchange of body fluids such as blood which occurs when drug users share needles.
- Tobacco mosaic virus (TMV) is a widespread plant pathogen affecting many species of plants including tomatoes.
- TMV gives a distinctive 'mosaic' pattern of discolouration on the leaves which affects the growth of the plant due to lack of photosynthesis.
- Salmonella food poisoning is spread by bacteria ingested in food, or on food prepared in unhygienic conditions.
- In the UK, poultry are vaccinated against Salmonella to control the spread.
- Fever, abdominal cramps, vomiting and diarrhoea are caused by the [Salmonella] bacteria and the toxins they secrete.
- Gonorrhoea is a sexually transmitted disease (STD) with symptoms of a thick yellow or green discharge from the vagina or penis and pain on urinating.
- Gonorrhoea is caused by a bacterium and was easily treated with the antibiotic penicillin until many resistant strains appeared.
- Gonorrhoea is spread by sexual contact.
- The spread can be controlled by treatment with antibiotics or the use of a barrier method of contraception such as a condom.
- Measles is a viral disease showing symptoms of fever and a red skin rash. Measles is a serious illness that can be fatal if complications arise. For this reason most young children are vaccinated against measles.
- Lesson 03 - What effect do pathogens have on plants? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Knowledge of plant diseases is restricted to tobacco mosaic virus as a viral disease, black spot as a fungal disease and aphids as insects.
- Suggested Activity:
show students a range of photos of the affected plants and ask them which photo matches to t
- Suggested Activity:
- The pathogens that cause malaria are protists.
- Suggested Activity:
Show students a image of a protist and ask them describe if it is more like an animal or plant cell.
Show them the video after: https://www.bbc.com/education/clips/z2tq2hv
- Suggested Activity:
- Rose black spot is a fungal disease where purple or black spots develop on leaves, which often turn yellow and drop early. It affects the growth of the plant as photosynthesis is reduced.
- Suggested Activity:
Students use a note maker document (A4 or A3 page split into 4/6/8 boxes) to take notes on information from different stations on the various plant diseases. Answering questions about each one.
- Suggested Activity:
- Rose black spot is spread in the environment by water or wind.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Make a script for a video segment for ‘Gardeners’ World’ on plant diseases – how to recognise them and why they harm your plants. (could video if time allows)
HT: Use ICT to include images etc. or make ‘model’ infected/healthy leaves to show.Equipment Required:
iPad for videoing
- Suggested Activity:
- Rose black spot can be treated by using fungicides and/or removing and destroying the affected leaves.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Justify why there is a large part of the scientific industry dedicated to the prevention and development of cures for plant diseases?
- Suggested Activity:
- The malarial protist has a life cycle that includes the mosquito. Malaria causes recurrent episodes of fever and can be fatal.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: What is the economic impact of plant diseases on the agricultural community?
- Suggested Activity:
- The spread of malaria is controlled by preventing the vectors, mosquitos, from breeding and by using mosquito nets to avoid being bitten.
- Suggested Activity:
Ask students to download a free app for stop time animation and bring devices in for the next lesson
- Suggested Activity:
- Knowledge of plant diseases is restricted to tobacco mosaic virus as a viral disease, black spot as a fungal disease and aphids as insects.
- Lesson 04 - How do plants defend themselves from pathogens? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Plants can be infected by a range of viral, bacterial and fungal pathogens as well as by insects.
- Suggested Activity:
Think, pair, Share "What can cause plant infection" Use a circle map to record ideas.
- Suggested Activity:
- Plants can be damaged by a range of ion deficiency conditions.
Knowledge of ions is limited to nitrate ions needed for protein synthesis and therefore growth, and magnesium ions needed to make chlorophyll.
* The understanding of ion deficiencies allows horticulturists to provide optimum conditions for plants. - Stunted growth caused by nitrate deficiency
- Suggested Activity:
Create a matrix map / table to show the cause, impact and possible solutions for different plant deficiencies and diseases
- Suggested Activity:
- Chlorosis caused by magnesium deficiency
- Students should be able to describe physical and chemical plant defence responses.
- Suggested Activity:
Annoate a simple diagram of a plant to show the physical and chemical defenses of a plant.
- Suggested Activity:
- Physical defence responses to resist invasion of microorganisms.
? Cellulose cell walls.
? Tough waxy cuticle on leaves.
? Layers of dead cells around stems (bark on trees) which fall off.- Suggested Activity:
EW: Describe the physical and chemical defenses that plants have against the invasion of microorganisms.
- Suggested Activity:
- Chemical plant defence responses.
? Antibacterial chemicals.
? Poisons to deter herbivores.- Suggested Activity:
GF: Suggest how plants have adapted to have these physical and chemical features to aid survival
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) Plant diseases can be detected by:
? stunted growth
? spots on leaves
? areas of decay (rot)
? growths
? malformed stems or leaves
? discolouration
? the presence of pests.- Suggested Activity:
Observe an exhibition of plants or photographs showing evidence of plant disease (as listed in the specification) and garden manuals, internet websites, testing kits (HT).
Search for illustrations on the internet to include in a report (HT).
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) Identification can be made by:
? reference to a gardening manual or website
? taking infected plants to a laboratory to identify the pathogen
? using testing kits that contain monoclonal antibodies.- Suggested Activity:
"Dear Dr Gardner"
write an email to a help section of a gardening website asking for a diagnosis of a plant. Write a response including possible treatment or prevention.
- Suggested Activity:
- Mechanical adaptations.
? Thorns and hairs deter animals.
? Leaves which droop or curl when touched.
? Mimicry to trick animals.- Suggested Activity:
modelling adaptations of plants
Equipment Required:
modelling materials:
straws
toilet rolls centers
sellotape
tissue paper
card
- Suggested Activity:
- Plants can be infected by a range of viral, bacterial and fungal pathogens as well as by insects.
- Lesson 05 - How do vaccinations prevent illnesses? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain how vaccination will prevent illness in an individual, and how the spread of pathogens can be reduced by immunising a large proportion of the population.
- Evaluate the global use of vaccination in the prevention of disease.
- Vaccination involves introducing small quantities of dead or inactive
forms of a pathogen into the body to stimulate the white blood cells to produce antibodies. - If the same pathogen re-enters the body the white blood cells respond quickly to produce the correct antibodies, preventing infection.
- Suggested Activity:
Plan a story board using a flow map of the stages of how vaccinations work. Make a stop time animation of the process. (free app Stop Motion Studio)
- Suggested Activity:
- Students do not need to know details of vaccination schedules and side effects associated with specific vaccines.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Explain how a vaccine works.
EW: Explain why there is a sharp increase the in the number of white blood cells after a vaccination is given.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how vaccination will prevent illness in an individual, and how the spread of pathogens can be reduced by immunising a large proportion of the population.
- Lesson 06 - How are drugs used to treat diseases? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Antibiotics, such as penicillin, are medicines that help to cure bacterial disease by killing infective bacteria inside the body.
- Suggested Activity:
Create some illness cards and students act out role play situations for doctors and patients. Doctors needs to prescribe a course of treatment.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain the use of antibiotics and other medicines in treating disease.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Describe the importance of antibiotics and the impact of antibiotic resistance. Explain how this has impacted on cleaning practices in Britain’s hospitals. Research MRSA and C. difficile infections and treatment.
GF: Suggest what patients, doctors and scientists should do to ensure we will have effective antibiotics in the future.Equipment Required:
x
- Suggested Activity:
- It is important that specific bacteria should be treated by specific antibiotics.
- Suggested Activity:
Modelling of lock and key theory using plasticine shapes either as teacher demo to explain or with students making own to assess understanding.
- Suggested Activity:
- The use of antibiotics has greatly reduced deaths from infectious bacterial diseases.
- Suggested Activity:
Interpret graphs showing bacterial population growth
- Suggested Activity:
- However, the emergence of strains resistant to antibiotics is of great concern.
- Suggested Activity:
Discuss the impact of overuse of antibiotics after watching the video: https://www.nhs.uk/video/pages/antibiotics-dont-work-for-everything.aspx
- Suggested Activity:
- Antibiotics cannot kill viral pathogens.
- Suggested Activity:
Recall the structure of a virus and how it attacks the body and how drugs travel in the body (in the blood).
Then ask the question why are antibiotics not given for viral infections?
- Suggested Activity:
- Painkillers and other medicines are used to treat the symptoms of disease but do not kill pathogens.
- It is difficult to develop drugs that kill viruses without also damaging the body?s tissues.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Explain why doctors will not prescribe antibiotics for viral infections.
- Suggested Activity:
- Antibiotics, such as penicillin, are medicines that help to cure bacterial disease by killing infective bacteria inside the body.
- Lesson 07 - How are new drugs developed? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Traditionally drugs were extracted from plants and microorganisms.
- Suggested Activity:
Use images of foxgloves and willow with the questions "where are drugs extracted from?"
- Suggested Activity:
- The heart drug digitalis originates from foxgloves.
- The painkiller aspirin originates from willow.
- Penicillin was discovered by Alexander Fleming from the Penicillium mould.
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0ZWjzcsTd5M
watch the video and highlight the key points in a circle map
- Suggested Activity:
- Most new drugs are synthesised by chemists in the pharmaceutical industry. However, the starting point may still be a chemical extracted from a plant.
- New medical drugs have to be tested and trialled before being used to check that they are safe and effective.
- Preclinical testing is done in a laboratory using cells, tissues and live animals.
- Suggested Activity:
Discuss drug safety and how drugs are tested today.
- Suggested Activity:
- Clinical trials use healthy volunteers and patients.
- Very low doses of the drug are given at the start of the clinical trial.
- Suggested Activity:
Think, Pair Share possible effects if the dosage was incorrect. List ideas in a circle map.
- Suggested Activity:
- If the drug is found to be safe, further clinical trials are carried out to find the optimum dose for the drug.
- In double blind trials, some patients are given a placebo.
- Students understand that the results of testing and trials are published only after scrutiny by peer review. (WS)
- Students should be able to describe the process of discovery and development of potential new medicines, including preclinical and clinical testing.
- Suggested Activity:
Watch a video that show the stages of preclinical trials https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fYfp4IdVsXI
Summarise the key steps using a flow map or a cartoon strip style.
- Suggested Activity:
- Traditionally drugs were extracted from plants and microorganisms.
- Lesson 08 - What are monoclonal antibodies? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe how monoclonal antibodies are produced.
- Suggested Activity:
Research MAB production and uses using ABPI and cancer research websites. Draw a flow diagram to describe how MABs are produced.
- Suggested Activity:
- Monoclonal antibodies are produced from a single clone of cells.
- The antibodies are specific to one binding site on one protein antigen and so are able to target a specific chemical or specific cells in the body.
- Suggested Activity:
Discussion – would you choose to be treated with MABs?
EW: Evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of MABs.
- Suggested Activity:
- Antibodies are produced by stimulating mouse lymphocytes to make a particular antibody.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: What are the the power and limitations the technological applications of science
EW: evaluate risks in relation to MABs.
- Suggested Activity:
- The lymphocytes are combined with a particular kind of tumour cell to make a cell called a hybridoma cell. The hybridoma cell can both divide and make the antibody.
- Suggested Activity:
model method for monoclonal antibodies
Equipment Required:
different coloured Plasticine
A3 sugar paper
- Suggested Activity:
- Single hybridoma cells are cloned to produce many identical cells that all produce the same antibody.
- A large amount of the antibody can be collected and purified.
- Students should be able to describe some of the ways in which
monoclonal antibodies can be used.
* Appreciate the power of monoclonal antibodies and consider any ethical issues (WS). - Some examples [of monoclonal antibodies] include:
? for diagnosis such as in pregnancy tests
? in laboratories to measure the levels of hormones and other chemicals in blood, or to detect pathogens
? in research to locate or identify specific molecules in a cell or tissue
by binding to them with a fluorescent ?dye to treat some diseases (e.g. cancer) - Monochlonal antibodies are used to treat cancer. The antibody can be
bound to a radioactive substance, a toxic drug or a chemical which
stops cells growing and dividing. - Monochlonal antibodies deliver the substance to the
cancer cells without harming other cells in the body. - Students are not expected to recall any specific tests or treatments but given appropriate information they should be able to explain how they work.
- Monoclonal antibodies create more side effects than expected. They are not yet as widely used as everyone hoped when they were first developed.
- * Evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of monoclonal antibodies.
- Suggested Activity:
Marketplace activity: provide stations with information sheets and diagrams. Students fill in a summary table and use info to create a poster:
• for diagnosis, eg to bind to HCG in pregnancy tests
• to measure levels of hormones and chemicals in the blood
• to locate specific molecules in a cell using a fluorescent dye
• to treat some diseases, eg to deliver a chemical to cancer cells without harming healthy cells.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe how monoclonal antibodies are produced.
- Lesson 01 - What is a pathogen? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C1.1
- Lesson 01 - What is the difference between solid, liquid and gas? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The three states of matter are solid, liquid and gas. Melting and freezing take place at the melting point, boiling and condensing take place at the boiling point.
- The three states of matter can be represented by a simple model. In this model, particles are represented by small solid spheres.
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO: Particle models (using marbles or students)
Equipment Required:
Marbles in a Gratnell tray
- Suggested Activity:
- Particle theory can help to explain melting, boiling, freezing and condensing.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: In terms of energy and particles, explain what happens to a substance as it changes from a solid to a liquid.
- Suggested Activity:
- The amount of energy needed to change state from solid to liquid and from liquid to gas depends on the strength of the forces between the particles of the substance. The nature of the particles involved depends on the type of bonding and the structure of the substance. The stronger the forces between the particles the higher the melting point and boiling point of the substance.
- (HT only) Limitations of the simple model above include that in the model there are no forces, that all particles are represented as spheres and that the spheres are solid.
- Students should be able to predict the states of substances at different temperatures given appropriate data
- Suggested Activity:
High numeracy: Whiteboard graph to show states of matter and latent heat.
Low numeracy: Whiteboard number lines and states of matter.Equipment Required:
Whiteboards
Pens
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain the different temperatures at which changes of state occur in terms of energy transfers and types of bonding
- (HT only) explain the limitations of the particle theory in relation to changes of state when particles are represented by solid inelastic spheres which have no forces between them.
- The three states of matter are solid, liquid and gas. Melting and freezing take place at the melting point, boiling and condensing take place at the boiling point.
- Lesson 02 - What is the difference between atoms, elements and compounds? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- All substances are made of atoms. An atom is the smallest part of an element that can exist.
- Atoms of each element are represented by a chemical symbol, eg O represents an atom of oxygen, Na represents an atom of sodium.
- There are about 100 different elements. Elements are shown in the periodic table.
- Compounds are formed from elements by chemical reactions.
- Chemical reactions always involve the formation of one or more new substances, and often involve a detectable energy change.
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO:
making NaCl on a brick
- student led enquiry task (clues given and they are to work out what compound is formed) discuss change in properties from elements to compoundsEquipment Required:
fume cupboard
chlorine gas tube x2
sodium
brick
bunsen with long tube
- Suggested Activity:
- Compounds contain two or more elements chemically combined in fixed proportions and can be represented by formulae using the symbols of the atoms from which they were formed.
- Suggested Activity:
Use molymods to model the reaction of H2 with O2 to produce H2O. How do students resolve the spare oxygen molecule?
Equipment Required:
Molymods
- Suggested Activity:
- Compounds can only be separated into elements by chemical reactions.
- All substances are made of atoms. An atom is the smallest part of an element that can exist.
- Lesson 03 - How is the periodic table used to name elements and compounds? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Chemical reactions can be represented by word equations or equations using symbols and formulae.
- Suggested Activity:
Use the items in the periodic elements tray to identify the symbol or name of the element.
Challenge - attempt the compounds.Equipment Required:
Periodic table elements tray
- Suggested Activity:
- Students will be supplied with a periodic table for the exam and should be able to use the names and symbols of the first 20 elements in the periodic table, the elements in Groups 1 and 7, and other elements in this specification
- Name compounds of these elements from given formulae or symbol equations.
- In chemical equations, the three states of matter are shown as (s), (l) and (g), with (aq) for aqueous solutions.
- Review from KS3 balancing equations if secure in the naming and symbols of basic elements and compounds.
- Chemical reactions can be represented by word equations or equations using symbols and formulae.
- Lesson 04 - What is a mixture and how do we separate them? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A mixture consists of two or more elements or compounds not chemically combined together.
- The chemical properties of each substance in the mixture are unchanged.
- Mixtures can be separated by physical processes such as filtration, crystallisation, simple distillation, fractional distillation and chromatography. These physical processes do not involve chemical reactions and no new substances are made.
- Students should be able to describe, explain and give examples of the specified processes of separation.
- Suggested Activity:
Carousel of different separation techniques (outlined below)
- Suggested Activity:
- Filtration (review from KS3)
- Suggested Activity:
Filtration
Equipment Required:
Sand, salt and water solution
Filter paper
- Suggested Activity:
- Crystallisation (review from KS3)
- Suggested Activity:
Crystallisation
Equipment Required:
Copper sulfate solution
Evaporation dishes
- Suggested Activity:
- Simple distillation (review from KS3)
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO: Simple distillation
Equipment Required:
Simple distillation setup with alcohol and water solution
- Suggested Activity:
- A mixture consists of two or more elements or compounds not chemically combined together.
- Lesson 05 - How can we separate a mixture of more than two substances? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- fractional distillation
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO: Fractional distillation (optional)
Equipment Required:
Demo- fractional distillation of oil.
test tubes
mineral wool & small burning trays
- Suggested Activity:
- chromatography (review from KS3)
- Suggested Activity:
Paper chromatography
Equipment Required:
Chromatography paper
M&Ms or food colourings
spotting tiles
Pipettes
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to suggest suitable separation and purification techniques for mixtures when given appropriate information.
- Suggested Activity:
Justifying chosen separation techniques by separating a mixture of sand, salt, iron and water.
Equipment Required:
Salt
Sand
Conical flasks
Filter paper
Evaporating dishes
Sieve
- Suggested Activity:
- fractional distillation
- Lesson 06 - How has the model of the atom developed over time? (Common content with Physics) Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- New experimental evidence may lead to a scientific model being changed or replaced.
(WS) This historical context provides an opportunity for students to show an understanding of why and describe how scientific methods and theories develop over time. - Before the discovery of the electron, atoms were thought to be tiny spheres that could not be divided.
- The discovery of the electron led to the plum pudding model of the atom.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Explain the events and discoveries that led to our understanding of the structure of the atom today.
- Suggested Activity:
- The plum pudding model suggested that the atom is a ball of positive charge with negative electrons embedded in it.
- The results from the alpha particle scattering experiment led to the conclusion that the mass of an atom was concentrated at the centre (nucleus) and that the nucleus was charged. This nuclear model replaced the plum pudding model.
- Suggested Activity:
element card sort
Equipment Required:
laminated card sort for elements, mixtures and compounds.
- Suggested Activity:
- Niels Bohr adapted the nuclear model by suggesting that electrons orbit the nucleus at specific distances. The theoretical calculations of Bohr agreed with experimental observations.
- Later experiments led to the idea that the positive charge of any nucleus could be subdivided into a whole number of smaller particles, each particle having the same amount of positive charge. The name proton was given to these particles.
- The experimental work of James Chadwick provided the evidence to show the existence of neutrons within the nucleus. This was about 20 years after the nucleus became an accepted scientific idea.
- Students should be able to describe why the new evidence from the scattering experiment led to a change in the atomic model
- Students should be able to describe the difference between the plum pudding model of the atom and the nuclear model of the atom.
- Details of experimental work supporting the Bohr model are not required.
- Details of Chadwick's experimental work are not required.
- New experimental evidence may lead to a scientific model being changed or replaced.
- Lesson 07 - What are the size and mass of atoms? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The relative electrical charges of the particles in atoms are:
Proton +1
Neutron 0
Electron -1- Suggested Activity:
modelling the structure of an atom to show the number of PEN in elements. extension ions.
Equipment Required:
Plasticine
modelling items
- Suggested Activity:
- Atoms have no overall electrical charge.
- In an atom, the number of electrons is equal to the number of protons in the nucleus.
- The number of protons in an atom of an element is its atomic number.
- All atoms of a particular element have the same number of protons.
- Atoms of different elements have different numbers of protons.
- Students should be able to use the nuclear model to describe atoms.
- The radius of a nucleus is less than 1/10 000 of that of the atom (about 1 x 10-14 m).
- Almost all of the mass of an atom is in the nucleus.
- The relative masses of protons, neutrons and electrons are:
Proton 1
Neutron 1
Electron Very small - The sum of the protons and neutrons in an atom is its mass number.
- The relative electrical charges of the particles in atoms are:
- Lesson 08 - What is relative atomic mass? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Atoms of the same element can have different numbers of neutrons; these atoms are called isotopes of that element.
- Suggested Activity:
Determine the element using RAM periodic table. link to measurement errors.
Equipment Required:
Sealed jars with no labels filled with sand with the mass as below:
1. 7g
2. 12g
3. 59g
4. 16g
5. 11g
6. 20g
7. 23g
8. 65
9. 63.5g
10. 35.5g
11. 39g
12. 9g
13. 55g
14. 31g
15. 79g
- Suggested Activity:
- Atoms can be represented as shown in this example: (periodic table tile for sodium with mass and atomic number)
- Students should be able to calculate the numbers of protons, neutrons and electrons in an atom or ion, given its atomic number and mass number.
- Students should be able to relate size and scale of atoms to objects in the physical world.
- The relative atomic mass of an element is an average value that takes account of the abundance of the isotopes of the element.
- Students should be able to calculate the relative atomic mass of an element given the percentage abundance of its isotopes.
- Atoms of the same element can have different numbers of neutrons; these atoms are called isotopes of that element.
- Lesson 09 - What is the electronic structure of an atom? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The electrons in an atom occupy the lowest available energy levels (innermost available shells).
- Suggested Activity:
Modelling electron arrangement
Equipment Required:
Electron shells sheets (forming ions)(laminated) and non perm ohp pens
or circles in books
- Suggested Activity:
- The electronic structure of an atom can be represented by numbers or by a diagram. For example, the electronic structure of sodium is 2,8,1 or (electron arrangement using dot-and-cross diagram) showing two electrons in the lowest energy level, eight in the second energy level and one in the third energy level.
- (WS) Students should be able to represent the electronic structures of the first twenty elements of the periodic table in both forms.
- Students may answer questions in terms of either energy levels or shells.
- Atoms are very small, having a radius of about 0.1 nm (1 x 10-10 m).
- The electrons in an atom occupy the lowest available energy levels (innermost available shells).
- Lesson 01 - What is the difference between solid, liquid and gas? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C1.2
- Lesson 01 - What is the periodic table? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The elements in the periodic table are arranged in order of atomic (proton) number and so that elements with similar properties are in columns, known as groups. The table is called a periodic table because similar properties occur at regular intervals.
- Elements that react to form positive ions are metals.
- Suggested Activity:
Model transfer of electrons using plasticine/fluffy balls. Students then practice drawing electronic configuration of ions to establish the charges to develop recall of knowledge from C1.1
Equipment Required:
fluffy balls
plasticine
- Suggested Activity:
- Elements in the same group in the periodic table have the same number of electrons in their outer shell (outer electrons) and this gives them similar chemical properties.
- Suggested Activity:
Students draw electronic configurations of hydrogen, lithium, sodium, fluorine, chlorine and bromine. Complete a double bubble map to compare a contrast each group.
- Suggested Activity:
- Elements that do not form positive ions are non-metals.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: What would happen to the chemical properties of Sodium if it had a full outer shell of electrons?
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how the position of an element in the periodic table is related to the arrangement of electrons in its atoms and hence to its atomic number
- The majority of elements are metals.
- Students should be able to predict possible reactions and probable reactivity of elements from their positions in the periodic table.
- The elements in the periodic table are arranged in order of atomic (proton) number and so that elements with similar properties are in columns, known as groups. The table is called a periodic table because similar properties occur at regular intervals.
- Lesson 02 - How was the periodic table developed? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Before the discovery of protons, neutrons and electrons, scientists attempted to classify the elements by arranging them in order of their atomic weights.
- Suggested Activity:
periodic table battle ships:
Stretch: using symbols and names
Challenge: using group numbers and period numbers
Super challenge: using proton and mass numbersEquipment Required:
A5 laminated periodic tables.
In tray in prep room labelled periodic table top trumps (2 per student needed)
lump or Plasticine or wooden block to hold up
whiteboard pens (in rooms)
- Suggested Activity:
- The early periodic tables were incomplete and some elements were placed in inappropriate groups if the strict order of atomic weights was followed.
- Students should be able to explain how the atomic structure of metals and non-metals relates to their position in the periodic table
- Mendeleev overcame some of the problems by leaving gaps for elements that he thought had not been discovered and in some places changed the order based on atomic weights.
- Suggested Activity:
Show students previous versions of periodic table and ask to identify the major differences
- Suggested Activity:
- Elements with properties predicted by Mendeleev were discovered and filled the gaps.
- Suggested Activity:
Ask students to apply knowledge from lesson 1 electronic configuration why Mendeleev might have left gaps
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals are found to the left and towards the bottom of the periodic table. Non-metals are found towards the right and top of the periodic table.
- Suggested Activity:
quiz testing knowledge and use of the periodic table to identify if elements are metals or non-metals and if they are proton donors or accepters.
- Suggested Activity:
- Knowledge of isotopes made it possible to explain why the order based on atomic weights was not always correct.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Why are isotopes chemically similar but physically different?
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe these steps in the development of the periodic table.
- Suggested Activity:
Drama piece to remember the names of different scientists involved in the development of the periodic table and the steps involved at each stage in contributing towards the periodic table.
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pt55ttIaPX0)
- Suggested Activity:
- Before the discovery of protons, neutrons and electrons, scientists attempted to classify the elements by arranging them in order of their atomic weights.
- Lesson 03 - What are the properties of Group 0 elements? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain how the reactions of elements are related to the arrangement of electrons in their atoms and hence to their atomic number.
- The elements in Group 0 of the periodic table are called the noble gases.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Discuss the relationship between group 0 elements and radioactive decay
- Suggested Activity:
- The elements in Group 0 of the periodic table are unreactive and do not easily form molecules because their atoms have stable arrangements of electrons.
- Suggested Activity:
Students draw the electronic configuration to work out that they have a full outside shell of electrons
- Suggested Activity:
- The noble gases have eight electrons in their outer shell, except for helium, which has only two electrons.
- The boiling points of the noble gases increase with increasing relative atomic mass (going down the group).
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate the boiling point of group 0 elements and make observations from results
- Suggested Activity:
Students should be able to explain how properties of the elements in Group 0 depend on the outer shell of electrons of the atoms- Students should be able to predict properties from given trends down the group.
- Students should be able to explain how the reactions of elements are related to the arrangement of electrons in their atoms and hence to their atomic number.
- Lesson 04 - What are the properties of Group 1 elements? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The elements in Group 1 of the periodic table are known as the alkali metals and have characteristic properties because of the single electron in their outer shell.
- Students should be able to explain the differences between metals and non-metals on the basis of their characteristic physical and chemical properties. This links to Group 0, Group 1, Group 7 and Bonding, structure and the properties of matter
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate the physical properties of transition metals
Equipment Required:
samples of transition metals
hammer with heat proof mat
nail to scratch
magnets
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the reactions of the first three alkali metals with oxygen, chlorine and water.
- In Group 1, the reactivity of the elements increases going down the group.
- Suggested Activity:
Group 1 demo in water using universal indicator to show alkali solutions are formed. Try to catch the gas with a lit splint to demonstrate the squeaky pop.
Equipment Required:
Group 1 demo
(La Ni K)
filter paper
WUL
forceps
Universal Indicator
Gloves
3 large beakers
Spills to light hydrogen gas bubbles (in class)
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how properties of the elements in Group 1 depend on the outer shell of electrons of the atoms
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Describe the forces that are involved in the transfer of electrons
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to predict properties from given trends down the group.
- Suggested Activity:
Model the increasing size of atoms down group 1 using fluffy balls and rings drawn on tables or students draw configurations in their books to deduce why the reactivity increases.
EW: Describe and explain why the reactivity of group 1 metalsEquipment Required:
fluffy balls
- Suggested Activity:
- The transition elements are metals with similar properties which are different from those of the elements in Group 1.
- Suggested Activity:
write word and symbol equations to show elements in same groups have similar reactions.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the difference compared with Group 1 in melting points, densities, strength, hardness and reactivity with oxygen, water and halogens.
- Suggested Activity:
Create a double bubble thinking map to compare group 1 and transition metals.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to exemplify these general properties by reference to Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu.
- The elements in Group 1 of the periodic table are known as the alkali metals and have characteristic properties because of the single electron in their outer shell.
- Lesson 05 - What are the properties of Group 7 elements? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The elements in Group 7 of the periodic table are known as the halogens and have similar reactions because they all have seven electrons in their outer shell.
- The halogens are non-metals and consist of molecules made of pairs of atoms.
- Students should be able to describe the nature of the compounds formed when chlorine, bromine and iodine react with metals and non-metals.
- In Group 7, the further down the group an element is the higher its relative molecular mass, melting point and boiling point.
- Suggested Activity:
Draw / sketch a graph to show the melting and boiling points of group 7 elements
- Suggested Activity:
- In Group 7, the reactivity of the elements decreases going down the group.
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO Displacement reactions - http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000733/reactions-of-halogens-as-aqueous-solutions?cmpid=CMP00006118
Model the decreases size of atoms down group 7 using fluffy balls and rings drawn on tables or students draw configurations in their books to deduce why the reactivity decreases.
EW: Describe and explain why the reactivity of group 7 metals decreases as you go down the group.Equipment Required:
DEMO:
1 Spotting tile
Universal Indicator Paper
6 Plastic dropping pipettes
0.1% chlorine water
0.1% bromine water
1M iodine solution
0.1M potassium chloride
0.1M potassium bromide
0.1M potassium iodide
- Suggested Activity:
- A more reactive halogen can displace a less reactive halogen from an aqueous solution of its salt.
- Suggested Activity:
Model displacement reactions with students or using famous people for "attraction" factors
- Suggested Activity:
Students should be able to explain how properties of the elements in Group 7 depend on the outer shell of electrons of the atoms- Students should be able to predict properties from given trends down the group.
- Many transition elements have ions with different charges, form coloured compounds and are useful as catalysts.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
Place a 250 cm3 conical flask on a heat resistant mat. Add acetone to the flask to a depth of 5 mm (approximately 30 cm3 of acetone). Trim a sheet of copper foil and bend it to hook over a glass rod. Check that when the copper foil is lowered into the flask it is held approximately 2 cm above the base.
Heat the copper directly until it is red hot, then lower it into the conical flask. Waves of colour will ripple across its surface as it catalyses the oxidation of the acetone. The effect is emphasised if the lights are turned off and the copper will continue to glow as long as there is a supply of acetone vapour.
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00001235/catalytic-copperEquipment Required:
Copper foil (0.25 mm or thicker) or coin
Acetone (highly flammable; irritant)
250 cm3 conical flask
Bunsen burner or blowtorch
Eye protection
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to exemplify these general properties by reference to compounds of Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu.
- The elements in Group 7 of the periodic table are known as the halogens and have similar reactions because they all have seven electrons in their outer shell.
- Lesson 01 - What is the periodic table? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C1.3
- Lesson 01 - What are chemical bonds? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Recap atomic stability being having a full outer shell of electrons.
- There are three types of strong chemical bonds: ionic, covalent and metallic.
ALTERNATIVE activity - independent thinking.- Suggested Activity:
Give students several diagrams each showing an electronic configuration of a different atom. Some metals and some non-metals.
Start with group 7 and group 1 elements - how could they interact to get a full outer shell?
Next do group 6 and group 2.
GF: group 6 and group 1.
Move on to two group 7 - how could they interact to get a full outer shell?
GF: two group 6.
Finally, two group 1 elements - cannot interact so electron delocalises.Equipment Required:
Electronic configuration diagrams of different elements.
Minimum required per student group:
2 Na, 1 Ca, 1 O, 2 Fl.
- Suggested Activity:
- There are three types of strong chemical bonds: ionic, covalent and metallic.
- Suggested Activity:
Experts in bonding.
Put students in threes and get them each to find out information on each type of bond. Return and share their findings. Record results in table.
- Suggested Activity:
- For ionic bonding the particles are oppositely charged ions.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo electrostatic attraction with pupil particles.
- Suggested Activity:
- For metallic bonding the particles are atoms which share delocalised electrons.
- Ionic bonding occurs in compounds formed from metals combined with non-metals.
- Covalent bonding occurs in most non-metallic elements and in compounds of non-metals.
- Metallic bonding occurs in metallic elements and alloys.
- Students should be able to explain chemical bonding in terms of electrostatic forces and the transfer or sharing of electrons.
- Recap atomic stability being having a full outer shell of electrons.
- Lesson 02 - What is ionic bonding? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- When a metal atom reacts with a non-metal atom, electrons in the outer shell of the metal atom are transferred.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo the process of forming an ionic bond using students and tennis balls.
Equipment Required:
Theory
- Suggested Activity:
- Metal atoms lose electrons to become positively charged ions.
- Suggested Activity:
When determining the charge of ions, get students to picture electrons as negative people. Gain more in your life you become more negative, lose them you become more positive.
- Suggested Activity:
- Non-metal atoms gain electrons to become negatively charged ions.
- Suggested Activity:
Draw out electron structures of elements: 2 metal and 2 non metal elements and then attempt to draw their ions.
- Suggested Activity:
- The ions produced by metals in Groups 1 and 2 and by non-metals in Groups 6 and 7 have the electronic structure of a noble gas (Group 0).
- Suggested Activity:
Determine trends in ions based on where they are found on the periodic table
- Suggested Activity:
- The electron transfer during the formation of an ionic compound can be represented by a dot and cross diagram. E.g. for sodium chloride.
- Suggested Activity:
Give students a compound and get them to attempt to draw out the ions of each element and attempt to determine what a bond may look like.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to draw dot and cross diagrams for ionic compounds formed by metals in Groups 1 and 2 with non-metals in Groups 6 and 7.
- The charge on the ions produced by metals in Groups 1 and 2 and by non-metals in Groups 6 and 7 relates to the group number of the element in the periodic table.
- Students should be able to work out the charge on the ions of metals and non-metals from the group number of the element, limited to the metals in Groups 1 and 2, and non-metals in Groups 6 and 7.
- Suggested Activity:
Give students several ionic compounds based on the elements they are made up of. Calculate charge on ions and then formula of compound.
- Suggested Activity:
- When a metal atom reacts with a non-metal atom, electrons in the outer shell of the metal atom are transferred.
- Lesson 03 - What are ionic compounds? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- An ionic compound is a giant structure of ions.
- Ionic compounds are held together by strong electrostatic forces of attraction between oppositely charged ions.
- These forces act in all directions in the lattice: this is called ionic bonding.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo giant lattice with pupil particles. Use it to explain properties.
Students convert ideas into a diagram and extend themselves by using this to explain properties.
- Suggested Activity:
- The structure of sodium chloride can be represented in the following forms: ball and stick giant lattice and charged ion ionic lattice.
- Suggested Activity:
Back to back: in pairs each takes a turn at describing one type of model, limiting use of key terms.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to deduce that a compound is ionic from a diagram of its structure in one of the specified forms
- Students should be able to describe the limitations of using dot and cross, ball and stick, two and three-dimensional diagrams to represent a giant ionic structure.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Compare and contrast using the ball and stick model and charged ionic lattice for representing ionic compounds.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to work out the empirical formula of an ionic compound from a given model or diagram that shows the ions in the structure.
- Suggested Activity:
Give students several ionic compounds based on the elements they are made up of. Calculate charge on ions and then formula of compound.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be familiar with the structure of sodium chloride but do not need to know the structures of other ionic compounds.
- Suggested Activity:
Practical demo: making NaCl on a brick
Equipment Required:
fume cupboard
chlorine gas in gas jar, sodium metal, Forceps,house brick
long bunsen burner
chlorine gas in jar NOT TEST TUBES KERRY, DOH!
- Suggested Activity:
- An ionic compound is a giant structure of ions.
- Lesson 04 - What is covalent bonding? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- When atoms share pairs of electrons, they form covalent bonds. These bonds between atoms are strong.
- Suggested Activity:
Get students to draw out the electron structure of two fluorine atoms and give them the formula of fluorine F2.
Students to use this to determine how they may bond.
Extension: Repeat with O2Equipment Required:
Giant covalent structures x 4 from top shelf in upstairs prep room, 2 red 1 blue 1 green
- Suggested Activity:
- Covalently bonded substances may consist of small molecules.
- Suggested Activity:
Demonstrate covalent bond. Get students to attempt to draw several.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to recognise common substances that consist of small molecules from their chemical formula.
- Suggested Activity:
Show structure of several simple covalent molecules
What do they share in common?
Go on to explain how their size influence their properties
- Suggested Activity:
- Some covalently bonded substances have very large molecules, such as polymers.
- Some covalently bonded substances have giant covalent structures, such as diamond and silicon dioxide.
- Suggested Activity:
Circus of giant covalent compounds. Students to research
- diamond
- graphite
- graphene
- silicone dioxide
- Suggested Activity:
- The covalent bonds in molecules and giant structures can be represented in the following forms: using dot-and-cross diagram, ball-and-stick diagram or displayed formula)
- Polymers can be represented using displayed formulae, where n is a large number.
- Students should be able to draw dot and cross diagrams for the molecules of hydrogen, chlorine, oxygen, nitrogen, hydrogen chloride, water, ammonia and methane
- Students should be able to represent the covalent bonds in small molecules, in the repeating units of polymers and in part of giant covalent structures, using a line to represent a single bond
- Students should be able to describe the limitations of using dot and cross, ball and stick, two and three-dimensional diagrams to represent molecules or giant structures
- Students should be able to deduce the molecular formula of a substance from a given model or diagram in these forms showing the atoms and bonds in the molecule.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Explain why the melting and boiling point of sodium chloride is much higher than that of carbon dioxide.
Your answer must reference the structure of bonding in each and how that influences the properties.
- Suggested Activity:
- When atoms share pairs of electrons, they form covalent bonds. These bonds between atoms are strong.
- Lesson 05 - What is metallic bonding? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Metals consist of giant structures of atoms arranged in a regular pattern.
- Suggested Activity:
Get students to draw out two metal ions and think about how they could bond together, ensuring each gets a full outer shell of electrons.
- Suggested Activity:
- The electrons in the outer shell of metal atoms are delocalised and so are free to move through the whole structure.
- Suggested Activity:
Input: Show students how metals actually bond.
use the equipment to show how the atoms arrange themselves into neat rows. add water to represent the delocalised electrons saying that the water can move freely.Equipment Required:
small beaker
metal ball bearings
distilled water
- Suggested Activity:
- The sharing of delocalised electrons gives rise to strong metallic bonds. The bonding in metals may be represented in the following form: (diagram)
- Suggested Activity:
Give students a piece of metal each and get them to describe the properties it has.
Input Feedback to how the structure of the metal gives it those properties.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to recognise substances as metallic giant structures from diagrams showing their bonding.
- Students should be able to recognise that atoms themselves do not have the bulk properties of materials
- Metals consist of giant structures of atoms arranged in a regular pattern.
- Lesson 06 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe and explain the bonding in ionic and simple covalent bonding.
- Suggested Activity:
Give students the word equation.
Complete the practical.
Ask students to record everything they know or can deduce from the equation and practical given the rules they have been taught about the different types of bonding.
Ionic reaction: describe and explain how magnesium chloride is made.
Covalent reaction: describe and explain how the water is made.Equipment Required:
Two practicals. Set up one on either side of classroom. 5 sets of each practical:
Ionic reaction:
magnesium ribbon, hydrochloric acid,
conical flask,
measuring cylinder
Covalent reaction:
copper oxide powder, sulphuric acid, conical flask, measuring cylinder, spatula
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe and explain the bonding in ionic and simple covalent bonding.
- Lesson 01 - What are chemical bonds? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C1.4
- Lesson 01 - Why are metals useful? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Metals are good conductors of electricity because the delocalised electrons in the metal carry electrical charge through the metal.
- Suggested Activity:
Order different types of alloys.
Temperature sensitive smart alloys practical
Place temp sensitive alloy at different temp and time how long it takes them to go back to original shape.
Extended writing: describe melting points and boiling points of metallic substances.
Extended writing: explain why the melting point and boiling point of metallic substances are high.
Extended writing: describe the structure of metal alloys.
Research some uses of metallic substances.
Extension: make links between the uses of metal substances, their properties and structure.
Research some uses of metal alloys.
Extension: make links between the uses of metal alloys, their properties and structure.
BBC Bitesize The properties and uses of metals
BBC Bitesize Bronze – the first alloyEquipment Required:
Examples of different types of alloys.
Temp sensitive alloys.
Kettle
- Suggested Activity:
- In pure metals, atoms are arranged in layers, which allows metals to be bent and shaped.
- Suggested Activity:
test different materials to see if they conduct electricity or not. Students consider why they do/don't
Equipment Required:
battery circuits with croc clips. bulbs.2.5v materials of conductors and non conductors to test.
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals are good conductors of thermal energy because energy is transferred by the delocalised electrons.
- Pure metals are too soft for many uses and so are mixed with other metals to make alloys which are harder.
- Suggested Activity:
growing metal crystals.
set up at start of lesson and look at towards the end.
????????Equipment Required:
20mL of silver nitrate in small cylinders with lids. (1 between 2)
1 coil of copper metal each.
Sandpaper to rough up copper wire
Permanent pens to mark tubes
?????????????
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain why alloys are harder than pure metals in terms of distortion of the layers of atoms in the structure of a pure metal.
- Metals are good conductors of electricity because the delocalised electrons in the metal carry electrical charge through the metal.
- Lesson 02 - What are the properties of ionic compounds? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Ionic compounds have regular structures (giant ionic lattices) in which there are strong electrostatic forces of attraction in all directions between oppositely charged ions.
- Suggested Activity:
Practical dissolving different types of ionic compunds and covalent compunds and testing if they conduct electrcity.
EW: Compare and contrast the properties of ionic and covalent compounds.Equipment Required:
Power packs
Ammeters
Leads
Carbon electrodes
Plain water
Copper chloride
Salt water
Sugar water
Crocodile clips
- Suggested Activity:
- These compounds have high melting points and high boiling points because of the large amounts of energy needed to break the many strong bonds.
- When melted or dissolved in water, ionic compounds conduct electricity because the ions are free to move and so charge can flow.
- Knowledge of the structures of specific ionic compounds other than sodium chloride is not required.
- Ionic compounds have regular structures (giant ionic lattices) in which there are strong electrostatic forces of attraction in all directions between oppositely charged ions.
- Lesson 03 - What are the properties of small molecules? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Substances that consist of small molecules are usually gases or liquids that have relatively low melting points and boiling points.
- Suggested Activity:
Students observe samples of simple molecules to deduce their properties and their structure / bonding.
Equipment Required:
beakers with test tubes filled with
- water
- Carbon dioxide
- hydrogen chloride
- ammonia
- methane
- oxygen
take tubes from solids, liquids and gasses tray, minus the sand tubes
- Suggested Activity:
- The intermolecular forces increase with the size of the molecules, so larger molecules have higher melting and boiling points.
- Students must be able to recall the chemical formula and draw the covalent bonding for: water, methane, carbon dioxide and ammonia.
- These substances have only weak forces between the molecules (intermolecular forces).
- These substances do not conduct electricity because the molecules do not have an overall electric charge.
- It is these intermolecular forces that are overcome, not the covalent bonds, when the substance melts or boils.
- Students should be able to use the idea that intermolecular forces are weak compared with covalent bonds to explain the bulk properties of molecular substances.
- Substances that consist of small molecules are usually gases or liquids that have relatively low melting points and boiling points.
- Lesson 04 - Why are giant covalent structures useful? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain the properties of diamond in terms of its structure and bonding.
- Metals have giant structures of atoms with strong metallic bonding. This means that most metals have high melting and boiling points.
- Suggested Activity:
Create models of metallic structures.
Use copper wire and silver nitrate solution to grow silver crystals.
Practical: Metals and insulators electrical conduction.
Video clips:
BBC Bitesize The atomic structure of metals
YouTube: What are metallic bonds?Equipment Required:
Examples of metals and insulators.
Electricity trolley
leads with crocodille clips.
- Suggested Activity:
- In graphite, each carbon atom forms three covalent bonds with three other carbon atoms, forming layers of hexagonal rings which have no covalent bonds between the layers.
- In graphite, one electron from each carbon atom is delocalised.
- These bonds must be overcome to melt or boil these substances.
- Students should be able to explain the properties of graphite in terms of its structure and bonding.
- Students should know that graphite is similar to metals in that it has delocalised electrons.
- Graphene is a single layer of graphite and has properties that make it useful in electronics and composites.
- Carbon nanotubes are cylindrical fullerenes with very high length to diameter ratios. Their properties make them useful for nanotechnology, electronics and materials.
- Students should be able to explain the properties of graphene in terms of its structure and bonding.
- Students should be able to recognise graphene and fullerenes from diagrams and descriptions of their bonding and structure
- Fullerenes are molecules of carbon atoms with hollow shapes. The structure of fullerenes is based on hexagonal rings of carbon atoms but they may also contain rings with five or seven carbon atoms.
- Students should be able to give examples of the uses of fullerenes, including carbon nanotubes.
- Students should be able to explain the properties of diamond in terms of its structure and bonding.
- Lesson 05 - What are fullerenes? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Substances that consist of giant covalent structures are solids with very high melting points.
- Suggested Activity:
Jigsaw research the four different types of covalent structure.
Compare ready made 3D examples of giant covalent structures.
EW: Why is a split ring commutator made out of Graphite.
GF: Why would Fullerenes be used in drug delivery rather than graphite?
- Suggested Activity:
- In diamond, each carbon atom forms four covalent bonds with other carbon atoms in a giant covalent structure, so diamond is very hard, has a very high melting point and does not conduct electricity.
- All of the atoms in these structures are linked to other atoms by strong covalent bonds.
- Diamond and graphite (forms of carbon) and silicon dioxide (silica) are examples of giant covalent structures.
- Students should be able to recognise giant covalent structures from diagrams showing their bonding and structure.
- The first fullerene to be discovered was Buckminsterfullerene (C60) which has a spherical shape.
- Substances that consist of giant covalent structures are solids with very high melting points.
- Lesson 06 - What is nanoscience? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Nanoscience refers to structures that are 1?100 nm in size, of the order of a few hundred atoms.
- Suggested Activity:
Extended writing: describe the history of nanoscience
Video clip
YouTube: What is nanoscience?
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0U2hyQ1dyoU
Extended writing: link the uses of nanoparticles to their properties.
Extended writing: evaluate the use of nanoparticles in applications, eg sun cream.
Research uses and properties of nanoparticles.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nYEmiQCr3JU
- Suggested Activity:
- Nanoparticles, are smaller than fine particles (PM2.5), which have diameters between 100 and 2500 nm (1 x 10-7 m and 2.5 x 10-6 m).
- Coarse particles (PM10) have diameters between 1 x 10-5 m and 2.5 x 10-6 m. Coarse particles are often referred to as dust.
- (MS) Students should be able to make order of magnitude calculations.
- As the side of cube decreases by a factor of 10 the surface area to volume ratio increases by a factor of 10.
- Nanoparticles may have properties different from those for the same materials in bulk because of their high surface area to volume ratio. It may also mean that smaller quantities are needed to be effective than for materials with normal particle sizes.
- Students should be able to compare ?nano? dimensions to typical dimensions of atoms and molecules.
- Students should be able to calculate areas of triangles and rectangles, surface areas and volumes of cubes.
- Nanoparticles have many applications in medicine, in electronics, in cosmetics and sun creams, as deodorants, and as catalysts. New applications for nanoparticulate materials are an important area of research.
- Students should consider advantages and disadvantages of the applications of these nanoparticulate materials, but do not need to know specific examples or properties other than those specified.
- Students should be able to given appropriate information, evaluate the use of nanoparticles for a specified purpose
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate the effectiveness of nanoparticles in nappies. To prove that increasing mass affects how much water it can hold.
Equipment Required:
small balances
weighing boats
250mL beakers
glass stirring rods
distilled water bottles
cut up nappies
spatulas
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain that there are possible risks associated with the use of nanoparticles.
- Nanoscience refers to structures that are 1?100 nm in size, of the order of a few hundred atoms.
- Lesson 07 - What are polymers? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Polymers are very large molecules.
- Suggested Activity:
Molymods
create different examples of polymers eg; polyetheneEquipment Required:
molymods
- Suggested Activity:
- For example: ethane diol and hexanedioic acid polymerise to produce a polyester.
- Suggested Activity:
Dissolve polystyrene chunks into acetone
Equipment Required:
Large glass bowl
Acetone
Polystyrene cups
Glass stirring rod
Forceps
- Suggested Activity:
- The atoms in the polymer molecules are linked to other atoms by strong covalent bonds.
- Alkenes can be used to make polymers such as poly(ethene) and poly(propene) by addition polymerisation. Use models to represent addition polymerisation.
- Suggested Activity:
Making bouncy balls or slime
Equipment Required:
equipment for making slime
- Suggested Activity:
- The intermolecular forces between polymer molecules are relatively strong and so these substances are solids at room temperature.
- In addition polymerisation reactions, many small molecules (monomers) join together to form very large molecules (polymers).
- Students should be able to recognise polymers from diagrams showing their bonding and structure.
- For example (displayed formula showing ethene monomer becoming poly(ethene)).
- In addition polymers the repeating unit has the same atoms as the monomer because no other molecule is formed in the reaction.
- Students should be able to recognise addition polymers and monomers from diagrams in the forms shown and from the presence of the functional group C=C in the monomers
- Students should be able to draw diagrams to represent the formation of a polymer from a given alkene monomer
- Students should be able to relate the repeating unit to the monomer.
- Polymers are very large molecules.
- Lesson 08 - What are condensation polymers? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- When these types of monomers react they join together, usually losing small molecules such as water, and so the reactions are called condensation reactions. Use models to represent condensation polymerisation.
- Suggested Activity:
Molymods creating the most basic condensation polymer.
GF: Create your own example of a condensation polymer.
- Suggested Activity:
- The simplest polymers are produced from two different monomers with two of the same functional groups on each monomer.
- Students should be able to explain the basic principles of condensation polymerisation by reference to the functional groups in the monomers and the repeating units in the polymers.
- Condensation polymerisation involves monomers with two functional groups.
- When these types of monomers react they join together, usually losing small molecules such as water, and so the reactions are called condensation reactions. Use models to represent condensation polymerisation.
- Lesson 09 - How are DNA and polymers linked? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to name the types of monomers from which these naturally occurring polymers are made. (HT only)
- Amino acids have two different functional groups in a molecule. Amino acids react by condensation polymerisation to produce polypeptides. (HT only)
- Suggested Activity:
Molymods
to create examples of polypeptidesEquipment Required:
extraction of DNA from fruit
http://thenode.biologists.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/12/Outreach-activity-DNA-extraction-from-kiwi-fruit.pdf
- Suggested Activity:
- For example: glycine is H NCH COOH and polymerises to produce the polypeptide (-HNCH2COO-) and n H2O.
(HT only) - Different amino acids can be combined in the same chain to produce proteins. (HT only)
- DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) is a large molecule essential for life. DNA encodes genetic instructions for the development and functioning of living organisms and viruses. (HT only)
- Most DNA molecules are two polymer chains, made from four different monomers called nucleotides, in the form of a double helix. (HT only)
- Other naturally occurring polymers important for life include proteins, starch and cellulose. (HT only)
- Students should be able to name the types of monomers from which these naturally occurring polymers are made. (HT only)
- Lesson 01 - Why are metals useful? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C1.5
- Lesson 01 - Why are chemical equations always balanced? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The law of conservation of mass states that no atoms are lost or made during a chemical reaction so the mass of the products equals the mass of the reactants.
- Suggested Activity:
Model the law of conservation using molecular model kits.
Teacher Demo:
Lead Nitrate and potassium Iodide.
Perform on balance no change in mass.
Write simple word equations.
Write simple symbol equations.
Balance symbol equations.
GF: balance complex equations and add state symbols.Equipment Required:
Teacher Demo:
Lead Nitrate and potassium Iodide.
balance
- Suggested Activity:
- This means that chemical reactions can be represented by symbol equations which are balanced in terms of the numbers of atoms of each element involved on both sides of the equation.
- Students should understand the use of the multipliers in equations in normal script before a formula and in subscript within a formula.
- The law of conservation of mass states that no atoms are lost or made during a chemical reaction so the mass of the products equals the mass of the reactants.
- Lesson 02 - What does the relative formula mass tell us? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The relative formula mass (Mr) of a compound is the sum of the relative atomic masses of the atoms in the numbers shown in the formula.
- Suggested Activity:
Review the definition of relative atomic mass.
Recall how to find the relative atomic mass from the Periodic Table.
Define the relative molecular mass.
Extended writing: write instructions to another student how to calculate the relative formula mass.
Model compounds with different sized and coloured lego bricks pre-marked with symbol and Ar of different elements. Sum the Ars marked on the bricks to obtain the Mr.Equipment Required:
Conservation of mass Demo only! Lead Bromide, potassium iodide in conical flask.
Accurate balance
- Suggested Activity:
- In a balanced chemical equation, the sum of the relative formula masses of the reactants in the quantities shown equals the sum of the relative formula masses of the products in the quantities shown.
- The relative formula mass (Mr) of a compound is the sum of the relative atomic masses of the atoms in the numbers shown in the formula.
- Lesson 03 - Why do some reactions appear to have a mass change? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Some reactions may appear to involve a change in mass but this can usually be explained because a reactant or product is a gas and its mass has not been taken into account. For example: when a metal reacts with oxygen the mass of the oxide produced is greater than the mass of the metal or in thermal decompositions of metal carbonates carbon dioxide is produced and escapes into the atmosphere leaving the metal oxide as the only solid product.
- Suggested Activity:
Extended writing: use measurements of mass before and after an experiment to explain what has happened to the mass during the experiment and why it has happened.
Equipment Required:
Use magnesium ribbon to produce magnesium oxide. Measure the mass of the ribbon at the start of the experiment, burn the ribbon in a strong Bunsen flame (SAFETY required) and measure the mass of the ribbon at the end of the experiment.
Use HCl acid in a conical flask with CaCO3. Measure the mass of the reaction on a top pan balance as the reaction proceeds over two minutes.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain any observed changes in mass in non-enclosed systems during a chemical reaction given the balanced symbol equation for the reaction and explain these changes in terms of the particle model.
- Whenever a measurement is made there is always some uncertainty about the result obtained.
- Students should be able to represent the distribution of results and make estimations of uncertainty
- Students should be able to use the range of a set of measurements about the mean as a measure of uncertainty.
- Some reactions may appear to involve a change in mass but this can usually be explained because a reactant or product is a gas and its mass has not been taken into account. For example: when a metal reacts with oxygen the mass of the oxide produced is greater than the mass of the metal or in thermal decompositions of metal carbonates carbon dioxide is produced and escapes into the atmosphere leaving the metal oxide as the only solid product.
- Lesson 04 - What is a mole? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Chemical amounts are measured in moles. The symbol for the unit mole is mol.
- Suggested Activity:
Define one mole in terms of Mr and Ar
Calculate the number of moles in a substance using the relative formula mass.
Extended writing: write instructions to another student how to calculate the number of moles using the relative formula mass
Measure out and compare 1 mole of elements like iron, sulfur, magnesium, copper, aluminium and so on.
Measure out and compare one mole of common compounds, water, sodium chloride, calcium carbonate and so on.
YouTube:
What is a mole?
Avogadro’s number – The moleEquipment Required:
Examples of 1 Mole samples, in tray in racking.
- Suggested Activity:
- How the mass of one mole of a substance calculated.
- One mole of a substance contains the same number of the stated particles, atoms, molecules or ions as one mole of any other substance.
- The number of atoms, molecules or ions in a mole of a given substance is the Avogadro constant.
- The value of the Avogadro constant is 6.02 x 1023 per mole.
- Students should understand that the measurement of amounts in moles can apply to atoms, molecules, ions, electrons, formulae and equations, for example that in one mole of carbon (C) the number of atoms is the same as the number of molecules in one mole of carbon dioxide (CO2).
- Students should be able to use the relative formula mass of a substance to calculate the number of moles in a given mass of that substance and vice versa.
- Chemical amounts are measured in moles. The symbol for the unit mole is mol.
- Lesson 05 - What are solutions? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Many chemical reactions take place in solutions. The concentration of a solution can be measured in mass per given volume of solution, eg grams per dm3 (g/dm3).
- Suggested Activity:
Extended writing: Write instructions to another student on how to calculate the concentration, or how to rearrange the equation to calculate number of moles
Extended writing: Write instructions to another student on how to carry out a titration. Include reasons for using a burette insteadEquipment Required:
x
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to calculate the mass of solute in a given volume of solution of known concentration in terms of mass per given volume of solution
- Students should be able to (HT only) explain how the mass of a solute and the volume of a solution is related to the concentration of the solution.
- It is important for sustainable development and for economic reasons to use reactions with high atom economy.
- Many chemical reactions take place in solutions. The concentration of a solution can be measured in mass per given volume of solution, eg grams per dm3 (g/dm3).
- Lesson 06 - How do you calculate reacting masses? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The masses of reactants and products can be calculated from balanced symbol equations.
- Suggested Activity:
Balance chemical equations and use these to calculate the masses of substances present.
Extended writing: write instructions to another student use balanced chemical equations to calculate the masses of substances present.
YouTube:
Calculating Masses in Reactions
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6KRcO3e36ZU
- Suggested Activity:
- Chemical equations can be interpreted in terms of moles. For example: Mg + 2HCI --> MgCI2 + H2 shows that one mole of magnesium reacts with two moles of hydrochloric acid to produce one mole of magnesium chloride and one mole of hydrogen gas.
- Students should be able to calculate the masses of substances shown in a balanced symbol equation
- Students should be able to calculate the masses of reactants and products from the balanced symbol equation and the mass of a given reactant or product.
- The balancing numbers in a symbol equation can be calculated from the masses of reactants and products by converting the masses in grams to amounts in moles and converting the numbers of moles to simple whole number ratios.
- Students should be able to balance an equation given the masses of reactants and products.
- Students should be able to change the subject of a mathematical equation.
- The masses of reactants and products can be calculated from balanced symbol equations.
- Lesson 07 - What is a limiting factor? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- In a chemical reaction involving two reactants, it is common to use an excess of one of the reactants to ensure that all of the other reactant is used.
- Suggested Activity:
Define the term limiting reactant.
Link the limiting reactant to the number of moles.
Link the limiting reactant to the masses in grams.
Use a small strip of magnesium ribbon in 20 ml HCl acid. Identify which reactant is the limiting reactant and state the reason for this choice.Equipment Required:
HCl - different strengths
Magnesium Ribbon
Conical flasks
Balloons
- Suggested Activity:
- The reactant that is completely used up is called the limiting reactant because it limits the amount of products.
- Students should be able to explain the effect of a limiting quantity of a reactant on the amount of products it is possible to obtain in terms of amounts in moles or masses in grams.
- In a chemical reaction involving two reactants, it is common to use an excess of one of the reactants to ensure that all of the other reactant is used.
- Lesson 08 - What infomation does yield tell you? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Even though no atoms are gained or lost in a chemical reaction, it is not always possible to obtain the calculated amount of a product because:
??? the reaction may not go to completion because it is reversible
??? some of the product may be lost when it is separated from the reaction mixture;
? some of the reactants may react in ways different to the expected reaction.- Suggested Activity:
Describe how atoms are lost or gained in a chemical reaction.
Explain why atoms can be lost or gained in a chemical reaction.
Calculate the theoretical yield for simple examples.
Extended writing: write instructions to another student how to calculate the theoretical yield giving explained examples.
Use Lego as a model for chemical reactions demonstrating the loss of product and use the model as a simple introduction to yield calculations.
The same can be applied to atom economy.Equipment Required:
Lego
- Suggested Activity:
- The amount of a product obtained is known as the yield.
- When compared with the maximum theoretical amount as a percentage, it is called the percentage yield.
% Yield = Mass of product actually made / Maximum theoretical mass of product ? 100 - Students should be able to calculate the percentage yield of a product from the actual yield of a reaction
- (HT only) calculate the theoretical mass of a product from a given mass of reactant and the balanced equation for the reaction.
- Even though no atoms are gained or lost in a chemical reaction, it is not always possible to obtain the calculated amount of a product because:
- Lesson 09 - What is atom economy? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The atom economy (atom utilisation) is a measure of the amount of starting materials that end up as useful products.
- Suggested Activity:
Describe how atoms are lost or gained in a chemical reaction.
Explain why atoms can be lost or gained in a chemical reaction.
Calculate the theoretical yield for simple examples.
Extended writing: write instructions to another student how to calculate the theoretical yield giving explained examples.
Use Lego as a model for chemical reactions demonstrating the loss of product and use the model as a simple introduction to yield calculations.
The same can be applied to atom economy.Equipment Required:
Lego
Molymods
- Suggested Activity:
- The percentage atom economy of a reaction is calculated using the balanced equation for the reaction as follows: Relative formula mass of desired product from equation / Sum of relative formula masses of all reactants from equation ? 100
- Students should be able to calculate the atom economy of a reaction to form a desired product from the balanced equation
- (HT only) explain why a particular reaction pathway is chosen to
produce a specified product given appropriate data such as atom
economy (if not calculated), yield, rate, equilibrium position and
usefulness of by-products.
- The atom economy (atom utilisation) is a measure of the amount of starting materials that end up as useful products.
- Lesson 10 - How do you calculate the concentration of a solution? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The concentration of a solution can be measured in mol/dm3.
- Suggested Activity:
Calculate the atom economy for simple examples.
Extended writing: write instructions to another student how to calculate the atom economy giving explained examples.
Identify a chemical reaction that has a high atom economy and research the positives to industry of producing a high yield of useful product.
Identify a chemical reaction that has a low atom economy and research the negatives to industry of producing a low yield of useful product and ways the reactions has been improved to increase the yield of useful product.
Atom Economy Video
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Zuyk4hfbjSA
- Suggested Activity:
- The amount in moles of solute or the mass in grams of solute in a given volume of solution can be calculated from its concentration in mol/dm3.
- If the volumes of two solutions that react completely are known and the concentration of one solution is known, the concentration of the other solution can be calculated.
- Suggested Activity:
complete an acid-base titration to determine the concentration of an unknown solution:
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000697/titrating-sodium-hydroxide-with-hydrochloric-acid?cmpid=CMP00005972Equipment Required:
Burette (30 or 50 cm3) (Note 1)
Conical flask (100 cm3)
Beaker (100 cm3)
Pipette (20 or 25 cm3) with pipette filler
Stirring rod
Small (filter) funnel (about 4 cm diameter)
Burette stand and clamp (Note 2)
White tile (optional) (Note 3)
Bunsen burner
Tripod
Pipeclay triangle (Note 4)
Evaporating basin (at least 50 cm3 capacity)
Crystallising dish (Note 5)
Microscope or hand lens suitable for examining crystals in the crystallising dish
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how the concentration of a solution in mol/dm3 is related to the mass of the solute and the volume of the solution
- Opportunities within titrations including to determine concentrations of strong acids and alkalis. (WS)
- The concentration of a solution can be measured in mol/dm3.
- Lesson 11 - How do you calculate the volume of gas reactants and products? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Equal amounts in moles of gases occupy the same volume under the same conditions of temperature and pressure.
- Suggested Activity:
Recall the equation:
number of moles =
mass/(relative formula mass)
Use the equation:
volume of gas at rtp = number of moles x molar gas volume (24 dm3)
for simple examples.
Extended writing: write instructions to another student on how to calculate the volume of a gas.
Use balanced equations and known volume of reactant/product to calculate the volumes of gaseous reactants/ products.
Molar volumes of gases https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UCmYSIjOnUA
How to calculate gas volumes
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_CyIgvYNolE
- Suggested Activity:
- The volume of one mole of any gas at room temperature and pressure (20oC and 1 atmosphere pressure) is 24 dm3.
- The volumes of gaseous reactants and products can be calculated from the balanced equation for the reaction.
- Students should be able to calculate the volume of a gas at room temperature and pressure from its mass and relative formula mass
- Students should be able to calculate volumes of gaseous reactants and products from a balanced equation and a given volume of a gaseous reactant or product
- Students should be able to change the subject of a mathematical equation.
- Equal amounts in moles of gases occupy the same volume under the same conditions of temperature and pressure.
- Lesson 01 - Why are chemical equations always balanced? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C1.6
- Lesson 01 - Why are some metals more reactive than others? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The reactivity of a metal is related to its tendency to form positive ions.
- The metals potassium, sodium, lithium, calcium, order of reactivity is from their reactions with water and dilute acids.
- Suggested Activity:
Show the structure of one group 1 metal or use fluffly balls to show it. Show students how it donates an electron to form an ion and reactive. Ask students to draw the atomic structure of other group 1 metals and the ion formed. Use these to describe deduce why group 1 reactivity increases down the group
Equipment Required:
Alkali metals reacted in water, in large beakers.
Filter paper, forceps, washing up liquid.
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals react with oxygen to produce metal oxides.
- Suggested Activity:
Write word and symbol equations for metal reactions from the standard equation. Differentiate for the group
stretch - word equations
challenge - write symbol equations from the given word equation that dont need further balancing
super challenge - equations that need balancing too
- Suggested Activity:
- The reactions are oxidation reactions because the metals gain oxygen.
- Suggested Activity:
Remind students about the phrase OIL RIG
oxidation is loss of electrons, reduction if gain of electrons.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain reduction and oxidation in terms of loss or gain of oxygen.
- Oxidation is the loss of electrons and reduction is the gain of electrons.
- Students should be able to explain how the reactivity of metals with water or dilute acids is related to the tendency of the metal to form its positive ion
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Describe and explain the reactivity in group 1 metals
- Suggested Activity:
- The reactivity of a metal is related to its tendency to form positive ions.
- Lesson 02 - Why are some metals unreactive? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A more reactive metal can displace a less reactive metal from a compound.
- Suggested Activity:
investigate the displacement reactions of metals and metal ion solutions to determine the reactivity series of metals
Equipment Required:
reactivity mats
small metal samples/granules
spatulas
waste bowls
metal solutions
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to deduce an order of reactivity of metals based on experimental
results.- Suggested Activity:
Students deduce
- Suggested Activity:
- The non-metals hydrogen and carbon are often included in the reactivity series.
- Suggested Activity:
Show the reactivity series and ask students to compare their results against the known series. Students to suggest why they might have different results. Discuss if their experiments are reproducible.
- Suggested Activity:
- The reactions of metals with water and acids are limited to room temperature and do not include reactions with steam.
- Suggested Activity:
Teacher to question students about CVs during the demo to lead to these points
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals can be arranged in order of their reactivity in a reactivity series.
- Suggested Activity:
Show this mnemonic and then ask students if they can improve it to make it more memorable for them: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XWjQUgq2u9E
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to recall and describe the reactions, if any, of potassium, sodium, lithium, calcium, magnesium, zinc, iron and copper with water or
dilute acids and where appropriate, to place these metals in order
of reactivity- Suggested Activity:
Write a conclusion for their experiment that includes references to observations made for each metal with acid and acids.
GF: Discuss why sacrificial metals are used in the production of boats and bridges
- Suggested Activity:
- Student should be able to write ionic equations for displacement reactions
- Suggested Activity:
Write ionic equations for each result from their experiment
- Suggested Activity:
- A more reactive metal can displace a less reactive metal from a compound.
- Lesson 03 - What happens when acids react with metals? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Unreactive metals such as gold are found in the Earth as the metal itself but most metals are found as compounds that require chemical reactions to extract the metal.
- Suggested Activity:
Show the PP slide with a range of metal ores / native metal images with their symbols. Ask students to complete the tasks in their books. Share answers.
Equipment Required:
0.5 g of the metal oxides:
- Copper
- Lead
- Iron
(Groups to do one and show results.)
powdered carbon
Balances accurate
Bottle tops
spatulas
Magnets
filter paper
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals less reactive than carbon can be extracted from their oxides by reduction with carbon.
- Suggested Activity:
Class practical to extract metals: http://science.cleapss.org.uk/Resource/TL009-Reduction-of-metal-ores-using-carbon.pdf
- Suggested Activity:
- Reduction involves the loss of oxygen.
- Suggested Activity:
Introduce the mnemonic OIL RIG
Oxidation Is Loss of electrons (and gain of oxygen)
Reduction Is Gain of electrons (and loss of oxygen)
Tell them that this happens in redox reactions.
Ask students to create an image in their books to help them remember these phrases. They should use equations and or atomic diagrams.
- Suggested Activity:
- Knowledge and understanding are limited to the reduction of oxides using carbon.
- Suggested Activity:
Recall the reactivity series from lesson 1 or sort using a jumbled list from the board / cards. Identify the position of carbon and explain to students the reasons why.
- Suggested Activity:
- Knowledge of the details of processes used in the extraction of metals is not required.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Explain why some metals can be extracted by reduction reactions using carbon and other's cannot. Include in your answer example of those metals that can/cannot be extracted using carbon.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to interpret or evaluate specific metal extraction processes when given appropriate information
- Suggested Activity:
Ask students to apply their knowledge of the reactivity series to other elements. They should estimate if they could be extracted or not from information given about the element.
Stretch: Roentgenium is less reactive than gold.
Challenge: Rubidium (in group 1) students should recall the pattern of group one from C1.2
Super Challenge: Tennessine
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to identify the substances which are oxidised or reduced in terms of gain or loss of oxygen.
- Suggested Activity:
Model the loss of oxygen during reduction and the gain of oxygen during a chemical reaction, e.g
magnesium oxide carbon dioxide --> Magnesium carbon dioxide
MgO CO2 --> Mg CO2
Show students how one species gains oxygen whilst the other loses it.
Practice identifying what is oxidised and reduced giving reasons why for different word and symbol equations.
Foundation Tier Extension: Students can write their own word/symbol equations.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to identify in a given reaction, symbol equation or half equation which species are oxidised and which are reduced.
- Suggested Activity:
(HT) Identify the substances that are reduced and oxidized in symbol and half equations.
- Suggested Activity:
- Unreactive metals such as gold are found in the Earth as the metal itself but most metals are found as compounds that require chemical reactions to extract the metal.
- Lesson 04 - What reactions do acids have? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Acids react with some metals to produce salts and hydrogen.
- Suggested Activity:
starter: ask students to recall the basic metal acid equation from year 8. Provide some visual hints and/or keywords to sort if needed.
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) Students should be able to explain in terms of gain or loss of electrons, that these are redox reactions
- Suggested Activity:
Tell students that the name of this reaction is another example of a redox reaction. Ask students to call what happens during a redox reaction.
- Suggested Activity:
- Knowledge of reactions limited to those of magnesium, zinc and iron with hydrochloric and sulfuric acids.
- Suggested Activity:
Aim: How does the type of acid effect the salt formed?
DV either gas produced or temperature change.
1. Students list factors that could affect the type of salt formed in a circle map.
2. Students identify what will be their IV and DV in their circle map using BLUE for IV and RED for DV.
3. Students then circle any other factors in black as the CVs
4. Draw a simple results table
5. Carry out the practical.
different groups test different metals and share resultsEquipment Required:
hydrochloric acid 1M
sulfuric acid 1M
nitric acid 1M
magnesium ribbon in small strips
zinc and iron strips
25 ml measuring cylinders
pipettes
DV - temperature change
polystyrene cups
thermometers
cardboard lids
DV - gas collection
boiling tubes with delivery tubes
gas syringes or water baths and up turned small measuring cylinders
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to identify which species are oxidised and which are reduced in given chemical equations. (HT only)
- Suggested Activity:
for each reaction carried out in the practical students should complete the word, symbol or half equations to show how they are redox reactions.
Students doing the stretch or challenge task should identify on their equations which species of oxidised and which is reduced.
Stretch - complete word equations
Challenge - complete balanced symbol equations
Super Challenge - complete balanced half equations
- Suggested Activity:
- Acids react with some metals to produce salts and hydrogen.
- Lesson 05 - How are soluble salts produced? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Acids are neutralised by alkalis (eg soluble metal hydroxides) and bases (eg insoluble metal hydroxides and metal oxides) to produce salts and water
- Acids are neutralised by metal carbonates to produce salts, water and carbon dioxide.
- The particular salt produced in any reaction between an acid and a base or alkali depends on:
- the acid used (hydrochloric acid produces chlorides, nitric acid produces nitrates, sulfuric acid produces sulfates)
- the positive ions in the base, alkali or carbonate. - Students should be able to predict products from given reactants
- Suggested Activity:
Students should complete a selection of equations to predict the names of products / names of reactants in neutralization reactions.
Stretch - complete word equations
Challenge - complete balanced symbol equations
Super Challenge - complete balanced half equations
- Suggested Activity:
- Acids are neutralised by alkalis (eg soluble metal hydroxides) and bases (eg insoluble metal hydroxides and metal oxides) to produce salts and water
- Lesson 06 - Required Practical 1 - Preparing a pure dry sample of a soluble salt Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Soluble salts can be made from acids by reacting them with solid insoluble substances, such as metals, metal oxides, hydroxides or carbonates.
- Suggested Activity:
Recall the equation for neutralisation use images to prompt their memory. Tell them this is the common equation.
- Suggested Activity:
- (WS) The solid is added to the acid until no more reacts and the excess solid is filtered off to produce a solution of the salt.
- Suggested Activity:
Practical: Collect pure insoluble salt from a solution. Write a flow map for the method, including the names of equipment and what each piece is used for.
Equipment Required:
Silver nitrate
sodium chloride
test tubes
pipettes
filter paper
funnels
conical flasks
- Suggested Activity:
- Salt solutions can be crystallised to produce solid salts.
- Suggested Activity:
Show an example of a crystallization and evaporation of salts to show the difference. Students to observe them using spy glasses and then complete a matrix map to compare the methods and the difference in the products.
Equipment Required:
pre prepared samples of copper sulfate solutions that have been evaporated and crystallized (one between two to share)
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe how to make pure, dry samples of named soluble salts from information provided.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Use your flow map to construct a method to prepare a pure dry sample of silver chloride
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to use the formulae of common ions to deduce the formulae of salts.
- Suggested Activity:
Use the ion list to construct equations for students to deduce the formulae of salts or the the ions they are derived from.
Stretch - group 1 and 7 ions / group 2 and 6 ions
Challenge - Group 1 and 6 and Group 2 and 7 ions
Super Challenge - transition ions range of non metals.
- Suggested Activity:
- Soluble salts can be made from acids by reacting them with solid insoluble substances, such as metals, metal oxides, hydroxides or carbonates.
- Lesson 07 - What is the difference between an acid and an alkali? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (WS) Students should be able to describe the use of universal indicator or a wide range indicator to measure the approximate pH of a solution
- (WS) Students should be able to use the pH scale to identify acidic or alkaline solutions.
- Aqueous solutions of alkalis contain hydroxide ions (OH-).
- A strong acid is completely ionised in aqueous solution. Examples of strong acids are hydrochloric, nitric and sulfuric acids.
- A weak acid is only partially ionised in aqueous solution. Examples of weak acids are ethanoic, citric and carbonic acids.
- Acids produce hydrogen ions (H ) in aqueous solutions.
- For a given concentration of aqueous solutions, the stronger an acid, the lower the pH.
- As the pH decreases by one unit, the hydrogen ion concentration of the solution increases by a factor of 10.
- Students should be able to use and explain the terms dilute and concentrated (in terms of amount of substance), and weak and strong (in terms of the degree of ionisation) in relation to acids
- Students should be able to describe neutrality and relative acidity in terms of the effect on hydrogen ion concentration and the numerical value of pH (whole numbers only).
- (WS) Students should be able to describe the use of universal indicator or a wide range indicator to measure the approximate pH of a solution
- Lesson 08 - What is neutralisation? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- This reaction can be represented by the equation: H (aq) OH-(aq) -> H2O(l)
- Suggested Activity:
How many drops required to neutralise?
Equipment Required:
Hydrochloric acid
sodium Hydroxide
UI
conical flasks
pipettes
indicator charts
- Suggested Activity:
- In neutralisation reactions between an acid and an alkali, hydrogen ions react with hydroxide ions to produce water.
- Suggested Activity:
Pupils to workout the products of neutrilisation reactions
acid alkai- Salt water
GF: Why do people take antacids?
Is it healthy to take too many antacids.
- Suggested Activity:
- The pH scale, from 0 to 14, is a measure of the acidity or alkalinity of a solution, and can be measured using universal indicator or a pH probe.
- A solution with pH 7 is neutral. Aqueous solutions of acids have pH values of less than 7 and aqueous solutions of alkalis have pH values greater than 7.
- Suggested Activity:
Define the following terms:
• acid
• base
• alkali
• neutral.
Recall the pH numbers for the following solutions:
• acidic
• alkaline
• neutral.
Write the symbol equation for the neutralisation of an acid and an alkali.
What is more acidic H2SO4 or HCl?
What would produce more H ions in solution?Equipment Required:
Practical: measure the pH change when a strong acid neutralises a strong alkali.
This is best done using a data logger and pH probe or digital pH meter. AT3.
- Suggested Activity:
- This reaction can be represented by the equation: H (aq) OH-(aq) -> H2O(l)
- Lesson 09 - What can we learn from titrations? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to:
- describe how to carry out titrations using strong acids and strong alkalis only (sulfuric, hydrochloric and nitric acids only) to find the reacting volumes accurately - (MS) (HT Only) calculate the chemical quantities in titrations involving concentrations in mol/dm3 and in g/dm3.
- (MS) (HT only) determination of the concentration of one of the solutions in mol/dm3 and g/dm3 from the reacting volumes and the known concentration of the other solution.
- Students should be able to:
- Lesson 10 - Required Practical 2 - Titrations (Chemistry only) Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required Practical 2 - Titrations (chemistry only) (AT skills 1,8)
- The volumes of acid and alkali solutions that react with each other can be measured by titration using a suitable indicator.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Describe how to carry out titrations using strong acids and strong alkalis (sulfuric, hydrochloric and nitric acids only) to find the reacting volumes accurately.
(HT Only) Calculate the chemical quantities in titrations involving concentrations in mol/dm3 and in g/dm3.
- Suggested Activity:
- Required Practical 2 - Titrations (chemistry only) (AT skills 1,8)
- Lesson 01 - Why are some metals more reactive than others? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C1.7
- Lesson 01 - What energy changes happen during reactions? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Energy is conserved in chemical reactions. The amount of energy in the universe at the end of a chemical reaction is the same as before the reaction takes place.
- Suggested Activity:
Investigating the energy change of reactions
Equipment Required:
Collins C5.1
polystyrene cups lids
thermometers
250ml beakers, spatulas
25ml cylinders
zinc powder 1M copper sulphate sol
magnesium powder 1M sulfuric acid
Citric acid crystals 1M sodium hydrogen carbonate soln
Sodium carbonate powder 1M ethanoic acid.
DEMO
10g ammonium chloride
20g Barium hydroxide
Piece of thin wood
water dispenser
datalogger temp probe
- Suggested Activity:
- If a reaction transfers energy to the surroundings the product molecules must have less energy than the reactants, by the amount transferred.
- An exothermic reaction is one that transfers energy to the surroundings so the temperature of the surroundings increases.
- Exothermic reactions include combustion, many oxidation reactions and neutralisation.
- Everyday uses of exothermic reactions include self-heating cans and hand warmers.
- An endothermic reaction is one that takes in energy from the surroundings so the temperature of the surroundings decreases.
- Endothermic reactions include thermal decompositions and the reaction of citric acid and sodium hydrogencarbonate. Some sports injury packs are based on endothermic reactions.
- Some sports injury packs are based on endothermic reactions.
- Students should be able to distinguish between exothermic and endothermic reactions on the basis of the temperature change of the surroundings
- Students should be able to evaluate uses and applications of exothermic and endothermic reactions given appropriate information.
- Limited to measurement of temperature change. Calculation of energy changes or ?H is not required.
- Energy is conserved in chemical reactions. The amount of energy in the universe at the end of a chemical reaction is the same as before the reaction takes place.
- Lesson 02 - What is a reaction pathway? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Chemical reactions can occur only when reacting particles collide with each other and with sufficient energy.
- Suggested Activity:
Plan Required Practical for Energy Changes
Equipment Required:
Practical planning sheets
Temperature changes required practical
- Suggested Activity:
- The minimum amount of energy that particles must have to react is called the activation energy.
- Reaction profiles can be used to show the relative energies of reactants and products, the activation energy and the overall energy change of a reaction.
- Students should be able to draw simple reaction profiles (energy level diagrams) for exothermic and endothermic reactions showing the relative energies of reactants and products, the activation energy and the overall energy change, with a curved line to show the energy as the reaction proceeds
- Students should be able to use reaction profiles to identify reactions as exothermic or endothermic
- Students should be able to explain that the activation energy is the energy needed for a reaction to occur.
- During a chemical reaction energy must be supplied to break bonds in the reactants
and energy is released when bonds in the products are formed. - The energy needed to break bonds and the energy released when bonds are formed can be calculated from bond energies.
- The difference between the sum of the energy needed to break bonds in the reactants and the sum of the energy released when bonds in the products are formed is the overall energy change of the reaction.
- In an exothermic reaction, the energy released from forming new bonds is greater than the energy needed to break existing bonds.
- In an endothermic reaction, the energy needed to break existing bonds is greater than the energy released from forming new bonds.
- Students should be able to calculate the energy transferred in chemical reactions using bond energies supplied.
- Chemical reactions can occur only when reacting particles collide with each other and with sufficient energy.
- Lesson 03 - Required Practical - Temperature change in a reaction Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required practical 4 - temperature change in reactions (AT skills 1,3,5,6)
- Required practical 4 - temperature change in reactions (AT skills 1,3,5,6)
- Lesson 04 - How are batteries and fuel cells able to store energy? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Cells contain chemicals which react to produce electricity.
- The voltage produced by a cell is dependent upon a number of factors including the type of electrode and electrolyte.
- A simple cell can be made by connecting two different metals in contact with an electrolyte.
- Batteries consist of two or more cells connected together in series to provide a greater voltage.
- In non-rechargeable cells and batteries the chemical reactions stop when one of the reactants has been used up. Alkaline batteries are non-rechargeable.
- Suggested Activity:
Students handle hydrogen powered cars
Equipment Required:
hydrogen powered cars - charged up!
- Suggested Activity:
- Rechargeable cells and batteries can be recharged because the chemical reactions are reversed when an external electrical current is supplied.
- Students should be able to interpret data for relative reactivity of different metals and evaluate the use of cells.
- Students do not need to know details of cells and batteries other than those specified.
- Fuel cells are supplied by an external source of fuel (eg hydrogen) and oxygen or air. The fuel is oxidised electrochemically within the fuel cell to produce a potential difference.
- The overall reaction in a hydrogen fuel cell involves the oxidation of hydrogen to produce water.
- Hydrogen fuel cells offer a potential alternative to rechargeable cells and batteries.
- Students should be able to evaluate the use of hydrogen fuel cells in comparison with rechargeable cells and batteries
- Students should be able to write the half equations for the electrode reactions in the hydrogen fuel cell. (HT only)
- Cells contain chemicals which react to produce electricity.
- Lesson 05 - How does electrolysis split compounds? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- When an ionic compound is melted or dissolved in water, the ions are free to move about within the liquid or solution. These liquids and solutions are able to conduct electricity and are called electrolytes.
- (HT only) Write balanced half equations and ionic equations where appropriate.
- Passing an electric current through electrolytes causes the ions to move to the electrodes. Positively charged ions move to the negative electrode (the cathode), and negatively charged ions move to the positive electrode (the anode). Ions are discharged at the electrodes producing elements. This process is called electrolysis.
- Suggested Activity:
Class practical:
electrolysis of copper sulfateEquipment Required:
Beaker 250ml
Graphite electrodes
wooden separators
DC power supply (6 volt)
Light bulb 6 volt
Leads croc/plug
1M copper sulphate soln
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) Throughout Section 4.4.3 Higher Tier students should be able to write half equations for the reactions occurring at the electrodes during electrolysis, and may be required to complete and balance supplied half equations. (MS)
- When a simple ionic compound (eg lead bromide) is electrolysed in the molten state using inert electrodes, the metal (lead) is produced at the cathode and the non-metal (bromine) is produced at the anode.
- Students should be able to predict the products of the electrolysis of binary ionic compounds in the molten state.
- (HT only) students should be able to write half equations for the reactions occurring at the electrodes during electrolysis, and may be required to complete and balance supplied half equations for this process . (MS)
- During electrolysis, at the cathode (negative electrode), positively charged ions gain electrons and so the reactions are reductions.
- At the anode (positive electrode), negatively charged ions lose electrons and so the reactions are oxidation reactions.
- Reactions at electrodes can be represented by half equations, for example:
2H 2e- ? H2
and
4OH- ? O2 2H2O 4e-
or
4OH- 4e- ? O 2H2O
- When an ionic compound is melted or dissolved in water, the ions are free to move about within the liquid or solution. These liquids and solutions are able to conduct electricity and are called electrolytes.
- Lesson 06 - How are metals like aluminium extracted from their ores? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Metals can be extracted from molten compounds using electrolysis. Electrolysis is used if the metal is too reactive to be extracted by reduction with carbon or if the metal reacts with carbon.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
electrolysis of molten lead bromide
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00001725/electrolysing-molten-lead-ii-bromide?cmpid=CMP00005239Equipment Required:
Access to a fume cupboard DEMO,
Lead bromide
Bunsen burner
tripod
gauze
THINGS BELOW IN BRACKETS ARE IN CHEMICAL CUPBOARD IN TRAY L
(Porcelain crucible,
2x
Graphite rod electrodes, about 15 cm long,
Rubber bung with two holes about 1 cm apart to fit the graphite rods)
DC power supply 12 V
Ammeter, 0-5 A, ideally a large
demonstration model
Leads croc/plugs x2
- Suggested Activity:
- Large amounts of energy are used in the extraction process to melt the compounds and to produce the electrical current.
- Aluminium is manufactured by the electrolysis of a molten mixture of aluminium oxide and cryolite using carbon as the positive electrode (anode).
- Students should be able to explain why a mixture is used as the electrolyte
- Students should be able to explain why the positive electrode must be continually replaced.
- (HT only) students should be able to write half equations for the reactions occurring at the electrodes during electrolysis, and may be required to complete and balance supplied half equations for this process . (MS)
- Metals can be extracted from molten compounds using electrolysis. Electrolysis is used if the metal is too reactive to be extracted by reduction with carbon or if the metal reacts with carbon.
- Lesson 07 - What products will be created at the electrodes during electrolysis? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The ions discharged when an aqueous solution is electrolysed using inert electrodes depend on the relative reactivity of the elements involved.
- At the negative electrode (cathode), hydrogen is produced if the metal is more reactive than hydrogen.
- At the positive electrode (anode), oxygen is produced unless the solution contains halide ions when the halogen is produced.
- This happens because in the aqueous solution water molecules break down producing hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions that are discharged.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
Rainbow electrolysis
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000735/colourful-electrolysis?cmpid=CMP00004981Equipment Required:
U-shaped tube
Clamp and clamp stand
Carbon electrodes 2
Plug/croc leads
Power pack (low voltage, d.c.)
Beaker (100 cm3)
salty water
Universal indicator soln
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to predict the products of the electrolysis of aqueous solutions containing a single ionic compound.
- Suggested Activity:
Class:
Electrolysis of NaCl to identify unexpected productsEquipment Required:
Clamp and clamp stand
Carbon electrodes and electrode holders, 2 of each (Note 3)
Electrical leads, 2
Power pack (low voltage, d.c.)
Beaker (100 cm3)
Spatula
Stirring rod
NaCl solution
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) students should be able to write half equations for the reactions occurring at the electrodes during electrolysis, and may be required to complete and balance supplied half equations for this process . (MS)
- The ions discharged when an aqueous solution is electrolysed using inert electrodes depend on the relative reactivity of the elements involved.
- Lesson 08 - Required practical 3 - Electrolysis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required practical 3 - electrolysis (developing hypothesis) (AT skills 3,7,8)
- Suggested Activity:
RP Electrolysis plan and carry out
Equipment Required:
RP 3 Electrolysis
0.5M copper sulphate soln
0.5M sodium chloride soln
0.5M copper chloride soln
0.5M sodium sulphate soln
carbon electrodes holders
beakers
power packs
plug/croc leads
Blue litmus paper
forceps
MAYBE SET UP 4 OF EACH CHEM READY IN BEAKERS WITH ELECTRODES(rather than 60 beakers)
- Suggested Activity:
- Required practical 3 - electrolysis (developing hypothesis) (AT skills 3,7,8)
- Lesson 01 - What energy changes happen during reactions? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- P1.1
- Lesson 01 - How is energy stored and transferred? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A system is an object or group of objects.
- Suggested Activity:
Starter:
Recall the different types/forms of energy from KS3
Introduce the idea of systems and stores.
Ask students to group/classify them as systems and stores.
- Suggested Activity:
- Energy can be transferred usefully, stored or dissipated, but cannot be created or destroyed.
- Suggested Activity:
Recall the law of conservation of energy.
GF: Discuss the reasons why in a chemical reaction the energy and atoms are conserved.
- Suggested Activity:
- There are changes in the way energy is stored when a system changes.
- Suggested Activity:
Class Practical - Energy Circus
Equipment Required:
DEMO:
Hairdryer
1kg mass
Lamp
Model fruit (or real!)
Candle and matches
Kettle
Speaker
Iron
OR
Energy circus
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe with examples where there are energy transfers in a closed system, that there is no net change to the total energy.
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO:
Energy Transfer Candle Model (http://www.neilatkin.com/2016/06/09/teaching-energy-new-approach/)
GF: Evaluate the model used to represent energy stores and pathways. Include the difference between energy transformation and transfers in your response.Equipment Required:
DEMO:
1 litre beaker of coloured water (red)
Two different width tubing measuring approx. 1 metre
1 large Gratnell tray
(see image here for model - http://neilatkin.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/thermal-transfer-168x300.jpg)
- Suggested Activity:
- A system is an object or group of objects.
- Lesson 02 - How are changes in energy calculated? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe all the changes involved in the way energy is stored when a system changes, for common situations. For example: an object projected upwards
- The amount of elastic potential energy stored in a stretched spring can be calculated using the equation:
elastic potential energy = 0.5 x spring constant x extension 2- Suggested Activity:
Create a Physics equation flashcard
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to calculate the amount of energy associated with a moving object, a stretched spring and an object raised above ground level.
- Suggested Activity:
Circus of mini practicals (2 or 3 sets for a big class of each)
PiXL Physics equation practice: GPEEquipment Required:
2 or 3 sets of each of the following (depending on size of class):
1. Brick on a table (GPE)
2. Car on a ramp, stop clock, balance, meter ruler. (kinetic energy)
3. Picking up a wooden block string around the table from the table, meter ruler, balance, Newton meter. (work done)
4. Pulling a box across a table (balance, meter ruler, Newton meter)
5. (HT only) GF task or could be used later after teaching work done and charge.
Series circuit with powerpack ammeter and voltmeter. Calculate charge first then energy as work done using energy = charge x potential difference
- Suggested Activity:
- The kinetic energy of a moving object can be calculated using the equation:
kinetic energy = 0.5 ? mass ? speed2- Suggested Activity:
PiXL Physics equation practice: KE
- Suggested Activity:
- The amount of gravitational potential energy gained by an object raised above ground level can be calculated using the equation:
g.p.e. = mass x gravitational field strength x height- Suggested Activity:
Create a Physics equation flashcard
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe, with examples, how in all system changes energy is dissipated, so that it is stored in less useful ways.
This energy is often described as being "wasted".- Suggested Activity:
Recall the definition for 'conservation of energy'.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe all the changes involved in the way energy is stored when a system changes, for common situations. For example: an object projected upwards
- Lesson 03 - How do we reduce unwanted energy transfers? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The energy efficiency for any energy transfer can be calculated using the
equation:
efficiency = useful output energy transfer / total input energy transfer- Suggested Activity:
GCSEpod: Energy Efficiency
Practice calculations for efficiency:
http://moodle.bishopston.swansea.sch.uk/pluginfile.php/9398/mod_resource/content/0/Core_Physics/Electrical_Energy/Efficiency_Worksheet.doc
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain ways of reducing unwanted energy transfers, for example through lubrication and the use of thermal insulation.
- Suggested Activity:
Marketplace activity: How to reduce unwanted energy transfers
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) Students should be able to describe ways to increase the efficiency of an intended energy transfer.
- Suggested Activity:
Present the efficiency equation and ask students "Thinking quantitatively, how could efficiency be increased?"
- Suggested Activity:
- The energy efficiency for any energy transfer can be calculated using the
- Lesson 04 - Required Practical - Thermal Insulation (Separates only) Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required Practical Activity 2: Thermal Insulation
- Required Practical Activity 2: Thermal Insulation
- Lesson 05 - What is specific heat capacity? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The amount of energy stored in or released from a system as its temperature changes can be calculated using the equation:
change in thermal energy = mass ? specific heat capacity
? temperature change- Suggested Activity:
Create Physics equation flashcard
PiXL Physics equation practice
Practise calculations for specific heat capacity
- Suggested Activity:
- Use calculations to show on a common scale how the overall energy in a system is redistributed when the system is changed.
- Suggested Activity:
Determine the SHC o
Equipment Required:
Power packs
beakers
immersion heaters
thermometers
Ammeters
plug/plug/leads
Stopclocks
250ml cylinders
- Suggested Activity:
- The specific heat capacity of a substance is the amount of energy required to raise the temperature of one kilogram of the substance by one degree Celsius.
- Power is defined as the rate at which energy is transferred or the rate at which work is done.
- Students should be able to describe how the rate of cooling of a building is affected by the thickness and thermal conductivity of its walls.
- Students should be able to give examples that illustrate the definition of power eg comparing two electric motors that both lift the same weight through the same height but one does it faster than the other.
- The higher the thermal conductivity of a material the higher the rate of energy transfer by conduction across the material.
- The amount of energy stored in or released from a system as its temperature changes can be calculated using the equation:
- Lesson 06 - Required Practical - Specific Heat Capacity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required Practical Activity 1: Specific Heat Capacity
Investigation to determine the specific heat capacity of one or more
materials. The investigation will involve linking the decrease of one energy store (or work done) to the
increase in temperature and subsequent increase in thermal energy stored.
- Required Practical Activity 1: Specific Heat Capacity
- Lesson 07 - How can energy production be sustainable? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to show that science has the ability to identify environmental issues arising from the use of energy resources but not always the power to
deal with the issues because of political, social, ethical or economic
considerations. (extended writing opp) - The main energy resources available for use on Earth include: fossil fuels (coal, oil and gas), nuclear fuel, biofuel, wind, hydro-electricity, geothermal, the tides, the Sun and water waves.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Suggest why scientists have not been able to mass produce energy from nuclear fission yet
Equipment Required:
Hydrogen powered car
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to compare ways that different energy resources are used, the uses to include transport, electricity generation and heating
- Students should be able to understand why some energy resources are more reliable than others
- Students should be able to consider the environmental issues that may arise from the use of different energy resources
- A renewable energy resource is one that is being (or can be) replenished as it is used.
- Students should be able to explain patterns and trends in the use of energy resources.
- Students should be able to distinguish between energy resources that are renewable and energy resources that are non-renewable
- The uses of energy resources include: transport, electricity generation and heating.
Descriptions of how energy resources are used to generate electricity are not required. - Students should be able to describe the main energy sources available
- Students should be able to describe the environmental impact arising from the use of different energy resources
- Students should be able to show that science has the ability to identify environmental issues arising from the use of energy resources but not always the power to
- Lesson 01 - How is energy stored and transferred? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- P1.2
- Lesson 01 - How do we draw circuits? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Circuit diagrams use standard symbols (draw and intrepret)
- Suggested Activity:
Draw circuit diagrams for different scenarios for parallel and series
circuits.
practical:
Measure current and voltage in given circuits.
GF:Why should a home have a parallel circuit installed for lighting and not series?Equipment Required:
Electricity trolley:
Ammeter
Voltmeter
bulbs 2.5
leads
Batteries
- Suggested Activity:
- For electrical charge to flow through a closed circuit the circuit must
include a source of potential difference. - Electric current is a flow of electrical charge.
- The size of the electric current is the rate of flow of electrical charge.
- Circuit diagrams use standard symbols (draw and intrepret)
- Lesson 02 - How can circuits be turned into circuit diagrams? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to draw an appropriate circuit diagram using correct circuit symbols.
- Suggested Activity:
Practice questions involving rearranging for a
Extension:Draw Parallel circuits.
- Suggested Activity:
- Charge flow, current and time are linked by the equation:
charge flow = current ? time- Suggested Activity:
Practice questions involving rearranging for a stretch.
- Suggested Activity:
- A current has the same value at any point in a single closed loop.
- Suggested Activity:
Practical: Create series and parallel circuits and test how voltage and current changes at different points of the circuit.
Equipment Required:
Electricity trolley:
Ammeter
Voltmeter
Power packs
leads
12v bulbs
Resistors 100 Ohms
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to draw an appropriate circuit diagram using correct circuit symbols.
- Lesson 03 - What factors affect resistance? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Current, potential difference or resistance can be calculated using the
equation:
potential difference = current ? resistance
V = I R- Suggested Activity:
Diffrentiated questions using the equation
V= I REquipment Required:
x
- Suggested Activity:
- The current (I) through a component depends on both the resistance (R)
of the component and the potential difference (V) across the component.- Suggested Activity:
Draw a current (amps) against potential difference (volts) graph.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain that, for some resistors, the value of R remains constant but that in others it can change as the current changes.
- Current, potential difference or resistance can be calculated using the
- Lesson 04 - Required Practical - Resistance along a wire Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required practical 3 - factors affecting resistance
- Suggested Activity:
Required practical 3: factors affecting resistance
EW: What is the best type of wire for a light bulb?Equipment Required:
Power packs
ammeters
voltmeters
croc/clips
resistance wire on banjo boards
plug/plug leads
10 Ohm resistors
- Suggested Activity:
- Required practical 3 - factors affecting resistance
- Lesson 05 - Required Practical - Resistance of components Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The greater the resistance of the component the smaller the current for a
given potential difference (pd) across the component. - Students should be able to use graphs to explore whether circuit
elements are linear or non-linear and relate the curves produced to their function and properties.- Suggested Activity:
Drawing graphs that identify linear and non linear relationships.
- Suggested Activity:
- Required practical 4 - resistors
- Suggested Activity:
SEE AQA Required practical method and use booklets.
GF:What would be the best type of resistor for an incubator?Equipment Required:
ammeters or multimeter
voltmeters
12 V lamps or desk lamps?
variable resistor
diodes
resistor 10 Ω
Connecting leads
LDRs
power packs
- Suggested Activity:
- The greater the resistance of the component the smaller the current for a
- Lesson 06 - What are the applications of different types of resistor? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The resistance of a filament lamp increases as the temperature of the filament increases. (Required practical activity 4)
- The applications of thermistors in circuits eg a thermostat is required.
- Students should be able to explain the design and use of a circuit to measure the resistance of a component by measuring the current through, and potential difference across, the component
- The diode has a very high resistance in the reverse direction.
- Students should be able to explain the design and use of a circuit to measure the resistance of a component by measuring the current through, and potential difference across, the component
- The current through an ohmic conductor (at a constant temperature) is directly proportional to the potential difference across the resistor. This means that the resistance remains constant as the current changes. (Required practical activity 4)
- Students should be able to explain the design and use of a circuit to measure the resistance of a component by measuring the current through, and potential difference across, the component
- Suggested Activity:
Draw and compare circuits that measure resistance. Highlighting the importance of placing the voltmeter in parallel and ammeter in series.
EW: Justify what type of resistor should be used in a street lamp.
- Suggested Activity:
- The resistance of components such as lamps, diodes, thermistors and LDRs is not constant; it changes with the current through the component. (Required practical activity 4)
- Suggested Activity:
Draw and compare circuits that measure resistance. Highlighting the importance of placing the voltmeter in parallel and ammeter in series.
EW: Justify what type of resistor should be used in
Circuit of lamp, diode, thermistor or LDREquipment Required:
Switches
Power supplies
Resistors
Ammeters
Wires
Voltmeters
LDRs
Thermistors
Diodes
Lamps
- Suggested Activity:
- The current through a diode flows in one direction only.
- Suggested Activity:
Draw graphs of current against voltage for LDR, Diode, thermistor and filament lamp.
Equipment Required:
graph paper
- Suggested Activity:
- The applications of thermistors in circuits eg a thermostat is required.
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate the effect of temperature and light intensity on thermisters and LDRs
Equipment Required:
battery circuit kits
thermisters
kettles (filled and heated)
thermometers
ice
LDRs
lamps
data loggers (LUX meters)
Ammeters
Voltmeters
Large beakers (500mL)
- Suggested Activity:
- The resistance of an LDR decreases as light intensity increases. (Investigation)
- Suggested Activity:
LDR light intensity practical
Equipment Required:
multimeters
lamps 12v
LDRs
power packs
leads
voltmeters
ammeters
diodes
10 Ohm resistors
variable resistors
- Suggested Activity:
- The application of LDRs in circuits eg switching lights on when it gets
dark is required. - Students should be able to explain the design and use of a circuit to measure the resistance of a component by measuring the current through, and potential difference across, the component
- The resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases. (Investigation)
- [The resistance of a semicondutor decreases as energy increases as more charge carriers become freed]
- The resistance of a filament lamp increases as the temperature of the filament increases. (Required practical activity 4)
- Lesson 01 - How do we draw circuits? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- P1.3
- Lesson 01 - What is static charge? (SEPARATES ONLY) Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The further away from the charged object, the weaker the field
- When certain insulating materials are rubbed against each other they become electrically charged.
- Suggested Activity:
What is static electricity?
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fT_LmwnmVNM
Phet - Creating static
https://phet.colorado.edu/sims/html/john-travoltage/latest/john-travoltage_en.html
- Suggested Activity:
- A second charged object placed in the field experiences a force.
- Negatively charged electrons are rubbed off one material and on to the other.
- Suggested Activity:
Extended writing:
Describe and explain how rubbing materials against each other can get them to become charged, in terms of particle movement.
- Suggested Activity:
- Two objects that carry the same type of charge repel.
- The electric field is strongest close to the charged object.
- The force gets stronger as the distance between the objects decreases.
- Two objects that carry different types of charge attract.
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate the effect charged objects have on other objects placed near it – both charged and uncharged?
Phet - Interacting charges
https://phet.colorado.edu/sims/html/balloons-and-static-electricity/latest/balloons-and-static-electricity_en.html
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to draw the electric field pattern for an isolated charged sphere
- Suggested Activity:
Diagrams of electric fields
http://www.cyberphysics.co.uk/topics/electricity/higher_electricity/electric_field.htm
- Suggested Activity:
- The material that gains electrons becomes negatively charged. The material that loses electrons is left with an equal positive charge.
- Attraction and repulsion between two charged objects are examples of non-contact force.
- Students should be able to explain the concept of an electric field
- Students should be able to describe the production of static electricity, and sparking, by rubbing surfaces
- Suggested Activity:
Dangers of static
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FzsTamPPnHc
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how the concept of an electric field helps to explain the non- contact force between charged objects as well as other electrostatic phenomena such as sparking.
- Students should be able to describe evidence that charged objects exert forces of attraction or repulsion on one another when not in contact
- Students should be able to explain how the transfer of electrons between objects can explain the phenomena of static electricity.
- The further away from the charged object, the weaker the field
- Lesson 02 - How do series and parallel circuits differ? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- There are two ways of joining electrical components, in series and in
parallel. Some circuits include both series and parallel parts. - Students should be able to explain the design and use of dc series circuits for measurement and testing purposes
- Suggested Activity:
use students to demonstrate the difference between series and parallel circuits (ensure students hold hands/wrists with skin contact to make it work. first show a circle for series and then add in students to create a parallel - listen to the change in the sound then add a second ball in.
Equipment Required:
conductivity balls
- Suggested Activity:
- A charged object creates an electric field around itself.
- Suggested Activity:
Demonstrate static electricity using the Van de Graaf generator.
Equipment Required:
Van de Graaf generator.
- Suggested Activity:
- For components connected in series:
? there is the same current through each component
? the total potential difference of the power supply is shared between the components
? the total resistance of two components is the sum of the resistance of each component. Rtotal = R1 R2- Suggested Activity:
Investigate PD, current and resistance through series and parallel circuits.
1. Make a simple circuit containing a switch, power supply and a lamp
2. Add more lamps – both in series and then in parallel
3. Note the effect on the brightness of the lamps.
Current through, and potential difference across, each lamp can be measured to get numerical values and see the effect of adding more lamps.Equipment Required:
Power packs
Voltmeters
Ammeters
Leads
12 volt lamps
Switch
Variable resistors
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to calculate the currents, potential differences and resistances in dc series circuits
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate how the current in each loop of a parallel circuit compares to the current in the main branch of the circuit
- Suggested Activity:
- For components connected in parallel:
? the potential difference across each component is the same
? the total current through the whole circuit is the sum of the currents through the separate components
? the total resistance of two resistors is less than the resistance of the smallest individual resistor.
- When two electrically charged objects are brought close together they exert a force on each other.
- Students should be able to use circuit diagrams to construct and check series and parallel circuits that include a variety of common circuit components
- Suggested Activity:
Why are decorative lights for Christmas trees connected in parallel and not series?
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the difference between series and parallel circuits
- Students should be able to solve problems for circuits which include resistors in series using the concept of equivalent resistance.
- Students should be able to explain qualitatively why adding resistors in series increases the total resistance whilst adding resistors in parallel decreases the total resistance
Students are not required to calculate the total resistance of two
resistors joined in parallel.
- There are two ways of joining electrical components, in series and in
- Lesson 03 - How can we calculate the power of an appliance? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain how the power transfer in any circuit device is related to the potential difference across it and the current through it, and to the energy changes over time:
power = potential difference ? current
P = V I
power = current2 ? resistance
P = I2 R
where:
power, P, in watts, W
potential difference, V, in volts, V
current, I, in amperes, A (amp is acceptable for ampere)
resistance, R, in ohms, ?- Suggested Activity:
Demo the equations for calculating power.
Students to apply.
- Suggested Activity:
- Everyday electrical appliances are designed to bring about energy transfers.
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate a number of electrical appliances, either around the lab or well-known devices, eg a TV, to look at the energy transfers that occur.
Equipment Required:
Circus of electrical appliances
Energy meters
- Suggested Activity:
- The amount of energy an appliance transfers depends on how long the appliance is switched on for and the power of the appliance.
- Students should be able to describe how different domestic appliances
transfer energy from batteries or ac mains to the kinetic energy of electric motors or the energy of heating devices. - Students should be able to explain how the power of a circuit device is
related to the potential difference across it and the current through it
- Students should be able to explain how the power transfer in any circuit device is related to the potential difference across it and the current through it, and to the energy changes over time:
- Lesson 04 - How do we calculate the energy transferred by an appliance? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Work is done when charge flows in a circuit.
- The amount of energy transferred by electrical work can be calculated using the equation:
energy transferred = power ? time
- Suggested Activity:
Demo the equation for calculating work done in a circuit
Students to apply.
- Suggested Activity:
- Energy transferred can also be calculated by: energy transferred = charge flow ? potential difference
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate how the amount of energy transferred to an electrical appliance depends on the amount of time that it is on for by connecting the appliance to a joulemeter.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how the power of a circuit device is
related to the energy transferred over a given time. - Students should be able to describe, with examples, the relationship
between the power ratings for domestic electrical appliances and the
changes in stored energy when they are in use.
- Work is done when charge flows in a circuit.
- Lesson 05 - Why do UK plugs have 3-pins? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Mains electricity is an ac supply.
- In the United Kingdom the domestic electricity supply has a frequency of 50 Hz.
- [In the United Kingdom the domestic electricity supply] is about 230 V.
- Suggested Activity:
Demonstrate alternating current and direct current with pupil electrons
or a long loop of stringEquipment Required:
Several meters of string joined in a loop.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain the difference between direct and alternating potential difference.
- Suggested Activity:
Research the use of direct and alternating potential difference. Find out why the USA used direct potential difference, then changed to an alternating potential difference..
- Suggested Activity:
- Most electrical appliances are connected to the mains using three-core cable.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo to take apart a plug and sketch how it is wired. Then research the role of each part of the plug
- Plastic casing
- Insulated cable
- Fuse
- Live wire
- Neutral wire
- Earth wireEquipment Required:
DEMO using visualiser
Plug
Screwdriver
Wire stripper
- Suggested Activity:
- The insulation covering each wire is colour coded for easy identification:
live wire ? brown
neutral wire ? blue
earth wire ? green and yellow stripes. - The live wire carries the alternating potential difference from the supply.
- The neutral wire completes the circuit.
- The potential difference between the live wire and earth (0 V) is about 230 V.
- The neutral wire is at, or close to, earth potential (0 V).
- Suggested Activity:
What safety measures are used with mains electricity?
- Suggested Activity:
- The earth wire is at 0 V, it only carries a current if there is a fault.
- Students should be able to explain that a live wire may be dangerous even when a switch in the mains circuit is open
- Students should be able to explain the dangers of providing any connection between the live wire and earth.
- The earth wire is a safety wire to stop the appliance becoming live.
- Mains electricity is an ac supply.
- Lesson 06 - How is a plug supplied with electricity? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The National Grid is a system of cables and transformers linking power
stations to consumers.- Suggested Activity:
Model the National Grid to show how electricity is sent from power stations to consumers.
Equipment Required:
National grid demo
- Suggested Activity:
- Electrical power is transferred from power stations to consumers using the National Orid.
- Step-up transformers are used to increase the potential difference from the power station to the transmission cables
- Suggested Activity:
Demo: How transformers affect potential difference
http://www.bbc.co.uk/schools/gcsebitesize/science/add_ocr_pre_2011/electric_circuits/mainsproducedrev5.shtml
- Suggested Activity:
- Step-down
transformers are used to decrease, to a much lower value, the potential
difference for domestic use. - Students should be able to explain why the National Grid system is an
efficient way to transfer energy.- Suggested Activity:
Extended writing
In the UK, electricity is delivered to consumers by the National Grid.
Explain the main features of the National Grid.
- Suggested Activity:
- The National Grid is a system of cables and transformers linking power
- Lesson 01 - What is static charge? (SEPARATES ONLY) Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- P1.4
- Lesson 01 - How does density change with changes of state? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The density of a material is defined by the equation:
density = mass / volume - Required practical 5 - density (AT skills 1)
- The density of a material is defined by the equation:
- Lesson 02 - What can change the internal energy of a substance? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Energy is stored inside a system by the particles (atoms and molecules) that make up the system. This is called internal energy.
- Suggested Activity:
internal energy circus of practicals (or done as a demo)
Equipment Required:
1. ball hoop
2. Ice in pack, strip of metal (lead) hammer
3. Bike pump
4. Kettle beaker thermometer ice spoon
5. Rubber strip
6. Metal pole (from conduction practical)
- Suggested Activity:
- If the temperature of the system increases, the increase in temperature depends on the mass of the substance heated, the type of material and the energy input to the system.
- Internal energy is the total kinetic energy and potential energy of all the particles (atoms and molecules) that make up a system.
- Heating changes the energy stored within the system by increasing the energy of the particles that make up the system. This either raises the temperature of the system or produces a change of state.
- Energy is stored inside a system by the particles (atoms and molecules) that make up the system. This is called internal energy.
- Lesson 04 - What is latent heat? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to recognise/draw simple diagrams to model the difference between solids, liquids and gases.
- The particle model can be used to explain
? the different states of matter
? differences in density.- Suggested Activity:
density bottle containing salt water, isopropyl and beads of different density. set up as:
bottom layer - salt water
beads in centre
isopropyl on top.
explain reasoning / ask students to explain.
shake bottle and then ask students to suggest what has happened and why.Equipment Required:
500ml plastic bottle containing salt water, isopropyl and beads of different density. set up as:
bottom layer - salt water
beads in centre
isopropyl on top
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain the differences in density between the different states of matter in terms of the arrangement of atoms or molecules.
- If a change of state happens the energy needed for a substance to change state is called latent heat.
- When a change of state occurs, the energy supplied changes the energy stored (internal energy) but not the temperature.
- Students should be able to describe how, when substances change state (melt, freeze, boil, evaporate, condense or sublimate), mass is conserved.
- The specific latent heat of a substance is the amount of energy required to change the state of one kilogram of the substance with no change in temperature.
- Suggested Activity:
investigate the cooling curve of stearic acid. Record temperature and plot on graph.
Equipment Required:
stearic acid in test tubes
thermometers
Kettles
stop watches
Beakers
- Suggested Activity:
- Changes of state are physical changes which differ from chemical changes because the material recovers its original properties if the change is reversed.
- Students should be able to recognise/draw simple diagrams to model the difference between solids, liquids and gases.
- Lesson 05 - How can the energy be calculated in the changes of state? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (MS) energy for a change of state = mass ? specific latent heat
E = m L
energy, E, in joules, J
mass, m, in kilograms, kg
specific latent heat, L, in joules per kilogram, J/kg - Specific latent heat of fusion is the change of state from solid to liquid
- Students should be able to distinguish between specific heat capacity and specific latent heat.
- Specific latent heat of vaporisation is the change of state from liquid to vapour
- Students are to gather data to draw part of a heating graph.
- Suggested Activity:
Using a water bath (set up using a beaker of water over a Bunsen burner), students are to slowly melt the Salol or stearic acid in the boiling tube and record the temperature at small time intervals.
Students record their results in a table and draw a graph of temperature against time to show the Salol temperature remains constant during the melting change of state.Equipment Required:
Per pair:
Boiling tube with solid Salol / stearic acid with a thermometer stuck in it (melted previously and allowed to harden with thermometer in it).
Stopclocks.
250ml glass beakers
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to interpret heating and cooling graphs that include changes of state.
- (MS) energy for a change of state = mass ? specific latent heat
- Lesson 07 - What affects gas pressure? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The molecules of a gas are in constant random motion.
- Changing the temperature of a gas, held at constant volume, changes the pressure exerted by the gas.
- Suggested Activity:
Use a conical flask with cling film covering the opening (flat) and place it in hot water. The cling film will dome showing gas volume has increased as particles spread out. If kept at a constant volume, this would result in increased pressure.
Use ice water to show the opposite effect of temperature. The cling film should curve downwards.Equipment Required:
Conical flask, cling film, kettles, ice water.
- Suggested Activity:
- The temperature of the gas is related to the average kinetic energy of the molecules.
- Students should be able to explain how the motion of the molecules in a gas is related to both its temperature and its pressure
- Students should be able to explain qualitatively the relation between the temperature of a gas and its pressure at constant volume.
- The molecules of a gas are in constant random motion.
- Lesson 09 - How can you calculate fluid pressures? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Physics only) A fluid can be either a liquid or a gas.
- Suggested Activity:
class practical - experience pressure in fluids
Equipment Required:
syringes with liquids and gases in (singular ones or duel syringes)
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) The pressure in fluids causes a force normal (at right angles) to any surface.
- Suggested Activity:
Show the piddle tube and students explain why this happens
Equipment Required:
piddle tube
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) The pressure at the surface of a fluid can be calculated using the equation: pressure = force normal to a surface
area of that surface
p = F / A
pressure, p, in pascals, Pa force, F, in newtons, N
area, A, in metres squared, m2 - (Physics only) The pressure due to a column of liquid can be calculated using the
equation:
pressure = height of the column ? density of the liquid
? gravitational field strength
[ p = h ? g ]
pressure, p, in pascals, Pa
height of the column, h, in metres, m
density, ?, in kilograms per metre cubed, kg/m3
gravitational field strength, g, in newtons per kilogram, N/kg (In any
calculation the value of the gravitational field strength (g) will be given - (Physics only) Students should be able to explain why, in a liquid, pressure at a point
increases with the height of the column of liquid above that point and with
the density of the liquid.- Suggested Activity:
demo - Cartesian diver
Equipment Required:
Cartesian diver model already made up ready to show
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Students should be able to calculate the differences in pressure at different
depths in a liquid. (MS) - (Physics only) A partially (or totally) submerged object experiences a greater pressure on
the bottom surface than on the top surface. This creates a resultant force
upwards. This force is called the upthrust. - (Physics only) Students should be able to describe the factors which influence floating and
sinking. - (Physics only) The atmosphere is a thin layer (relative to the size of the Earth) of air round the Earth.
- (Physics only) The atmosphere gets less dense with increasing altitude
- (Physics only) Air molecules colliding with a surface create atmospheric pressure.
- (Physics only) The number of air molecules (and so the weight of air) above a surface decreases as the height of the surface above ground level increases.
- (Physics only) So as height increases there is always less air above a surface than there is at a lower height. So atmospheric pressure decreases with an increase in height
- (Physics only) Students should be able to describe a simple model of the Earth?s atmosphere and of atmospheric pressure
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain why atmospheric pressure varies with height above a surface
- (Physics only) A fluid can be either a liquid or a gas.
- Lesson 10 - How does doing work Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Physics only) A gas can be compressed or expanded by pressure changes.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo - collapsing can to show changes in air pressure
Equipment Required:
2/3 drinks cans
clamp
large glass bowl of water
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) The pressure produces a net force at right angles to the wall of the gas container (or any surface).
- Suggested Activity:
Class practical - investigate what happens to a gas with temperature change (cover conical flask and submerge in hot water observe what happens to gas pressure)
Equipment Required:
kettles
conical flasks
cling film
large beakers
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Students should be able to use the particle model to explain how increasing the volume in which a gas is contained, at constant temperature, can lead to a decrease in pressure.
- (MS)(Physics only) For a fixed mass of gas held at a constant temperature:
pressure ? volume = constant
p V = constant
pressure, p, in pascals, Pa
volume, V, in metres cubed, m3 - (Physics only) (MS) Students should be able to calculate the change in the pressure of a gas or the volume of a gas (a fixed mass held at constant temperature) when either the pressure or volume is increased or decreased.
- (Physics only) Work is the transfer of energy by a force.
- (Physics only) Doing work on a gas increases the internal energy of the gas and can cause an increase in the temperature of the gas.
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how, in a given situation eg a bicycle pump, doing work on an enclosed gas leads to an increase in the temperature of the gas.
- Suggested Activity:
demo - bike pump to show effects of work done
Equipment Required:
bike pump
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) In [Nuclear fusion] some of the mass may be converted into the energy of radiation.
- (Physics only) A gas can be compressed or expanded by pressure changes.
- Lesson 01 - How does density change with changes of state? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- P1.5
- Lesson 01 - How has the model of the atom changed over time? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- New experimental evidence may lead to a scientific model being changed or replaced.
- Before the discovery of the electron, atoms were thought to be tiny spheres that could not be divided.
- Suggested Activity:
Produce a timeline to show how our ideas about atoms have changed since ancient Greek times.
Find out about the origins of the words protons, neutrons and electrons.
- Suggested Activity:
- The discovery of the electron led to the plum pudding model of the atom.
- The plum pudding model suggested that the atom is a ball of positive charge with negative electrons embedded in it.
- The results from the alpha particle scattering experiment led to the conclusion that the mass of an atom was concentrated at the centre (nucleus) and that the nucleus was charged. This nuclear model replaced the plum pudding model.
- Suggested Activity:
Model the alpha scattering experiment using marbles and an upturned tray lifted just off the table with a hidden small mass in the centre.
Roll the marbles (alpha particles) under the tray and note down how many go straight through, how many deflected slightly and how many deflected straight back.
Use these observations to come up with a model of what is under the box (model of the atom). Mimicking Rutherford.
---OR---
by flicking a 1p coin through stack of 2p coins. The 1p coin represents the alpha particle and the stack of 2p coins the gold foil. How must the stacks be arranged in order that 90% of the coins go straight through without scattering? What conclusion can be drawn about the arrangement of atomic nuclei in a material and the amount of free space between nuclei?Equipment Required:
Rutherford alpha particle scattering demo (upturned tray with hidden small box and marbles).
---OR---
1p pieces and 2p pieces.
- Suggested Activity:
- Niels Bohr adapted the nuclear model by suggesting that electrons orbit the nucleus at specific distances. The theoretical calculations of Bohr agreed with experimental observations.
Details of experimental work supporting the Bohr model are not required. - Later experiments led to the idea that the positive charge of any nucleus could be subdivided into a whole number of smaller particles, each particle having the same amount of positive charge. The name proton was given to these particles.
- The experimental work of James Chadwick provided the evidence to show the existence of neutrons within the nucleus. This was about 20 years after the nucleus became an accepted scientific idea.
Details of Chadwick?s experimental work are not required. - Students should be able to describe why the new evidence from the scattering experiment led to a change
in the atomic model. - Students should be able to describe the difference between the plum pudding model of the atom and the nuclear model of the atom.
- New experimental evidence may lead to a scientific model being changed or replaced.
- Lesson 02 - How do atoms interact with electromagnetic radiation? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Atoms are very small, having a radius of about 1 x 10^-10 metres.
- The basic structure of an atom is a positively charged nucleus composed of both protons and neutrons surrounded by negatively charged electrons.
- Suggested Activity:
Model an atom using plasticine. On the model show where most of the mass in concentrated and that most of the atom is empty space.
Describe the composition of an atom and draw a fully labelled diagram of an atom showing protons and neutrons in the nucleus with electrons outside the nucleus.Equipment Required:
plasticine
- Suggested Activity:
- The radius of a nucleus is less than 1/10,000 of the radius of an atom.
- Most of the mass of an atom is concentrated in the nucleus.
- The electrons are arranged at different distances from the nucleus (different energy levels).
- The electron arrangements may change with the absorption of electromagnetic radiation (move further from the nucleus; a higher energy level) or by the emission of electromagnetic radiation (move closer to the nucleus; a lower energy level)
- Suggested Activity:
Use equipment to see how different coloured filters absorb different wavelengths of light
Research how absorption and emission spectra are formed.Equipment Required:
ray boxes
data loggers with temperature probes
power packs
cables
coloured filters to slot into ray box
- Suggested Activity:
- Atoms are very small, having a radius of about 1 x 10^-10 metres.
- Lesson 03 - How do subatomic particles relate to each other? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- In an atom the number of electrons is equal to the number of protons in the nucleus.
- Atoms have no overall electrical charge.
- All atoms of a particular element have the same number of protons. The number of protons in an atom of an element is called its atomic number.
- The total number of protons and neutrons in an atom is called its mass number.
- Suggested Activity:
Calculate the mass number for a particular element given the number of protons and neutrons in the atom. Rearrange the equation to find number of protons or number of neutrons and the mass number.
- Suggested Activity:
- Atoms can be represented as shown in this example:
(Mass number) (Atomic number) 23 11 Na- Suggested Activity:
Produce a table showing the mass number, atomic number and number of neutrons for an element given in the form (_11^23) Na .
- Suggested Activity:
- Atoms of the same element can have different numbers of neutrons; these atoms are called isotopes of that element.
- Suggested Activity:
Use simple modelling techniques to show that the number of protons in an isotope of an element remains constant but the number of neutrons changes.
Equipment Required:
Plasticine
fluffy balls
- Suggested Activity:
- Atoms turn into positive ions if they lose one or more outer electron(s).
- Suggested Activity:
Use students to model losing electrons.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to relate differences between isotopes to differences in conventional representations of their identities, charges and masses.
- In an atom the number of electrons is equal to the number of protons in the nucleus.
- Lesson 04 - What is nuclear radiation? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Some atomic nuclei are unstable.
- The nucleus gives out radiation as it changes to become more stable. This is a random process called radioactive decay.
- Activity is the rate at which a source of unstable nuclei decays.
- Activity is measured in becquerel (Bq)
- Count-rate is the number of decays recorded each second by a detector (eg Geiger-Muller tube).
- An alpha particle (α) is this consists of two neutrons and two protons, it is the same as a helium nucleus
- Suggested Activity:
Model alpha, beta, gamma and neutron decay using plasticine and/or stop frame animation. Models should show the atom before and after decay as well as the radiation emitted.
Equipment Required:
Plasticine
Cameras
- Suggested Activity:
- A beta particle (β) is a high speed electron ejected from the nucleus as a neutron turns into a proton
- A gamma ray (γ) is electromagnetic radiation from the nucleus
- The nuclear radiation emitted may be also be a neutron (n).
- Alpha is stopped by a few centimeters of air or a sheet of paper.
- Suggested Activity:
Demonstrate the penetration of alpha, beta and gamma radiation. Link the penetration of each type of radiation to the nature of the radiation and the uses of the radioactive sources.
Equipment Required:
Radioactive sources
Geiger muller tube
counter.
- Suggested Activity:
- Beta is stopped by a few millimeters of aluminium
- Suggested Activity:
Plan an experiment to determine the type of radiation emitted by an unknown radioactive source. Produce a risk assessment for this experiment.
- Suggested Activity:
- Gamma rays are stopped by a few centimeters of lead or a few meters of concrete.
- Gamma rays are the least ioninsing, because they are not charged.
- Alpha particles are the most ioninsing as they have a charge of plus 2.
- Students should be able to apply their knowledge to the uses of radiation and evaluate the best sources of radiation to use in a given situation.
- Some atomic nuclei are unstable.
- Lesson 05 - How does nuclear radiation change an atom? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Nuclear equations are used to represent radioactive decay. (diagram)
- In a nuclear equation an alpha particle may be represented by the symbol:The symbol of an alpha particle.
- The symbol of a beta particle.
- The emission of the different types of nuclear radiation may cause a change in the mass and /or the charge of the nucleus.
- alpha decay causes both the mass and charge of the nucleus to decrease.
- Beta decay does not cause the mass of the nucleus to change but does cause the charge of the nucleus to increase.
- Students should be able to use the names and symbols of common nuclei and particles to write balanced equations that show single alpha (α) and beta (β) decay. This is limited to balancing the atomic numbers and mass numbers. The identification of daughter elements from such decays is not required.
- The emission of a gamma ray does not cause the mass or the charge of the nucleus to change.
- Nuclear equations are used to represent radioactive decay. (diagram)
- Lesson 06 - What is half life? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Radioactive decay is random.
- Suggested Activity:
Model the radioactive decay of alpha and beta sources. Use the model to construct decay equations for alpha and beta decay. Critically analyse the limitations of the models produced by the class.
Demonstrate the randomness of the decay of a radioactive substance by throwing six dice and getting a prediction of the number of dice that will land on a six. Alternatively, drop 20 coins and get students to predict the number that will land on a head.Equipment Required:
Dice
- Suggested Activity:
- The half-life of a radioactive isotope is the time it takes for the number of nuclei of the isotope in a sample to halve, or the time it takes for the count rate (or activity) from a sample containing the isotope to fall to half its initial level.
- Students should be able to explain the concept of half-life and how it is related to the random nature of radioactive decay
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate half-life by throwing a large number of Tillich bricks. Any that land on the side with the odd colour get removed and the number remaining is recorded. Plot a graph of the number of throws against number of cubes remaining. Determine the half-life of the cubes (the number of throws needed to get the number of cubes to reduce by half).
This experiment can also be carried out using coins. Is it possible to predict which cubes or coins will land on a certain side?
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to determine the half-life of a radioactive isotope from given information.
- (HT only) Students should be able to calculate the net decline, expressed as a ratio, in a radioactive emission after a given number of half-lives.
- Radioactive decay is random.
- Lesson 07 - What is radioactive contamination? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Radioactive contamination is the unwanted presence of materials
containing radioactive atoms on other materials.- Suggested Activity:
Describe how radioactive contamination can occur.
Compare precautions taken by a teacher handling radioactive sources with those used by, say, in a nuclear power station.
- Suggested Activity:
- The hazard from
contamination is due to the decay of the contaminating atoms. The type of radiation emitted affects the level of hazard. - Irradiation is the process of exposing an object to nuclear radiation. The
irradiated object does not become radioactive. - Students should be able to compare the hazards associated with
contamination and irradiation.- Suggested Activity:
Evaluate the use of irradiating fruit in terms of cost of goods and potential risk due to the exposure of workers and consumers of the irradiation process.
- Suggested Activity:
- Suitable precautions must be taken to protect against any hazard that
the radioactive source used in the process of irradiation may present.- Suggested Activity:
EW : Justify the use of radioactive sources in school in terms of risk-benefit analysis to the students in the class.
- Suggested Activity:
- Radioactive contamination is the unwanted presence of materials
- Lesson 08 - When does background radiation occur? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Background radiation is around us all of the time.
- Suggested Activity:
Pose question: Are people in some areas exposed to more background radiation than others? If so why?
- Suggested Activity:
- Background radiation comes from:
? natural sources such as rocks and cosmic rays from space
? man-made sources such as the fallout from nuclear weapons testing and nuclear accidents.- Suggested Activity:
Pose question: Are we at risk from background radiation?
Is this greater or less than other parts of the country and why?
- Suggested Activity:
- The level of background radiation and radiation dose may be affected by occupation and/or location.
- Radiation dose is measured in sieverts (Sv)
- 1000 millisieverts (mSv) = 1 sievert (Sv)
- Students will not need to recall the unit of radiation dose.
- Nuclear radiations are used in medicine for the:
? exploration of internal organs
? control or destruction of unwanted tissue.- Suggested Activity:
Research some radioactive sources used in medicine and the properties of these tracers (half-life, type of radiation emitted and state).
Find out how nuclear radiation can be used in the diagnosis and treatment of cancer.
- Suggested Activity:
- Nuclear radiations are used in medicine for the:
? exploration of internal organs
? control or destruction of unwanted tissue. - Students should be able to describe and evaluate the uses of nuclear radiations for exploration of internal organs, and for control or destruction of unwanted tissue
- Students should be able to evaluate the perceived risks of using nuclear radiations in relation to given data and consequences.
- Radioactive isotopes have a very wide range of half-life values
- Students should be able to explain why the hazards associated with radioactive material differ according to the half-life involved
- Suggested Activity:
Pose question: Why can’t radioactive waste be thrown in landfill sites?
- Suggested Activity:
- Background radiation is around us all of the time.
- Lesson 09 - What is the difference between fission and fusion? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Nuclear fission is the splitting of a large and unstable nucleus (eg uranium or plutonium).
- Spontaneous fission is rare. Usually, for fission to occur the unstable nucleus must first absorb a neutron.
- The nucleus undergoing fission splits into two smaller nuclei, roughly equal in size, and emits two or three neutrons plus gamma rays. Energy is released by the fission reaction.
- Suggested Activity:
Model nuclear fission of a uranium nucleus. Use students.
- Suggested Activity:
- All of the fission products have kinetic energy.
- Suggested Activity:
Watch - https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1U6Nzcv9Vws
Use ideas from Energy topic (4.2) to answer question: Explain how the kinetic energy of the products is transferred to boil water.
- Suggested Activity:
- The neutrons may go on to start a chain reaction.
- Suggested Activity:
Model chain reactions using dominos or matches.
- Suggested Activity:
- The chain reaction is controlled in a nuclear reactor to control the energy released.
- The explosion caused by a nuclear weapon is caused by an uncontrolled chain reaction.
- Suggested Activity:
GF : Investigate the causes of the Chernobyl and Fukushima nuclear disasters. Have the lessons of these events been learnt? How can nuclear power be made safer than it is currently?
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to draw/interpret diagrams representing nuclear fission and how a chain reaction may occur.
- Nuclear fusion is the joining of two light nuclei to form a heavier nucleus.
- Suggested Activity:
Write simple word or symbol equations for the fusion of two hydrogen atoms or other light elements.
- Suggested Activity:
- Nuclear fission is the splitting of a large and unstable nucleus (eg uranium or plutonium).
- Lesson 01 - How has the model of the atom changed over time? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- B2.1
- Lesson 01 - How does the nervous system work? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The nervous system enables humans to react to their surroundings and to coordinate their behaviour.
- Suggested Activity:
Group practical:
Investigate the factors affecting response rateEquipment Required:
Data loggers
Reaction time sensors
- Suggested Activity:
- Be able to explain how the structure of the nervous system is adapted to its functions.
- All control systems include:a) cells called receptors, which detect stimuli (changes in the environment), b) coordination centres (such as the brain, spinal cord and pancreas) that receive and process information from receptors, c) effectors, muscles or glands, which bring about responses which restore optimum levels.
- These automatic control systems may involve nervous responses or chemical responses.
- Be able to explain that homeostasis is the regulation of the internal conditions of a cell or organism to maintain optimum conditions for function in response to internal and external changes.
- Homeostasis maintains optimal conditions for enzyme action and all cell functions.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
Ask one student to put one hand into the cold and another in the warm water for two minutes.
Student to then put both hands into the room temperature water together and describe what they experience.
Student should feel that one hand stays hot/cold for a while despite being in the same temperature water.Equipment Required:
Three large bowls: one warm water, one room temperature and one ice water.
- Suggested Activity:
- In the human body, these include control of: a) blood glucose concentration. B) body temperature. C) water levels.
- The nervous system enables humans to react to their surroundings and to coordinate their behaviour.
- Lesson 02 - How does a body respond to a stimulus? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Information from receptors passes along cells (neurones) as electrical impulses to the central nervous system (CNS).
- The CNS is the brain and spinal cord.
- The CNS coordinates the response of effectors which may be muscles contracting or glands secreting hormones.
- Suggested Activity:
The Reaction Time Test
https://www.justpark.com/creative/reaction-time-test/
- Suggested Activity:
- Stimulus --> Receptor --> Coordinator --> Effector --> Response
- Suggested Activity:
Student model of the CNS.
Equipment Required:
Large neurone posters.
- Suggested Activity:
- Be able to explain how the various structures in a reflex arc including the sensory neurone, synapse, relay neurone and motor neurone relate to their function.
- Students should understand why reflex actions are important.
- Reflex actions are automatic and rapid; they do not involve the conscious part of the brain.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
Students blow into each others faces - How fast do your eyes close?
- Suggested Activity:
- Be able to extract and interpret data from graphs, charts and tables, about the functioning of the nervous system.
- Be able to translate information about reaction times between numerical and graphical forms.
- Information from receptors passes along cells (neurones) as electrical impulses to the central nervous system (CNS).
- Lesson 03 - Required Practical: Reaction Time Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required Practical - Reaction Time (AT skills 1,3,4)
- Suggested Activity:
GCSE Biology required practical activity: Reaction Time
Equipment Required:
Metre rules
Stop-clocks
- Suggested Activity:
- Required Practical - Reaction Time (AT skills 1,3,4)
- Lesson 04 - How is the endocrine system different to the nervous system? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The endocrine system is composed of glands which secrete chemicals called hormones directly into the bloodstream.
- Students should be able to identify the position of the following on a diagram of the human body:
Pituitary gland, Pancreas, Thyroid, Adrenal Gland, Ovary and Testes.- Suggested Activity:
Label a diagram of the organs in the endocrine system.
Equipment Required:
Human body diagram
- Suggested Activity:
- The blood carries the hormone to a target organ, where it produces an effect.
- Compared to the nervous system the effects are slower, but act for longer.
- The pituitary gland in the brain is a "master gland" which secretes several hormones into the blood in response to body conditions.
- These hormones in turn act on other glands to stimulate other hormones to be released to bring about effects.
- Students should be able to describe the principles of hormonal coordination and control by the human endocrine system.
- Students should be able to explain the roles of thyroxine and adrenaline in the body (HT only)
- Adrenaline is produced by the adrenal glands in times of fear or stress. It increases the heart rate and boosts the delivery of oxygen and glucose to the brain and muscles, preparing the body for "flight or fight". (HT only)
- Thyroxine from the thyroid gland stimulates the basal metabolic rate. It plays an important role in growth and development. (HT only)
- Thyroxine levels are controlled by negative feedback. Interpret and explain simple diagrams of negative feedback control. (HT only)
- The endocrine system is composed of glands which secrete chemicals called hormones directly into the bloodstream.
- Lesson 05 - How is the optimum blood glucose level maintained? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Blood glucose concentration is monitored and controlled by the pancreas
- Suggested Activity:
Draw life size model of a person to show control of blood glucose
Equipment Required:
Plain wall paper
marker pens
- Suggested Activity:
- If the blood glucose concentration is too high, the pancreas produces the hormone insulin that causes glucose to move from the blood into the cells.
- In the liver and muscle cells excess glucose is converted to glycogen for storage.
- When insulin is released it causes the liver to convert more glucose into glycogen.
- Type 1 diabetes is a disorder in which the pancreas fails to produce sufficient insulin. It is characterised by uncontrolled high blood glucose levels and is normally treated with insulin injections.
- In Type 2 diabetes the body cells no longer respond to insulin produced by the pancreas. A carbohydrate controlled diet and an exercise regime are common treatments.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
How doctors used to diagnose diabetes by tasting fake urine.
Confirm results with Benedict’s solution.
Evaluate the methods.Equipment Required:
Weak urine samples with and without glucose
Benedict’s solution
kettles
testtubes
pipett
10ml cylinders
- Suggested Activity:
- Obesity is a risk factor for Type 2 diabetes.
- Students should be able to compare Type 1 and Type 2 diabetes and explain how they can be treated.
- Suggested Activity:
GF/EW: How has treatment of diabetes developed over time? include use of human insulin produced by bacteria, current research into pancreas cell transplants and stem cell research.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to extract information and interpret data from graphs that show the effect of insulin in blood glucose levels in both people with diabetes and people without diabetes.
- (HT only) If the blood glucose concentration is too low, the pancreas produces the hormone glucagon that causes glycogen to be converted into glucose and released into the blood.
- (HT only) Glucagon interacts with insulin in a negative feedback cycle to control blood glucose (sugar) levels in the body.
- Blood glucose concentration is monitored and controlled by the pancreas
- Lesson 06 - How is the water balance maintained in the body? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain the effect on cells of osmotic changes in body fluids
- (HT only) Students should be able to describe the effect of ADH on the permeability of the kidney tubules.
- Water leaves the body via the lungs during exhalation.
- (HT only) The water level in the body is controlled by the hormone ADH which acts on the kidney tubules.
- Water, ions and urea are lost from the skin in sweat.
- (HT only) ADH is released by the pituitary gland when the blood is too concentrated and it causes more water to be reabsorbed back into the blood from the kidney tubules. This is controlled by negative feedback.
- Suggested Activity:
Use the ABPI activities (see resources) to explain the negative feedback mechanism involved in control of water concentration in the blood.
https://www.abpischools.org.uk/topic/homeostasis-kidneys/
- Suggested Activity:
- There is no control over water, ion or urea loss by the lungs or skin.
- People who suffer from kidney failure may be treated by organ transplant or by using kidney dialysis. Students should know the basic principles of dialysis.
- Suggested Activity:
GF/EW: Discuss a moral dilemma – research cost of dialysis and transplants. Discuss considerations in terms of cost as to how kidney patients should be treated – lifetime dialysis, transplant, shortage of kidneys, buying kidneys from healthy people and prioritising lists for surgery. Produce arguments for and against the options.
- Suggested Activity:
- Excess water, ions and urea are removed via the kidneys in the urine.
- If body cells lose or gain too much water by osmosis they do not function efficiently
- (HT only) The digestion of proteins from the diet results in excess amino acids which need to be excreted safely. In the liver these amino acids are deaminated to form ammonia. Ammonia is toxic and so it is immediately converted to urea for safe excretion.
- Students should be able to describe the function of kidneys in maintaining the water balance of the body.
- The kidneys produce urine by filtration of the blood and selective reabsorption of useful substances such as glucose, some ions and water.
- Knowledge of other parts of the urinary system, the structure of the kidney and the structure of a nephron is not required.
- Students should be able to translate tables and bar charts of glucose, ions and urea before and after filtration.
- Students should be able to explain the effect on cells of osmotic changes in body fluids
- Lesson 07 - How does the brain control human response? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The brain controls complex behaviour. It is made of billions of interconnected neurones and has different regions that carry out different functions.
- Students should be able to identify the cerebral cortex, cerebellum and medulla on a diagram of the brain, and describe their functions
- (HT only) Students should be able to explain some of the difficulties of investigating brain function and treating brain damage and disease.
- (HT only) Neuroscientists have been able to map the regions of the brain to particular functions by studying patients with brain damage, electrically stimulating different parts of the brain and using MRI scanning techniques.
- (HT only) The complexity and delicacy of the brain makes investigating and treating brain disorders very difficult.
- The brain controls complex behaviour. It is made of billions of interconnected neurones and has different regions that carry out different functions.
- Lesson 08 - How does the eye work? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to relate the structures of the eye to their functions. This includes accommodation to focus on near or distant objects.
- Another adaptation is to dim light - The eye is a sense organ containing receptors sensitive to light intensity and colour.
- Students should be able to identify the following structures on a diagram of the eye and explain how their structure is related to their function: ? retina
? optic nerve
? sclera
? cornea
? iris
? ciliary muscles
? suspensory ligaments. - Accommodation is the process of changing the shape of the lens to focus on near or distant objects.
- To focus on a near object: ???? the ciliary muscles contract ?? the suspensory ligaments loosen ???? the lens is then thicker and refracts light rays strongly. To focus on a distant object:
? the ciliary muscles relax
? the suspensory ligaments are pulled tight
? the lens is then pulled thin and only slightly refracts light rays. - Two common defects of the eyes are myopia (short sightedness) and hyperopia (long sightedness) in which rays of light do not focus on the retina. ???
- Generally these defects are treated with spectacle lenses which refract the light rays so that they do focus on the retina.
- New technologies now include hard and soft contact lenses, laser surgery to change the shape of the cornea and a replacement lens in the eye.
- Students should be able to interpret ray diagrams, showing these two common defects of the eye and demonstrate how spectacle lenses correct them.
- Students should be able to relate the structures of the eye to their functions. This includes accommodation to focus on near or distant objects.
- Lesson 09 - How is body temperature controlled? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Body temperature is monitored and controlled by the thermoregulatory centre in the brain. The thermoregulatory centre contains receptors sensitive to the temperature of the blood.
- The skin contains receptors which detect changes in temperature and send impulses to the brain.
- If the body temperature is too high, blood vessels dilate (vasodilation) and sweat is produced from the sweat glands.
- Both these mechanisms cause a transfer of energy from the skin to the environment.
- If the body temperature is too low, blood vessels constrict (vasoconstriction), sweating stops and skeletal muscles contract (shiver).
- (HT only) Students should be able to explain how these mechanisms lower or raise body temperature in a given context.
- Suggested Activity:
Group Practical:
Investigate the effect of sweating on the rate of cooling using a model - tubes of hot water wrapped in wet and dry paper towels.
Plot cooling curves and make conclusions.Equipment Required:
Boiling tubes
Paper towels
Elastic bands
Thermometers
Pipettes
Timers,
kettles
- Suggested Activity:
- Body temperature is monitored and controlled by the thermoregulatory centre in the brain. The thermoregulatory centre contains receptors sensitive to the temperature of the blood.
- Lesson 01 - How does the nervous system work? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- B2.2
- Lesson 01 - (Setting-up) Required Practical: How do light and gravity affect plant growth? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Separates only) Required Practical 8 - Effect of Light / Gravity on Seeds (Length and Biological Drawings) (AT skills 1,3,4,7)
- Suggested Activity:
Students plan the investigation, taking care to identify variables and describe a method.
Students set up cress seeds.
Investigating light:
Some in a dark cupboard, some on window sill, some in cardboard box with a hole cut in one side.
Investigating gravity:
some flat on the windowsill, some taped sideways on the wall of the windowsill (make cress seeds are secure).Equipment Required:
Required practical 8 - Effect of light/gravity on plant growth.
Cress seeds,
small pots,
cotton wool, pipettes,
small cardboard boxes (old pinhole cameras?)
- Suggested Activity:
- (Separates only) Required Practical 8 - Effect of Light / Gravity on Seeds (Length and Biological Drawings) (AT skills 1,3,4,7)
- Lesson 02 - How are hormones involved in reproduction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe the roles of hormones in human reproduction, including the menstrual cycle.
- During puberty reproductive hormones cause secondary sex characteristics to develop.
- Suggested Activity:
Label a diagram for male and female for where the reproductive hormones are produced.
HT Create a timeline.
GF : How are hormones linked to mental illness?
- Suggested Activity:
- Oestrogen is the main female reproductive hormone produced in the ovary.
- Suggested Activity:
Circus task for the different hormones (info into a table).
- Suggested Activity:
- At puberty eggs begin to mature and one is released approximately every 28 days. This is called ovulation
- Testosterone is the main male reproductive hormone produced by the testes and it stimulates sperm production.
- Several hormones are involved in the menstrual cycle of a woman.
- Follicle stimulating hormone (FSH) causes maturation of an egg in the ovary.
- Luteinising hormone (LH) stimulates the release of the egg.
- Oestrogen and progesterone are involved in maintaining the uterus lining
- (HT only) Students should be able to explain the interactions of FSH, oestrogen, LH and progesterone, in the control of the menstrual cycle
- (HT only) Students should be able to extract and interpret data from graphs showing hormone levels during the menstrual cycle.
- Students should be able to describe the roles of hormones in human reproduction, including the menstrual cycle.
- Lesson 03 - What are the different forms of contraception? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to evaluate the different hormonal and non-
hormonal methods of contraception.- Suggested Activity:
Show students the methods of contraception. Separate students into groups, get them to learn about a specific method and then rejoin to feedback. (Jigsaw).
Equipment Required:
Condom
Femidom
Contraceptive pills
Coil
Implant
- Suggested Activity:
- Fertility can be controlled by a variety of hormonal and non-hormonal methods of contraception.
- These include:
? oral contraceptives that contain hormones to inhibit FSH production so that no eggs mature
? injection, implant or skin patch of slow release progesterone to inhibit the maturation and release of eggs for a number of months or years
? barrier methods such as condoms and diaphragms which prevent the
sperm reaching an egg
? intrauterine devices which prevent the implantation of an embryo or
release a hormone
? spermicidal agents which kill or disable sperm
? abstaining from intercourse when an egg may be in the oviduct
? surgical methods of male and female sterilisation. Explain everyday and technological applications of science; evaluate associated personal, social, economic and environmental implications; and make
decisions based on the evaluation of evidence and arguments. - (HT) Explain the use of hormones in modern
reproductive technologies to treat infertility - (HT) Explain how developments of
microscopy techniques have enabled IVF treatments to develop. - This includes giving FSH and LH in a ?fertility drug? to a woman. She may then become pregnant in the normal way. (HT only)
- Understand social and ethical issues associated with IVF treatments (HT only)
- Suggested Activity:
HT : Information on fertility treatments.
Debate on their use - octomum.
- Suggested Activity:
- Although fertility treatment gives a woman the chance to have a baby of her own:
? it is very emotionally and physically stressful
? the success rates are not high
? it can lead to multiple births which are a risk to both the babies and the mother. (HT only) - Evaluate from the perspective of patients and doctors the methods of treating infertility.
(HT only)
- Students should be able to evaluate the different hormonal and non-
- Lesson 04 - How do plants grow in certain directions? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Separates only) Plants produce hormones to coordinate and control growth and responses to light (phototropism) and gravity (gravitropism or geotropism).
- Suggested Activity:
Introduce the types of tropism and get students to figure out the definition for each.
Diagram drawing for the affect of auxins.
- Suggested Activity:
- (Separates only) Unequal distributions of auxin cause unequal growth rates in plant roots and shoots. (Required Practical)
- (Separates only) (HT only) Gibberellins are important in initiating seed germination.
- (Separates only) (HT only) Ethene controls cell division and ripening of fruits.
- (Separates only) (HT only) The mechanisms of how gibberellins and ethene work are not required.
- (Separates only) Students should be able to describe the effects of some plant hormones and the different ways people use them to control plant growth.
- Suggested Activity:
EW : Evaluate the use of rooting powders and weed killers in horticulture and agriculture.
- Suggested Activity:
- (Separates only) Plant growth hormones are used in agriculture and horticulture
- (Separates only) Understand how the everyday use of hormones as weed killers has an effect on biodiversity.
- (Separates only) Auxins are used:
? as weed killers
? as rooting powders
? for promoting growth in tissue culture. - (Separates only) Ethene is used in the food industry to control ripening of fruit during storage and transport.
- (Separates only) Gibberellins can be used to:
? end seed dormancy
? promote flowering
? increase fruit size.
- (Separates only) Plants produce hormones to coordinate and control growth and responses to light (phototropism) and gravity (gravitropism or geotropism).
- Lesson 05 - Required Practical: How do light and gravity affect plant growth? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Separates only) Required Practical 8 - Affect of Light / Gravity on Seeds (Length and Biological Drawings) (AT skills 1,3,4,7)
- Suggested Activity:
Draw graphs of results or from fake data looking at length over time in days. One from each area (full light, partial light, no light). All on the same scatter graph.
Writing conclusions and evaluations. The evaluations should be based on validity and precision.Equipment Required:
Required Practical 8 - Affect of Light / Gravity on Seeds (Length and Biological Drawings)
Pre-grown cress plants from a variety of conditions.
Sharp pencils
Rulers
Graph paper
- Suggested Activity:
- (Separates only) Required Practical 8 - Affect of Light / Gravity on Seeds (Length and Biological Drawings) (AT skills 1,3,4,7)
- Lesson 01 - (Setting-up) Required Practical: How do light and gravity affect plant growth? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- B2.3
- Lesson 01 - What is a genome? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe the structure of DNA and define genome.
- The genetic material in the nucleus of a cell is composed of a chemical called DNA.
- DNA is a polymer made up of two strands forming a double helix.
- The DNA is contained in structures called chromosomes.
- A gene is a small section of DNA on a chromosome. Each gene codes for a particular sequence of amino acids, to make a specific protein.
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hywRdDVR76A
Sort the order into: Nucleotide, Gene, Chromosome, Genome.
Explain why the order of the bases is important.
Higher:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zwibgNGe4aY
(first 3 minutes)
Describe how a gene leads to a protein.
Explain why a base change could change the properties of a protein.
- Suggested Activity:
- The genome of an organism is the entire genetic material of that organism.
- Suggested Activity:
Extracting DNA from fruit
https://www.nuffieldfoundation.org/practical-biology/extracting-dna-living-thingsEquipment Required:
smashed up fruit
extracting solution pre made
ice cold ethanol
steralised boiling tubes
pipettes
- Suggested Activity:
- The whole human genome has now been studied and this will have great importance for medicine in the future.
- Students should be able to discuss the importance of understanding the human genome.
- Each nucleotide consists of a common sugar and phosphate group with one of four different bases attached to the sugar
- DNA contains four bases, A, C, G and T.
- This is limited to the:
- search for genes linked to different types of disease
- understanding and treatment of inherited disorders
- use in tracing human migration patterns from the past.- Suggested Activity:
EW: Evaluate the research into the human genome against the cost the of the project and the on-going research into what the genes do.
https://www.genome.gov/27565109/the-cost-of-sequencing-a-human-genome/
GF: Was cooperation or competition more important in achieving the human genome project? https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AhsIF-cmoQQ
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the structure of DNA and define genome.
- Lesson 02 - What does the genetic code do? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe DNA as a polymer made from four different nucleotides.
- A sequence of three bases is the code for a particular amino acid.
- The long strands of DNA consist of alternating sugar and phosphate sections. Attached to each sugar is one of the four bases
- The DNA polymer is made up of repeating nucleotide units. Interpret a diagram of DNA structure but will not be required to reproduce it.
- (HT only) Students should be able to recall a simple description of protein synthesis
- explain simply how the structure of DNA affects the protein made
- describe how genetic variants may influence phenotype: a) in coding DNA by altering the activity of a protein: and b) in non-coding DNA by altering how genes are expressed
- The order of bases controls the order in which amino acids are assembled to produce a particular protein.
- Suggested Activity:
Give possible codons for the 24 amino acids. Produce base sequence (in multiples of 3) (ending in stop codon).
Extension - propose changes to base sequence, some that have no effect on amino acid sequence, so that would cause a point mutation and the effects of an insertion or deletion. Get them to comment on the significance of each mutation.
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) In the complementary strands a C is always linked to a G on the opposite strand and a T to an A.
- (HT only) Students are not expected to know or understand the structure of mRNA, tRNA, or the detailed structure of amino acids or proteins.
- (HT only) Students should be able to explain how a change in DNA structure may result in a change in the protein synthesised by a gene
- (HT only) Proteins are synthesised on ribosomes, according to a template.
- (HT only) Carrier molecules bring specific amino acids to add to the growing protein chain in the correct order
- (HT only) When the protein chain is complete it folds up to form a unique shape. This unique shape enables the proteins to do their job as enzymes, hormones or forming structures in the body such as collagen.
- Suggested Activity:
Separates Only: Storyboard / flow chart / stop-frame animation of the process of protein synthesis.
GF: Explain how a change in base sequence can lead to a change in properties of a protein, linked to the shape of the protein.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe DNA as a polymer made from four different nucleotides.
- Lesson 03 - How does meiosis produce gametes? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain how meiosis halves the number of
chromosomes in gametes and fertilisation restores the full number of chromosomes. - Cells in reproductive organs divide by meiosis to form gametes.
- When a cell divides to form gametes:
? copies of the genetic information are made
? the cell divides twice to form four gametes, each with a single set of
chromosomes
? all gametes are genetically different from each other. - Knowledge of the stages of meiosis is not required
- Gametes join at fertilisation to restore the normal number of
chromosomes. The new cell divides by mitosis. The number of cells
increases. As the embryo develops cells differentiate.
- Suggested Activity:
Pipe cleaner chromosomes (possibly take photo of each stage as they divide) and follow from duplicating the pipe cleaner chromosomes and following the path of division to end of with 4 haploid cells.
Double Bubble mitosis division with meiosis division (similar - replicate and line up along middle, differences - how they line up along the middle and the number of divisions).
GF: Explain how meiosis creates variation in the way it divides and why this is important.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how meiosis halves the number of
- Lesson 04 - How are sexual and asexual reproduction different? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Meiosis leads to non-identical cells being formed
- Mitosis leads to identical cells being formed.
- Sexual reproduction involves the joining (fusion) of male and female gametes:
? sperm and egg cells in animals
? pollen and egg cells in flowering plants.
- In sexual reproduction there is mixing of genetic information which leads to variety in the offspring.
- The formation of gametes involves meiosis.
- Asexual reproduction involves only one parent and no fusion of gametes.
- There is no mixing of genetic information. This leads to genetically identical offspring (clones). Only mitosis is involved.
- Suggested Activity:
Table comparing the products of meiosis to mitosis. (Number of divisions, number of cells formed, haploid or diploid, unique or identical, purpose of division)
Table comparing sexual and asexual reproduction. (number of parents, fusion of gametes, clone or unique, faster or slower, creates variation or not)
EW (Not for separates as they have other content to cover and can complete this activity in a future lesson) Describe the lifecycle of the aphid and describe how it carries out both asexual and sexual reproduction.
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) Mutations occur continuously. Most do not alter the protein, or only alter it slightly so that its appearance or function is not changed.
- (HT only) A few mutations code for an altered protein with a different shape. An enzyme may no longer fit the substrate binding site or a structural protein may lose its strength.
- (HT only) Modelling insertions and deletions in chromosomes to illustrate mutations
- (HT only) A few mutations code for an altered protein with a different shape. An enzyme may no longer fit the substrate binding site or a structural protein may lose its strength.
- (HT only) Not all parts of DNA code for proteins. Non-coding parts of DNA can switch genes on and off, so variations in these areas of DNA may affect how genes are expressed.
- Suggested Activity:
Evaluate the effects of mutations to the genetic code.
Bar headed goose and haemoglobin with higher affinity for oxygen allows it to fly over mountain range on migration rather than around like other geese species.
Sickle Cell Anaemia - negative effects of mutation and also positive effect for malaria resistance.
Neutral mutations - eye colour.
- Suggested Activity:
- Meiosis leads to non-identical cells being formed
- Lesson 05 - Why do some species carry out asexual and sexual reproduction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Examples of organisms reproducing by both methods includes: ? Malarial parasites reproduce asexually in the human host, but sexually in
the mosquito.
? Many fungi reproduce asexually by spores but also reproduce sexually to give variation.
? Many plants produce seeds sexually, but also reproduce asexually by runners such as strawberry plants, or bulb division such as daffodils.
Historical developments of our understanding of the causes and prevention of malaria. (WS) - Knowledge of reproduction in organisms is restricted to those mentioned
- Students are expected to be able to explain the advantages and
disadvantages of asexual and sexual reproduction for any organism if given appropriate information.
- Suggested Activity:
Research task: Malarial parasite (plasmodium), fungi such mushrooms and plants - strawberry plants and daffodils.
Describe how these species reproduce both sexually and asexually.
- Suggested Activity:
- Advantages of sexual reproduction:
? produces variation in the offspring
? if the environment changes variation gives a survival advantage by natural selection
? natural selection can be speeded up by humans in selective breeding to increase food production.
- Advantages of asexual reproduction:
? only one parent needed
? more time and energy efficient as do not need to find a mate
? faster than sexual reproduction
? many identical offspring can be produced when conditions are favourable.
- Suggested Activity:
Separates only - Think Pair Share - suggestions of the advantages and disadvantages of both reproductive strategies. Question about which strategies suit animals depending on how long they live/how long the offspring are cared for.
- Suggested Activity:
- Some organisms reproduce by both methods depending on the
circumstances.
- Suggested Activity:
Separates only - EW Compare the use of asexual and sexual reproduction as strategies for the aphid (asexual of successful individuals in the summer when resources are plentiful, sexual for the next year to introduce variation for what may be different conditions next year)
GF: Suggest how this life cycle strategy could have evolved.
- Suggested Activity:
- Examples of organisms reproducing by both methods includes: ? Malarial parasites reproduce asexually in the human host, but sexually in
- Lesson 06 - How can the chance of a characteristic being passed on be predicted? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain the term chromosome
- Students should be able to explain the term gene
- Students should be able to explain the term allele
- Students should be able to explain the term dominant
- Students should be able to explain the term recessive
- Students should be able to explain the term homozygous
- Students should be able to explain the term hetrozygous
- Students should be able to explain the term genotype
- Students should be able to explain the term phenotype
- Some characteristics are controlled by a single gene, such as: fur colour in mice; and red-green colour blindness in humans. Each gene may have different forms called alleles.
- The alleles present, or genotype, operate at a molecular level to develop characteristics that can be expressed as a phenotype.
- A dominant allele is always expressed, even if only one copy is present.
- A recessive allele is only expressed if two copies are present (therefore no dominant allele present).
- If the two alleles present are the same the organism is homozygous for that trait, but if the alleles are different they are heterozygous.
- Most characteristics are a result of multiple genes interacting, rather than a single gene.
- Students should be able to understand the concept of probability in predicting the results of a single gene cross, but recall that most phenotype features are the result of multiple genes rather than single gene inheritance
- Students should be able to use direct proportion and simple ratios to express the outcome of a genetic cross.
- Students should be able to complete a Punnett square diagram and extract and interpret information from genetic crosses and family trees.
- (HT only) Students should be able to construct a genetic cross by Punnett square diagram and use it to make predictions using the theory of probability
- Suggested Activity:
Complete Punnett squares. Identify incorrect Punnett squares, calculate the chances and ratios from a Punnett square.
(decent worksheet in B2.3 folder)
HT - give questions about crosses and get pupils to construct Punnett or work backwards to find phenotypes of parents.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain the term chromosome
- Lesson 07 - How are some disorders inherited? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Some disorders are inherited. These disorders are caused by the
inheritance of certain alleles. - Polydactyly (having extra fingers or toes) is caused by a dominant allele.
- Cystic fibrosis (a respitory disease) is caused by a recessive allele, so both parents must carry the gene in order for the offspring to have the disease.
- Suggested Activity:
Compare (possibly in a table) the mutation, it's effects, whether it is dominant or recessive and the combinations from the parents by which it would be inherited.
Use pedigree charts to work out family history of inherited conditions. Maybe Haemophilia and the Royal family as an example.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should make informed judgements about the economic, social and ethical issues concerning embryo screening, given appropriate information. Appreciate that embryo screening and gene therapy may alleviate suffering but consider the ethical issues which arise.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Evaluate whether embryo screening is the 'right thing' to do.
- Suggested Activity:
- Ordinary human body cells contain 23 pairs of chromosomes.
- 22 pairs control characteristics only, but one of the pairs carries the genes that determine sex.
- ? In females the sex chromosomes are the same (XX).
? In males the chromosomes are different (XY). - Students should be able to carry out a genetic cross to show sex inheritance.
- Students should understand and use direct proportion and simple ratios in genetic crosses.
- Suggested Activity:
Complete Punnett squares to demonstrate there is a 50:50 chance of having a girl or a boy.
- Suggested Activity:
- Some disorders are inherited. These disorders are caused by the
- Lesson 01 - What is a genome? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- B2.4
- Lesson 01 - How are living things classified? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Traditionally living things have been classified into groups depending on their structure and characteristics in a system developed by Carl Linnaeus
- Suggested Activity:
Exhibition of organisms to classify, use post-it notes to explain groupings – observe and discuss choices made by other groups.
Equipment Required:
classification cards (pictures of animals)
- Suggested Activity:
- Linnaeus classified living things into kingdom, phylum, class, order, family, genus and species.
- Suggested Activity:
Compare the classification of related and unrelated organisms using the Linnaeus system.
- Suggested Activity:
- Organisms are named by the binomial system of genus and species.
- Suggested Activity:
Look at the variety of names given to the same plant and discuss why the binomial system is more useful.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to use information given to show understanding of the Linnaean system.
- Students should be able to describe the impact of developments in biology on classification systems.
- As evidence of internal structures became more developed due to improvements in microscopes, and the understanding of biochemical processes progressed, new models of classification were proposed. (WS) Understand how scientific methods and theories develop over time.
- Due to evidence available from chemical analysis there is now a ?three- domain system? developed by Carl Woese. In this system organisms are divided into:
? archaea (primitive bacteria usually living in extreme environments)
? bacteria (true bacteria)
? eukaryota (which includes protists, fungi, plants and animals).
- Suggested Activity:
Watch BBC video clip about chemical analysis and its use in classifying organisms (see resources).
http://www.bbc.co.uk/education/clips/zhb3cdm
- Suggested Activity:
- Evolutionary trees are a method used by scientists to show how they believe organisms are related. They use current classification data for living organisms and fossil data for extinct organisms.
- Students should be able to interpret evolutionary trees (WS)
- Traditionally living things have been classified into groups depending on their structure and characteristics in a system developed by Carl Linnaeus
- Lesson 02 - How is variation in organisms created? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe simply how the genome and its interaction with the environment influence the development of the phenotype of an organism
- Suggested Activity:
Discuss why organisms of the same species show variation. Use the terms: genetic and environmental variation, continuous and discontinuous variation.
- Suggested Activity:
- Differences in the characteristics of individuals in a population is called variation and may be due to differences in:
- the genes they have inherited (genetic causes)
- the conditions in which they have developed (environmental causes)
- a combination of genes and the environment- Suggested Activity:
List different characteristics in which there is variation.
Include in the table whether each characteristic is due to genetic or environmental causes, or both.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to state that there is usually extensive genetic variation within a population of a species
- A recessive allele is only expressed if two copies are present (therefore no dominant allele present).
- (Biology only) Mutations occur continuously. Very rarely a mutation will lead to a new phenotype. If the new phenotype is suited to an environmental change it can lead to a relatively rapid change in the species. There are links with this content to
Speciation (biology only). - Students should be able to describe evolution as a change in the
inherited characteristics of a population over time through a process of natural selection which may result in the formation of a new species.
- The theory of evolution by natural selection states that all species of living things have evolved from simple life forms that first developed
more than three billion years ago. - Students should be able to explain how evolution occurs through natural selection of variants that give rise to phenotypes best suited to their environment. Use the theory of evolution by natural
selection in an explanation.
- If two populations of one species become so different in phenotype
that they can no longer interbreed to produce fertile offspring they have formed two new species.
- Students should be able to describe simply how the genome and its interaction with the environment influence the development of the phenotype of an organism
- Lesson 03 - Is genetic engineering a good thing? What are the impacts of selective breeding? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain the impact of selective breeding of food plants and domesticated animals.
- Selective breeding (artificial selection) is the process by which humans breed plants and animals for particular genetic characteristics. Humans have been doing this for thousands of years since they first bred food crops from wild plants and domesticated animals.
- Suggested Activity:
Images of different dogs. Students ‘breed’ and name a new dog from selecting any 2 – draw a picture of their new breed.
- Suggested Activity:
- Selective breeding involves choosing parents with the desired characteristic from a mixed population. They are bred together. From the offspring those with the desired characteristic are bred together. This continues over many generations until all the offspring show the desired characteristic.
- Suggested Activity:
Draw a flow diagram to explain the steps involved in selective breeding.
- Suggested Activity:
- The characteristic can be chosen for usefulness or appearance:
? Disease resistance in food crops.
? Animals which produce more meat or milk.
? Domestic dogs with a gentle nature.
? Large or unusual flowers.
- Suggested Activity:
Give examples of characteristics that are selectively bred in plants and animals and say why they are there - Table?
- Suggested Activity:
- Selective breeding can lead to ?inbreeding? where some breeds are particularly prone to disease or inherited defects.
- Suggested Activity:
Discuss the advantages and risks of selective breeding in plants and animals.
Consider the social, economic and ethical implications of selective breeding.
Debate: should people be allowed to breed dogs?
- Suggested Activity:
- Evidence for Darwin's theory is now available as it has been shown
that characteristics are passed on to offspring in genes. There is further evidence in the fossil record and the knowledge of how resistance to antibiotics evolves in bacteria.
- Students should be able to explain the impact of selective breeding of food plants and domesticated animals.
- Lesson 04 - How did a monk help us understand genetics? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe the development of our understanding of genetics including the work of Mendel
- Students should be able to understand why the importance of Mendel's discovery was not recognised until after his death.
- In the mid-19th century Oregor Mendel carried out breeding experiments on plants. One of his observations was that the inheritance of each characteristic is determined by ?units? that are passed on to descendants unchanged.
- Suggested Activity:
Watch a video clip of Mendel’s experiments (see resources).
Video clip: BBC Bitesize –http://www.bbc.co.uk/education/clips/zwx4wmn
Use a model to explain genetic inheritance in pea plants and using unfamiliar information.
- Suggested Activity:
- In the late 19th century behaviour of chromosomes during cell division was observed
- Suggested Activity:
Draw and label genetic diagrams to explain Mendel’s experiments.
- Suggested Activity:
- Our current understanding of genetics has developed over time.
- In the early 20th century it was observed that chromosomes and Mendel?s ?units? behaved in similar ways. This led to the idea that the ?units?, now called genes, were located on chromosomes. There are links with this content to Oenetic inheritance.
- In the mid-20th century the structure of DNA was determined and the mechanism of gene function worked out. There are links with this content to Oenetic inheritance.
- Suggested Activity:
Research the main developments in the understanding of inheritance and draw a timeline.
- Suggested Activity:
- This scientific work by many scientists led to the gene theory being developed. There are links with this content to Oenetic inheritance.
- Students should be able to describe the development of our understanding of genetics including the work of Mendel
- Lesson 05 - Is genetic engineering a good thing? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe genetic engineering as a process which involves modifying the genome of an organism by introducing a gene from another organism to give a desired characteristic
- An example of genetic engineering is plant crops have been genetically engineered to be resistant to diseases or to produce bigger better fruits.
- Bacterial cells have been genetically engineered to produce useful
substances such as human insulin to treat diabetes. There are links
with this content to role of biotechnology. (biology only).
- Students should be able to explain the potential benefits and risks of genetic engineering in agriculture and in medicine and that some people have objections
- In genetic engineering, genes from the chromosomes of humans and other organisms can be ?cut out? and transferred to cells of other organisms.
- Suggested Activity:
Brainstorm what the terms genetic engineering, genetic modification and gene therapy mean.
List examples of genetic engineering.
- Suggested Activity:
- Crops that have had their genes modified in this way are called genetically modified (GM) crops.
- GM crops include ones that are resistant to insect attack or to herbicides.
- GM crops generally show increased yields.
- Concerns about GM crops include the effect on populations of wild flowers and insects. Some people feel the effects of eating GM crops on human health have not been fully explored.
- Suggested Activity:
Research advantages and disadvantages of GM crops. What characteristics may be modified? Produce a web page or a table of benefits versus concerns.
- Suggested Activity:
- Modern medical research is exploring the possibility of genetic modification to overcome some inherited disorders
- (HT only) Students should be able to describe the main steps in the
process of genetic engineering.
- (HT only) In genetic engineering:
- enzymes are used to isolate the required gene; this gene is inserted into a vector, usually a bacterial plasmid or a virus
- the vector is used to insert the gene into the required cells
- genes are transferred to the cells of animals, plants or
microorganisms at an early stage in their development so that they
develop with desired characteristics. Interpret information about genetic engineering techniques and to make informed judgements about issues concerning cloning and genetic engineering, including OM crops.- Suggested Activity:
Use a model to describe genetic engineering techniques.
EW : How is human insulin is produced by bacteria and what advantages are there of using this over porcine insulin.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe genetic engineering as a process which involves modifying the genome of an organism by introducing a gene from another organism to give a desired characteristic
- Lesson 06 - What are the ways, benefits and risks of cloning? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Tissue culture: using small groups of cells from part of a plant to grow
identical new plants. This is important for preserving rare plant species or commercially in nurseries. - Cuttings: an older, but simple, method used by gardeners to produce many identical new plants from a parent plant.
- Suggested Activity:
Discuss plant cloning techniques and why they are used.
Take cuttings of different plants.
Produce cauliflower clones – follow guidance from Science and Plants for Schools (SAPS). Observe growth in later lesson.
Evaluate the use of cuttings and tissue culture to clone plants.
http://www.saps.org.uk/secondary/teaching-resources/706-cauliflower-cloning-tissue-culture-and-micropropagationEquipment Required:
Cuttings:
scissors
plants, eg geraniums or spider plants
•pots &,compost
- Suggested Activity:
- Embryo transplants: splitting apart cells from a developing animal
embryo before they become specialised, then transplanting the identical embryos into host mothers.
- Suggested Activity:
Produce and evaluate a model to describe embryo transplants.
- Suggested Activity:
- Explain the potential benefits and risks of cloning in agriculture and in medicine and that some people have ethical objections.
- Suggested Activity:
GF : Evaluate the effect that human cloning could have on the social, economic and cultural environment of the world if ti were to be legalised.
- Suggested Activity:
- The process of adult cell cloning:
? The nucleus is removed from an unfertilised egg cell.
? The nucleus from an adult body cell, such as a skin cell, is inserted into the egg cell.
? An electric shock stimulates the egg cell to divide to form an embryo.
? These embryo cells contain the same genetic information as the adult
skin cell.
? When the embryo has developed into a ball of cells, it is inserted into
the womb of an adult female to continue its development.- Suggested Activity:
Use a model to describe adult cell cloning.
- Suggested Activity:
- Tissue culture: using small groups of cells from part of a plant to grow
- Lesson 07 - Who is Charles Darwin and what did he do for science? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Charles Darwin, as a result of observations on a round the world
expedition, backed by years of experimentation and discussion and linked to developing knowledge of geology and fossils, proposed the theory of evolution by natural selection.- Suggested Activity:
Look at exhibition to show the wide variety of organisms that live, or have lived, on Earth.
Discuss how they were all formed.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should appreciate that the theory of evolution by natural
selection developed over time and from information gathered by many scientists.
- Theory of evolution by natural selection invovles: ? Individual organisms within a particular species show a wide range of
variation for a characteristic.
? Individuals with characteristics most suited to the environment are more likely to survive to breed successfully.
? The characteristics that have enabled these individuals to survive are
then passed on to the next generation.
- Suggested Activity:
Draw a flow diagram to explain natural selection.
- Suggested Activity:
- Darwin published his ideas in On the Origin of Species (1859). There was much controversy surrounding these revolutionary new ideas.
- The theory of evolution by natural selection was only gradually accepted because:
? the theory challenged the idea that Ood made all the animals and
plants that live on Earth
? there was insufficient evidence at the time the theory was published
to convince many scientists
? the mechanism of inheritance and variation was not known until
50 years after the theory was published.
- Charles Darwin, as a result of observations on a round the world
- Lesson 08 - How do new species form? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Other theories, including that of Jean-Baptiste Lamarck, are based
mainly on the idea that changes that occur in an organism during its
lifetime can be inherited. We now know that in the vast majority of cases this type of inheritance cannot occur. A study of creationism is not required.
- Suggested Activity:
Research and produce report on evolutionary theories, eg Darwin, Wallace and Lamarck.
Compare the different theories and suggest reasons for these differences – turn into a ‘Question Time’ style role play.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the work of Darwin and Wallace in the development of the theory of evolution by natural selection
- Students should be able to explain the impact of these ideas on biology
- Alfred Russel Wallace independently proposed the theory of evolution by natural selection. He published joint writings with Darwin in 1858 which prompted Darwin to publish On the Origin of Species (1859) the following year.
- Suggested Activity:
Research the work of Alfred Russel Wallace (see resources).
Produce a flow diagram or cut-out to illustrate how new species arise
- Suggested Activity:
- Wallace worked worldwide gathering evidence for evolutionary theory. He is best known for his work on warning colouration in animals and his theory of speciation.
- Alfred Wallace did much pioneering work on speciation but more evidence over time has led to our current understanding of the theory of speciation
- Suggested Activity:
Discuss organisms that are only found in or are endemic to eg Australia, Madagascar and ask why this is. Support with projected images or video clips.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the steps which give rise to new species. The theory of speciation has developed over time
- Other theories, including that of Jean-Baptiste Lamarck, are based
- Lesson 09 - Where do fossils come from? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe the evidence for evolution including fossils and antibiotic resistance in bacteria.
- Suggested Activity:
Discuss the evidence we have to support Darwin’s theory and present in a suitable format.
- Suggested Activity:
- The theory of evolution by natural selection is now widely accepted. Data is now available to support the theory of evolution.
- Fossils are the remains of organisms from millions of years ago, which are found in rocks.
- Suggested Activity:
Discuss how fossils provide evidence for evolution.
- Suggested Activity:
- Extract and interpret information from charts, graphs and tables related to fossil evidence
- Fossils may be formed:
- from parts of organisms that have not decayed because one or more
of the conditions needed for decay are absent
- when parts of the organism are replaced by minerals as they decay
- as preserved traces of organisms, such as footprints, burrows and
rootlet traces.- Suggested Activity:
Observe fossils or pictures of fossils.
Model how a fossil can be formed.
- Suggested Activity:
- Many early forms of life were soft-bodied, which means that they have left few traces behind.
- What traces there were have been mainly destroyed by geological activity. This is why scientists cannot be certain about how life began on Earth.
- We can learn from fossils how much or how little different organisms
have changed as life developed on Earth.
- Appreciate why the fossil record is incomplete
- Understand how scientific
methods and theories
develop over time.
- Suggested Activity:
Consider theories of how life on Earth began.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to extract and interpret information from charts, graphs and tables such as evolutionary trees
- Extinctions occur when there are no remaining individuals of a species still alive.
- Suggested Activity:
Give a list of extinct organisms and ask students to print images. Suggest reasons to explain why they died out.
Explain why some organisms are endangered. Give examples. Give reasons why it is important to prevent species from becoming extinct
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe factors which may contribute to the extinction of a species
- Suggested Activity:
Research causes of extinction and write a report/PowerPoint presentation to present to the class.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the evidence for evolution including fossils and antibiotic resistance in bacteria.
- Lesson 10 - Why is MRSA so dangerous? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Bacteria can evolve rapidly because they reproduce at a fast rate.
- Stages of antibacterial resistance include: 1. Mutations of bacterial pathogens produce new strains. 2. Some strains might be resistant to antibiotics, and so are not killed. 3. They survive and reproduce, so the population of the resistant strain rises. 4. The resistant strain will then spread because people are not immune to it and there is no effective treatment.
- Suggested Activity:
Explain how bacteria can become resistant to antibiotics.
- Suggested Activity:
- MRSA is resistant to antibiotics. There are links with this content to
Antibiotics and painkillers.- Suggested Activity:
Discuss how the rate of development of resistant bacteria could be slowed down.
Discuss why there are few new antibiotics being developed, and suggest how drug companies might be encouraged to develop some.
- Suggested Activity:
- To reduce the rate of development of antibiotic resistant strains:
? doctors should not prescribe antibiotics inappropriately, such as treating non-serious or viral infections
? patients should complete their course of antibiotics so all bacteria are killed and none survive to mutate and form resistant strains
? the agricultural use of antibiotics should be restricted.
- Suggested Activity:
Explain how antibiotic resistance has impacted on cleaning practices in Britain’s hospitals.
- Suggested Activity:
- The development of new antibiotics is costly and slow. It is unlikely to keep up with the emergence of new resistant strains
- Suggested Activity:
Role play: life without antibiotics.
- Suggested Activity:
- Bacteria can evolve rapidly because they reproduce at a fast rate.
- Lesson 01 - How are living things classified? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- B2.5
- Lesson 01 - What do organisms compete for in an ecosystem? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe different levels of organisation in an ecosystem from individual organisms to the whole ecosystem
- Students should be able to describe the importance of interdependence and competition in a community.
- Students should be able to, when provided with appropriate information suggest the factors for which organisms are competing in a given habitat
- An ecosystem is the interaction of a community of living organisms
(biotic) with the non-living (abiotic) parts of their environment. - To survive and reproduce, organisms require a supply of materials from their surroundings and from the other living organisms there.
- Plants in a community or habitat often compete with each other for light and space, and for water and mineral ions from the soil.
- Animals often compete with each other for food, mates and territory.
- Within a community each species depends on other species for food,
shelter, pollination, seed dispersal etc. If one species is removed it can affect the whole community. This is called interdependence.
- Suggested Activity:
Habitats of Hamble:
Students go to designated spots around the school (give students a stop watch and a time limit), e.g. behind Durban. At each location students are to note down the different organisms living there and what they compete for. How would the removal of one species impact the other species living here?
OR
Habitats of the World:
Set up stations around the classroom with a different habitat at each (e.g. arctic, rainforest, savannah, etc.)
At each station have a large photo of the environment and some example food webs. Students are to note down the different organisms living there and what they compete for. How would the removal of one species impact the other species living here?Equipment Required:
Stopwatches.
OR
Large photos of different habitats (e.g. arctic, rainforest, savannah, etc.)
and example food webs for each habitat.
- Suggested Activity:
- A stable community is one where all the species and environmental factors are in balance so that population sizes remain fairly constant.
- Students should be able to extract and interpret information from charts, graphs and tables relating to the interaction of organisms within a community. Extract and interpret information from charts,
graphs and tables.(MS) -
- Students should be able to describe different levels of organisation in an ecosystem from individual organisms to the whole ecosystem
- Lesson 02 - What is the difference between abiotic and biotic factors? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain how a change in an abiotic factor would affect a given community given appropriate data or context.
- Abiotic (non-living) factors which can affect a community are:
- light intensity
- temperature
- moisture levels
- soil pH and mineral content
- wind intensity and direction
- carbon dioxide levels for plants
- oxygen levels for aquatic animals. - Students should be able to extract and interpret information from charts, graphs and tables relating to the effect of abiotic factors on organisms within a community. Extract and interpret information from charts, graphs and tables. (MS)
- Students should be able to explain how a change in a biotic factor might affect a given community given appropriate data or context.
- Biotic (living) factors which can affect a community are:
- availability of food
- new predators arriving
- new pathogens
- one species out-competing another so the numbers are no longer sufficient to breed. - Students should be able to extract and interpret information from charts, graphs and tables relating to the effect of biotic factors on organisms within a community.
- (WS) Extract and interpret information from charts, graphs and tables
- Students should understand that photosynthetic organisms are the producers of biomass for life on Earth.
- Feeding relationships within a community can be represented by food chains.
- All food chains begin with a producer which synthesises
molecules. This is usually a green plant or alga which makes glucose by photosynthesis. - In relation to abundance of organisms students should be able to understand the terms mean, mode and median (MS)
- In relation to abundance of organisms students should be able to calculate arithmetic means (MS)
- In relation to abundance of organisms students should be able to plot and draw appropriate graphs selecting appropriate scales for the axes (MS)
- Producers are eaten by primary consumers, which in turn may be eaten by secondary consumers and then tertiary consumers
- Consumers that kill and eat other animals are predators, and those eaten are prey.
- In a stable community the numbers of predators and prey rise and fall in cycles.
- Interpret graphs used to model predator-prey cycles (WS) (MS)
- Suggested Activity:
Students are to describe and explain the predator-prey graph for foxes and rabbits.
Equipment Required:
Predator-prey relationship graph.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to interpret graphs used to model these cycles.
- Students should be able to explain how a change in an abiotic factor would affect a given community given appropriate data or context.
- Lesson 03 - How are organisms adapted to survive? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to, when provided with appropriate information suggest how organisms are adapted to the conditions in which they live.
- Students should be able to explain how organisms are adapted to live in their natural environment, given appropriate information.
- Organisms have features (adaptations) that enable them to survive in the conditions in which they normally live. These adaptations may be structural, behavioural or functional
- Some organisms live in environments that are very extreme, such as at high temperature, pressure, or salt concentration. These organisms are called extremophiles.
- Bacteria living in deep sea vents are extremophiles.
- Suggested Activity:
Adaptation research task:
Students are put in to small groups and each group given an area of adaptations to research (desert animals; desert plants; arctic animals; deterring predators; extremophiles.)
Students fill in their area of their mindmap during the research.
Each group feeds back their research to the class. Students complete the rest of the mindmap whilst listening.
Plenary:
exam question on adaptations.Equipment Required:
Adaptations research mindmap.
Biology textbooks, computers, students' phones.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to, when provided with appropriate information suggest how organisms are adapted to the conditions in which they live.
- Lesson 04 - Required Practical - Sampling Techniques Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A range of experimental methods using transects and quadrats are used by ecologists to determine the distribution and abundance of species in an ecosystem. Required Practical 9 - Sampling Techniques (AT skills 1,3,4,6,8)
- Suggested Activity:
Required practical - sampling.
Random sampling - random placing of quadrats to calculate average population of a species in a field.
Transect - lay measuring tape and place quadrat regularly to investigate growth of a species across a habitat.Equipment Required:
• a 25cm x 25cm quadrat
• 2 x 30 m tape measure
• a clipboard
• a pen
• paper.
- Suggested Activity:
- A range of experimental methods using transects and quadrats are used by ecologists to determine the distribution and abundance of species in an ecosystem. Required Practical 9 - Sampling Techniques (AT skills 1,3,4,6,8)
- Lesson 05 - How is material recycled by the living world? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should recall that many different materials cycle through the abiotic and biotic components of an ecosystem
- Students should be able to explain the importance of the carbon and water cycles to living organisms
- All materials in the living world are recycled to provide the building blocks for future organisms. Students are not expected to study the nitrogen cycle.
- (WS) Students should be able to interpret and explain the processes in diagrams of the carbon cycle, the water cycle.
- The carbon cycle returns carbon from organisms to the atmosphere as
carbon dioxide to be used by plants in photosynthesis.- Suggested Activity:
Possible practical: storing carbon dioxide in the sea (see ppt on shared area.)
Equipment Required:
Per group (see ppt for set up):
two conical flasks with bungs with two holes for delivery tubes;
syringes; baking soda; phenol red indicator; measuring cylinders; beakers, vinegar, spatulas
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain the role of microorganisms in cycling materials through an ecosystem by returning carbon to the atmosphere as carbon dioxide and mineral ions to the soil.
- The water cycle provides fresh water for plants and animals on land
before draining into the seas. - Water is continuously evaporated and
precipitated.
- Students should recall that many different materials cycle through the abiotic and biotic components of an ecosystem
- Lesson 06 - What factors affect the rate of decay? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain how temperature, water and availability of oxygen affect the rate of decay of biological material.
- Students should be able to calculate rate changes in the decay of biological material (MS)
- Students should be able to translate information between numerical and graphical form (MS)
- Students should be able to plot and draw appropriate graphs selecting appropriate scales for the axes. (MS)
- Gardeners and farmers try to provide optimum conditions for rapid decay of waste biological material.
- The compost produced is used as a natural fertiliser for growing garden plants or crops.
- Anaerobic decay produces methane gas. Biogas generators can be used to produce methane gas as a fuel.
- Required Practical 10 - Rate of Decay (AT skills 1,3,4,5)
- Suggested Activity:
Required practical - decay (separates only.)
Equipment Required:
Full fat milk
0.05M sodium carb. soln
5% lipase soln
250ml beakers
test tubes
ohp pens
Pipettes
thermometers
stopclocks
Cresol red
kettles
Ice
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how temperature, water and availability of oxygen affect the rate of decay of biological material.
- Lesson 07 - How do environmental changes impact the distribution of a species? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to evaluate the impact of environmental changes on the distribution of species in an ecosystem given appropriate information.
- Environmental changes affect the distribution of species in an ecosystem.
- These changes include:
- temperature
- availability of water
- composition of atmospheric gases.- Suggested Activity:
Transect to investigate the affect of light on growth of e.g. daisies, measure abundance going from tree line to open field.
Equipment Required:
Measuring tapes, quadrats.
- Suggested Activity:
- The changes may be seasonal, geographic or caused by human interaction.
- Students should be able to evaluate the impact of environmental changes on the distribution of species in an ecosystem given appropriate information.
- Lesson 01 - What do organisms compete for in an ecosystem? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- B2.6
- Lesson 01 - What is pollution and what can be done about it? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Rapid growth in the human population and an increase in the standard of living mean that increasingly more resources are used and more waste is produced. Unless waste and chemical materials are properly handled, more pollution will be caused.
- Pollution can occur:
? in water, from sewage, fertiliser or toxic chemicals
? in air, from smoke and acidic gases
? on land, from landfill and from toxic chemicals.- Suggested Activity:
Computer room needed!
Put the class into groups and assign each group one topic to research (human population explosion; land pollution; water pollution; or air pollution).
Each group studies their one topic and creates a ppt to describe their topic and explain its effect on biodiversity to the rest of the class. Students should use the ppt template on the shared area for guidance.
Students copy the pollution table on to a whole page in their books.
Each group presents their ppt to the class and students fill in the mind map for that topic.
- Suggested Activity:
- Pollution kills plants and animals which can reduce biodiversity
- Suggested Activity:
Optional practical: How does fertiliser affect duckweed? Can observe the results after two lessons.
- Suggested Activity:
- (WS) Evaluate the environmental implications of deforestation
- Students should be able to describe some of the biological consequences of global warming
- Levels of carbon dioxide and methane in the atmosphere are increasing, and contribute to ?global warming?.
- (WS) Understand that the scientific consensus about global warming and climate change is based on systematic reviews of thousands of peer reviewed publications.
- (WS) Explain why evidence is uncertain or incomplete in a complex context
- Rapid growth in the human population and an increase in the standard of living mean that increasingly more resources are used and more waste is produced. Unless waste and chemical materials are properly handled, more pollution will be caused.
- Lesson 02 - How are humans impacting biodiversity? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Biodiversity is the variety of all the different species of organisms on
earth, or within an ecosystem. - Humans reduce the amount of land available for other animals and plants by building, quarrying, farming and dumping waste
- A great biodiversity ensures the stability of ecosystems by reducing the dependence of one species on another for food, shelter and the maintenance of the physical environment.
- The destruction of peat bogs, and other areas of peat to produce garden compost, reduces the area of this habitat and thus the variety of different plant, animal and microorganism species that live there (biodiversity).
- The future of the human species on Earth relies on us maintaining
a good level of biodiversity. - The decay or burning of the peat releases carbon dioxide into the atmosphere.
- Many human activities are reducing
biodiversity and only recently have measures been taken to try to stop this reduction. - (WS) Understand the conflict between the need for cheap available compost to increase food production and the need to conserve peat bogs and peatlands as habitats for biodiversity and to reduce carbon dioxide emissions
- Suggested Activity:
Letter to future generations:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eRLJscAlk1M
Biodiversity is ‘the variety of different life found on earth’
1) Show video clip from PPt. Students to read article on ‘Why should I care about the Everglades?’ and write a summary of this article in 10 sentences.
2) Repeat this task for “Deforestation” and “Peat Bogs” – Read supporting materials and summarise the issues in 10 sentences.
3) Impact of loss of endangered species on a food web (optional)
4) Having now looked at one example the students should be in a position to independently research a habitat that is found regularly on the Natural World Heritage Site where biodiversity is at risk. There won’t be enough information to look up very specific individual places but they could look at:
a) Coral reefs
b) Rainforests
c) Mangroves
d) The Congo basin
5) There is some structure to assist them on this. Suggested websites are available and book boxes could be ordered from the library.
6) Present their research to the class. Pair the students together with another student who researched the same area and combining their research they should summarise in a poster/powerpoint/speech what they have found.Equipment Required:
The Everglades article, Deforestation factsheet, peat bog factsheet, Congo Basin factsheet, Research on biodiversity WS.
- Suggested Activity:
- (WS) Explain how waste, deforestation and global warming have an impact on biodiversity.
- Large-scale deforestation in tropical areas has occurred to:
? provide land for cattle and rice fields
? grow crops for biofuels. - Students should be able to describe both positive and negative human interactions in an ecosystem and explain their impact on biodiversity.
- Biodiversity is the variety of all the different species of organisms on
- Lesson 03 - Why are farmers paid to leave margins around their fields? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Scientists and concerned citizens have put in place programmes to reduce the negative effects of humans on ecosystems and biodiversity
- These include:
? breeding programmes for endangered species
? protection and regeneration of rare habitats
? reintroduction of field margins and hedgerows in agricultural areas
where farmers grow only one type of crop
? reduction of deforestation and carbon dioxide emissions by some governments
? recycling resources rather than dumping waste in landfill.- Suggested Activity:
Starter:
Money for Nothing playing as students enter.
Can you describe the difference in these pictures of the edges of farmers’ fields.
Main:
Put class into mixed ability groups of four and assign each student within the group the appropriate colour:
• Lower ability = pink or yellow.
• Higher ability = blue or green.
Each student in the group will study a different text (colour coded). Students move to sit with others studying the same text. Students write a brief summary statement on a post-it note for each key point in the text. Students should share their ideas with others studying the same text.
Students return to their original groups and share their findings. Students then divide all ideas into one of three categories:
• Advantages to wildlife.
• Advantages to farmers.
• Scientific fact.
Finally, as a group students prioritise the ideas within each category.
Plenary:
Farmers are being paid to sacrifice farmland for larger field margins. Explain the advantages or this to both wildlife and the farmers. (10 marks)Equipment Required:
Colour coded field margin texts,
Field margins 10 marks question WS
- Suggested Activity:
- Scientists and concerned citizens have put in place programmes to reduce the negative effects of humans on ecosystems and biodiversity
- Lesson 04 - How are organisms in an ecosystem linked? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
-
- Students should be able to describe the differences between the trophic levels of organisms within an ecosystem
- Level 1: Plants and algae make their own food and are called producers.
- Level 2: Herbivores eat plants/algae and are called primary consumers
-
- Level 3: Carnivores that eat herbivores are called secondary consumers
- Level 4: Carnivores that eat other carnivores are called tertiary consumers. Apex predators are carnivores with no predators.
- Decomposers break down dead plant and animal matter by secreting enzymes into the environment.
- Small soluble food molecules then diffuse into the microorganism.
-
- Lesson 05 - How are pyramids of biomass used to calculate energy efficiency? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Pyramids of biomass can be constructed to represent the relative amount of biomass in each level of a food chain. Trophic level 1 is at the bottom of the pyramid
- Students should be able to construct accurate pyramids of biomass from appropriate data.
- Students should be able to describe pyramids of biomass
- Students should be able to explain how biomass is lost between the different trophic levels
- Producers are mostly plants and algae which transfer about 1 % of the incident energy from light for photosynthesis.
- Only approximately 10 % of the biomass is transferred up each trophic level.
- Losses of biomass are due to:
? not all the ingested material is absorbed, some is egested as faeces
? some absorbed material is lost as waste, such as carbon dioxide and water in respiration and water and urea in urine. - Large amounts of glucose are used in respiration.
- (MS) Calculate the efficiency of biomass transfer between trophic levels.
- Students should be able to calculate the efficiency of biomass transfers between trophic levels by percentages or fractions of mass.
- Students should be able to explain how this affects the number of organisms at each trophic level
- Pyramids of biomass can be constructed to represent the relative amount of biomass in each level of a food chain. Trophic level 1 is at the bottom of the pyramid
- Lesson 06 - What is food security? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe some of the biological factors affecting levels of food security
- Food security is having enough food to feed a population.
- Sustainable methods must be found to feed all people on Earth
- (WS) Interpret population and food production statistics to evaluate food security.
- Biological factors which are threatening food security include:
? the increasing birth rate has threatened food security in some countries
? changing diets in developed countries means scarce food resources are transported around the world
? new pests and pathogens that affect farming
? environmental changes that affect food production, such as widespread famine occurring in some countries if rains fail
? the cost of agricultural inputs
? conflicts that have arisen in some parts of the world which affect the availability of water or food.- Suggested Activity:
Complete as a homework:
News article on factors affecting food security (p.123 in biology revision guide.)
Use a homework tester at start of next lesson (in ppt) to assess how well students have understood this.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe some of the biological factors affecting levels of food security
- Lesson 07 - What are the long term impacts of modern farming techniques? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The efficiency of food production can be improved by restricting energy transfer from food animals to the environment.
- Some animals are fed high protein foods to increase growth.
- (WS) Understand that some people have ethical objections to some
modern intensive farming methods. - (WS) Evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of modern farming techniques.
- Fish stocks in the oceans are declining. It is important to maintain fish stocks at a level where breeding continues or certain species may disappear altogether in some areas
- Control of net size and the introduction of fishing quotas play important roles in conservation of fish stocks at a sustainable level
- (WS) Understand how application of different fishing techniques promotes recovery of fish stocks
- Suggested Activity:
Work through ppt and play videos on intensive farming.
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of intensive methods for rearing farm animals and fish. Mark scheme on ppt.
- Suggested Activity:
- The efficiency of food production can be improved by restricting energy transfer from food animals to the environment.
- Lesson 08 - How can biotechnology be used to improve food security? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe and explain some possible biotechnical and agricultural solutions, including genetic modification, to the demands of the growing human population
- Suggested Activity:
Create a news report (video) discussing current food production and how it can be made more sustainable.
Key points to include:
Food security.
Current intensive farming methods.
Sustainable fisheries.
Role of biotechnology, including mycoprotein and GM crops.
Skills:
Team work.
Research.
Communication.
Creativity.
- Suggested Activity:
- Modern biotechnology techniques enable large quantities of microorganisms to be cultured for food.
- The fungus Fusarium is useful for producing mycoprotein, a protein-rich food suitable for vegetarians.
- The fungus is grown on glucose syrup, in aerobic conditions, and the biomass is harvested and purified
- A genetically modified bacterium produces human insulin. When harvested and purified this is used to treat people with diabetes.
- GM crops could provide more food or food with an improved nutritional value such as golden rice
- Students should be able to describe and explain some possible biotechnical and agricultural solutions, including genetic modification, to the demands of the growing human population
- Lesson 01 - What is pollution and what can be done about it? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C2.1
- Lesson 01 - How can we measure the rate of a chemical reaction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The rate of a chemical reaction can be found by measuring the quantity of a reactant used or the quantity of product formed over time: mean rate of reaction = quantity of reactant used / time taken OR mean rate of reaction = quantity of product formed / time taken
- Suggested Activity:
Demo - iodine clock reaction with 5 student helpers
time how long to react.
sketch/plot a graph of results to work out rate from graph or calculate direct from resultsEquipment Required:
RSC iodine clock demo (in your chem book)
- Suggested Activity:
- The quantity of reactant or product can be measured by the mass in grams or by a volume in cm3.
- Suggested Activity:
Focus on gas collection (RP skills)
React CaCO3 with dilute HCl and measure the volume of CO2 evolved against time. IV - number of marble chips or volume of acid.
Calculate rate by mass of chips / time taken or volume or gas / time taken.
Record the results and plot a graph of results of volume of gas against time.Equipment Required:
Class set
Marble Chips
2M, 1.5M, 1M, 0.5M, 0.25M HCl
Conical flasks
Gas syringes
Balances
Sieve
- Suggested Activity:
- The units of rate of reaction may be given as g/s or cm3/s.
- Suggested Activity:
Explain what is meant by the units:
• g/s
• cm3/s
• mol/s.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students are also required to use quantity of reactants in terms of moles and units for rate of reaction in mol/s. (HT only)
- Suggested Activity:
Extended writing: write instructions to another student how to calculate the mean rate of reaction.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to calculate the mean rate of a reaction from given information about the quantity of a reactant used or the quantity of a product formed and the time taken
- Students should be able to draw, and interpret, graphs showing the quantity of product formed or quantity of reactant used up against time
- Suggested Activity:
Analyse graphical data on ppt to identify and explain
ie:
•initially rate is fast
•slows down
•reaction completion
Go further: complete the measuring rate of reaction worksheet.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to draw tangents to the curves on these graphs and use the slope of the tangent as a measure of the rate of reaction
- Students should be able to (HT only) calculate the gradient of a tangent to the curve on these graphs as a measure of rate of reaction at a specific time.
- Suggested Activity:
Get students to calculate the gradient from graphs they have analysed using tangents.
- Suggested Activity:
- The rate of a chemical reaction can be found by measuring the quantity of a reactant used or the quantity of product formed over time: mean rate of reaction = quantity of reactant used / time taken OR mean rate of reaction = quantity of product formed / time taken
- Lesson 02 - How do temperature and pressure affect the rate of a chemical reaction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Collision theory explains how various factors affect rates of reactions. According to this theory, chemical reactions can occur only when reacting particles collide with each other and with sufficient energy.
- Suggested Activity:
use the fluffy balls to represent particles in reactions with changing factors. e.g higher/lower concentrations
Equipment Required:
fluffy balls
- Suggested Activity:
- Factors which affect the rates of chemical reactions include: the concentrations of reactants in solution, the pressure of reacting gases, the surface area of solid reactants, the temperature and the presence of catalysts.
- Suggested Activity:
Circus of mini practicals measuring the rate of reaction. Students record their results in the table (shared area).
Go further: In terms of rates of reaction explain why grass needs to be cut more often in the summer months. You should include any relevant chemical equations.Equipment Required:
Station 1: marble chips and acid, conical flask with gas syringe, different concentration of HCl, small measuring cylinders.
jewellery balance
sieve
Station 2: marble chips and acid with delivery tube water bath set up, varying particle size of marble chips, measuring cylinders.
jewellery balances
sieve
Station 3: mini scale sodium thiosulfate reaction with different temperature reactant (room temp, ice and water bath), measuring cylinders.
Station 4: pieces of magnesium, 1 M hydrochloric acid, conical flask and gas syringe, measuring cylinders.
- Suggested Activity:
- The minimum amount of energy that particles must have to react is called the activation energy.
- Increasing the temperature increases the frequency of collisions and makes the collisions more energetic, and so increases the rate of reaction.
- The minimum amount of energy that particles must have to react is called the activation energy.
- Students should be able to recall how changing the pressure of reacting gases affects the rate of chemical reactions.
- Students should be able to recall how changing the temperature affects the rate of chemical reactions.
- Collision theory explains how various factors affect rates of reactions. According to this theory, chemical reactions can occur only when reacting particles collide with each other and with sufficient energy.
- Lesson 03 - How do surface area and concentration affect the rate of a chemical reaction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to predict and explain the effects of changes in the size of pieces of a reacting solid in terms of surface area to volume ratio
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate particle size impact on rate of reaction. Collecting gas using water troughs. Calculate rate using 1 / time taken.
Equipment Required:
3cm magnesium ribbon pieces
Mg powder
1M hcl
conical flasks
delivery tubes
troughs
measuring cylinders
stopclocks
spatulas
- Suggested Activity:
- Increasing the concentration increases the frequency of collisions and makes the collisions and so increases the rate of reaction.
- Students should be able to recall how changing the concentrations of reactants in solution affects the rate of chemical reactions.
- Suggested Activity:
Go further: create summary diagrams to explain these effects without using any words.
- Suggested Activity:
- Increasing the concentration of reactants in solution, the pressure of reacting gases, and the surface area of solid reactants increases the frequency of collisions and so increases the rate of reaction.
- Students should be able to use simple ideas about proportionality when using collision theory to explain the effect of a factor on the rate of a reaction.
- Suggested Activity:
Extended writing: Use collision theory to explain the change in rate of reaction in terms of particle behaviour for:
• Concentration
• Pressure
• Surface area
• Temperature
• Catalyst.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to predict and explain using collision theory the effects of changing conditions of concentration, pressure and temperature on the rate of a reaction
- Students should be able to recall how changing the surface area of solid reactants affects the rate of chemical reactions.
- Students should be able to predict and explain the effects of changes in the size of pieces of a reacting solid in terms of surface area to volume ratio
- Lesson 04 - Why are catalysts often used in chemical reactions? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Catalysts change the rate of chemical reactions but are not used up during the reaction. Different reactions need different catalysts.
- Suggested Activity:
demo:
Elephants toothpasteEquipment Required:
elephants toothpaste in large measuring cylinder and tray
- Suggested Activity:
- Enzymes act as catalysts in biological systems.
- Suggested Activity:
Find out which is the best catalyst at decomposing hydrogen peroxide
Equipment Required:
per group:
75 cm3 of 10 volume hydrogen peroxide solution. - About 0.5 g of powdered manganese(IV) oxide (manganese dioxide, MnO2). - About 0.5 g of lead(IV) oxide (lead dioxide, PbO2). - About 0.5 g of iron(III) oxide (red iron oxide, Fe2O3). - A small piece (about 1 cm3) of potato. - A small piece (about 1 cm3) of liver.
washing up liquid in small beaker with pipette
stop clock
50ml cylinders
- Suggested Activity:
- Catalysts increase the rate of reaction by providing a different pathway for the reaction that has a lower activation energy.
* An opportunity to investigate the catalytic effect of adding different metal salts to a reaction such as the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide. - A reaction profile for a catalysed reaction can be drawn in the following form: (energy level diagram with reduced Ea with catalyst)
- Suggested Activity:
Students draw their predicted reaction profiles for with and without a catalyst -> evaluate and correct.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to identify catalysts in reactions from their effect on the rate of reaction and because they are not included in the chemical equation for the reaction.
- Students should be able to explain catalytic action in terms of activation energy.
- Students do not need to know the names of catalysts other than those specified in the subject content.
- Suggested Activity:
Why are catalysts used in industry?
Go further: You are in charge of a factory producing a chemical. Which factor would you change to increase the rate of reaction? Why?
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to recall how the presence of a catalyst affects the rate of chemical reactions.
- Catalysts change the rate of chemical reactions but are not used up during the reaction. Different reactions need different catalysts.
- Lesson 05 - What are reversible reactions? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to plan, complete and analyse a practical to measure how changing the concentration affects the rate of reaction.
- Suggested Activity:
Required practical 5:
Investigate how changes in concentration affect the rates of reactions by a method involving measuring the volume of a gas produced and a method involving a change in colour or turbidity. Calculate rate using 1 / time taken.Equipment Required:
Class set:
Magnesium ribbon cut to 1cm in length.
2M, 1.5M, 1.0M, 1.5M, 0.5M, 0.25M hydrochloric acid
Conical flasks
Gas syringes
Stopclocks
50ml measuring cylinders
- Suggested Activity:
- Required practical 5 - rates of reaction (developing a hypothesis) (AT skills 1,3,5,6)
- Students should be able to plan, complete and analyse a practical to measure how changing the concentration affects the rate of reaction.
- Lesson 06 - What is dynamic equilibrium? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- In some chemical reactions, the products of the reaction can react to produce the original reactants.
- Suggested Activity:
Show the reversible reaction symbol - what does this mean?
- Suggested Activity:
- Such reactions are called reversible reactions and are represented: A B (reversible arrow) C D
- For example: ammonium chloride (heat - reversible arrow - cool) ammonia hydrogen chloride.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo 1:
ammonium chloride is a white solid that breaks down into ammonia and hydrogen
chloride gases when heated, leave to cool to see reverse reaction.Equipment Required:
demo 1:
ammonium chloride in boiling tube with mineral wool in the top
- Suggested Activity:
- If a reversible reaction is exothermic in one direction, it is endothermic in the opposite direction.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo 2:
heat hydrous copper sulfate and then leave to cool/add water to show reverse reaction.Equipment Required:
Demo 2:
boiling tube of hydrous copper sulfate, distilled water.
- Suggested Activity:
- In a reversible reaction the same amount of energy is transferred in each case. For example: hydrated copper sulfate [blue] (endothermic - reversible arrow - exothermic) anhydrous copper sulfate [white] water.
- Suggested Activity:
Show energy change sketch graphs for exothermic and endothermic reactions to help explain.
- Suggested Activity:
- The direction of reversible reactions can be changed by changing the conditions.
- Suggested Activity:
Give several examples of reactions and ask students what will happen when temperature, concentration and pressure are changed.
Go further: Students are to write their own exam question based on the learning in the topic. Must include a mark scheme on the other side. Swap with another student -> answer -> hand back and peer assess.
- Suggested Activity:
- In some chemical reactions, the products of the reaction can react to produce the original reactants.
- Lesson 07 - How can equilibrium be affected? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- If the temperature of a system at equilibrium is increased:
- the relative amount of products at equilibrium increases for an endothermic reaction
- the relative amount of products at equilibrium decreases for an exothermic reaction.- Suggested Activity:
Demo 1:
The equilibrium of the cobalt chloride–water system;
temperature. Observe colour of reaction at different temperatures (20,30,40 degrees)Equipment Required:
class practical: -TECH notes- see chemistry folder C6.10 to make up solutions of coblat (II) chloride solutions.
three test tubes labelled A, B and C each set to "turn" at the required temperatures for each group of students.
water baths set up at 20, 30 and 40 degrees.
- Suggested Activity:
- If the temperature of a system at equilibrium is decreased:
- the relative amount of products at equilibrium decreases for an endothermic reaction
- the relative amount of products at equilibrium increases for an exothermic reaction.- Suggested Activity:
demo of co
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to interpret appropriate given data to predict the effect of a change in temperature on given reactions at equilibrium.
- When a reversible reaction occurs in apparatus which prevents the escape of reactants and products, equilibrium is reached when the forward and reverse reactions occur at exactly the same rate.
- Suggested Activity:
Watch https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dUMmoPdwBy4
- Suggested Activity:
- For gaseous reactions at equilibrium:
? an increase in pressure causes the equilibrium position to shift towards the side with the smaller number of molecules as shown by the symbol equation for that reaction
? a decrease in pressure causes the equilibrium position to shift towards the side with the larger number of molecules as shown by the symbol equation for that reaction. - Students should be able to interpret appropriate given data to predict the effect of pressure changes on given reactions at equilibrium.
- Suggested Activity:
Go Further: complete the Haber process worksheet.
- Suggested Activity:
- The relative amounts of all the reactants and products at equilibrium depend on the conditions of the reaction.
- Suggested Activity:
Ask students what happens when a bottle of coke is opened -> bubbles fizz out -> why? Affect of pressure on carbonic acid reversible reactions.
- Suggested Activity:
- If a system is at equilibrium and a change is made to any of the conditions, then the system responds to counteract the change.
- Suggested Activity:
Watch the two videos and annotate the snap shots (hand outs - video 1 and video 2 in shared folder):
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7zuUV455zFs
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XhQ02egUs5Y
Go further: Write the correct sentences for the sentence exerts (shared area).
- Suggested Activity:
- The effects of changing conditions on a system at equilibrium can be predicted using Le Chatelier's Principle.
- Students should be able to make qualitative predictions about the effect of changes on systems at equilibrium when given appropriate information.
- Suggested Activity:
Complete dynamic equilibrium worksheet.
- Suggested Activity:
- If the concentration of one of the reactants or products is changed, the system is no longer at equilibrium and the concentrations of all the substances will change until equilibrium is reached again.
- If the concentration of a reactant is increased, more products will be formed until equilibrium is reached again.
- If the concentration of a product is decreased, more reactants will react until equilibrium is reached again.
- Students should be able to interpret appropriate given data to predict the effect of a change in concentration of a reactant or product on given reactions at equilibrium.
- If the temperature of a system at equilibrium is increased:
- Lesson 08 - What is the Haber Process? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The Haber process is used to manufacture ammonia, which can be
used to produce nitrogen-based fertilisers. - Some of the hydrogen and nitrogen reacts to form
ammonia. - The reaction is reversible so some of the ammonia
produced breaks down into nitrogen and hydrogen: nitrogen hydrogen --> <-- ammonia - ? explain how the commercially used conditions for the Haber process are related to the availability and cost of raw materials and energy supplies, control of equilibrium position and rate
- On cooling, the ammonia liquefies and is removed. The remaining
hydrogen and nitrogen are recycled. - MS 1a
Recognise and use
expressions in decimal form.
MS 1c
Use ratios, fractions and
percentages.
- ? apply the principles of dynamic equilibrium in
Reversible reactions and dynamic equilibrium to the Haber process - ? explain the trade-off between rate of production and position of equilibrium
- The raw materials for the Haber process are nitrogen and hydrogen
- Students should be able to recall a source for the nitrogen and a source for the hydrogen used in the Haber process
- The purified gases are passed over a catalyst of iron at a high
temperature (about 450?C) and a high pressure (about 200
atmospheres).
- The Haber process is used to manufacture ammonia, which can be
- Lesson 01 - How can we measure the rate of a chemical reaction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C2.2
- Lesson 01 - What is crude oil? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Crude oil is a finite resource found in rocks. Crude oil is the remains of an ancient biomass consisting mainly of plankton that was buried in mud.
- Crude oil is a mixture of a very large number of compounds.
- Most of the compounds in crude oil are hydrocarbons, which are molecules made up of hydrogen and carbon atoms only.
- Most of the hydrocarbons in crude oil are hydrocarbons called alkanes. The general formula for the homologous series of alkanes is CnH2n+2
- The first four members of the alkanes are methane, ethane, propane and butane.
- Suggested Activity:
Teach - Monkey's Eat Peanut Butter as recall for naming hydrocarbons
- Suggested Activity:
- Alkane molecules can be represented in the following forms: C2H6 or displayed formula.
- Suggested Activity:
Students deduce the general formula by modelling hydrocarbons
Equipment Required:
molymods
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to recognise substances as alkanes given their formulae in these forms.
- Suggested Activity:
Create a table with the name, symbol, diagram for the first four hydrocarbons
GF: suggest what the naming would be for other larger hydrocabons
- Suggested Activity:
- Students do not need to know the names of specific alkanes other than methane, ethane, propane and butane.
- Suggested Activity:
Plenary quiz showing the structure, symbols and students have to name
- Suggested Activity:
- Crude oil is a finite resource found in rocks. Crude oil is the remains of an ancient biomass consisting mainly of plankton that was buried in mud.
- Lesson 02 - How can we seperate crude oil into useful fractions? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The many hydrocarbons in crude oil may be separated into fractions, each of which contains molecules with a similar number of carbon atoms, by fractional distillation.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
1. Distillation of ethanol and water.
2. Fractional distillation of crude oil
Class activity:
Model distillation of pupils using their heights to represent carbon chain length.Equipment Required:
Crude oil demo - Fractional distillation
- Suggested Activity:
- The fractions can be processed to produce fuels and feedstock for the petrochemical industry.
- Suggested Activity:
show a range of images of products made from hydrocarbons (plastics, Vaseline, bitumen, jet fuel, black seagulls (red heron) make up.
Ask students to consider how their lives would be different if we didn't have access to crude oil
- Suggested Activity:
- Many of the fuels on which we depend for our modern lifestyle, such as petrol, diesel oil, kerosene, heavy fuel oil and liquefied petroleum gases, are produced from crude oil.
- Many useful materials on which modern life depends are produced by the petrochemical industry, such as solvents, lubricants, polymers, detergents.
- The vast array of natural and synthetic carbon compounds occur due to the ability of carbon atoms to form families of similar compounds.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Compare the process of forming different polymers from crude oil similar to proteins synthesis.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how fractional distillation works in terms of evaporation and condensation.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Use a flow map to plan and then "Explain how crude oil is separated."
- Suggested Activity:
- Knowledge of the names of other specific fractions or fuels is not required.
- Some properties of hydrocarbons depend on the size of their molecules, including boiling point, viscosity and flammability. These properties influence how hydrocarbons are used as fuels. (WS) Investigate the properties of different hydrocarbons.
- Students should be able to recall how boiling point, viscosity and flammability change with increasing molecular size.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Describe how the properties of hydrocarbons changes as their carbon chain length increases
- Suggested Activity:
- The many hydrocarbons in crude oil may be separated into fractions, each of which contains molecules with a similar number of carbon atoms, by fractional distillation.
- Lesson 03 - What is a combustion reaction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The complete combustion of a hydrocarbon produces carbon dioxide and water.
- Suggested Activity:
Stretch - Recall the products of combustion reaction using images to prompt students.
Challenge -
write and balance the symbol equation for the combustion reaction for methane
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to write balanced equations for the complete combustion of hydrocarbons with a given formula.
- Suggested Activity:
Teach/Remind students that combustion reactions are examples of oxidation reactions
- Suggested Activity:
- During combustion, the carbon and hydrogen in the fuels are oxidised.
- The combustion of hydrocarbon fuels releases energy.
- Knowledge of trends in properties of hydrocarbons is limited to: ? boiling points, ? viscosity, ? flammability.
- Suggested Activity:
Investigating the flammability (how easy is it to ignite and cleanness of flame) and viscosity of different hydrocarbons (timing how long it takes to drip down the tile)
Students should identify the IV and DV and describe the control of the CV.
Evaluate the quality of your dataEquipment Required:
white tiles
samples of hydrocabons
small metal tubs (mineral wool)
pipettes
splints
timers
- Suggested Activity:
- The complete combustion of a hydrocarbon produces carbon dioxide and water.
- Lesson 04 - What is cracking and why is it done? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Hydrocarbons can be broken down (cracked) to produce smaller, more useful molecules.
- Suggested Activity:
Ask students to recall or work out what the term thermal decomposition means
- Suggested Activity:
- Cracking can be done by various methods including catalytic cracking and steam cracking.
- Suggested Activity:
Model the idea of cracking using diagrams and pupil demos
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe in general terms the conditions used for catalytic cracking and steam cracking.
- Suggested Activity:
Students construct word or symbol equations to show the process of cracking with steam
- Suggested Activity:
- The products of cracking include alkanes and another type of hydrocarbon called alkenes.
- Suggested Activity:
demo cracking to show the products formed
Equipment Required:
Cracking demo
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to balance chemical equations as examples of cracking given the formulae of the reactants and products.
- Suggested Activity:
demo and example of how to complete cracking equations and then give a range for students to complete
- Suggested Activity:
- Alkenes are more reactive than alkanes and react with bromine water, which is used as a test for alkenes.
- Suggested Activity:
Teach students that C=C bond in alkenes and that is what makes them different to alkanes
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to recall the colour change when bromine water reacts with an alkene.
- Suggested Activity:
Class practical - identifying unknown hydrocarbons using bromine water
Equipment Required:
test tubes filled with cyclohexane and cyclohexene labelled A and B.
Bromine water.
- Suggested Activity:
- There is a high demand for fuels with small molecules and so some of the products of cracking are useful as fuels.
- Suggested Activity:
Tidying away task: "Why is cracking so important?"
Use images to prompt students if necessary
- Suggested Activity:
- Alkenes are used to produce polymers and as starting materials for the production of many other chemicals.
- Students should be able to give examples to illustrate the usefulness of cracking. They should also be able to explain how modern life depends on the uses of hydrocarbons. (For Combined Science: Trilogy and Synergy students do not need to know the formulae or names of individual alkenes.)
- Hydrocarbons can be broken down (cracked) to produce smaller, more useful molecules.
- Lesson 05 - How do alkenes differ from alkanes? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Alkenes are hydrocarbons with a double carbon-carbon bond.
- Suggested Activity:
Stretch - identify if hydrocarbons are alkanes or alkenes using their structural formulas
Challenge - identify if hydrocarbons are alkanes or alkenes using only their empirical formulas
- Suggested Activity:
- The general formula for the homologous series of alkenes is CnH2n. Recognise substances that are alkenes from their names or from given formulae in these forms.
- Suggested Activity:
Ask them to deduce the general formula from the starter activity
- Suggested Activity:
- Alkene molecules are unsaturated because they contain two fewer hydrogen atoms than the alkane with the same number of carbon atoms.
- Suggested Activity:
Compare the structures of both and remind them of the reaction with chlorine.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the reactions and conditions for the addition of water alkenes
- Suggested Activity:
Introduce the concept of specific conditions for addition reactions.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the reactions and conditions for the addition of halogens to alkenes
- The first four members of the homologous series of alkenes are ethene, propene, butene and pentene.
- Suggested Activity:
Apply Monkeys Eat Peanut Butter to the alkenes
- Suggested Activity:
- Alkene molecules can be represented in the following forms: C3H6 or displayed formula
- Students do not need to know the names of individual alkenes other than ethene, propene, butene and pentene.
- Suggested Activity:
Draw the structural and display formula for the first five alkenes.
- Suggested Activity:
- Alkenes are hydrocarbons with the functional group C=C.
- Suggested Activity:
Teach what a functional group is and then ask them to identify the functional groups of alkenes, alcohols and carboxylic acids
- Suggested Activity:
- It is the generality of reactions of functional groups that determine the reactions of organic compounds.
- Alkenes react with oxygen in combustion reactions in the same way as other hydrocarbons, but they tend to burn in air with smoky flames because of incomplete combustion.
- Alkenes react with hydrogen, water and the halogens, by the addition of atoms across the carbon-carbon double bond so that the double bond becomes a single carbon-carbon bond.
- Students should be able to describe the reactions and conditions for the addition of hydrogen to alkenes
- Students should be able to describe the reactions and conditions for the addition of hydrogen to alkenes
- Students should be able to draw fully displayed structural formulae of the first four members of the alkenes and the products of their addition reactions with hydrogen, water, chlorine, bromine and iodine.
- Suggested Activity:
Produce a table that summarises the different reactions of alkenes, it should include their reaction with oxygen, with air, addition hydrogen and halogens. The table should include any critical observations and the products formed.
Equipment Required:
teacher demo:
complete combustion of hydrocarbons - bunsen burnen open burning clean (ethene)
incomplete combustion - bunsen burner closed or spirit burner with butane/hexane(?) one with a smokey flame.
class practical:
16 test tubes with small amount of alkane and 16 with small amount of alkene. 6-8 bottles of bromine water.
- Suggested Activity:
- Alkenes are hydrocarbons with a double carbon-carbon bond.
- Lesson 06 - How can alcohols be made? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Alcohols contain the functional group ?OH.
- Suggested Activity:
Recall the functional group from alcohols from last lesson
- Suggested Activity:
- Methanol, ethanol, propanol and butanol are the first four members of a homologous series of alcohols. Opportunities when investigating reactions of alcohols.
- Suggested Activity:
Apply the naming process Monkey's Eat Peanut Butter to the first four members of the alcohols
- Suggested Activity:
- Alcohols can be represented in the following forms: CH3CH2OH or displayed formula
- Suggested Activity:
Deduce the structure of the first four alcohols
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe what happens when any of the first four alcohols react with sodium
- Students should be able to recognise alcohols from their names from given formulae.
- Students should be able to describe what happens when any of the first four alcohols react with burn in air
- Suggested Activity:
Demo the reaction of alcohols with sodium. Students can complete the rest of the practicals themselves constructing a table of the products and observations.
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000463/the-properties-of-alcohols?cmpid=CMP00005962Equipment Required:
Each group of students will need:
Test tubes, 2
Boiling tubes, 2
Beakers (100 cm3), 2 (Note 2)
Tin lid
Wooden splint
Heat resistant mat
Bunsen burner
Boiling tube holder
Dropping pipette (for water)
Universal indicator paper (full range, pH 1-14)
Forceps for sodium
Filter paper for sodium
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe what happens when any of the first four alcohols are added to water
- Students should be able to recall the main uses of these alcohols.
- Suggested Activity:
Tidying away task:
Identify the main use of alcohols (use images to prompt)
- Suggested Activity:
- Aqueous solutions of ethanol are produced when sugar solutions are fermented using yeast.
- Students should know the conditions used for fermentation of sugar using yeast.
- Students do not need to know the names of individual alcohols other than methanol, ethanol, propanol and butanol.
- Students are not expected to write balanced chemical equations for the reactions of alcohols other than for combustion reactions.
- Alcohols contain the functional group ?OH.
- Lesson 07 - How are carboxylic acids and esters made and what do they do? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe what happens when any of the first four alcohols react with an oxidising agent
- Carboxylic acids have the functional group ?COOH.
- Suggested Activity:
show the structural formula of an alcohol and oxygen and ask what the product might look like. students should then identified the functional group.
- Suggested Activity:
- The first four members of a homologous series of carboxylic acids are methanoic acid, ethanoic acid, propanoic acid and butanoic acid. (WS) Opportunies within investigation of the reactions of carboxylic acids.
- The structures of carboxylic acids can be represented in the following
forms: CH3COOH or displayed formula
- Students should be able to recognise carboxylic acids from their names or from given formulae.
- Suggested Activity:
apply previous learning to identify the names and the structures of the first four carboxylic acids
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) explain why carboxylic acids are weak acids in terms of ionisation and pH (see Strong and weak acids
- Students should be able to describe what happens when any of the first four carboxylic acids react with carbonates
- Students should be able to describe what happens when any of the first four carboxylic acids dissolve in water
- Suggested Activity:
Reactions of carboxylic acids:
1. Testing for pH:
universal indicator or universal indicator paper
2. Dissolve in solution and re test the pH
3. React with a metal carbonate and bubble gas through limewater to show productsEquipment Required:
1.0M ethanoic acid
test tubes
universal indicator
pipettes
lime water
bungs with delivery tubes
metal carbonates
- Suggested Activity:
- Students do not need to know the names of individual carboxylic acids other than methanoic acid, ethanoic acid, propanoic acid and butanoic acid.
- Students should be able to describe what happens when any of the first four carboxylic acids react with alcohols.
- Suggested Activity:
preparing etsers
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00001743/making-esters-from-alcohols-and-acids?cmpid=CMP00005257Equipment Required:
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00001743/making-esters-from-alcohols-and-acids?cmpid=CMP00005257
*please put conc acid in test tube for the lesson*
Each working group will require:
Eye protection
Glass specimen tubes, 4 (Note 1)
Plastic dropping pipettes, access to adequate supply
Beaker (100 cm3 or 250 cm3), (Note 1)
Test-tubes, 4
Test-tube rack
Bunsen burner
Heat resistant mat
Tripod and gauze
Crucible tongs
- Suggested Activity:
- Students are not expected to write balanced chemical equations for the reactions of carboxylic acids.
- Students do not need to know the names of esters other than ethyl ethanoate.
- Students should be able to describe what happens when any of the first four alcohols react with an oxidising agent
- Lesson 01 - What is crude oil? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C2.3
- Lesson 01 - How can we identify the purity of a substance? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- In chemistry, a pure substance is a single element or compound, not mixed with any other substance.
- Suggested Activity:
Design a flow chart assigning elements/compounds/mixtures as pure or impure.
Why is 'pure' orange juice not pure?
- Suggested Activity:
- A formulation is a mixture that has been designed as a useful product.
- Suggested Activity:
Case study: How tablets are made to ensure that the taker receives the correct dose of medication.
- Suggested Activity:
- Pure elements and compounds melt and boil at specific temperatures. Melting point and boiling point data can be used to distinguish pure substances from mixtures.
- Suggested Activity:
Study a range of melting points of pure and impure substances. Students draw conclusions from this.
- Suggested Activity:
- Formulations include fuels, cleaning agents, paints, medicines, alloys, fertilisers and foods.
- Suggested Activity:
Study a recipe and discuss how changing the recipe may affect the food product made. Link to formulations and why we use formulations
- Suggested Activity:
- In everyday language, a pure substance can mean a substance that has had nothing added to it, so it is unadulterated and in its natural state, eg pure milk.
- Formulations are made by mixing the components in carefully measured quantities to ensure that the product has the required properties.
- Suggested Activity:
Suggested practical:
Making mayonnaiseEquipment Required:
Making mayonnaise
Per group:
•Small screw top bottles (100 cm3) or test tubes and bungs
• Pipettes
• Teaspoons (or disposable plastic spoons)
• Cooking oil
• Washing up liquid
• Sugar
• Flour
• Mustard powder
• Egg
• 2 bowls (or 100 cm3 glass beakers)
• Egg yolk separator
•Plastic disposable gloves
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to use melting point and boiling point data to distinguish pure from impure substances.
- Suggested Activity:
Analyse information on the melting points of pure gold against counterfeits as a method for determining purity
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to identify formulations given appropriate information.
- In chemistry, a pure substance is a single element or compound, not mixed with any other substance.
- Lesson 02 - How can we use chemical tests to identify an unknown gas? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The test for carbon dioxide uses an aqueous solution of calcium hydroxide (lime water). When carbon dioxide is shaken with or bubbled through limewater the limewater turns milky (cloudy).
- Suggested Activity:
Practical: Testing for different gases
- Hydrogen
- Carbon dioxide
- Oxygen
- Chlorine
Students to plan and investigate the gas testsEquipment Required:
Practical: Testing for different gases
Prepared samples of:
- Hydrogen
- Oxygen
- Chlorine
Equipment to prepare Carbon dioxide:
-Marble chips
-Hydrochloric acid
-Delivery tubes
-Conical flasks
- Suggested Activity:
- Students do not need to know the names of components in proprietary products.
- The test for hydrogen uses a burning splint held at the open end of a test tube of the gas. Hydrogen burns rapidly with a pop sound
- The test for chlorine uses litmus paper. When damp litmus paper is put into chlorine gas the litmus paper is bleached and turns white.
- The test for oxygen uses a glowing splint inserted into a test tube of the gas. The splint relights in oxygen
- The test for carbon dioxide uses an aqueous solution of calcium hydroxide (lime water). When carbon dioxide is shaken with or bubbled through limewater the limewater turns milky (cloudy).
- Lesson 03 - How can we use paper chromatography to identify an unknown mixture? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Chromatography can be used to separate mixtures and can give information to help identify substances.
- Chromatography involves a stationary phase and a mobile phase.
- Separation depends on the distribution of substances between the phases
- Suggested Activity:
Watch video of cars racing down runway (attached on ppt on shared drive). Thinking point - Why did the cars cross the line at different times?
- Suggested Activity:
- The ratio of the distance moved by a compound (centre of spot from origin) to the distance moved by the solvent can be expressed as its R value
- RT = distance moved by substance / distance moved by solvent
- Different compounds have different R values in different solvents,
- Suggested Activity:
Students use mock chromatograms to calculate Rf values and identify unknown substance. Spice it up as a ransom note.
- Suggested Activity:
- Rf values can be used to help identify the compounds.
- The compounds in a mixture may separate into different spots depending on the solvent but a pure compound will produce a single spot in all solvents.
- Students should be able to explain how paper chromatography separates mixtures
- Suggested Activity:
Research where chromatography is used in forensics - Inks, colourings, dyes, drugs etc
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to suggest how chromatographic methods can be used for distinguishing pure substances from impure substances
- Students should be able to interpret chromatograms and determine R values from
chromatograms - provide answers to an appropriate number of significant figures. (MS)
- Elements and compounds can be detected and identified using instrumental methods. Instrumental methods are accurate, sensitive and rapid.
- Students should be able to state advantages of instrumental methods compared with the chemical tests in this specification.
- Chromatography can be used to separate mixtures and can give information to help identify substances.
- Lesson 04 - Required practical: Chromatography Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required practical 6 - Chromatography (AT skills 1,4)
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate how paper chromatography can be used to separate and tell the
difference between coloured substances.Equipment Required:
For the basic method - per group
• a 250 cm3 beaker
• a wooden spill or pencil to support the chromatography paper
• paper clip
• a ruler
• a pencil
• distilled water
• four known food colourings labelled A–D
• unknown food colouring labelled U
• rectangle of chromatography paper
• five glass capillary melting point tubes.
- Suggested Activity:
- Required practical 6 - Chromatography (AT skills 1,4)
- Lesson 05 - How can we use chemical tests to identify unknown ionic compounds? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Flame tests can be used to identify some metal ions (cations). Lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium and copper compounds produce distinctive colours in flame tests: ? lithium compounds result in a crimson flame
? sodium compounds result in a yellow flame
? potassium compounds result in a lilac flame
? calcium compounds result in an orange-red flame
? copper compounds result in a green flame.
- Suggested Activity:
Flame tests.
Equipment Required:
Splints. Metal oxide powders for testing flame tests.
- Suggested Activity:
- If a sample containing a mixture of ions is used some flame colours can be masked
- Carbonates react with dilute acids to form carbon dioxide gas. Carbon dioxide can be identified with limewater.
- Suggested Activity:
Students design a flow diagram on testing for positive ions.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to identify species from the results of the tests in 4.8.3.1 to 4.8.3.5.
- Halide ions in solution produce precipitates with silver nitrate solution in the presence of dilute nitric acid. Silver chloride is white, silver bromide is cream and silver iodide is yellow.
- Suggested Activity:
Students design a flow diagram on testing for negative ions.
- Suggested Activity:
- Flame colours of other metal ions are not required knowledge.
- Suggested Activity:
SEPARATE EW
A group of students had four different colourless solutions in beakers 1, 2, 3 and 4,
The students knew that the solutions were
• sodium chloride
• sodium iodide
• sodium carbonate
• potassium carbonate
but did not know which solution was in each beaker.
Plan a method that could be used to identify each solution.
You may use the following reagents:
• dilute nitric acid
• silver nitrate solution.
It is suggested that a flame test is used to identify the positive ions.
Outline a method that could identify the four solutions.
You should include the results of the tests you describe.
- Suggested Activity:
- Flame tests can be used to identify some metal ions (cations). Lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium and copper compounds produce distinctive colours in flame tests: ? lithium compounds result in a crimson flame
- Lesson 06 - Required practical: Identifying ions Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required practical 7 - identifying ions (AT skills 1,8)
- Suggested Activity:
Use of chemical tests to identify the ions in unknown single ionic compounds
covering the ions from Flame tests and sulphates.Equipment Required:
LiCl, NaCl, KCl, CaCl, CuCl powders
Na2Co3, Na2So4, NaCl, NaBr, NaI 0.4M solutions
Unknown Solution=0.4M KCl.
0.4M barium choride sol,
0.4M nitric acid, 0.05M silver nitrate sol.
Limewater, boiling tubes & delivery tubes.
Nichrome wires
- Suggested Activity:
- Sulfate ions in solution produce a white precipitate with barium chloride solution in the presence of dilute hydrochloric acid.
- Sodium hydroxide solution can be used to identify some metal ions (cations).
- Solutions of aluminium, calcium and magnesium ions form white precipitates when sodium hydroxide solution is added but only the aluminium hydroxide precipitate dissolves in excess sodium hydroxide solution.
- Solutions of copper(II), iron(II) and iron(III) ions form coloured precipitates when sodium hydroxide solution is added. Copper(II) forms a blue precipitate, iron(II) a green precipitate and iron(III) a brown precipitate.
- Students should be able to write balanced equations for the reactions to produce the insoluble hydroxides.
- Students are not expected to write equations for the production of sodium aluminate.
- Flame emission spectroscopy is an example of an instrumental method used to analyse metal ions in solutions.
- Suggested Activity:
GCSE pod video on flame emission spectroscopy brilliantly explains the process. Link back to why it is a more reliable test than a basic flame test.
- Suggested Activity:
- The sample is put into a flame and the light given out is passed through a spectroscope. The output is a line spectrum that can be analysed to identify the metal ions in the solution and measure their concentrations.
- Students should be able to interpret an instrumental result given appropriate data in chart or tabular form, when accompanied by a reference set in the same form, limited to flame emission spectroscopy.
- Required practical 7 - identifying ions (AT skills 1,8)
- Lesson 01 - How can we identify the purity of a substance? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C2.4
- Lesson 01 - How has the Earth's atmopshere changed since its formation? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students to recall current composition of the earths atmosphere: about four-fifths (approximately 80 %) nitrogen, about one-fifth (approximately 20 %) oxygen and small proportions of various other gases, including carbon dioxide, water vapour and noble gases.
- Suggested Activity:
Draw accurate pie charts for the composition of the atmosphere.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to, given appropriate information, interpret
evidence and evaluate different theories about the Earth's early
atmosphere.- Suggested Activity:
Earths early atmosphere:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Gyn754vw8ZQ
- Suggested Activity:
- One theory suggests that during the first billion years of the Earth's
existence there was intense volcanic activity that released gases that
formed the early atmosphere and water vapour that condensed to
form the oceans. At the start of this period the Earth's atmosphere
may have been like the atmospheres of Mars and Venus today,
consisting of mainly carbon dioxide with little or no oxygen gas.- Suggested Activity:
Evolution of the Earth's atmosphere:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gwGeH9O8Rx4
- Suggested Activity:
- Volcanoes also produced nitrogen which gradually built up in the
atmosphere and there may have been small proportions of methane
and ammonia.
- When the oceans formed carbon dioxide dissolved in the water and
carbonates were precipitated producing sediments, reducing the
amount of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere. No knowledge of other
theories is required. - Algae and plants produced the oxygen that is now in the atmosphere
by photosynthesis, which can be represented by the equation.- Suggested Activity:
Demo: Aquatic plants (eg Elodea) producing oxygen in daylight.
(Interleaving opportunity to require practical with colours and ruler for intensity).Equipment Required:
DEMO:
Aquatic plant in water with high carbonate concentration.
Lamp
different coloured acetates
meter ruler
- Suggested Activity:
- Algae first produced oxygen about 2.7 billion years ago and soon after
this oxygen appeared in the atmosphere. Over the next billion years
plants evolved and the percentage of oxygen gradually increased to a
level that enabled animals to evolve. - Algae and plants decreased the percentage of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere by photosynthesis.
- Carbon dioxide was also decreased by the formation of sedimentary rocks and fossil fuels that contain carbon.
- Students should be able to describe the main changes in the atmosphere over time and some of the likely causes of these changes
- Suggested Activity:
2 x Demos to show the reactions occurring in a volcano
EW: Describe the theory of the evolution of the Earth’s early atmosphere.
or
Explain why the composition of the atmosphere has changed over billions of years.
or
Compare the Earth’s atmosphere to that of Mars and Venus.Equipment Required:
Demo 1:
1. Cover the desk with foil and complete the demonstration behind a safety
screen. Wear eye protection.
2. Spread approximately 5g of Potassium Permanganate (VII) on to the
metal dish.
3. Pour over approximately 10ml of glycerol, stand back and observe.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe and explain the formation of deposits of limestone, coal, crude oil and natural gas.
- Students to recall current composition of the earths atmosphere: about four-fifths (approximately 80 %) nitrogen, about one-fifth (approximately 20 %) oxygen and small proportions of various other gases, including carbon dioxide, water vapour and noble gases.
- Lesson 02 - How does carbon dioxide help sustain earths climate? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Oreenhouse gases in the atmosphere maintain temperatures on Earth high enough to support life. Water vapour, carbon dioxide and methane are greenhouse gases.
- Suggested Activity:
Describe the effect of greenhouse gases on wavelength.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the greenhouse effect in terms of the interaction of short and long wavelength radiation with matter.
- Some human activities increase the amounts of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere. These include:
- carbon dioxide
- methane.
Students should be able to recall two human activities that increase the amounts of each of the greenhouse gases carbon dioxide and methane. - Based on peer-reviewed evidence, many scientists believe that human activities will cause the temperature of the Earth's atmosphere to increase at the surface and that this will result in global climate change. - b
- There are difficulties in such complex systems as global climate change. This leads to simplified models, speculation and opinions presented in the media that may be based on only parts of the evidence and which may be biased.
- Students should be able to evaluate the quality of evidence in a report about global climate change given appropriate information
- Students should be able to describe uncertainties in the evidence base
- Students should be able to recognise the importance of peer review of results and of communicating results to a wide range of audiences.
- Suggested Activity:
Use the internet to obtain data for concentrations of greenhouse gases.
Evaluate the reliability of the data available on the internet.
Research the process of peer review in reporting results/data.
- Suggested Activity:
- Oreenhouse gases in the atmosphere maintain temperatures on Earth high enough to support life. Water vapour, carbon dioxide and methane are greenhouse gases.
- Lesson 03 - How is human activity resulting in climate change? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- An increase in average global temperature is a major cause of climate change.
There are several potential effects of global climate changes.- Suggested Activity:
Causes of climate change
https://www.bbc.com/education/clips/zvw34wx
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe briefly four potential effects of global climate change
- Suggested Activity:
Greenhouse effect and global warming
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dP-tg4atr5M
Watch the polar ice caps melting and water levels rising but building land with the plasticine, add water and 1 ice cube. Mark water level on the beaker, allow ice to melt and check water level and effects on land.Equipment Required:
Beakers
plasticine
(SNK likes pertri dishes)
Ice
OHP pens
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to discuss the scale, risk and environmental implications of global climate change.
- The carbon footprint is the total amount of carbon dioxide and other greenhouse gases emitted over the full life cycle of a product, service or event.
- Suggested Activity:
Describe what a carbon footprint is.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YB9TCxhjVHo
Calculate students carbon footprints using:
WWF Footprint Calculator
- Suggested Activity:
- The carbon footprint can be reduced by reducing emissions of carbon dioxide and methane.
- Students should be able to describe actions to reduce emissions of carbon dioxide and methane
- Suggested Activity:
Describe how emissions can be reduced. Suggest the consequences of the reductions on the Earth, atmosphere and everyday life.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to give reasons why actions may be limited.
- An increase in average global temperature is a major cause of climate change.
- Lesson 04 - What are the consequences of burning fossil fuels upon the atmopshere? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The combustion of fuels is a major source of atmospheric pollutants.
- Most fuels, including coal, contain carbon and/or hydrogen and may also contain some sulfur.
- Suggested Activity:
What is combustion?
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zEjEqnMBdEM
- Suggested Activity:
- The gases released into the atmosphere when a fuel is burned may include carbon dioxide, water vapour, carbon monoxide, sulfur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen. Solid particles and unburned hydrocarbons may also be released that form particulates in the atmosphere.
- Suggested Activity:
Combustion and acid rain
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HE6Y0iEuXMQ
Explain why the following can be produced in combustion:
• Carbon dioxide
• Carbon monoxide
• Soot
• Water vapour
• Sulfur dioxide
• Oxides of nitrogen.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe how carbon monoxide, soot (carbon particles), sulfur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen are produced by burning fuels.
- Suggested Activity:
Research task: Study the effects of emisions of:
• Carbon monoxide on the human body.
• Sulfur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen on acidity of rain water.
• Sulfur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen on respiratory system.
• Particulates on global dimming.
• Particulates on human health problems.
- Suggested Activity:
- Carbon monoxide is a toxic gas. It is colourless and odourless and so is not easily detected.
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate the effects of pollution on rain water using titration. Aim To find out how much alkali is needed to neutralise four samples of rain water.
enough samples for each group to test one once (20mL per group) and shared results.
China - pH 1-2
UK - pH 6
Greenland pH 7
Australia - pH 4-5
Phenolphthalein colourless in acidic and pink in alkaline solutions.Equipment Required:
4 samples of "rain water" spiked to have different pH values labelled as:
China - pH 1-2
UK - pH 6
Greenland pH 7
Australia - pH 4-5
(in main chem store)
enough samples for each group to test one once (20mL per group) and shared results.
alkali solution (NaOH) that will neutralise each sample(countries) at a suitable concentration.
burettes
conical flasks
Universal indicator
pipettes
20mL measuring cylinders
NaOH 1molar 50ml per group in burettes
- Suggested Activity:
- Sulfur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen cause respiratory problems in humans and cause acid rain.
- Particulates cause global dimming and health problems for humans.
- Students should be able to describe and explain the problems caused by increased amounts of these pollutants in the air.
- The combustion of fuels is a major source of atmospheric pollutants.
- Lesson 01 - How has the Earth's atmopshere changed since its formation? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C2.5
- Lesson 01 - Should we use plastic or paper bags? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Humans use the Earth's resources to provide warmth, shelter, food and transport.
- Suggested Activity:
Think Pair Share
Show picture of a carton of orange juice. Get students to think about all of the different materials that go into making that product and where they come from.
- Suggested Activity:
- Natural resources, supplemented by agriculture, provide food, timber, clothing and fuels.
- Finite resources from the Earth, oceans and atmosphere are processed to provide energy and materials.
- Chemistry plays an important role in improving agricultural and industrial processes to provide new products and in sustainable development, which is development that meets the needs of current generations without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs.
- Suggested Activity:
Analyse data as to estimates of how long different resources will last.
What options do we have and when they run out
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to state examples of natural products that are supplemented or replaced by agricultural and synthetic products.
- Suggested Activity:
Research examples of natural products that are supplemented or replaced by agricultural and synthetic products. (NYLON)
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to distinguish between finite and renewable resources given appropriate information.
- Students should be able to extract and interpret information about resources from charts, graphs and tables.
- Students should be able to use orders of magnitude to evaluate the significance of data.
- Life cycle assessments (LCAs) are carried out to assess the environmental impact of products in each of these stages:
- extracting and processing raw materials
- manufacturing and packaging
- use and operation during its lifetime
- disposal at the end of its useful life, including transport and distribution at each stage.- Suggested Activity:
TED talk LCA's:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d7F0DWjzq0U
- Suggested Activity:
- Use of water, resources, energy sources and production of some wastes can be fairly easily quantified. Allocating numerical values to pollutant effects is less straightforward and requires value judgements, so LCA is not a purely objective process.
- Suggested Activity:
Carry out a simple comparative LCAs for shopping bags made from plastic and paper. Info on shared drive
- Suggested Activity:
- Selective or abbreviated LCAs can be devised to evaluate a product but these can be misused to reach pre-determined conclusions, eg in support of claims for advertising purposes.
- Students should be able to carry out simple comparative LCAs for shopping bags made from plastic and paper.
- Humans use the Earth's resources to provide warmth, shelter, food and transport.
- Lesson 02 - How can the three R's improve our future? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The reduction in use, reuse and recycling of materials by end users reduces the use of limited resources, use of energy sources, waste and environmental impacts.
- Suggested Activity:
Recycling plastics (90's special)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=s5p6Nk3SzcU
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals, glass, building materials, clay ceramics and most plastics are produced from limited raw materials.
- Much of the energy for the processes comes from limited resources.
- Obtaining raw materials from the Earth by quarrying and mining causes environmental impacts.
- Suggested Activity:
Extended writing: Describe the environmental impacts of obtaining raw materials from the Earth.
- Suggested Activity:
- Some products, such as glass bottles, can be reused. Glass bottles can be crushed and melted to make different glass products. Other products cannot be reused and so are recycled for a different use.
- Metals can be recycled by melting and recasting or reforming into different products.
- The amount of separation required for recycling depends on the material and the properties required of the final product. For example, some scrap steel can be added to iron from a blast furnace to reduce the amount of iron that needs to be extracted from iron ore.
- Students should be able to evaluate ways of reducing the use of limited resources, given appropriate information.
- Suggested Activity:
Design an informative poster aimed at future generations to encourage them to recycle, reuse, reduce.
- Suggested Activity:
- The reduction in use, reuse and recycling of materials by end users reduces the use of limited resources, use of energy sources, waste and environmental impacts.
- Lesson 03 - How is water made safe for human consumption? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Water of appropriate quality is essential for life. For humans, drinking water should have sufficiently low levels of dissolved salts and microbes.
- Urban lifestyles and industrial processes produce large amounts of waste water that require treatment before being released into the environment.
- Water that is safe to drink is called potable water. Potable water is not pure water in the chemical sense because it contains dissolved substances.
- Suggested Activity:
Compare the composition of:
• potable water
• pure water.
Why do we not drink pure water?
- Suggested Activity:
- Sewage and agricultural waste water require removal of organic matter and harmful microbes. Industrial waste water may require removal of organic matter and harmful chemicals.
- Suggested Activity:
Treating waste water:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YW6GBciRHLg
- Suggested Activity:
- The methods used to produce potable water depend on available supplies of water and local conditions.
- Sewage treatment includes:
? screening and grit removal
? sedimentation to produce sewage sludge and effluent
? anaerobic digestion of sewage sludge
? aerobic biological treatment of effluent. - In the United Kingdom (UK), rain provides water with low levels of dissolved substances (fresh water) that collects in the ground and in lakes and rivers, and most potable water is produced by:
- choosing an appropriate source of fresh water
- passing the water through filter beds
- sterilising. - Students should be able to comment on the relative ease of obtaining potable water from waste, ground and salt water.
- Sterilising agents used for potable water include chlorine, ozone or ultraviolet light.
- Suggested Activity:
Thinking task:
Task students with coming up with a solution to supplying water to a city that only has access to salt water (such as Dubai).
Review ideas and then go through distillation and osmosis.
- Suggested Activity:
- If supplies of fresh water are limited, desalination of salty water or sea water may be required.
- Desalination can be done by distillation or
by processes that use membranes such as reverse osmosis.- Suggested Activity:
Extended writing: Describe the process of desalination.
or
Describe the process of distillation
or
Explain how distillation separates substances.
- Suggested Activity:
- These processes require large amounts of energy.
- Students should be able to distinguish between potable water and pure water.
- Students should be able to describe the differences in treatment of ground water and salty water.
- Students should be able to give reasons for the steps used to produce potable water.
- Water of appropriate quality is essential for life. For humans, drinking water should have sufficiently low levels of dissolved salts and microbes.
- Lesson 04 - Required practical - how is potable water made? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to carry out analysis and purification of water samples from different sources, including pH, dissolved solids and distillation.
- Required practical 8 - purifying water (AT skills 2,3,4)
- Students should be able to carry out analysis and purification of water samples from different sources, including pH, dissolved solids and distillation.
- Lesson 05 - How can we extract metals from low grade ores? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The Earth?s resources of metal ores are limited.
- Copper ores are becoming scarce and new ways of extracting copper from low-grade ores include phytomining, and bioleaching.
- Suggested Activity:
Think/Pair/Share
Demand for copper continues to increase, but the Earth's supplies are dwindling. How could we overcome this?
Bioleaching and Phytomining
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XF399zN36LE
- Suggested Activity:
- These methods avoid traditional mining methods of digging, moving and disposing of large amounts of rock.
- Phytomining uses plants to absorb metal compounds. The plants are harvested and then burned to produce ash that contains metal compounds.
- Suggested Activity:
Create a cartoon story board: Process of phytomining.
- Suggested Activity:
- Bioleaching uses bacteria to produce leachate solutions that contain metal compounds.
- Suggested Activity:
Bioleaching:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eLeLPYUeCH8
- Suggested Activity:
- The metal compounds can be processed to obtain the metal. For example, copper can be obtained from solutions of copper compounds by displacement using scrap iron or by electrolysis.
- Suggested Activity:
Opportunity to recap methods of extracting metals from their ores
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to evaluate alternative biological methods of metal extraction, given appropriate information.
- The Earth?s resources of metal ores are limited.
- Lesson 06 - What are NPK fertilisers? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Ammonia can be used to manufacture ammonium salts and nitric acid.
- Students should be able to recall the names of the salts produced when phosphate rock is treated with nitric acid, sulfuric acid and phosphoric acid
- Potassium chloride, potassium sulfate and phosphate rock are obtained by mining, but phosphate rock cannot be used directly as a fertiliser
- Phosphate rock is treated with nitric acid or sulfuric acid to produce soluble salts that can be used as fertilisers.
- (HT only) Students should be able to:
interpret graphs of reaction conditions versus rate - Students should be able to compare the industrial production of fertilisers with laboratory preparations of the same compounds, given appropriate information
- Compounds of nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium are used as fertilisers to improve agricultural productivity. NPK fertilisers contain compounds of all three elements.
- Industrial production of NPK fertilisers can be achieved using a variety of raw materials in several integrated processes
- NPK fertilisers are formulations of various salts containing appropriate percentages of the elements.
- Ammonia can be used to manufacture ammonium salts and nitric acid.
- Lesson 07 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
-
- Lesson 01 - Should we use plastic or paper bags? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- C2.6
- Lesson 01 - How can corrosion be useful? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Corrosion is the destruction of materials by chemical reactions with substances in the environment.
- Corrosion can be prevented by applying a coating that acts as a barrier, such as greasing, painting or electroplating.
- Suggested Activity:
Practical investigation placing nails in test tubes that contain water, oil, air or smeared with Vaseline.
Get technitians to keep for a week and ask for them back to evaluate
GF: Why are sacrifical metals used in boats?Equipment Required:
Nails
Test tubes
Rubber bungs
oil
Vaseline
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe experiments and interpret results to show that both air and water are necessary for rusting.
- Rusting is an example of corrosion. Both air and water are necessary for iron to rust.
- Some coatings are reactive and contain a more reactive metal to provide sacrificial protection, eg zinc is used to galvanise iron.
- Aluminium has an oxide coating that protects the metal from further corrosion.
- Students should be able to explain sacrificial protection in terms of relative reactivity.
- Corrosion is the destruction of materials by chemical reactions with substances in the environment.
- Lesson 02 - How are alloys made? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Most metals in everyday use are alloys.
- Suggested Activity:
Match up alloys names and what they are made from.
Practical: making solderEquipment Required:
Each group will need:
Lead (TOXIC, DANGEROUS FOR THE ENVIRONMENT), about 2 g
Tin, about 2 g
Carbon powder, about 2 g
Eye protection
Thermal protection gloves
Each working group requires:
Crucible
Pipe clay triangle
Bunsen burner
Tripod
Heat resistant mat
Spatula
Tongs (Note 1)
Casting sand (Note 2)
Metal sand trays or sturdy metal lids, 2 (Note 2)
Balance (no decimal places needed)
- Suggested Activity:
- Bronze is an alloy of copper and tin. Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc.
- Gold used as jewellery is usually an alloy with silver, copper and zinc. The proportion of gold in the alloy is measured in carats. 24 carat being 100 % (pure gold), and 18 carat being 75 % gold.
- Steels are alloys of iron that contain specific amounts of carbon and other metals.
- High carbon steel is strong but brittle. Low carbon steel is softer and more easily shaped.
- Steels containing chromium and nickel (stainless steels) are hard and resistant to corrosion.
- Aluminium alloys are low density.
- Students should be able to recall a use of each of the alloys specified.
- Most metals in everyday use are alloys.
- Lesson 03 - What products can be made from the Earth's materials? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Most of the glass we use is soda-lime glass, made by heating a mixture of sand, sodium carbonate and limestone.
- Suggested Activity:
Making concrete - testing strength using masses (consider making lesson before or testing in subsequent lessons)
Equipment Required:
making concrete:
sand
gravel
water
moulds
- Suggested Activity:
- Borosilicate glass, made from sand and boron trioxide, melts at higher temperatures than soda-lime glass.
- Students should be able to, given appropriate information compare quantitatively the physical properties of glass and clay ceramics, polymers, composites and metals.
- Students should be able to interpret and evaluate the composition and uses of alloys other
than those specified given appropriate information. - Clay ceramics, including pottery and bricks, are made by shaping wet clay and then heating in a furnace.
- Most composites are made of two materials, a matrix or binder surrounding and binding together fibres or fragments of the other material, which is called the reinforcement.
- Students should be able to recall some examples of composites.
- Most of the glass we use is soda-lime glass, made by heating a mixture of sand, sodium carbonate and limestone.
- Lesson 04 - Why are some plastics hard and others flexible? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to, given appropriate information explain how the properties of materials are related to their uses and select appropriate materials.
- Thermosoftening polymers melt when they are heated. Thermosetting polymers do not melt when they are heated.
- The properties of polymers depend on what monomers they are made from and the conditions under which they are made. For example, low density (LD) and high density (HD) poly(ethene) are produced from ethene.
- Suggested Activity:
Observe everyday examples of LH and HD polymers to deduce their properties and structure
Equipment Required:
cleaned out examples of high and low density plastics, as below or similar:
Low density:
milk carton
food packaging
clingfilm
carrier bags
plastic fizzy drink bottle
high density:
hard plastics (trays)
pens
drink bottle
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how low density and high density poly(ethene) are both produced from ethene.
- Students should be able to explain the difference between thermosoftening and thermosetting polymers in terms of their structures.
- Students should be able to, given appropriate information explain how the properties of materials are related to their uses and select appropriate materials.
- Lesson 01 - How can corrosion be useful? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- P2.1
- Lesson 01 - What are the different forces and how are they classified? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A force is a push or pull that acts on an object due to the interaction with another object.
- All forces between objects are either:
- contact forces - the objects are physically touching
- non-contact forces - the objects are physically separated. - Examples of contact forces include friction, air resistance, tension and normal contact force.
- Examples of non-contact forces are gravitational force, electrostatic force and magnetic force.
- Students should be able to describe the interaction between pairs of objects which produce a force on each object. The forces should be able to be represented as vectors.
- Force is a vector quantity.
- Vector quantities have magnitude and an associated direction.
- A vector quantity may be represented by an arrow. The length of the arrow represents the magnitude, and the direction of the arrow the direction of the vector quantity.
- Scalar quantities have magnitude only.
- A force is a push or pull that acts on an object due to the interaction with another object.
- Lesson 02 - How is a resultant force calculated? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A number of forces acting on an object may be replaced by a single force that has the same effect as all the original forces acting together. This single force is called the resultant force.
- Students should be able to calculate the resultant of two forces that act in a straight line.
- Students should be able to describe examples of the forces acting on an isolated object or system.
- Students should be able to use free body diagrams to describe qualitatively examples where several forces lead to a resultant force on an object, including balanced forces when the resultant force is zero.
- A single force can be resolved into two components acting at right angles to each other. The two component forces together have the same effect as the single force.
- A number of forces acting on an object may be replaced by a single force that has the same effect as all the original forces acting together. This single force is called the resultant force.
- Lesson 03 - What is the difference between mass and weight? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Weight is measured using a calibrated spring-balance (a newtonmeter).
- The weight of an object and the mass of an object are directly
proportional. - The weight of an object depends on the gravitational field strength at the point where the object is.
- Weight is the force acting on an object due to gravity. The force of gravity close to the Earth is due to the gravitational field around the Earth.
- The weight of an object may be considered to act at a single point
referred to as the object's centre of mass. - The weight of an object can be calculated using the equation:
weight = mass x gravitational field strength
W = m g
weight, W, in newtons, N
mass, m, in kilograms, kg
gravitational field strength, g, in newtons per kilogram, N/kg
(In any calculation the value of the gravitational field strength (g) will be given.)
- Weight is measured using a calibrated spring-balance (a newtonmeter).
- Lesson 04 - How much work is done to lift a coffee jar? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- When a force causes an object to move through a distance work is done on the object.
- A force does work on an object when the force causes a displacement of the object.
- One joule of work is done when a force of one newton causes a displacement of one metre.
1 joule = 1 newton-metre - Students should be able to convert between newton-metres and joules
- (MS) The work done by a force on an object can be calculated using the equation:
work done = force ? distance moved along the line of action of the force
W = F s
work done, W, in joules, J
force, F, in newtons, N
distance, s, in metres, m - Students should be able to describe the energy transfer involved when work is done.
- Work done against the frictional forces acting on an object causes a rise in
the temperature of the object.
- When a force causes an object to move through a distance work is done on the object.
- Lesson 05 - What happens to an object when it is stretched? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to give examples of the forces involved in stretching, bending or compressing an object
- A force that stretches (or compresses) a spring does work and elastic potential energy is stored in the spring.
- Students should be able to explain why, to change the shape of an object (by stretching, bending or compressing), more than one force has to be applied ? this is limited to stationary objects only
- Provided the spring is not inelastically deformed, the work done on the spring and the elastic potential energy stored are equal.
- Students should be able to describe the difference between elastic deformation and inelastic deformation caused by stretching forces.
- The extension of an elastic object, such as a spring, is directly proportional to the force applied, provided that the limit of proportionality is not exceeded.
- (MS) force = spring constant ? extension
F = k e
force, F, in newtons, N
spring constant, k, in newtons per metre, N/m extension, e, in metres, m
This relationship also applies to the compression of an elastic object, where
?e? would be the compression of the object. - Students should be able to describe the difference between a linear and non-linear relationship between force and extension
- Students should be able to give examples of the forces involved in stretching, bending or compressing an object
- Lesson 06 - Required Practical - Extension of a spring Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to calculate a spring constant in linear cases
- Required practical activity 6 (Part 1) -force and extension for a spring. (AT skills 1 and 2)
- Students should be able to interpret data from an investigation of the relationship between force and extension
- Students should be able to calculate work done in stretching (or compressing) a spring (up to the limit of proportionality) using the equation:
elastic potential energy = 0.5 x spring constant s extension(squared)
E = 0.5 k e(squared) - Students should be able to calculate relevant values of stored energy and energy transfers.
- Students should be able to calculate a spring constant in linear cases
- Lesson 07 - How do the forces that cause rotation result in a moment? (Separates only) Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A force or a system of forces may cause an object to rotate.
- Students should be able to describe examples in which forces cause
rotation. - The turning effect of a force is called the moment of the force.
- (MS) The size of
the moment is defined by the equation:
moment of a force = force ? distance
M = F d
moment of a force, M, in newton-metres, Nm
force, F, in newtons, N
distance, d, is the perpendicular distance from the pivot to the line of action
of the force, in metres, m. - If an object is balanced, the total clockwise moment about a pivot equals
the total anticlockwise moment about that pivot. - Students should be able to calculate the size of a force, or its distance from
a pivot, acting on an object that is balanced.
- A force or a system of forces may cause an object to rotate.
- Lesson 08 - How do levers and gears transmit the rotational effects of forces? (Separates only) Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A simple lever and a simple gear system can both be used to transmit the
rotational effects of force - Students should be able to explain how levers and gears transmit the
rotational effects of forces.
- A simple lever and a simple gear system can both be used to transmit the
- Lesson 01 - What are the different forces and how are they classified? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- P2.2
- Lesson 01 - How can speed be calculated? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Distance is how far an object moves. Distance does not involve direction.
- Speed does not involve direction. Speed is a scalar quantity.
- Distance is a scalar quantity.
- The speed of a moving object is rarely constant. When people walk,
run or travel in a car their speed is constantly changing. - Displacement includes both the distance an object moves, measured in a straight line from the start point to the finish point and the direction of that straight line.
- The speed at which a person can walk, run or cycle depends on many
factors including: age, terrain, fitness and distance travelled.
Typical values may be taken as:
walking ? 1.5 m/s
running ? 3 m/s
cycling ? 6 m/s.
- Displacement is a vector quantity.
- Students should be able to recall typical values of speed for a person
walking, running and cycling as well as the typical values of speed for
different types of transportation systems. - Students should be able to express a displacement in terms of both the
magnitude and direction. - It is not only moving objects that have varying speed. The speed of
sound and the speed of the wind also vary. - A typical value for the speed of sound in air is 330 m/s
- Students should be able to make measurements of distance and time
and then calculate speeds of objects.- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
Use data logger with trolley to investigate variables that affect speed of trolley (remember to lift the trolley when returning to the start position)Equipment Required:
Data loggers
Laptop with software
Light gates
Ramps
Diff. surfaces
Trolleys
Metre Rulers
- Suggested Activity:
- (MS) For an object moving at constant speed the distance travelled in a
specific time can be calculated using the equation:
distance travelled = speed ? time
s = v t
distance, s, in metres, m
speed, v, in metres per second, m/s
time, t, in seconds, s - (MS) Students should be able to calculate average speed for non-uniform motion.
- Distance is how far an object moves. Distance does not involve direction.
- Lesson 02 - What is the difference between velocity and speed? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The velocity of an object is its speed in a given direction.
- If an object moves along a straight line, the distance travelled can be represented by a distance?time graph.
- Velocity is a vector quantity.
- The speed of an object can be calculated from the gradient of its distance?time graph.
- Students should be able to explain the vector?scalar distinction as it applies to displacement, distance, velocity and speed.
- (HT only) If an object is accelerating, its speed at any particular time can be determined by drawing a tangent and measuring the gradient of the distance?time graph at that time.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
Use data logger and air track to investigate accelerationEquipment Required:
air track
air blower
accessories box
2 clamp stands
- Suggested Activity:
- HT only) Students should be able to explain qualitatively, with examples, that motion in a circle involves constant speed but changing velocity.
- The velocity of an object is its speed in a given direction.
- Lesson 03 - How can graphs show a journey? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to draw distance?time graphs from measurements and extract and interpret lines and slopes of distance?time graphs, translating information between graphical and numerical form.
- Suggested Activity:
Model a journey - kids walk a distance-time graph
Drawing graphs from bits of proseEquipment Required:
Tape measures
Graph paper
Stop clocks
Pencils
Rulers
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to determine speed from a distance?time graph.
- The average acceleration of an object can be calculated using the equation:
acceleration = change in velocity
time taken
a = ? v t
acceleration, a, in metres per second squared, m/s2 change in velocity, ?v, in metres per second, m/s time, t, in seconds, s - (Physics only) Students should be able to draw and interpret velocity?time graphs for objects that reach terminal velocity
- Students should be able to draw distance?time graphs from measurements and extract and interpret lines and slopes of distance?time graphs, translating information between graphical and numerical form.
- Lesson 04 - How can we calculate acceleration? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- An object that slows down is decelerating
- (Physics only) Students should be able to interpret the changing motion in terms of the forces acting.
- Students should be able to estimate the magnitude of everyday accelerations.
- The acceleration of an object can be calculated from the gradient of a velocity?time graph.
- Suggested Activity:
Link back to RP19 (f=ma) using light gates.
Change mass of trolley on air track. record effect on acceleration. Calculate using the SUVAT equationEquipment Required:
air track
air blower
flags
2 clamp stands
pulley system set up
- Suggested Activity:
- The following equation applies to uniform acceleration:
final velocity 2 ? initial velocity 2 = 2 ? acceleration ? distance
v2 ? u2 = 2 a s
final velocity, v, in metres per second, m/s initial velocity, u, in metres per second, m/s
acceleration, a, in metres per second squared, m/s2 distance, s, in metres, m - Near the Earth?s surface any object falling freely under gravity has an acceleration of about 9.8 m/s2.
- An object that slows down is decelerating
- Lesson 05 - How can graphs show the relationship between velocity and time? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to draw velocity?time graphs from measurements and interpret lines and slopes to determine acceleration
- Suggested Activity:
Draw velocity time graphs
Model a journey - get the kids to walk a graph.Equipment Required:
Graph paper
Pencils
Rulers
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) The distance travelled by an object (or displacement of an object) can be calculated from the area under a velocity?time graph
- (HT only) interpret enclosed areas in velocity?time graphs to determine distance travelled (or displacement)
- (HT only) measure, when appropriate, the area under a velocity?time graph by counting squares.
- Students should be able to draw velocity?time graphs from measurements and interpret lines and slopes to determine acceleration
- Lesson 06 - What is terminal velocity? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- An object falling through a fluid initially accelerates due to the force of gravity. Eventually the resultant force will be zero and the object will move at its terminal velocity.
- Suggested Activity:
Equitable learning
Demo using arrows
Brian Cox feather and bowling ball videoEquipment Required:
Giant sliding arrows on metre sticks
- Suggested Activity:
- An object falling through a fluid initially accelerates due to the force of gravity. Eventually the resultant force will be zero and the object will move at its terminal velocity.
- Lesson 01 - How can speed be calculated? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- P2.3
- Lesson 01 - What are Newton's First and Third Laws? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Newton's Third Law:
Whenever two objects interact, the forces they exert on each other are equal and opposite. - Newton's First Law:
If the resultant force acting on an object is zero and the object is stationary, the object remains stationary.
If the object is moving, the object continues to move at the same speed and in the same direction. So the object continues to move at the same velocity.- Suggested Activity:
students identify the resultant force of force diagrams and identify direction/stationary
- Suggested Activity:
- Newton's First Law:
If the resultant force acting on an object is zero and the object is moving, the object continues to move at the same speed and in the same direction. So the object continues to move at the same velocity. - Students should be able to apply Newton's Third Law to examples of equilibrium situations.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Discuss the link between Newton's Third Law and the principals of chemical equilibrium
- Suggested Activity:
- As an equation:
resultant force = mass x acceleration
F = m a
force, F, in newtons, N mass, m, in kilograms, kg
acceleration, a, in metres per second squared, m/s2- Suggested Activity:
Demo: Use the data loggers with the wooden trolley and ramp to show how increasing the force on end of the string increases acceleration. Data could be collected on logger or using laptop with easy sense software.
Equipment Required:
DEMO
Data loggers
wooden ramp
Trolley
Masses
string
retort stand x2
boss and clamp x2
- Suggested Activity:
- When a vehicle travels at a steady speed the resistive forces balance the driving force.
- Suggested Activity:
Show video clip of a racing car and ask students to consider how the forces acting on the car change at different points:
- along the straight
- around a bend
- when they reach - max speed
<https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MzQ8CzXRO8A>
- Suggested Activity:
- The velocity (speed and/or direction) of an object will only change if a resultant force is acting on the object.
- Suggested Activity:
MWB quiz to predict if an object is changing speed, direction or no change from different situations
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to apply Newton's First Law to explain the motion of objects moving with a uniform velocity and objects where the speed and/or direction changes.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: How can Newtons first law be applied to the motion of an object moving with uniform velocity and objects where the speed and/or direction changes?
- Suggested Activity:
- Newton's Third Law:
- Lesson 02 - What is Newton's Second Law? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Newton's Second Law:
The acceleration of an object is proportional to the resultant force acting on the object, and inversely proportional to the mass of the object. - Students should be able to estimate the speed, accelerations and forces involved in large accelerations for everyday road transport.
- Suggested Activity:
mix and match activity with sizes
- Suggested Activity:
- Momentum is defined by the equation:
momentum = mass ? velocity
p = m v
momentum, p, in kilograms metre per second, kg m/s
mass, m, in kilograms, kg
velocity, v, in metres per second, m/s- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
Use the air track to show the effects of momentum when:
- moving object hitting a stationary one
- moving with same speed towards each other
- both moving at the same direction with same speed
- both moving in the same one going faster than the other.
GF: Discuss the changes in momentum that occur when particles collide during a chemical reaction. You should refer to activation energy in your answer.Equipment Required:
air track
data loggers
light gates and kit
2 x clamp stands
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to complete calculations involving an event, such as the collision of two objects.
- When a force acts on an object that is moving, or able to move, a change in momentum occurs.
The equations F = m × a and a = ( v − u ) / t
combine to give the equation F = m Δ v / Δ t
where mΔv = change in momentum
ie force equals the rate of change of momentum. - (HT only) Students should be able to explain that inertial mass is defined as the ratio of force over acceleration.
- In a closed system, the total momentum before an event is equal to the total momentum after the event. This is called conservation of momentum.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Ice skater or skate boarder exam question to explain concept of conservation of momentum
Q1 - level 2
Q2 - level 3
http://EIGUIYC.exampro.net
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain safety features such as: air bags, seat belts, gymnasium crash mats, cycle helmets and cushioned surfaces for playgrounds with reference to the concept of rate of change of momentum.
- Students should be able to apply equations relating force, mass, velocity and acceleration to explain how the changes involved are inter-related. (MS)
- Students should recognise and be able to use the symbol that indicates an approximate value or approximate answer ~
- Students should be able to use the concept of momentum as a model to describe and explain examples of momentum in an event, such as a collision
- (HT only) Students should be able to explain that inertial mass is a measure of how difficult it is to change the
velocity of an object - (HT only) The tendency of objects to continue in their state of rest or of uniform motion is called inertia.
- Newton's Second Law:
- Lesson 03 - Required Practical - Acceleration Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required practical 7 - force on the acceleration (AT skills 1, 2, 3)
- Suggested Activity:
Required practical booklet, page 121:
http://filestore.aqa.org.uk/resources/science/AQA-8464-8465-PRACTICALS-HB.PDFEquipment Required:
Linear air track and gliders
datalogger
light gates
cotton & pulley on air track
10g masses on hanger
- Suggested Activity:
- Required practical 7 - force on the acceleration (AT skills 1, 2, 3)
- Required practical 7 - force on the acceleration (AT skills 1, 2, 3)
- Lesson 04 - What affect stopping distance? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Poor condition of the vehicle is limited to the vehicle's brakes or tyres.
- The stopping distance of a vehicle is the sum of the distance the vehicle travels during the driver's reaction time (thinking distance) and the distance it travels under the braking force (braking distance).
- Suggested Activity:
Model the changing stopping distance with increasing velocity. Mark lines on the floor outside the science block. Get one student to walk, jog and run. marking the distance when shouted to stop (at random) to when they actually stop
- Suggested Activity:
- The braking distance of a vehicle can be affected by adverse road and weather conditions and poor condition of the vehicle.
- For a given braking force the greater the speed of the vehicle, the greater the stopping distance.
- Adverse road conditions include wet or icy conditions.
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate the effect of different surfaces to represent different road conditions. Compare amount of friction to stopping distance.
Equipment Required:
Data loggers
wooden ramp
string
2 clamp stands boss clamps
different surfaces
water spray (to create wet roads)
- Suggested Activity:
- Reaction times vary from person to person.
- Typical values range from 0.2 s to 0.9 s.
- A driver's reaction time can be affected by tiredness, drugs and
alcohol.- Suggested Activity:
GF: Explain how caffeine effects the body's reaction times. You should include reference to the central nervous system in your answer.
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Students should be able to estimate how the distance for a vehicle to make an emergency stop varies over a range of speeds typical for that vehicle. (MS)
- Distractions may also affect a driver?s ability to react.
- Students should be able to explain the factors which affect the distance required for road transport vehicles to come to rest in emergencies, and the implications for safety
- Students should be able to estimate how the distance required for road vehicles to stop in an emergency varies over a range of typical speeds.
- Suggested Activity:
Use the image from DVLA to discuss the stopping distances at different speeds.
https://www.rac.co.uk/drive/advice/learning-to-drive/stopping-distances/
GF: Explain why fuel for areoplanes and large lorries is made up of longer chained hydrocarbons to allow them to reach their top speeds. Compare the fuel needed for a car, lorry and plane.
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Students will be required to interpret graphs relating speed to stopping distance for a range of vehicles. (MS)
- Suggested Activity:
Use graphs to show the different stages of stopping distance
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain methods used to measure human reaction times and recall typical results
- Suggested Activity:
Students compare their reaction times using the data loggers and timers. IV different hands, with/out caffeine.
Equipment Required:
data loggers and reaction timers. large piece of car with a hole to show the light on the reaction button.
decaff coke and normal coke (if wanted)
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to evaluate the effect of various factors on thinking distance based on
given data. - When a force is applied to the brakes of a vehicle, work done by the friction force between the brakes and the wheel reduces the kinetic energy of the vehicle and the temperature of the brakes increases.
- Suggested Activity:
Model the energy transfer that occurs during braking using large beakers of coloured water.
Students draw the energy transformation diagram.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to interpret and evaluate measurements from simple methods to
measure the different reaction times of students- Suggested Activity:
EW: Plan a practical to compare the reaction time of students when they drink caffeine and when they don't drink caffeine.
- Suggested Activity:
- The greater the speed of a vehicle the greater the braking force needed to stop the vehicle in a certain distance.
- The greater the braking force the greater the deceleration of the vehicle. Large decelerations may lead to brakes overheating and/or loss of control.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Explain how increasing the braking force affect deceleration and brake heat. You should refer to the energy stores in your answer.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain the dangers caused by large decelerations
- Students should be able to (HT only) estimate the forces involved in the deceleration of road vehicles in typical situations on a public road.
- Suggested Activity:
Recall the equation, practice rearranging before applying to new questions.
- Suggested Activity:
- Poor condition of the vehicle is limited to the vehicle's brakes or tyres.
- Lesson 01 - What are Newton's First and Third Laws? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- P2.4
- Lesson 01 - What is a wave? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Waves may be either transverse or longitudinal.
- Suggested Activity:
Review the difference between the types of waves using a slinky to demonstrate or phet animation https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/fourier
or
https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/legacy/wave-interferenceEquipment Required:
Large slinky
- Suggested Activity:
- The ripples on a water surface are an example of a transverse wave
- Suggested Activity:
Show images of ripples in water r show using tuning fork in water ask students to suggest if they are transverse or longitudinal waves.
Equipment Required:
tuning fork
large glass bowl filled with water
- Suggested Activity:
- Longitudinal waves show areas of compression and rarefaction.
- Sound waves travelling through air are longitudinal.
- Suggested Activity:
Use the oscilloscope to show the types of waves and how the sound wave can be changed. Make the polystyrene pieces or cornflour mixture dance using the vibrations from the speaker.
Equipment Required:
oscilloscope
signal generator
speaker with cling flim on top
polystyrene pieces or cornflour mixture
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe the difference between longitudinal and transverse waves.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Compare and contrast the difference between longitudinal and transverse waves
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe evidence that, for both ripples on a water surface and sound waves in air, it is the wave and not the water or air itself that travels.
- Students should be able to describe wave motion in terms of their amplitude.
- Suggested Activity:
Students draw and label a transverse wave (last taught in year 8)
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe wave motion in terms of their wavelength.
- Students should be able to describe wave motion in terms of their frequency.
- Students should be able to describe wave motion in terms of their period.
- The amplitude of a wave is the maximum displacement of a point on a wave away from its undisturbed position.
- The wavelength of a wave is the distance from a point on one wave to the equivalent point on the adjacent wave.
- Suggested Activity:
Use slinky's and/or lengths of string to model the effects of changing wavelength, frequency and wave speed.
Equipment Required:
slinkies
1M lengths of string (class set)
- Suggested Activity:
- The frequency of a wave is the number of waves passing a point each second.
- Period = 1 / freqency T = 1 / f
- Suggested Activity:
**combined classes teach the equation and recall wave labels in an additional lesson**
Practice using the wave equation to rearrange and calculate with changing units
- Suggested Activity:
- The wave speed is the speed at which the energy is transferred (or the wave moves) through the medium.
- All waves obey the wave equation: wave speed = frequency x wavelength v = f x λ
- Students should be able to identify amplitude and wavelength from given diagrams
- Students should be able to describe a method to measure the speed of sound waves in air.
- Waves may be either transverse or longitudinal.
- Lesson 02 - Required Practical - Waves Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required practical 8 - waves on a string (AT skills 4)
- Suggested Activity:
https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/wave-on-a-string
Equipment Required:
vibration generator
signal generator
100g masses and hanger
10g masses and hanger
wooden bridge
pulley on a clamp
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe a method to measure the speed of ripples on a water surface. (Req Prac)
- (Physics only) Students should be able to show how changes in velocity, frequency and wavelength, in transmission of sound waves from one medium to another, are inter-related.
- Suggested Activity:
Have the Reubens tube on with music playing as the students enter the room or as a starter
Equipment Required:
Reubens tube demo
- Suggested Activity:
- Required practical 8 - waves ripple tank (AT skills 4)
- Suggested Activity:
Ripple tank
Equipment Required:
ripple tank set up under visuliser
meter ruler
- Suggested Activity:
- Required practical 8 - waves on a string (AT skills 4)
- Lesson 03 - How are waves used as evidence for the structure of the Earth? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Ultrasound waves have a frequency higher than the upper limit of hearing for humans.
- Students should be aware that the study of seismic waves provided new evidence that led to discoveries about parts of the Earth which are not directly observable.
- Seismic waves are produced by earthquakes.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Describe and explain how P-waves and S-waves travel through the Earth’s interior, and how this allows us to build up a picture of the Earth’s interior.
- Suggested Activity:
- P-waves are longitudinal, seismic waves.
- Suggested Activity:
Sketch a diagram of the structure of the Earth, show students a seismometer. Ask students to think > pair > share why they think it is difficult to predict when earthquakes are going to occur. Ask them to label their diagram to show where S and P wave would travel through.
- Suggested Activity:
- S-waves are transverse, seismic waves.
- Suggested Activity:
Build a simple seismometer
Equipment Required:
clamp stand
clamp
spring
string
weight or ball of plasticine
- Suggested Activity:
- S-waves cannot travel through a liquid.
- P-waves and S-waves provide evidence for the structure and size of the Earth?s core.
- Ultrasound waves have a frequency higher than the upper limit of hearing for humans.
- Lesson 04 - How do we hear sounds? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Echo sounding, using high frequency sound waves is used to detect objects in deep water and measure water depth.
- Suggested Activity:
show a video of a dolphin using echo location. Ask students to draw a diagram to show how it is used.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7Xr9BYhlceA
- Suggested Activity:
- Sound waves can travel through solids causing vibrations in the solid.
- Suggested Activity:
Use phet animations to show sound waves, ask students if they are longitudinal or traverse and justify why. https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/legacy/sound
- Suggested Activity:
- Within the ear, sound waves cause the ear drum and other parts to vibrate which causes the sensation of sound.
- Suggested Activity:
Video on how the ear works:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EEvwwGui2Ac
EW: Describe and explain why ear defenders are a required piece of equipment when pneumatic drills
- Suggested Activity:
- The conversion of sound waves to vibrations of solids works over a limited frequency range. This restricts the limits of human hearing.
- Suggested Activity:
Complete a hearing test. Students stand and then sit down when they can no longer hear the sound. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VxcbppCX6Rk&feature=youtu.be
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to describe, with examples, processes which convert wave disturbances between sound waves and vibrations in solids. Examples may include the effect of sound waves on the ear drum
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Why can you hear the sea in a shell?
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain why such processes only work over a limited frequency range and the relevance of this to human hearing.
- Students should know that the range of normal human hearing is from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
- Echo sounding, using high frequency sound waves is used to detect objects in deep water and measure water depth.
- Lesson 05 - What is the electromagnetic spectrum? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Each colour within the visible light spectrum has its own narrow band of wavelength and frequency.
- Electromagnetic waves are transverse waves that transfer energy from the source of the waves to an absorber.
- Suggested Activity:
Show that the microwaves that heat a bar of chocolate are transverse.
Review learning using the Phet animation: https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/legacy/microwaves
Ask students to prepare a commentary for the animation in pairs.Equipment Required:
microwave
large bar of chocolate
- Suggested Activity:
- Electromagnetic waves form a continuous spectrum.
- Suggested Activity:
Tell students all EM waves have the same properties, ask them to recall what they know about the properties of light from KS3 using images to prompt them (reflection, refraction, diffraction)
- Suggested Activity:
- All types of electromagnetic wave travel at the same velocity through a vacuum (space) or air.
- Suggested Activity:
Show the bell ringing in the bell jar. Link visible light as EM wave travelling through air and vacuum at same speed (still see the bell) but show sound cannot
Equipment Required:
Bell jar
vacuum pump
- Suggested Activity:
- The waves that form the electromagnetic spectrum are grouped in terms of their wavelength and their frequency.
- Suggested Activity:
Student sketch their own diagram of the EM spectrum and annotate to show the changing wavelength and frequency.
- Suggested Activity:
- Going from long to short wavelength (or from low to high frequency) the groups are: radio, microwave, infrared, visible light (red to violet), ultraviolet,
X-rays and gamma rays.- Suggested Activity:
**combined classes teach this in lesson 6**
Introduce the EM waves using the EM song.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uviPeK_d5yc
Check they know it using the karaoke version: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-H8HjxGtoXw
- Suggested Activity:
- Our eyes only detect visible light and so detect a limited range of electromagnetic waves.
- Electromagnetic waves have many practical applications. For example:
- radio waves - television and radio
- microwaves - satellite communications, cooking food
- infrared - electrical heaters, cooking food, infrared cameras
- visible light - fibre optic communications
- ultraviolet - energy efficient lamps, sun tanning
- X-rays and gamma rays - medical imaging and treatments.- Suggested Activity:
**combined classes teach this in lesson 6**
Watch the video on how UV waves are used to produce images of unborn babies. Create a thinking map to help you answer.
EW: How are EM waves used in medical imaging?
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GvbXHoiQHbI
- Suggested Activity:
- Each colour within the visible light spectrum has its own narrow band of wavelength and frequency.
- Lesson 06 - What are the uses and dangers of the electromagnetic spectrum? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (HT only) Radio waves can be produced by oscillations in electrical circuits.
- Changes in atoms and the nuclei of atoms can result in electromagnetic waves being generated or absorbed over a wide frequency range.
- Ultraviolet waves, X-rays and gamma rays can have hazardous effects on human body tissue.
- Gamma rays originate from changes in the nucleus of an atom.
- Ultraviolet waves can cause skin to age prematurely and increase the risk of skin cancer.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Why is it important to wear sun cream that has a high UV rating?
- Suggested Activity:
- Going from long to short wavelength (or from low to high frequency) the groups are: radio, microwave, infrared, visible light (red to violet), ultraviolet,
X-rays and gamma rays.- Suggested Activity:
*Duplicated from lesson 5* combined tier to teach in lesson 6. Higher tier covered in lesson 5
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to give examples that illustrate the transfer of energy by electromagnetic waves.
- Suggested Activity:
For each part of the EM wave consider the applications of each one and then identify the energy transformations that are occurring
- Suggested Activity:
- The effects depend on the type of radiation and the size of the dose.
- Students should be able to draw conclusions from given data about the risks and consequences of exposure to radiation.
- X-rays and gamma rays are ionising radiation that can cause the mutation of genes and cancer.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Describe the changes to DNA that exposure to radiation can occur. What effects can this have on the cell and the rest of the body?
- Suggested Activity:
- Electromagnetic waves have many practical applications. For example:
- radio waves - television and radio
- microwaves - satellite communications, cooking food
- infrared - electrical heaters, cooking food, infrared cameras
- visible light - fibre optic communications
- ultraviolet - energy efficient lamps, sun tanning
- X-rays and gamma rays - medical imaging and treatments.- Suggested Activity:
*Duplicated for combined only in this lesson* Higher tier groups to teach this in lesson 5.
Watch the video on how UV waves are used to produce images of unborn babies. Create a thinking map to help you answer.
EW: How are EM waves used in medical imaging?
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GvbXHoiQHbI
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) When radio waves are absorbed they may create an alternating current with the same frequency as the radio wave itself, so radio waves can themselves induce oscillations in an electrical circuit.
- Suggested Activity:
Use the phet animation to show the electromagnetic fields from radio waves.
https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/legacy/radio-waves
- Suggested Activity:
- Different substances may absorb, transmit, refract or reflect electromagnetic waves in ways that vary with wavelength.
- Radiation dose (in sieverts) is a measure of the risk of harm resulting from an exposure of the body to the radiation.
- 1000 millisieverts (mSv) = 1 sievert (Sv) Students will not be required to recall the unit of radiation dose.
- (HT only) Students should be able to give brief explanations why each type of electromagnetic wave is suitable for the practical application.
- Suggested Activity:
Use an image of the EM waves to compare the frequency and wavelength.
Demonstrate an optical fibre showing total internal reflection.
Demonstrate a use of UV by shining a UV light onto a bank note, through tonic water or writing a message using a security marker and then holding a UV light over the message.
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) Radio waves can be produced by oscillations in electrical circuits.
- Lesson 07 - What factors affect radaition and emission? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain that all bodies (objects) emit radiation.
- (HT only) A body at constant temperature is absorbing radiation at the same rate as it is emitting radiation.
- All bodies (objects), no matter what temperature, emit and absorb infrared radiation.
- The hotter the body, the more infrared radiation it radiates in a given time.
- Suggested Activity:
Write a conclusion for the results of the leslie cube demo
- Suggested Activity:
- Since a good absorber is also a good emitter, a perfect black body would be the best possible emitter.
- Suggested Activity:
Use the results of the leslie cube demo to apply to a range of different coloured objects.
Investigate how the colour of a surface affects how quickly an object will cool by the emission of infrared radiation. Use a Leslie cube or a ‘home-made’ version.Equipment Required:
homemade Leslie cubes using tin cans
tin cans
different coloured card
foil
insulating materials
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain that the intensity and wavelength distribution of any emission depends on the temperature of the body.
- A perfect black body is an object that absorbs all of the radiation incident on it. A black body does not reflect or transmit any radiation.
- Suggested Activity:
Use results from practicals to answer the PLC questions on the relationship between bodies and radiation/emission on the website
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) The temperature of a body increases when the body absorbs radiation faster than it emits radiation.
- (HT only) The temperature of the Earth depends on many factors including: the rates of absorption and emission of radiation, reflection of radiation into space.
- Suggested Activity:
Use the phet animation to made links between radiation and the green house effect https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/legacy/greenhouse
EW: Apply the ideas of radiation and emission to describe what factors can affect the temperature of the Earth
- Suggested Activity:
- (HT only) Students should be able to explain how the temperature of a body is related to the balance between incoming radiation absorbed and radiation emitted, using everyday examples to illustrate this balance, and the example of the factors which determine the temperature of the Earth.
- (HT only) Students should be able to use information, or draw/ interpret diagrams to show how radiation affects the temperature of the Earth's surface and atmosphere.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Explain how the particles in the atmosphere relate to emission and radiation, in your answer you should include the composition of the atmosphere, their structure, bonding and internal energy.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain that all bodies (objects) emit radiation.
- Lesson 08 - Required Practical - Infrared radiation Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Waves can be absorbed or transmitted at the boundary between two different materials.
- Suggested Activity:
Use the practical equipment to observe what happens when light reaches a boundary
Equipment Required:
glass blocks
Ray boxes
Powerpacks
Wires
Protractors
- Suggested Activity:
- Required practical: infrared radiation absorbed or radiated by a surface depends on the nature of that surface.(AT skills 1,4)
- Suggested Activity:
Leslie cube demonstration to show how the different surfaces emit different amounts of IR radiation using the data logger
Equipment Required:
CLASS SET:
Leslie cube
kettle
Infrared detector
Heatproof mat
- Suggested Activity:
- Waves can be absorbed or transmitted at the boundary between two different materials.
- Lesson 09 - How is diffused reflection different spectacular reflection? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Reflection from a smooth surface in a single direction is called specular reflection.
- Suggested Activity:
Observe the different reflection angles for smooth and rough surfaces
- Suggested Activity:
- Reflection from a rough surface causes scattering: this is called diffuse reflection.
- Suggested Activity:
Create a matrix map to compare the different properties of spectacular and diffused reflection.
- Suggested Activity:
- Waves can be reflected at the boundary between two different materials.
- Suggested Activity:
Use ray boxes to remind students of the properties that all EM waves have but that we can observe using visible light.
Equipment Required:
Ray boxes
Powerpacks
Wires
Mirrors
Protractors
- Suggested Activity:
- The time taken for the reflections to reach a detector can be used to determine how far away such a boundary is. This allows ultrasound waves to be used for both medical and industrial imaging.
- Suggested Activity:
Consider the applications of waves in medicine to suggest how their reflective properties can be taken advantage of
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to construct ray diagrams to illustrate the reflection of a wave at a surface.
- Suggested Activity:
Draw accurate ray diagrams for the observations made.
- Suggested Activity:
- Ultrasound waves are partially reflected when they meet a boundary between two different media.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Compare and contrast the properties of visible light and UV waves
- Suggested Activity:
- Reflection from a smooth surface in a single direction is called specular reflection.
- Lesson 10 - What is refraction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to explain in qualitative terms, how the differences in velocity, absorption and reflection between different types of wave in solids and liquids can be used both for detection and exploration of structures which are hidden from direct observation.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Describe how the Sun's light and infrared radiation is transmitted to heat the Earth.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to construct ray diagrams to illustrate the refraction of a wave at the boundary between two different media.
- Suggested Activity:
Observe what happens when light travels through mediums of different densities. Measure the angles.
Equipment Required:
Power supply
Ray boxes
Slits
Rectangular perspex blocks
Protractors
- Suggested Activity:
- Some effects, for example refraction, are due to the difference in velocity of the waves in different substances.
- Suggested Activity:
Use the phet animation to show what happens during refraction. https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/bending-light
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to use wave front diagrams to explain refraction in terms of the change of speed that happens when a wave travels from one medium to a different medium.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: What is refraction and when does it occur?
Equipment Required:
rayboxes slits
glass cubes
power packs
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain in qualitative terms, how the differences in velocity, absorption and reflection between different types of wave in solids and liquids can be used both for detection and exploration of structures which are hidden from direct observation.
- Lesson 11 - Required Practical - Reflection and refraction of waves Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Students should be able to describe the effects of reflection, transmission and absorption of waves at material interfaces.
- Required practical 9 - reflection/refraction of waves (physics only) (AT skills 4,8)
- Students should be able to describe the effects of reflection, transmission and absorption of waves at material interfaces.
- Lesson 12 - How are lenses used to help us see? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The distance from the lens to the principal focus is called the focal length.
- Suggested Activity:
Recall / describe the key features of a ray diagram where light passes through a lens. Students should be able to identify the:
• Principal axis
• Principal focus
• Focal length.
- Suggested Activity:
- The magnification produced by a lens can be calculated using the equation: magnification = image height / object height
- Suggested Activity:
Recall and use the magnification equation.
- Suggested Activity:
- Magnification is a ratio and so has no units.
- Image height and object height should both be measured in either mm or cm.
- Ray diagrams are used to show the formation of images by convex and concave lenses.
- Suggested Activity:
Investigate the images produced using convex and concave lenses using the window and a whiteboard to project the image onto. Stand with back to the window and hold the lens in front of your face.
Equipment Required:
Convex lenses
Concave lenses
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to construct ray diagrams to illustrate the similarities and differences between convex and concave lenses.
- Suggested Activity:
Construct ray diagrams to show how light travels through concave and convex lenses.
- Suggested Activity:
- In ray diagrams a convex lens will be represented by: <-->
- Suggested Activity:
Construct ray diagrams for a camera, a projector and a magnifying glass using a convex lens.
- Suggested Activity:
- [In ray diagrams] a concave lens will be represented by: >--<
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Use the correct terminology when describing the image produced by a lens, eg real, magnified and inverted for a projector. (start with a flow map)
- Suggested Activity:
- The image produced by a convex lens can be either real or virtual.
- The image produced by a concave lens is always virtual.
- Suggested Activity:
EW: Explain the difference between real and virtual images.
State situations where real images and virtual images are produced.
- Suggested Activity:
- A lens forms an image by refracting light.
- Suggested Activity:
Optics bench:
Investigate convex lenses. Using a single convex lens show how a camera can produce an image onto a photographic film. Show how when the object being looked at is further way than the focal length then the image is inverted.Equipment Required:
Optics bench
- Suggested Activity:
- In a convex lens, parallel rays of light are brought to a focus at the principal focus.
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Discuss how laser eye surgery is used to correct the vision of people who wear glasses
- Suggested Activity:
- The distance from the lens to the principal focus is called the focal length.
- Lesson 13 - Why do we see colours? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Colour filters work by absorbing certain wavelengths (and colour) and transmitting other wavelengths (and colour).
- Suggested Activity:
students to suggest how they think about why skiers/snowboarders wear yellow googles when light levels are low
use the phet animation to review answers https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/color-vision
- Suggested Activity:
- The colour of an opaque object is determined by which wavelengths of light are more strongly reflected.
- Suggested Activity:
Observe the differences when light shines through opaque and translucent objects
Equipment Required:
ray boxes
powerpacks
range of opaque and translucent pieces of plastic with a range of different colours too
- Suggested Activity:
- If all wavelengths are reflected equally the object appears white.
- Objects that transmit light are either transparent or translucent.
- Wavelengths that are not reflected are absorbed.
- Suggested Activity:
Use diagrams to show what happens to the light when different colored objects are observed
- Suggested Activity:
- If all wavelengths are absorbed the objects appears black.
- Suggested Activity:
Ask students to consider why black and white are often described as shades rather than colours (in terms of light)
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how the colour of an object is related to the differential absorption, transmission and reflection of different wavelengths of light by the object.
- Suggested Activity:
Students should make predictions and then explain why we observe a range of coloured and opaque/translucent objects
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain the effect of viewing objects through filters or the effect on light of passing through filters
- Suggested Activity:
GF: Suggest why some people are colour blind. You should refer to the cells that detect light in the eye.
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain why an opaque object has a particular colour.
- Colour filters work by absorbing certain wavelengths (and colour) and transmitting other wavelengths (and colour).
- Lesson 01 - What is a wave? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- P2.5
- Lesson 01 - How could a magnetic field be visualised? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Poles of a magnet
- Suggested Activity:
Describe two experiments that can be used to identify the magnetic field pattern of a permanent magnet.
Describe what would happen if two North seeking Magnetic Poles were placed near each other, two South seeking Poles or one of each.
Which part of a permanent magnet is the strongest?
Investigate and draw the shape of the magnetic field pattern around a permanent magnet.
Investigate the effect that two magnets have on each other in different orientations.Equipment Required:
Bar magnets
Iron filings
A3 paper
Plotting compass
- Suggested Activity:
- The region around a magnet where a force acts on another magnet or on a magnetic material (iron, steel, cobalt and nickel) is called the magnetic field.
- The force between a magnet and a magnetic material is always one of attraction.
- When two magnets are brought close together they exert a force on each other.
- The strength of the magnetic field depends on the distance from the magnet. The field is strongest at the poles of the magnet.
- Two like poles repel each other.
- The direction of the magnetic field at any point is given by the direction of the force that would act on another north pole placed at that point.
- Two unlike poles attract each other.
- The direction of a magnetic field line is from the north
(seeking) pole of a magnet to the south(seeking) pole of the magnet. - Attraction and repulsion between two magnetic poles are examples of non-contact force.
- A magnetic compass contains a small bar magnet. The Earth has a magnetic field. The compass needle points in the direction of the Earth's magnetic field.
- A permanent magnet produces its own magnetic field.
- Students should be able to describe how to plot the magnetic field pattern of a magnet using a compass.
- An induced magnet is a material that becomes a magnet when it is placed in a magnetic field.
- Students should be able to draw the magnetic field pattern of a bar magnet showing how strength and direction change from one point to another.
- Induced magnetism always causes a force of
attraction. - Students should be able to explain how the behaviour of a magnetic compass is related to evidence that the core of the Earth must be magnetic.
- When removed from the magnetic field an induced magnet loses most/all of its magnetism quickly.
- Students should be able to describe the attraction and repulsion between unlike and like poles for permanent magnets
- Students should be able to describe the difference between permanent and induced magnets.
- Poles of a magnet
- Lesson 02 - How are electromagnets made? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- When a current flows through a conducting wire a magnetic field is produced around the wire.
- Suggested Activity:
Describe how the magnetic effect of a current can be demonstrated.
Use the ‘right hand thumb rule’ to draw the magnetic field pattern of a wire carrying an electric current.
Demonstrate what happens when a foil strip with a current flowing through it is placed in a strong magnetic field. What happens if the direction of the current is reversed?
Try to demonstrate the shape of the magnetic field by placing a wire through a piece of card with iron filings sprinkled near it. Apply a current through the wire.Equipment Required:
Demo: Conducting Wire
card
Iron fillings
Foil Strip
Powerpack
U shaped magnet
leads
- Suggested Activity:
- The strength of the magnetic field depends on the current through the wire and the distance from the wire.
- Shaping a wire to form a solenoid increases the strength of the magnetic field created by a current through the wire.
- The magnetic field inside a solenoid is strong and uniform.
- The magnetic field around a solenoid has a similar shape to that of a bar magnet.
- Adding an iron core increases the strength of the
magnetic field of a solenoid. - An electromagnet is a solenoid with an iron core.
- Students should be able to describe how the magnetic effect of a current can be demonstrated
- Students should be able to draw the magnetic field pattern for a straight wire carrying a current and for a solenoid (showing the direction of the field)
- Students should be able to explain how a solenoid arrangement can increase the magnetic effect of the current.
- (Physics only) Students should be able to interpret diagrams of electromagnetic devices in order to explain how they work.
- Suggested Activity:
Give students diagrams of different devices which involve an electromagnet, such as a door bell. Students to explain how the device works.
- Suggested Activity:
- When a current flows through a conducting wire a magnetic field is produced around the wire.
- Lesson 03 - What is meant by the motor effect? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- When a conductor carrying a current is placed in a magnetic field the magnet producing the field and the conductor exert a force on each other. This is called the motor effect.
- Suggested Activity:
Explain what is meant by the motor effect.
Explain why a motor spins with respect to the magnetic field.
Make an electric motor and investigate how the speed and direction of rotation can be changed.Equipment Required:
Motor kit
powerpacks
leads
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to show that Fleming's left-hand rule represents the relative orientation of the force, the current in the conductor and the magnetic field.
- Students should be able to recall the factors that affect the size of the force on the conductor.
- For a conductor at right angles to a magnetic field and carrying a current:
force = magnetic flux density ? current ? length
F = B I l
force, F, in newtons, N
magnetic flux density, B, in tesla, T
current, I, in amperes, A (amp is acceptable for ampere) length, l, in metres, m
- When a conductor carrying a current is placed in a magnetic field the magnet producing the field and the conductor exert a force on each other. This is called the motor effect.
- Lesson 04 - How does an electric motor work? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A coil of wire carrying a current in a magnetic field tends to rotate. This is the basis of an electric motor.
- Suggested Activity:
Explain why changing the direction of the electric current in an electric motor changes the direction of rotation.
Explain why changing the polarity of the permanent magnets in the electric motor will change the direction of rotation.
Recall and use Fleming’s left-hand rule.Equipment Required:
Electric motor kit
Powerpack
leads
- Suggested Activity:
- Students should be able to explain how the force on a conductor in a magnetic field causes the rotation of the coil in an electric motor.
- A coil of wire carrying a current in a magnetic field tends to rotate. This is the basis of an electric motor.
- Lesson 05 - How do loudspeakers and microphones work? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Physics only) Loudspeakers and headphones use the motor effect to convert variations in current in electrical circuits to the pressure variations in sound waves.
- Suggested Activity:
Explain how a moving-coil loudspeaker and headphones work.
Make a working loudspeaker.
If an unwanted loudspeaker is available take it apart to show the construction of the speaker and where the magnets and electromagnets are located.Equipment Required:
Make a loudspeaker.
A taken apart loudspeaker to show the construction of the speaker and where the magnets and electromagnets are located.
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how a moving-coil loudspeaker and headphones work.
- (Physics only) If an electrical conductor moves relative to a magnetic field or if there is a change in the magnetic field around a conductor, a potential difference is induced across the ends of the conductor.
- (Physics only) If the conductor is part of a complete circuit, a current is induced in the conductor. This is called the generator effect.
- (Physics only) An induced current generates a magnetic field that opposes the original change, either the movement of the conductor or the change in magnetic field.
- (Physics only) Students should be able to recall the factors that affect the size of the induced potential difference/induced current.
- (Physics only) Students should be able to apply the principles of the generator effect in a given context.
- (Physics only) The generator effect is used in an alternator to generate ac and in a dynamo to generate dc.
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how the generator effect is used in an alternator to generate ac and in a dynamo to generate dc
- (Physics only) should be able to draw/interpret graphs of potential difference generated in the coil against time.
- (Physics only) Microphones use the generator effect to convert the pressure variations in sound waves into variations in current in electrical circuits.
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how a moving-coil microphone works.
- (Physics only) Loudspeakers and headphones use the motor effect to convert variations in current in electrical circuits to the pressure variations in sound waves.
- Lesson 06 - How do step-up and step-down transformers work? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Physics only) Students should be able to apply the equation linking the pds and number of turns in the two coils of a transformer to the currents and the power transfer involved, and relate these to the advantages of power transmission at high potential differences.
- Suggested Activity:
Explain how a step-up transformer will increase the potential difference in the secondary coil compared to the primary coil but it will also decrease the current. This happens as the electrical power on both primary and secondary coils remains the same.
GF: Research why American electricity companies switched from using d.c. to a.c. What are the advantages of sending electricity at high potential differences?
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Iron is used [for a core] as it is easily magnetised. Knowledge of laminations and eddy currents in the core is not required.
- (Physics only) The ratio of the potential differences across the primary and secondary coils of a transformer Vp and Vs depends on the ratio of the number of turns on each coil, np and ns .
EQUATION - (Physics only) A basic transformer consists of a primary coil and a secondary coil wound on an iron core.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
Making a transformer
Institute of Physics: Episode 416 – Generators and transformersEquipment Required:
EW: What are transformers?
Where are transformers used?
Draw a labelled diagram of a transformer. Students should be able to label the primary coil, secondary coil and the iron core.
Describe why an iron core is used in a transformer.
Why are the wires insulated?
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) In a step-up transformer Vs > Vp
- (Physics only) In a step-down transformer Vs < Vp
- (Physics only) If transformers were 100 % efficient, the electrical power output would equal the electrical power input.
- (Physics only) Vs ? Is = Vp ? Ip
Where
Vs ? Is is the power output (secondary coil) and
Vp ? Ip is the power input (primary coil).
power input and output, in watts, W - (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how the effect of an alternating current in one coil in inducing a current in another is used in transformers
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how the ratio of the potential differences across the two coils depends on the ratio of the number of turns on each
- (Physics only) Students should be able to apply the equation linking the pds and number of turns in the two coils of a transformer to the currents and the power transfer involved, and relate these to the advantages of power transmission at high potential differences.
- Lesson 07 - How can a specific output power be generated in a transformer? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Physics only) Students should be able to calculate the current drawn from the input supply to provide a particular power output
- Suggested Activity:
Stretch: Substitution questions relating to the power equations
Challenge: Questions relating to rearranging the power equation.
super challenge: Two step questions relating to other equations students need to have memorised.
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Students should be able to calculate the current drawn from the input supply to provide a particular power output
- Lesson 01 - How could a magnetic field be visualised? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- P2.6
- Lesson 01 - What makes up the Solar System? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Physics only) Within our solar system there is one star, the Sun, plus the eight planets and the dwarf planets that orbit around the Sun.
- (Physics only) Natural satellites, the moons that orbit planets, are also part of the solar system.
- (Physics only) Our solar system is a small part of the Milky Way galaxy.
- LEARN DIAGRAM
- Suggested Activity:
Research activity - factfile on planets and stellar bodies.
Stretch - Define the different terms.
Challenge - Describe the forces involved within the solar system and galaxy.
GF: Explain why Venus has a higher temperature than Mercury.
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Within our solar system there is one star, the Sun, plus the eight planets and the dwarf planets that orbit around the Sun.
- Lesson 02 - What is the life cycle of a star? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how fusion processes lead to the formation of new elements.
- (Physics only) A star goes through a life cycle. The life cycle is determined by the size of the star.
- (Physics only) The Sun was formed from a cloud of dust and gas (nebula) pulled together by gravitational attraction.
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9EnBBIx6XkM
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how, at the start of a star's life cycle, the dust and gas drawn together by gravity causes fusion reactions
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Uhy1fucSRQI
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain that fusion reactions lead to an equilibrium between the gravitational collapse of a star and the expansion of a star due to fusion energy.
- Suggested Activity:
EW Explain the forces involved in the formation of stars and the equilibrium reached in their main stage.
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Fusion processes in stars produce all of the naturally occurring elements.
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tXV9mtY1AoI
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uN2AYauvOeY
- Suggested Activity:
- (Physics only) Elements heavier than iron are produced in a supernova.
- (Physics only) The explosion of a massive star (supernova) distributes the elements throughout the universe.
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how fusion processes lead to the formation of new elements.
- Lesson 03 - What are satellites? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Orbital motion, natural and artificial satellites
- (Physics only) Gravity provides the force that allows planets and satellites (both natural and artificial) to maintain their circular orbits.
- Students should be able to describe the similarities and distinctions between the planets, their moons, and artificial satellites.
- (Physics only) (HT only) Students should be able to explain qualitatively how for circular orbits, the force of gravity can lead to changing velocity but unchanged speed
- (Physics only) (HT only) Students should be able to explain qualitatively how for a stable orbit, the radius must change if the speed changes.
- Orbital motion, natural and artificial satellites
- Lesson 04 - What evidence is there to support the Big Bang Theory? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain qualitatively the red-shift of light from galaxies that are receding
- (Physics only) There is an observed increase in the wavelength of light from most distant galaxies. This effect is called red-shift.
- (Physics only) The further away the galaxies, the faster they are moving and the bigger the observed increase in wavelength.
- (Physics only) The observed red-shift provides evidence that space itself (the universe) is expanding and supports the Big Bang theory.
- (Physics only) The Big Bang theory suggests that the universe began from a very small region that was extremely hot and dense.
- (Physics only) Since 1998 onwards, observations of supernovae suggest that distant galaxies are receding ever faster.
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain that the change of each galaxy's speed with distance is evidence of an expanding universe
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how red-shift provides evidence for the Big Bang model
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain qualitatively the red-shift of light from galaxies that are receding
- Lesson 05 - What is dark matter and dark energy? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how scientists are able to use observations to arrive at theories such as the Big Bang theory
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain that there is still much about the universe that is not understood, for example dark mass and dark energy.
- (Physics only) Students should be able to explain how scientists are able to use observations to arrive at theories such as the Big Bang theory
- Lesson 01 - What makes up the Solar System? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1B.1
- Lesson 01 - What are living things made up of? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- There are seven processes that are common to living things. - KS3.B.22
- The seven life processes are movement, respiration, sensitivity, growth, reproduction, excretion and nutrition. - KS3.B.22
- T: Cells as are the fundamental unit of living organisms. - KS3.B.01
- Suggested Activity:
organ models and torso model
Equipment Required:
organ models
Georgina torso body model
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Cells => Tissues => Organs => Organ Systems => Organisms - KS3.B.06
- W: Cells are repeated units - KS3.B.01
- W: Tissues are one type of cell working together. - KS3.B.01
- W: Organs are made of different tissues working together. - KS3.B.01
- W: Organ Systems are different organs working together. - KS3.B.01
- W: Organisms are living things, in which different organ systems work together. - KS3.B.01
- W: All living, or once living, things are made up of cells. - KS3.B.01
- W: Cells have smaller structures called organelles in them. - KS3.B.01
- T: The function of the cell wall is to strengthen the cell. - KS3.B.02
- T: The function of the cell membrane is to control the passage of substances in and out of the cell. - KS3.B.02
- Suggested Activity:
Back to back - drawing a 'square' palisade cell as a general plant cell.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The function of cytoplasm is to be a place for chemical reactions to take place. - KS3.B.02
- T: The function of nucleus is to control the cell. - KS3.B.02
- T: The function of permanent vacuole is to be a store of cell sap. - KS3.B.02
- T: The function of the chloroplasts is to absorb light energy to make food - KS3.B.02
- T: The function of mitochondria is to release energy through respiration. - KS3.B.02
- T: The function of the ribosome is to do protein synthesis (making). - KS3.B.02
- There are seven processes that are common to living things. - KS3.B.22
- Lesson 02 - How are cells different from each other? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: the similarities and differences between plant and animal cell:
- Plant and animal cells both have: cell membrane; cytoplasm; nucleus; mitochondria & ribosomes.
- Only plant cells have: cell wall; permanent vacuole and sometimes chloroplasts. - KS3.B.03- Suggested Activity:
Draw a human cheek cell as a standard animal cell.
Double bubble to compare.
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Students to sort diagrams (or photos for higher ability) of animal and plant cells based on their characteristics.
- Root hair cell
- Red blood cell
- Elodea cell
- Ciliated cell - KS3.B.03- Suggested Activity:
Sorting photos of cell diagrams
Equipment Required:
Cell diagrams printed and cut out
- Suggested Activity:
- W: That cells have special characteristics, different organelles and shape, in order to fulfill their function. - KS3.B.02
- Suggested Activity:
Use Specialised cells powerpoint.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Root hair cells have a large surface area to absorb water and nutrients. RHC have no chloroplasts as light does not get to them. - KS3.B.02
- W: Red blood cells have a rounded shape to allow it to flow smoothly. Is red due to the iron compound used to carry oxygen. RBC have no nucleus and a biconcave cross section to increase oxygen capacity. - KS3.B.02
- W: Elodea cell have lots of chloroplasts to capture light. - KS3.B.02
- W: Ciliated cells have hairs on them to move substances around. - KS3.B.02
- W: NB: Do not use a palisade cell as this will be used in 3B. - KS3.B.02
- W: the similarities and differences between plant and animal cell:
- Lesson 03 - How do we use a microscope to see cells? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: DESIRABLE:
To prepare a slide... - KS3.B.01- Suggested Activity:
DESIRABLE:
To prepare a slide...Equipment Required:
Cover slips
Optical pins
Scalpels
Cutting title
Iodine
Onion bulb
Daffodil bulb
- Suggested Activity:
- T: To focus a (light) microscope, put your head to the side and raise the stage until it is as close to the objective lens as possible without making contact. Then looking through the microscope, wind the stage down using the coarse focusing knob. The fine focus using the smaller knob. - KS3.B.01
- Suggested Activity:
Use Microsopes
Equipment Required:
Microscopes
Slides
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Biological diagrams are line drawings of 'the generalised specimen'. - KS3.B.01
- D: Students to record cell structure as a labelled biological diagram as seen using a light microscope. - KS3.B.01
- W: What is the difference between a onion bulb cell and a daffodil bulb?
- T: DESIRABLE:
- Lesson 04 - What are the forms of life? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Unicellular organisms are living things made up of only a one cell. - KS3.B.05
- W: Multicellular organisms are living things made up of many cells. - KS3.B.06
- T: Bacteria, Protozoa and Yeast (unicellular fungi) are examples of unicellular organisms. - KS3.B.05
- T: A bacterial cell consists of cytoplasm and a membrane surrounded by a cell wall; the genes are not in a distinct nucleus.
Some Bacteria may have Flagella (tails) to swim. - KS3.B.05 - T: Yeast cells have a nucleus, cytoplasm and a membrane surrounded by a cell wall. - KS3.B.05
- T: Protoza have pseudopodia (“false feet”) to move about and to surround food and take it inside the cell.
Protoza have temporary vacuoles containing waste. - KS3.B.05 - A: Students to sort prepared slides or diagrams of unicellular organisms based on their characteristics. - KS3.B.05
- W: Unicellular organisms are living things made up of only a one cell. - KS3.B.05
- Lesson 01 - What are living things made up of? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1B.2
- Lesson 05 - Planning: Hand Grip Strength vs Age Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Planning
- Aim: To find out how age affects the hand grip strength.
- Hypothesis: That the older someone is the stronger their grip.
NB: Experiment is likely to show a lack of range, use as a teaching point.
Use age in days
May be use male and female keyed data points. Will there be a difference in trend?
Forces may not have been taught yet, if so teach Newtons as the unit of force - KS3.B.08
- A: ENQUIRY: Planning
- Lesson 06 - Data Collection: Hand Grip Strength vs Age Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Data collection - KS3.B.08
- Suggested Activity:
Export DoB from SIMs and use the following formula to calculate their age in days.
=DATEDIF(B2, TODAY(), "d")
where 'B2' is their date of birth.Equipment Required:
Hand Strength Grip Meters
- Suggested Activity:
- A: ENQUIRY: Data collection - KS3.B.08
- Lesson 07 - Analysis: Hand Grip Strength vs Age Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Analysis - KS3.B.08
- A: ENQUIRY: Analysis - KS3.B.08
- Lesson 05 - Planning: Hand Grip Strength vs Age Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1B.3
- Lesson 08 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 1B.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/1B.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 1B.1
- Lesson 08 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1B.4
- Lesson 09 - How is the human skeleton arranged? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The structure of the human skeleton:
Legs:
- The upper leg has one bone called the Femur.
- The lower leg has two bones called the Tibia and the Fibula. The Tibia is the larger bone.
- The Femur, Tibia and Fibula are connected by the Knee joint, behind the Patella (knee cap).
Torso:
- The Femur is connected to the Pelvis by the Hip joint.
- The Spine is made up of Vertebrae connects the Pelvis to Skull.
- Attached to the spine is the Rib cage and the Clavicle.
Arms:
- The upper arm has one bone called the Humerus.
- The lower arm has two bones called the Radius and the Ulna. The Radius is on the side of the thumb.
- The Humerus is attached to the Clavicle at the Shoulder joint.
- Humerus, Radius and Ulna are connected by the Elbow joint. - KS3.B.07 - A: Students label a diagram based on the above. - KS3.B.07
- W: The functions of the human skeleton are:
- support,
- protection,
- movement and
- making blood cells - KS3.B.07 - T: Within bones there is bone marrow which produces new blood cells. - KS3.B.07
- T: There are different types of joint in the skeleton, allowing different types of movement.
- Hinge: Back and forth without twisting.
- Pivot: Twisting.
- Ball and socket: Rotation in all directions.
- Fixed: No movement - KS3.B.08 - W: The Elbow and Knee are hinge joints.
The Neck, part of the spine, is a pivot joint.
The Shoulder and Hip are ball and socket joints.
The Skull has fixed joints in it. - KS3.B.08
- T: The structure of the human skeleton:
- Lesson 10 - How does a skeleton move? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The muscle on top of the upper arm is called the Bicep.
The muscle on underside of the upper arm is called the Tricep.
The muscle on front of the upper leg is called the Quadriceps.
The muscles on back of the upper leg are called the Hamstrings.
The muscles between the ribs are called intercostal muscles. - KS3.B.08 - T: Joints are held together (bone to bone) by Ligaments.
Muscles are connected to bones by Tendons. - KS3.B.08- Suggested Activity:
Chicken wing / leg dissection
http://teachingcommons.cdl.edu/ngss/preservice/documents/Musculoskeletalsystem.docEquipment Required:
Chicken wing / leg
White trays
Scalpels
Forceps
Gloves
Disinfectant
Waste bag
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Ligaments are elastic (stretchy) to allow movement.
Tendons are not elastic to all muscles to exert a force on the bones. - KS3.B.08 - T: Muscles can only contract (pull) exerting a force and relax applying no force.
Muscles can not - KS3.B.09 - W: To raise the lower arm, the Bicep must contract while the triceps relaxes and vice versa. - KS3.B.09
- D: Students to workout the movement of joints required to use a particular muscle. Students rate how easy it is to raise a 1kg mass.
NB it is not safe to have student lift as heavy a weight as they can, even on appropriate gym machines.
Students could measure the size of their muscles to see if their is a correlation. - KS3.B.08
- T: The muscle on top of the upper arm is called the Bicep.
- Lesson 09 - How is the human skeleton arranged? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1B.5
- Lesson 11 - POO Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Reflection
- Reflection
- Lesson 11 - POO Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2B.1
- Lesson 01 - What makes up a flower? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Flowers are the genitals of plants - KS3.B.21
- Flower structure
- The Stamen is the male part of a flower.
- The Stamen consists of an Anther and Filament.
- The Anther contains pollen, the male gamete cell.
- The Carpel is the female part of a flower.
- The Carpel consists of a Stigma, Style and Ovary.
- The Stigma is on the end of the style.
- The Ovary contains the Ovule, the female gamete cell.
- The flower also has Petals and Sepals. - KS3.B.21- Suggested Activity:
Flower dissection
Equipment Required:
Flowers - eg Lillies
Cutting Tiles
Scalpels
Forceps
- Suggested Activity:
- H: SET HOMEWORK:
Learn Keyword spellings - KS3.P.29- Suggested Activity:
Wordsearch
- Suggested Activity:
- Flowers are the genitals of plants - KS3.B.21
- Lesson 02 - What do the parts of the flower do? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- insect pollination:
- Insects attracted to petals and nectar.
- Insect enters flower and pollen is transferred from Anther to Insect.
- Insect is attracted to another flower.
- Pollen from Insect is transferred to Stigma.
- Pollen cell grows a pollen tube down the Style to the Ovary. - KS3.B.21 - Fertilisation occurs when the Pollen nucleus fuses with the Ovule.
The fertilised Ovule forms the seed.
The Ovary forms the Fruit. - KS3.B.21 - T: The function of Pollen cells are to transfer genetic material (DNA) from one plant to another. - KS4.B.01
- W: Pollen cells are adapted to their function by:
- being small (microscopic)
- having a tough outer coating
- can have spikes or hooks - KS4.B.01 - Pollen being small allows it to be transported easily by insects (and wind next lesson)
Pollen having a tough outer coating allows the cell to survive in the environment away from the plant.
Pollen have spikes or hooks makes it more likely to stick to insects. - KS4.B.01
- insect pollination:
- Lesson 03 - How do plants spread? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Some plants use the Wind to pollinate other plants. - KS3.B.21
- Suggested Activity:
Why doesn't maze (sweet corn) have petals?
Equipment Required:
Teacher demo:
5 petri dishes with some pieces of hole punch circles in.
Fan to represent wind. small pile of paper (from hole punch)
Tray water spray to represent rain
fluffy cloth
1 x Balloon filled with paper to model explosive seed dispersal
Colander (with large holes) to represent animal internal
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The most successful plants are wide spread due to their seed dispersal mechanisms. - KS3.B.21
- Suggested Activity:
Discuss why buddleia spread so well down railways.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Dispersal mechanisms
- Wind
- Animal eating
- Animal fur
- Water
- Explosive - KS3.B.21- Suggested Activity:
Students examine pictures of seeds/fruit to determine how they might be spread.
- Suggested Activity:
- Some plants use the Wind to pollinate other plants. - KS3.B.21
- Lesson 01 - What makes up a flower? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2B.2
- Lesson 04 - Skill Focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Quantitative investigation of some dispersal mechanisms:
Paper Helicopters to model sycamore seeds.
Aim: To find out how the length of rotor affects the time of fall. - KS3.B.21- Suggested Activity:
Planning
Equipment Required:
x
- Suggested Activity:
- Quantitative investigation of some dispersal mechanisms:
- Lesson 05 - Skill Focus: Data Collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Quantitative investigation of some dispersal mechanisms:
Paper Helicopters to model sycamore seeds.
Aim: To find out how the length of rotor affects the time of fall. - KS3.B.21- Suggested Activity:
Data Collection
Equipment Required:
Paper Helicopters Templates
Paper Clips
Meter Rules (3 stuck together to make a 2m one)
Stop watches
- Suggested Activity:
- Quantitative investigation of some dispersal mechanisms:
- Lesson 06 - Skill Focus: Analysis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Quantitative investigation of some dispersal mechanisms:
Paper Helicopters to model sycamore seeds.
Aim: To find out how the length of rotor affects the time of fall. - KS3.B.21- Suggested Activity:
Conclusion
EvaluationEquipment Required:
conclusion/evaluation sheets
- Suggested Activity:
- Quantitative investigation of some dispersal mechanisms:
- Lesson 04 - Skill Focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2B.3
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Review of 2B.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/2B.1
- Suggested Activity:
- H: SET HOMEWORK:
Learn Definitions of keywords
(Crossword) and revise (Flashcards)
- A: Review of 2B.1
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2B.4
- Lesson 08 - Where do organisms get their energy from? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A food chain shows how energy passes from one organism to another. - KS3.B.30
- Food chains begin with a producer, which is normally a green plant. - KS3.B.30
- Green plants get their energy from the sun through photosynthesis. - KS3.B.30
- Suggested Activity:
Testing leaves for presence of starch
Equipment Required:
boiling tubes
ethanol
white tiles
leaves
iodine solution
pipettes
kettles
- Suggested Activity:
- Organisms that eat other organisms are called consumers. - KS3.B.30
- The first consumer in a food chain is called the primary consumer. The second the secondary consumer and the third the tertiary. The final consumer is called the top consumer. - KS3.B.30
- Animals that hunt other animals are called predators, they are unlikely to be primary consumers. - KS3.B.30
- Food webs are formed by combing the multiple food chains in an ecosystem. - KS3.B.30
- How organisms affect, and are affected by, their environment. - KS3.B.32
- A change in the population of an organism in a food web will affect the other organisms in the food chain.
This is known as interdependence. - KS3.B.30
- A food chain shows how energy passes from one organism to another. - KS3.B.30
- Lesson 09 - Why don't toxins kill all the animals in a ecosystem? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A pyramid of numbers shows how many organisms are consumed at each stage (trophic level) of a food web.
Generally, there are more organisms consumed at earlier stages.
This is because most of the energy consumed is used for movement or staying warm. Little is used to build body mass. - KS3.B.32- Suggested Activity:
Circle map before and after watching the video:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TZk6vcmLcKw
Draw to scale
(1 mm : 1 Organism)
1 Barn owl eats
10 Frogs,
Each frog eats 20 aphids
These numbers are far too low, but will fit nicely on a page.
A Barn Owl has a mass of 500g
A Frog has a mass of 25g
An Aphid has a mass of 0.001g
If 1% of the mass of the eaten animal makes up the consumer, then the numbers should be:
1 Barn owl
2000 Frogs
5,000,000,000 Aphids
Each frog eats 2,500,000 Aphids
- Suggested Activity:
- Organisms on low levels of the food web can ingest small amounts of toxic materials and survive.
When multiple low level organisms are ingested by higher level organisms the toxic materials accumulate to levels that are dangerous.
This is called bioaccumulation. - KS3.B.32- Suggested Activity:
DDT example:
If each aphid has 0.01 micrograms of DDT in it:
How much DDT does a frog have? (25 milligrams)
How much DDT does an Owl have? (50 grams)
- Suggested Activity:
- H: SET HOMEWORK:
Revise keyword meaning and concepts for POO.
- A pyramid of numbers shows how many organisms are consumed at each stage (trophic level) of a food web.
- Lesson 10 - Why should we care about insects? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Lesson 08 - Where do organisms get their energy from? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2B.5
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity - KS3.P.29
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity - KS3.P.29
- Lesson 12 - Reflect Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Reflection - KS3.P.29
- Suggested Activity:
1. Mark your flower diagram in green
2. Check your answer and write the Big Ideas and clues correctly if they are missing from your answer
3. Write the Big Ideas you wrote about to Securing (this would be 1,2,3 or 3 ticks on your answer grid)
4. Find someone to discuss and develop your missing Big Ideas - write improved answer on your feedback sheet.
5. Attempt the Go Further task in purple pen.Equipment Required:
x
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Reflection - KS3.P.29
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3B.1
- Lesson 01 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: PLANNING
AIM: How does light affect the height of seedlings over time?- Suggested Activity:
Sow cress in galley pot in cotton wall.
Once germinated, measure the height of plants each lesson.Equipment Required:
Cress Seeds, small pots to place them in, cotton wool, 10ml measuring cylinders, black card to block light, sellotape. pens to l
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Sow seeds
- A: PLANNING
- Lesson 01 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3B.2
- Lesson 02 - How do organisms get energy? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Plants making carbohydrates in their leaves by photosynthesis - KS3.B.15
- Food chains begin with a producer, which is normally a green plant. (FROM 2B) - KS3.B.30
- Green plants get their energy from the sun through photosynthesis. (FROM 2B) - KS3.B.30
- 'Photo' is from the Greek for 'light'. - KS3.B.30
- 'Synthesis' is from the Greek for 'put together or combine'. - KS3.B.30
- Suggested Activity:
Synthesis spelling can be remembered by having a sister called cynthia:
syn - the - sis
- Suggested Activity:
- Synthesis is the bonding together of small particles to form bigger particles. - KS3.B.30
- Decomposition is the splitting of large particles in smaller particles. - KS3.B.30
- T: Most photosynthesis takes place in palisade cells. - KS3.B.02
- W: Palisade cells are adapted for photosynthesis by having lots of chloroplasts.
NB: Main thrust of lessons should be looking at cells. - KS3.B.02 - D: Cover leaves to later test for starch.
- Plants making carbohydrates in their leaves by photosynthesis - KS3.B.15
- Lesson 03 - What does the word equation for photosynthesis mean? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The word summary for photosynthesis is:
Carbon Dioxide plus Water becomes Glucose plus Oxygen using light energy. - KS3.B.23 - W: The reactants of photosynthesis are:
Carbon Dioxide and Water - KS3.B.23 - W: Carbon Dioxide is absorbed from the air. - KS3.B.23
- W: Water is absorbed from the ground through the roots. - KS3.B.23
- T: Carbon dioxide is absorbed through the leaves. - KS3.B.23
- W: The products of photosynthesis are:
Glucose and Oxygen - KS3.B.23 - W: Glucose is used or stored in the plant. - KS3.B.23
- W: Oxygen is released through the leaves into the air. - KS3.B.23
- T: Glucose is converted into starch for storage. - KS3.B.23
- T: The word summary for respiration is:
Glucose plus Oxygen becomes Carbon Dioxide plus Water releasing energy. - KS3.B.23
- T: The word summary for photosynthesis is:
- Lesson 04 - What does the symbol equation for photosynthesis mean? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The symbol equation for photosynthesis is:
CO<SUB>2</SUB> plus H<SUB>2</SUB>O -> C<SUB>6</SUB>H<SUB>12</SUB>O<SUB>6</SUB>
With a wavy arrow showing the light energy. - KS3.B.23- Suggested Activity:
The wavy arrow distinguishes between the Big Ideas of Particles and Energy.
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Students can identify the number of elements in a compound from its formulae. -
Students can identify the number of atoms in a compound from its formulae - KS3.C.05- Suggested Activity:
For each chemical in photosynthesis eg:
Carbon dioxide is made up of the elements of Carbon and Oxygen.
The molecule consists of three atoms.
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Chemical reactions result from the rearrangement of atoms. - KS3.C.12
- Suggested Activity:
Use the chant and Particles -
Chemical writing frame to explain what is happening:
- Molecules (Hands make fists)
- Collide (Bag fists together twice, sticking together the second time)
- Split (Spread fingers out)
- Rearrange (Slide hands one in front of the other, then the other way round
- Bond (interlock fingers)
- Become a new substance (roll hands to 'present' new substance)
- Suggested Activity:
- A: DESIRABLE:
No particles are created or destroyed in a chemical reaction.
Therefore the equation needs to be balanced. - KS3.C.06 - A: Photosynthesis is an endothermic chemical reactions because it takes energy to build bigger molecules. - KS3.C.21
- Suggested Activity:
Energy ENters in ENdothermic reactions
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The symbol equation for respiration is:
C<SUB>6</SUB>H<SUB>12</SUB>O<SUB>6</SUB> -> CO<SUB>2</SUB> plus H<SUB>2</SUB>O
With a wavy arrow showing the energy leaving the reaction. - KS3.B.23 - A: Respiration is an exothermic chemical reactions because it releases energy when bigger molecules are split. - KS3.C.21
- Suggested Activity:
Energy EXits in EXothermic reactions
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Measure cress seedlings
- T: The symbol equation for photosynthesis is:
- Lesson 05 - How are leaves adapted for photosynthesis? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Leaves are flat and so have a large surface area to collect the sunlight. - KS3.B.25
- Suggested Activity:
observe stomata using slides of cells and microscopes
Equipment Required:
Nail varnish, leaves, slides, microscopes, prepared slides of cells, sellotape
- Suggested Activity:
- The palisade cells, found towards the top of the leaves, have lots of chloroplast which perform photosynthesis. - KS3.B.25
- D: Measure cress seedlings
- Leaves are flat and so have a large surface area to collect the sunlight. - KS3.B.25
- Lesson 06 - How can we prove that light is needed for photosynthesis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Glucose is converted into starch for storage. - KS3.B.23
- The test for starch is it reacts with iodine, turning black.
- D: Test half covered leaves for starch.
- EW: Write a conclusion and then explain it using big ideas
- Suggested Activity:
Extended Writing (TOWER)
T - Talk in groups
O - Organise visually (Flow map)
L - Level up language (Keyword sheet)
D - Draft first attempt
E - Evaluate (mark up, rainbow writing)
R - Redraft
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Measure cress seedlings
- A: Glucose is converted into starch for storage. - KS3.B.23
- Lesson 02 - How do organisms get energy? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3B.3
- Lesson 07 - Skill Focus: Analysis & Evaluations Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Draw graphs for cress experiment
- the role of leaf stomata in gas exchange in plants - KS3.B.19
- A: Conclusions and Evaluations for cress experiment
- A: Draw graphs for cress experiment
- Lesson 07 - Skill Focus: Analysis & Evaluations Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3B.4
- Lesson 08 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 3B.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/3B.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 3B.1
- Lesson 08 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3B.5
- Lesson 09 - How do plants get the gasses they need without losing too much water? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Stomata - KS3.B.19
- Suggested Activity:
Set up for CASE LESSON:
Activity 2: Workcard C
leaf 1 - vaseline on top
leaf 2 - vaseline spread on bottom
leaf 3 - vaseline spread on both sides
leaf 4 - no vaseline
leave for a few days and compare mass changeEquipment Required:
loads of leaves but not waxy ones
vasaline in petri dishes
washing line to peg out leaves
string
paper clips
small pieces of stickers
jury balances
- Suggested Activity:
- Stomata - KS3.B.19
- Lesson 10 - How do plants get the water and mineral nutrients they need? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Plants gaining water from the soil via their roots - KS3.B.15
- Plants gaining mineral nutrients from the soil via their roots - KS3.B.15
- Root hair cells have no chloroplast because they do not receive light.
- Root hair cells have a larger surface area to absorb more water and minerals.
- There are more stomata on the bottom of the leaf than on the top - KS3.B.19
- Suggested Activity:
Test CASE LESSON:
Activity 2: Workcard C
- Suggested Activity:
- Plants gaining water from the soil via their roots - KS3.B.15
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Reflect Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- REFLECTION
- REFLECTION
- Lesson 09 - How do plants get the gasses they need without losing too much water? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4B.1
- Lesson 01 - What are Food Groups? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The five food groups of a human diet are:
- carbohydrates (sugar and starch),
- lipids (fats and oils),
- proteins,
- vitamins and minerals,
- dietary fibre
- (and water). - KS3.B.10 - Carbohydrates: Starch is used for slow release energy. - KS3.B.10
- Carbohydrates: Sugar is used for quick release energy. - KS3.B.10
- Lipids are used for slow release energy, protection of organs and cell building. - KS3.B.10
- Proteins are used for growth, cell repair and cell replacement. - KS3.B.10
- Vitamins and minerals are needed in small quantities for a healthy body. - KS3.B.10
- Dietary Fibre is needed for healthy waste removal. - KS3.B.10
- T: The five food groups of a human diet are:
- Lesson 02 - What is a balanced diet? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A 'Balanced Diet' is a diet in which neither too much energy is consumed, nor too much of any one type of food group. - KS3.B.12
- A balanced diet consists of these proportions of food types:
Fruit and vegetables: 33%
Bread, rice, potatoes and pasta: 33%
Milk and other dairy products : 15%
Meat, fish, egg, beans: 12%
Foods and drinks high in energy: 7% - KS3.B.12- Suggested Activity:
Draw eat well plate pie chart.
- Suggested Activity:
- A food group is what substances are in the food. - KS3.B.12
- A food type is the name of the food. - KS3.B.12
- W: Fruit and vegetables give Vitamins and minerals and Fibre - KS3.B.12
- W: Bread, rice, potatoes and pasta gives Starch (Carbohydrates) - KS3.B.12
- W: Milk and milk products gives Protein; Lipids; Vitamins and Minerals - KS3.B.12
- W: Meat, fish, egg, beans gives Protein; Lipids - KS3.B.12
- W: Foods and drinks high in energy tend to conatain lots of sugars (Carbohydrates) and lipids. - KS3.B.12
- D: Comparing energy values of different foods (from labels) (kJ) - KS3.P.01
- Suggested Activity:
Compare energy found in different foods
Equipment Required:
Laminated food labels
- Suggested Activity:
- A 'Balanced Diet' is a diet in which neither too much energy is consumed, nor too much of any one type of food group. - KS3.B.12
- Lesson 01 - What are Food Groups? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4B.2
- Lesson 03 - How much energy is in the food we eat? Skill Focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Energy in food is chemical energy. - KS3.B.11
- W: Energy in food is measured in catering calories (Kilocalories) - KS3.B.11
- T: Energy in food is measured in Kilojoules in science. - KS3.B.11
- Suggested Activity:
Look at nutritional information on food packaging.
Which is bigger a kilojoule or a kilocalorie?Equipment Required:
Food packaging.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: PLANNING
Aim: Which crisp contains the most energy?
- W: Energy in food is chemical energy. - KS3.B.11
- Lesson 04 - Skill Focus: Data Collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: DATA COLLETION
- Suggested Activity:
Which crisp contains the most energy?
Equipment Required:
burning crisps. calorimeters with cardboard lids
Thermometers
'Fluffy' Crisps eg Wotsits Cheese Curls Onion Rings Cheesy Balls
Pins in Plasticine in bottle tops.
small accurate balances
- Suggested Activity:
- T: DATA COLLETION
- Lesson 05 - Skill Focus: Analysis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: ANALYSIS
Aim: Which crisp contains the most energy?- Suggested Activity:
Burning crisps measuring the temperature increase
Equipment Required:
5 different brands of crisps
small balances
pins to hold crisps
boiling tubes
thermometer
- Suggested Activity:
- T: ANALYSIS
- Lesson 03 - How much energy is in the food we eat? Skill Focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4B.3
- Lesson 06 - How much energy do we need? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Even when you are asleep you require energy to stay alive. - KS3.B.11
- W: You require energy to do anything more than stay alive. - KS3.B.11
- T: The energy required just to stay alive is known as your Basal Metabolic Rate (BMR). - KS3.B.11
- T: The energy you expend through the day doing activities is known as your Active Metabolic Rate (AMR). - KS3.B.11
- T: Your BMR depends on your age and gender. - KS3.B.11
- T: Your AMR depends on your activities. - KS3.B.11
- A: Total Energy Requirements = BMR plus AMR - KS3.B.11
- W: If a person consumes more energy than they use they gain weight. - KS3.B.12
- W: If a person consumes less energy than they use they lose weight. - KS3.B.12
- W: People who are excessively fat are said to be obese. - KS3.B.12
- T: Obesity leads to health problems:
- arthritis (worn joints)
- diabetes (high blood sugar)
- high blood pressure
- heart disease - KS3.B.12- Suggested Activity:
Showing effects of obesity on joints
modelling impact of high blood pressure using students as red blood cells (no equipment needed)Equipment Required:
Syndey skeleton model
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Starvation occurs when a person does not consume enough energy to live (over the medium term). - KS3.B.12
- T: If you do not consume enough vitamins and minerals then you may suffer from deficiency diseases, as cells are unable to function properly. - KS3.B.12
- W: Even when you are asleep you require energy to stay alive. - KS3.B.11
- Lesson 06 - How much energy do we need? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4B.4
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 4B.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/4B.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 4B.1
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4B.5
- Lesson 08 - How is your digestive system adapted? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Digestion happens in the digestive system. - KS3.B.13
- T: The parts of the digestive system: Mouth, Oesophagus, Stomach, Liver, Pancreas, Small intestine, Large intestine, Appendix, Rectum, Anus. - KS3.B.13
- W: Food is broken down into smaller pieces by chewing in the mouth. - KS3.B.13
- W: Chewing food into smaller pieces increase the surface area of the food. - KS3.B.13
- W: The surface area of food allows more food - saliva contact.
More food - saliva contact speeds up the rate of digestion. - KS3.B.13 - T: Food is churned in the stomach which physically breaks the food down. Stomach acids help to break down the food chemically. - KS3.B.13
- Suggested Activity:
Digestion Animation
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The nutrients from the digested food are absorbed into the blood stream in the small intestines. - KS3.B.13
- Suggested Activity:
Class practical: Observing changes in concentration of sugar solution through semi permeable membranes.
Test water for sugars after time to diffuse.Equipment Required:
visking tubing
glucose solution
distilled water
pipettes
Testing for sugars:
Kettles
beakers
test tubes
benedicts solution
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The small intestine has a good blood supply. - KS3.B.13
- T: The nutrients from the digested food diffuse through the intestine wall. - KS3.B.13
- T: Microscopic projections called villi increase the surface area of the intestine. Therefore increasing the rate of diffusion of useful particles from the intestines to the bloodstream. - KS3.B.13
- T: There is a high concentration of nutrients in the intestine and a lower concentration in the blood.
This creates a concentration gradient. - KS3.B.13 - T: The concentration gradient is great because
- the distance between the digested food and the blood is small because the wall of the intestine is thin.
- there is a good blood supply to remove the nutrients from the blood vessel next to the intestine. - KS3.B.13 - T: The small intestine is long (up to 9 meters) to maximise the time in which (complete digestion and) diffusion can happen. - KS3.B.13
- T: Excess water is absorbed back into the blood stream through the large intestines. - KS3.B.13
- W: Undigested food passes out of the anus as faeces when we go to the toilet. - KS3.B.13
- W: Digestion happens in the digestive system. - KS3.B.13
- Lesson 09 - What happens to the food during digestion? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Enzymes are biological catalysts (help specific chemical reactions to happen) that are produced in salivary glands and the pancreas. - KS3.B.13
- T: Amylase enzymes in the mouth break carbohydrates down into sugars. - KS3.B.13
- T: Protease enzymes in the stomach break proteins down into amino acids. - KS3.B.13
- T: Lipase enzymes in the small intestines break Lipids down into glycerol and fatty acids. - KS3.B.13
- T: Amylase and Protease enzymes in the small intestines break undigested carbohydrates and proteins - KS3.B.13
- T: Nutrients are now small enough to be absorbed through the lining of the small intestines into the bloodstream. - KS3.B.13
- T: The lining of the small intestines is adapted to have a thin lining, large surface area and good blood supply. - KS3.B.13
- T: Water is absorbed through the lining of the large intestines. - KS3.B.13
- W: Anything left is excreted - KS3.B.13
- Suggested Activity:
Poo in the sock
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Enzymes are biological catalysts (help specific chemical reactions to happen) that are produced in salivary glands and the pancreas. - KS3.B.13
- Lesson 10 - What are bacteria doing in your gut? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: the importance of bacteria in the human digestive system - KS3.B.14
- Suggested Activity:
FOR BACKGROUND OR TO BE ADDED AS LEARNING POINTS:
You're more microbe than human - if you count all the cells in your body, only 43% are human
- The rest is our microbiome and includes bacteria, viruses, fungi and single-celled archaea
- The human genome - the full set of genetic instructions for a human being - is made up of 20,000 instructions called genes
- But add all the genes in our microbiome together and the figure comes out at between two million and 20 million microbial genes
- It's known as the second genome and is linked to diseases including allergy, obesity, inflammatory bowel disease, Parkinson's, whether cancer drugs work and even depression and autism
- The microbiome has the same mass as your brain.
from BBC http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/health-43785523Equipment Required:
THEORY LESSON
- Suggested Activity:
- T: the importance of bacteria in the human digestive system - KS3.B.14
- Lesson 08 - How is your digestive system adapted? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4B.6
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Reflect Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- REFLECTION
- REFLECTION
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5B.1
- Lesson 01 - What is in the human reproductive systems? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Structure and function of the male reproductive systems:
- Testes: Where sperm cells are produced. - KS3.B.20 - T: - Scrotum: A bag of skin which holds the testes away from the body so the testes are cooler. - KS3.B.20
- T: - Glands: Adds fluids to sperm to make semen. Sperm use this fluid as an energy source. - KS3.B.20
- T: - Sperm duct: Tube which carries the semen to the penis. - KS3.B.20
- T: - Penis: Allows insertion into female. - KS3.B.20
- T: - Urethra: Tube which carries sperm out of the penis. - KS3.B.20
- T: Structure and function of the female reproductive systems:
- Ovary: Where eggs are stored and matured. - KS3.B.20 - T: - Oviducts: Tube which carries eggs from the ovary to the Uterus. - KS3.B.20
- T: - Uterus: Where the baby develops. - KS3.B.20
- T: - Cervix: The opening of the Uterus. - KS3.B.20
- T: - Vagina: Receives the semen. - KS3.B.20
- T: During the Menstrual cycle the blood rich lining of the Uterus thickens in readiness for pregnancy. If not used the lining is shed during menstruation.
(without details of hormones) - KS3.B.20- Suggested Activity:
A letter needs to go home first:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/education/clips/z3bmpv4
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Structure and function of the male reproductive systems:
- Lesson 02 - What are Gametes? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: gametes: cell structure linked to function
Sperm Cells:
- Tail: to be able to swim.
- Pointed head: streamlined for swimming and entering egg.
- Lots of mitrochondria: energy needed to swim, mitrochondria need to release energy through respiration. - KS3.B.20 - W: gametes: cell structure linked to function
Egg Cells:
- Large food store for initial growth - KS3.B.20 - T: Fertilisation occurs when the sperm's nucleus fuses with eggs nucleus.
This forms a zygote. - KS3.B.20 - W: Gametes only contain half the DNA of a 'normal' cell. - KS3.B.20
- T: To result in a pregnancy fertilisation must occur in the oviduct tubes. - KS3.B.20
- W: gametes: cell structure linked to function
- Lesson 03 - How does an offspring develop? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The zygote copies and divides and itself to produce a ball of cells called a embryo. - KS3.B.20
- T: A women becomes pregnant when the embryo implants in the blood rich lining of the Uterus. - KS3.B.20
- T: The embryo develops into a fetus. It is called a fetus when it heart starts beating. - KS3.B.20
- T: Part of the embryo develops into a placenta, which allows substances to cross from the mother's blood into the fetus, and vice versa. - KS3.B.20
- T: The time spend in the uterus is called gestation period. During this time cells continue to copy and divide allowing the fetus to grow. - KS3.B.20
- D: PLOT:
Gestation period vs birth weight for animals - KS3.B.20
- T: The zygote copies and divides and itself to produce a ball of cells called a embryo. - KS3.B.20
- Lesson 04 - What happens during birth? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: During birth, the cervix dilates and the uterus contracts pushing the Fetus through the cervix and vagina. - KS3.B.20
- T: During birth, the cervix dilates and the uterus contracts pushing the Fetus through the cervix and vagina. - KS3.B.20
- Lesson 01 - What is in the human reproductive systems? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5B.2
- Lesson 05 - Can the maternal lifestyle affect the fetus? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- D: Effect of maternal lifestyle on the fetus through the placenta
DATA ANALYSIS:
Plotting Secondary data - KS3.B.20
- D: Effect of maternal lifestyle on the fetus through the placenta
- Lesson 06 - Can the maternal lifestyle affect the fetus? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Effect of maternal lifestyle on the fetus through the placenta
CONCLUSIONS - KS3.B.20
- Effect of maternal lifestyle on the fetus through the placenta
- Lesson 05 - Can the maternal lifestyle affect the fetus? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5B.3
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 5B.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/5B.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 5B.1
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5B.4
- Lesson 08 - What is genetic material? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: In size order the genetic information is arranged as follow:
Base Pairs => Gene => Chromosome => Nucleus - KS3.B.34- Suggested Activity:
Show: http://www.bbc.co.uk/staticarchive/678f62dce35d0fc7ef2333d6d3bfbf53744374ff.jpg
- Suggested Activity:
- T: DNA is a long molecule that contains the genetic information for an organism.
DNA is in the form of a double helix of 2 strands, joined through base pairs. - KS3.B.34- Suggested Activity:
Develop Analogy (Bridge Map)
Base Pairs => Words
DNA => Recipe
Gene => Paragraph
Chromosome => Chapter
Nucleus => Recipe book
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The order of the bases gives the code to create proteins/give characteristics. - KS3.B.34
- T: Long strands of DNA are called chromosomes.
Genes are sections of DNA that give instructions for a particular characteristic.
Genes can be found at particular locations on the chromosome. - KS3.B.34
- W: In size order the genetic information is arranged as follow:
- Lesson 09 - How was the structure of DNA discovered? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Before the discovery of the DNA structure, Pauling had already discovered helical proteins and Chargaff had already discovered there were always equal numbers of bases A and T and also equal numbers of C and G. - KS3.B.34
- Suggested Activity:
Watch:
https://www.youtube.com/v/VegLVn_1oCE
(4 mins)
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Watson and Crick worked out the shape of the DNA double helix and how it could be replicated. - KS3.B.34
- T: Franklin and Wilkins used the new technology of X-ray crystallography to make photographs of the DNA molecule and revealing its shape.
Watson and Crick didn’t properly acknowledge the research carried out by Franklin and Wilkins they used to come up with their discovery. - KS3.B.34 - W: The factors needed for scientific understanding to progress including the improvements in technology and building on discoveries by other scientists. - KS3.B.34
- T: Before the discovery of the DNA structure, Pauling had already discovered helical proteins and Chargaff had already discovered there were always equal numbers of bases A and T and also equal numbers of C and G. - KS3.B.34
- Lesson 10 - What is Heredity? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Heredity is the process by which genetic information is transmitted from one generation to the next. - KS3.B.33
- T: A species is defined as a group of organisms who's genetic information is compatible such that their offspring can also reproduce. - KS3.B.35
- T: Similar species can reproduce, creating sterile offspring. - KS3.B.35
- Suggested Activity:
Look at Ligers, Tigons; Zorse and Horbra etc.
What out for photoshopped pictures.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Biodiversity is a measure of the number of species in an area. - KS3.B.39
- W: the importance of maintaining biodiversity: means all the roles in the ecosystem are occupied, maintains genetic variation, the ecosystem has a greater stability, can save potential useful species from extinction. - KS3.B.39
- Suggested Activity:
Debate?
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The use of gene banks is to preserve hereditary material. - KS3.B.39
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/v/iix7JlBf0ng
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Heredity is the process by which genetic information is transmitted from one generation to the next. - KS3.B.33
- Lesson 08 - What is genetic material? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5B.5
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: the variation between species and between individuals of the same species meaning some organisms compete more successfully, which can drive natural selection - KS3.B.37
- Suggested Activity:
Get students to come up with a list of differences between people in the class.
Are these caused by genetics or environmental factors?
Create a list of genetic, environmental and both variations.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: A species is defined as a group of organisms who's genetic information is compatible such that their offspring can also reproduce. - KS3.B.35
- The differences between individuals within a species are called variation . - KS3.B.36
- The variation between individuals within a species being continuous when there are (near) infinite number of possibilities. - KS3.B.36
- Continuous variation is often measureable and with units. - KS3.B.36
- Suggested Activity:
Eg
Hand span
height
weight
- Suggested Activity:
- Discontinuous variation is often described by words or integers - KS3.B.36
- The variation between individuals within a species being discontinuous when fits into a distinct categoriy - KS3.B.36
- Suggested Activity:
Eg
Ear lobes: detached / attached
Eye Colour
Hair Colour
Gender
Blood Group
Number of legs
COMPARE
Foot length & shoe size
- Suggested Activity:
- measurement and graphical representation of variation - KS3.B.36
- Suggested Activity:
Collect class data for height against no. of students and eye colour against number of students.
Plot these results as graphs.
Height (continuous variation) represented by a line graph.
Eye colour (discontinuous variation) represented by bar graph.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: the variation between species and between individuals of the same species meaning some organisms compete more successfully, which can drive natural selection - KS3.B.37
- Lesson 12 - Progress Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- changes in the environment which may leave individuals within a species, and some entire species, less well adapted to compete successfully and reproduce, which in turn may lead to extinction - KS3.B.38
- Suggested Activity:
Skim, scan, summarise a text on the extinction of woolly mammoth, dinosaurs and dodo.
Example table available to help students summarise the information.
- Suggested Activity:
- changes in the environment which may leave individuals within a species, and some entire species, less well adapted to compete successfully and reproduce, which in turn may lead to extinction - KS3.B.38
- Lesson 13 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- REFLECTION
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6B.1
- Lesson 01 - What is Respiration? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Cells require energy in order to fulfill their function. - KS3.B.26
- T: All cells obtain energy through respiration. - KS3.B.26
- A: Most respiration happens in the mitochondria of a cell. - KS3.B.26
- T: Respiration is the decomposing (breaking down) of large particles which contain lots of energy into smaller particles containing less energy.
The extra energy is released from the chemical reaction is used by the cell. - KS3.B.26 - T: Respiration is an exothermic reaction. - KS3.B.26
- W: For respiration cells need Glucose (sugar) and oxygen. - KS3.B.26
- Suggested Activity:
What do we need, so that we can do exercise?
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Most animals and plants do respiration using oxygen. This is called aerobic respiration. - KS3.B.26
- Suggested Activity:
How are aerobic classes different from weight lifting?
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1M5-HzxswPw#t=00m35s
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Aerobic respiration can be represented as
Glucose plus Oxygen => Carbon Dioxide plus Water ( plus Energy ) - KS3.B.27 - T: When there isn't enough oxygen, cells can't do aerobic energy.
Instead cells do anaerobic respiration. - KS3.B.28 - T: Anaerobic respiration can be represented as
Glucose => Lactic acid ( plus Energy ) - KS3.B.28 - T: Anaerobic respiration releases less energy than aerobic energy. - KS3.B.29
- Suggested Activity:
Why can't people keep on lifting heavy weights for a long time?
- Car is not getting heavier.
- Muscles are not getting smaller.
- They can take a break, without eating anything and then start again.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=p8dp8TWnHGc#t=00m43s
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Lactic acid causes a burning sensation in the muscle and possibly cramps. - KS3.B.29
- W: To get rid of the Lactic acid, it must be combined with oxygen to convert it back into water and carbon dioxide. - KS3.B.29
- Suggested Activity:
Why do people continue to breathe heavily after exercise?
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Cells require energy in order to fulfill their function. - KS3.B.26
- Lesson 02 - What is Diffusion? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Particles in a fluid are always moving. - KS3.C.09
- Diffusion is the movement of a substance from a region of higher concentration to a region of lower concentration. - KS3.P.53
- Concentration is the number of a particular type of particle in a volume of space. - KS3.C.09
- Horizontally, half the particles will be moving to the left and half to the right. - KS3.C.09
- Half of a large number is more than half of a smaller number.
So more particles will travel from a larger number of particles (high concentration), than are replaced by the smaller number moving form the smaller number of particles (lower concentration). - KS3.C.09 - T: Diffusion happens fastest when:
- there is a large surface area
- there is a large difference in concentration
- there is a short distance between areas of differing concentration.
- at higher temperatures. - KS3.C.09- Suggested Activity:
Students explain why these statements are true in terms of the particle model.
- Suggested Activity:
- Glucose diffuses into a muscle cell, because there is a higher concentration of glucose particles in the blood than the cell. - KS3.B.04
- Suggested Activity:
Draw a diagram from the description.
- Suggested Activity:
- Oxygen diffuses into a muscle cell, because there is a higher concentration of oxygen particles in the blood than the cell. - KS3.B.04
- Carbon dioxide diffuses out of a muscle cell, because there is a higher concentration of Carbon dioxide particles in the cell than the blood. - KS3.B.04
- Water diffuses out a muscle cell, because there is a higher concentration of oxygen particles in the blood than the cell. - KS3.B.04
- A: Diffusion occurs through the cell membrane, because there are small gaps in the me. - KS3.B.04
- T: Partially-permeable allows certain particles through but not others. - KS3.B.04
- W: These small gaps allow smaller molecules through but not larger ones. This means the membrane is partially-permeable - KS3.B.04
- W: Particles in a fluid are always moving. - KS3.C.09
- Lesson 03 - Where does diffusion happen in the body Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Identify the main parts of the human circulatory system:
- heart
- blood vessels
- Arteries
- Veins
- Capillaries
- blood - KS2.B.18- Suggested Activity:
KS2 RECAP
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Arteries take blood away from the heart. - KS2.B.18
- A: Veins take blood into the heart. - KS2.B.18
- A: Capillaries carry blood between cells. - KS2.B.18
- A: Blood is made up of mainly water with chemicals dissolved in it. This is called plasma. - KS2.B.18
- A: Carbon dioxide and some Oxygen are dissolved in the plasma. - KS2.B.18
- A: Blood has Red Blood Cells in it to carry far more oxygen. - KS2.B.18
- W: Oxygen diffuses into the blood in the lungs. - KS3.B.04
- W: Carbon dioxide diffuses out of the blood in the lungs. - KS3.B.04
- W: Glucose mainly diffuses into the blood in the small intestine. - KS3.B.04
- T: Excess water is mainly filtered out of the blood in the kidneys. - KS3.B.04
- A: Identify the main parts of the human circulatory system:
- Lesson 01 - What is Respiration? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6B.2
- Lesson 04 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Exercise enquiry
PLANNING:
Aim: How does duration / type of exercise affect pulse / breath rate - KS3.C.10
- Exercise enquiry
- Lesson 05 - Skill focus: Data collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Exercise enquiry
DATA COLLECTION
Aim: How does duration / type of exercise affect pulse / breath rate - KS3.C.10
- Exercise enquiry
- Lesson 06 - Skill focus: Analysis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Exercise enquiry
ANALYSIS & EVALUATION:
Aim: How does duration / type of exercise affect pulse / breath rate - KS3.C.10
- Exercise enquiry
- Lesson 04 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6B.3
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 6B.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/6B.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 6B.1
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6B.4
- Lesson 08 - How are the lungs adapted to allow gas exchange? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Gas exchange in humans occurs in the lungs. - KS3.B.16
- Gas enters the mouth and nose and descends down the wind pipe (trachea). - KS3.B.16
- Suggested Activity:
Label diagram from description
- Suggested Activity:
- The wind pipe splits into two Bronchi. One Bronchus to each lung. - KS3.B.16
- Suggested Activity:
Label diagram from description
- Suggested Activity:
- The Bronchi split into small tubes called Bronchioles. - KS3.B.16
- Suggested Activity:
Label diagram from description
- Suggested Activity:
- The Bronchioles lead to the alveoli (air sacs) - KS3.B.16
- Suggested Activity:
Label diagram from description
- Suggested Activity:
- Lungs are adapted to speed up gas exchange. - KS3.B.16
- Suggested Activity:
Lung dissection
Equipment Required:
Lung
Scalpel
Scissors
Forceps
Board
Pins
Pump
Dettol spray and cloth
Gloves
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The many Alveoli give the lungs a huge internal surface area. - KS3.B.16
- W: Alveoli's large surface area allows more particles to travel through at the same time. - KS3.B.16
- T: Alveoli have good blood supply. - KS3.B.16
- T: Alveoli's good blood supply maintains the difference in concentration as oxygen is taken away and carbon dioxide delivered quickly. - KS3.B.16
- T: Alveoli walls are only one cell thick. - KS3.B.16
- T: Alveoli's one cell thick walls reduces the distance the particles have to travel between the air and the blood. - KS3.B.16
- Gas exchange in humans occurs in the lungs. - KS3.B.16
- Lesson 09 - How do we breathe? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The chest cavity from the diaphragm up is called the Thorax. - KS3.B.17
- The ribs form a stiff boundary to the thorax. - KS3.B.17
- The rib cage, intercostal muscles and diaphragm are used to breathe. - KS3.B.17
- To move air into the lungs the rib cage is moved out and up by the intercostal muscles contracting. The diaphragm contracts and sinks. - KS3.B.17
- The increase in the volume of the lungs, reduces the air pressure in the lungs to lower than the air outside, pulling air particles into the lungs. - KS3.B.17
- To move air out of the lungs the rib cage is moved in and down by the intercostal muscles relaxing. The diaphragm relaxes and rises. - KS3.B.17
- The decrease in the volume of the lungs, increases the air pressure in the lungs to lower than the air outside, pushing the air particles out of the lungs. - KS3.B.17
- When there is a difference in pressure between the air around the nose and the air in the lungs, particles will 'diffuse' from the area of high pressure the area of lower pressure. - KS3.B.17
- Make simple measurements of lung volume. - KS3.B.17
- Suggested Activity:
Use the lung volume bags.
- Suggested Activity:
- The chest cavity from the diaphragm up is called the Thorax. - KS3.B.17
- Lesson 10 - How can gas exchange be affected? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: When humans exercise, more oxygen is required for respiration and more carbon dioxide needs to be expelled. - KS3.B.18
- W: When humans exercise heart (pulse) rate increases to supply more blood to the lungs. - KS3.B.18
- W: When humans exercise we breath faster and deeper to supply more air to the lungs. - KS3.B.18
- T: Asthma is caused by inflammation (swelling) of the breathing tubes that carry air in and out of the lungs. - KS3.B.18
- W: This inflammation makes the breathing tubes narrower and so restricts speed at which air can enter the lungs. - KS3.B.18
- T: Tobacco smoke contains:
- Tar
- Nicotine
- Carbon monoxide - KS3.B.18- Suggested Activity:
Use the fact sheets to create a matrix map to show short and long term effects of smoking
Equipment Required:
6B.10 fact sheets
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The tar lines the surface of the lungs. - KS3.B.18
- W: The tar adds a barrier which slows down diffusion. - KS3.B.18
- T: Carbon monoxide is more reactive than oxygen. - KS3.B.18
- W: Carbon monoxide takes the place of oxygen on the red blood cells, leaving less oxygen to be transported to the cells. - KS3.B.18
- T: Nicotine is addictive - it causes a smoker to want more cigarettes. Nicotine also increases the heart rate and blood pressure, and makes blood vessels narrower than normal. This can lead to heart disease. - KS3.B.18
- W: When humans exercise, more oxygen is required for respiration and more carbon dioxide needs to be expelled. - KS3.B.18
- Lesson 08 - How are the lungs adapted to allow gas exchange? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6B.5
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Progress Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- REFLECTION
- REFLECTION
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8B.1
- Lesson 01 - How do we classify drugs? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Drugs can be classified by their legal status. - KS3.B.22
- Suggested Activity:
Class brainstorm facts and question.
Equipment Required:
Drugs example box if required please let us know
- Suggested Activity:
- Drugs can be legal and freely available, legal with an age restriction, legal and require prescription from a doctor or illegal with varying penalties (class of drugs). - KS3.B.22
- Drugs can be classified by what they do. - KS3.B.22
- Depressants slows down brain activity. - KS3.B.22
- Hallucinogens alters what we hear and see. - KS3.B.22
- Painkillers blocks nerve impulses. - KS3.B.22
- Performance enhancers improve muscle development. - KS3.B.22
- Stimulants increase brain activity. - KS3.B.22
- Drugs can be classified by their legal status. - KS3.B.22
- Lesson 03 - What effect do drugs have? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The effect of drugs on life processes - KS3.B.22
- The effect of drugs on life processes - KS3.B.22
- Lesson 01 - How do we classify drugs? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8B.2
- Lesson 04 - Enquiry: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Enquiry Planing / Selecting information
Aim for student to be able to select relevant data from a large data set. - KS3.B.22- Suggested Activity:
http://www.nuffieldfoundation.org/practical-biology/investigating-factors-affecting-heart-rate-daphnia
Not temperature- just ethanol
Please concentrate on ethics of experimenting on living organismsEquipment Required:
AQA required Practical Sheet
- Suggested Activity:
- Enquiry Planing / Selecting information
- Lesson 05 - Enquiry: Data Collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Enquiry Data Analysis - KS3.B.22
- Enquiry Data Analysis - KS3.B.22
- Lesson 06 - Enquiry: Data Analysis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Enquiry Evaluation - KS3.B.22
- Enquiry Evaluation - KS3.B.22
- Lesson 04 - Enquiry: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8B.3
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 8B.1 - KS3.B.22
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/8B.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 8B.1 - KS3.B.22
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8B.4
- Lesson 08 - Revision for End of Key Stage Exam Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Revision for End of KS3 exam. - KS3.B.22
- Revision for End of KS3 exam. - KS3.B.22
- Lesson 08 - Revision for End of Key Stage Exam Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.01
- Lesson 01 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Solids hold their shape. - KS3.C.01
- Suggested Activity:
Demo Solid, liquid, Gas in a beaker
Equipment Required:
3 beakers
An Ice cube
Particle theory model & power pack
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Liquids take the shape of the bottom of their containers. - KS3.C.01
- Suggested Activity:
class practical
Equipment Required:
250mL beakers
ice
stop clocks
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Gases fill their containers. - KS3.C.01
- W: Liquids and gases are known as fluids because they can flow. - KS3.C.01
- T: All matter (stuff) is made of particles. - KS3.C.01
- T: Particles in a solid form a lattice - regular pattern. - KS3.C.01
- T: Particles in a liquid are touching, but have no pattern. - KS3.C.01
- T: Particles in a gas are spread out, with no pattern. - KS3.C.01
- T: Particles in a gas and liquids can move relative to each other, that is why they have no pattern. - KS3.C.01
- W: When particles can move relative to each other, the material can flow. - KS3.C.01
- T: The is no such thing as liquid or solid particles. - KS3.C.01
- W: Solids hold their shape. - KS3.C.01
- Lesson 01 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.02
- Lesson 02 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Lower: Density is the how heavy a material is for a given size.
Higher: Density is the ratio of mass to volume. - KS3.P.51 - D: Measure the mass and volume of material sample blocks / objects using eureka cans.
Calculate density.
Conversion of units and the use of unit prefixes. - KS3.P.51 - A: Students design tables to record measurement and calculations. - KS3.P.51
- W: For the same material:
- Solids are the most dense;
- Gases are the least dense;
- With liquids between. - KS3.P.51
- T: Lower: Density is the how heavy a material is for a given size.
- Lesson 02 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.03
- Lesson 03 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Students describe what is happening to be particles: ie transition from a lattice to lacking a pattern (amorphous structure) - KS3.P.57
- Suggested Activity:
Melt some ice in a boiling tube over a Bunsen.
Equipment Required:
Ice cube
- Suggested Activity:
- T: So what happens when a solid is heated but does not yet melt:
Matter expands when heated
Matter becomes less dense when heated. - KS3.P.57- Suggested Activity:
Ball and ring demo.
Equipment Required:
Ball and ring demo.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Particles move faster when heated, and so occupy a larger space.
Particles do not change size, but can be of different sizes. - KS3.P.57 - W: When heated, the forces involved in collisions increases as the particles are moving faster. - KS3.C.02
- T: Particles are never stationary - other than at absolute zero
There is nothing in the gaps between particles. - KS3.P.57 - W: DESIRABLE:
The anomaly of ice-water transition:
Less dense objects float.
If solids are more dense than liquids, why does ice float on water?
Why does a full bottle of water break when left in a freezer?
Ice is less dense than water. - KS3.P.55
- A: Students describe what is happening to be particles: ie transition from a lattice to lacking a pattern (amorphous structure) - KS3.P.57
- Lesson 03 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.04
- Lesson 04 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: The process of a solid turning into a liquid is called melting.
The process of a liquid turning into a solid is called freezing.
The process of a liquid turning into a gas is called evaporation.
The process of a gas turning into a liquid is called condensation. - KS3.P.50 - T: The process of a solid turning into a gas is called sublimation.
These are all changes of state, as solid, liquid and gas are known as 'states of matter'. - KS3.P.50- Suggested Activity:
The Sublimation of air freshener
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000404/the-sublimation-of-air-freshener?cmpid=CMP00005967Equipment Required:
Sublimation of Iodine,
Evaporating dish
Funnel
Iodine crystals
Gloves
Forceps
Fume Cupboard
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Particles always attract each other. - KS3.C.02
- T: Solids exist when the attraction between particles is greater than the forces involved in collisions.
Gases exist when the attraction between particles is less than the forces involved in collisions. - KS3.C.02 - T: Liquids can pour and take the shape of their container because particles are able to change places with each other. This is what causes the lack of a pattern. - KS3.C.02
- W: Liquids exist when some particles temporarily get enough energy to over come the forces of attraction with its neighbour and so change places with each other. - KS3.C.02
- W: The process of a solid turning into a liquid is called melting.
- Lesson 04 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.05
- Lesson 05 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: PLANNING
- Aim: To find out how the amount of time heating water affects its temperature.
- Hypothesis: That the temperature of water will increase more the longer it is heated.
NB: Good experiment to teach control variables. - KS3.P.58 - T: The effect of random error can be reduced by calculating a mean. - KS3.WS
- T: PLANNING
- Lesson 05 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.06
- Lesson 06 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: DATA COLLECTION:
- Aim: To find out how the amount of time heating water affects its temperature.
- Hypothesis: That the temperature of water will increase more the longer it is heated.
NB: Recap safe Bunsen use. - KS3.P.58
- T: DATA COLLECTION:
- Lesson 06 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.07
- Lesson 07 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: ANALYSIS & EVALUATION:
- Aim: To find out how the amount of time heating water affects its temperature.
- Hypothesis: That the temperature of water will increase more the longer it is heated.
NB: Link the length of time to the amount of energy given to the water. - KS3.P.58
- T: ANALYSIS & EVALUATION:
- Lesson 07 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.08
- Lesson 08 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Review of 1C.1 - KS3.P.58
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/1C.1
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Review of 1C.1 - KS3.P.58
- Lesson 08 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.09
- Lesson 09 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- D: Make a prediction of the change in mass when an Ice cube melts.
Develop into an explained hypothesis. - KS3.P.50 - D: Measure the mass of an ice cube and the let it melt.
Measure the mass of the resulting water. - KS3.P.50 - T: With every measurement there always random error. - KS3.WS
- T: Particles can not be created or destroyed. - KS3.P.50
- W: There is a conservation of material and of mass for physical processes ie: in melting, freezing, evaporation, sublimation, condensation.
NB: Students have not studied chemical reactions yet. - KS3.P.50 - A: Draw a labelled diagram to show the particle arrangement for a material sample as a solid, liquid and gas. Like:
http://www.chemistry.wustl.edu/~edudev/LabTutorials/Thermochem/images/SolLiqGas.jpg
Check for number of particles being constant.
Label melting, freezing, evaporation, sublimation, condensation. - KS3.P.50
- D: Make a prediction of the change in mass when an Ice cube melts.
- Lesson 09 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.10
- Lesson 10 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The energy of the particles in a material is called 'internal energy'. - KS3.P.58
- T: The energy of the particles in a material is called 'internal energy'. - KS3.P.58
- Lesson 10 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.12
- Lesson 12 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- REFLECTION
- REFLECTION
- Lesson 12 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.4
- Lesson 10 - What is internal energy? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: When particles are given heat energy they move faster, this because they gain kinetic (movement) energy. - KS3.P.58
- W: A change of state from solid to liquid, liquid to gas or solid to gas requires an increase of the internal energy of the material. - KS3.C.20
- D: Add energy arrows to diagram from previous lesson. - KS3.C.20
- D: DESIRABLE:
Latent heat experiment such as:
Practical 26 - Classic Chemistry Practicals
SHARED AREA\KS3\Other Resources\ClassicExp\Kev21-30.doc
or
http://wordpress.mrreid.org/2009/12/08/experiments-that-actually-work-latent-heat-of-fusion/
Ideally heating though. I like the idea measuring the water bath and the stearic acid.
Good opportunity for data loggers. - KS3.C.20 - W: An increase of the internal energy of the material does not always result in a increase in temperature. Some energy is used in order to change state. - KS3.C.20
- W: Internal energy is the sum of kinetic energy and the potential energy stored in the stretch 'attraction' between the particles. - KS3.C.20
- T: When particles are given heat energy they move faster, this because they gain kinetic (movement) energy. - KS3.P.58
- Lesson 10 - What is internal energy? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1C.5
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2C.1
- Lesson 01 - What did John Dalton work out? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: There are millions of chemicals in the world. - KS3.C.03
- T: During the 1800s, John Dalton did experiments to break down chemicals until they could not be split any further. - KS3.C.03
- T: Dalton found some chemicals do not split into other chemicals, these are known as elements. - KS3.C.03
- W: Elements are made of only one type of particle. - KS3.C.03
- W: The type of particle determines the element (chemical). - KS3.C.03
- T: Dalton found some chemical do split into other chemicals, these are known as compounds. - KS3.C.03
- W: Compounds are made up of more than one type of particles. - KS3.C.03
- T: Dalton found compounds always split into the same proportions. - KS3.C.03
- Suggested Activity:
Electrolysis of water.
Hydrogen rocket
Prove twice as much hydrogen as oxygen in water.Equipment Required:
Hofmann voltameter (with water)
Crocs
Power supply
Hydrogen balloon (zinc granuals, copper sulphate crystals and 2m hcl mixed in a conical flask with a lip with a balloon to catch gas)
Splint on meter rule
- Suggested Activity:
- H: SET HOMEWORK: Wordsearch - KS3.P.29
- W: There are millions of chemicals in the world. - KS3.C.03
- Lesson 02 - What is the link between Lego and chemistry? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: There are only around 100 types of atoms (elements) to make up the millions of chemicals. - KS3.P.56
- T: Atoms are the smallest part of a chemical, and can not be split chemically. - KS3.P.56
- Suggested Activity:
Bridge map Lego analogy.
Model => Chemical
Brick => Atom
Colour => Type
Tower => Molecule
Single Coloured tower => Element molecule
Multicoloured tower => Compound
Blocks in box => mixtureEquipment Required:
Various Large Lego bricks
Magnesium strip
Blue glass
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Groups of bonded atoms are called Molecules. - KS3.P.56
- Suggested Activity:
Bridge map Lego analogy
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Elements are made up of only one type of atom. - KS3.C.04
- Suggested Activity:
Bridge map Lego analogy
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Compounds are made up of more than one type of atom, in a fixed combination. - KS3.C.04
- Suggested Activity:
Bridge map Lego analogy
- Suggested Activity:
- T: A Mixture is a collection of different particles in the same place. - KS3.C.04
- Suggested Activity:
Bridge map Lego analogy
Show Air on Atomscope
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Complete drawings in AM:ECM Matrix - KS3.C.04
- T: There are only around 100 types of atoms (elements) to make up the millions of chemicals. - KS3.P.56
- Lesson 03 - How do we read and write chemistry? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Each element has a chemical symbol. - KS3.C.05
- Some chemical symbols consist of two letters (as there are more than 26 elements).
Chemical symbols start with a capital letter. - KS3.C.05 - T: Compounds have chemical formulae which show the elements in the compound. - KS3.C.05
- W: Compounds have chemical formulae with more than one capital letter in. - KS3.C.05
- Suggested Activity:
Demo 1:
show different properties of elements Fe and S in a mixture compared to as a compound of FeS.Equipment Required:
mixture of sulfur and iron filings
magnet
test tube with some sulfur and iron
hammer
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Elements have chemical formulae with only one capital letter in. - KS3.C.05
- A: Students can identify the number of elements in a compound from its formulae. - KS3.C.05
- A: Students can identify the number of atoms in a compound from its formulae. - KS3.C.05
- W: Mixture 'formulae' have a plus sign in. - KS3.C.05
- Each element has a chemical symbol. - KS3.C.05
- Lesson 01 - What did John Dalton work out? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2C.2
- Lesson 04 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- PLANNING
SECONDARY DATA TASK
How could something about the particles in a substance affect its boiling point. eg
To find out how the number of elements in a substance affect its boiling point.
To find out how the number of atoms in a substance's molecule affect its boiling point.
A chance to have a graph without a possible line of best fit.
Leading to a conclusion: There is no relationship between ... and melting point. - KS3.P.58 - A: D: Write a scientific (testable) question - KS3.P.58
- D: <TABLE style='font-size:0.7em;'><TR><TH>Chemical</TH><TH>Formula</TH><TH>Melting<BR>Point<BR>(°C)</TH><TH>Melting<BR>Point<BR>(K)</TH></TR><TR><TD>Argon</TD><TD>Ar</TD><TD>-190</TD><TD>83</TD></TR><TR><TD>Hydrogen</TD><TD>H<SUB>2</SUB></TD><TD>-260 </TD><TD>13</TD></TR><TR><TD>Iodine</TD><TD>I<SUB>2</SUB></TD><TD>114</TD><TD>387</TD></TR><TR><TD>Carbon Dioxide</TD><TD>CO<SUB>2</SUB></TD><TD>-57 </TD><TD>216</TD></TR><TR><TD>Water</TD><TD>H<SUB>2</SUB>O</TD><TD>0 </TD><TD>273</TD></TR><TR><TD>Methane</TD><TD>CH<SUB>4</SUB></TD><TD>-182 </TD><TD>91</TD></TR><TR><TD>Ethanol</TD><TD>CH<SUB>5</SUB>OH</TD><TD>-114 </TD><TD>159</TD></TR><TR><TD>Glucose</TD><TD>C<SUB>6</SUB>H<SUB>12</SUB>O<SUB>6</SUB></TD><TD>146 </TD><TD>419</TD></TR></TABLE> - KS3.P.58
- PLANNING
- Lesson 05 - Skill focus: Data Analysis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Data Analysis<UL>
E: Identify the Independent Variable (IV) as continuous or categoric.
E: Choose the correct graph to draw.
D: Plot suitable graph.
S: Independently work out the scale for graphs.
M: Explain the choice to draw a bar chart or a scatter graph.</UL> - KS3.P.58 - D: <TABLE style='font-size:0.7em;'><TR><TH>Chemical</TH><TH>Formula</TH><TH>Melting<BR>Point<BR>(°C)</TH><TH>Melting<BR>Point<BR>(K)</TH></TR><TR><TD>Argon</TD><TD>Ar</TD><TD>-190</TD><TD>83</TD></TR><TR><TD>Hydrogen</TD><TD>H<SUB>2</SUB></TD><TD>-260 </TD><TD>13</TD></TR><TR><TD>Iodine</TD><TD>I<SUB>2</SUB></TD><TD>114</TD><TD>387</TD></TR><TR><TD>Carbon Dioxide</TD><TD>CO<SUB>2</SUB></TD><TD>-57 </TD><TD>216</TD></TR><TR><TD>Water</TD><TD>H<SUB>2</SUB>O</TD><TD>0 </TD><TD>273</TD></TR><TR><TD>Methane</TD><TD>CH<SUB>4</SUB></TD><TD>-182 </TD><TD>91</TD></TR><TR><TD>Ethanol</TD><TD>CH<SUB>5</SUB>OH</TD><TD>-114 </TD><TD>159</TD></TR><TR><TD>Glucose</TD><TD>C<SUB>6</SUB>H<SUB>12</SUB>O<SUB>6</SUB></TD><TD>146 </TD><TD>419</TD></TR></TABLE> - KS3.P.58
- A: Data Analysis<UL>
- Lesson 06 - Skill focus: Conclusion Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Conclusions<UL>
E: State if something changed using your results.
E: State if the independent variable affects the dependent variable
D: Write a (Point) conclusion
S: Write a (Point Evidence) conclusion</UL> - KS3.P.58
- A: Conclusions<UL>
- Lesson 04 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2C.3
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 2C.1 - KS3.P.58
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/2C.1
Equipment Required:
x
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 2C.1 - KS3.P.58
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2C.4
- Lesson 08 - Why are liquids lighter than their solids? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: There is no change of mass during a change of state as no particles are destroyed.
This is known as the conservation of mass. - KS3.C.06- Suggested Activity:
Take some molten wax from water bath.
Pour into beaker and weigh.
Let it freeze and weigh again.
Very similar to 1C!Equipment Required:
molten wax in tube tubes in water bath
beakers
balances
- Suggested Activity:
- W: There is no change of mass during a change of state as no particles are destroyed.
- Lesson 09 - What happens to the number of particles during a chemical reaction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: There is no change of mass during chemical reactions as no particles are destroyed.
This is known as the conservation of mass. - KS3.C.06- Suggested Activity:
Marble chips and hydrochloric acid in conical flask with balloon over neck.
Equipment Required:
Marble chips
Hydrochloric acid
(Conical flasks)
Balloons
Jewelry Balances
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Chemical reactions result from the rearrangement of atoms - KS3.C.12
- Suggested Activity:
Learn the chant:
- Molecules (Hands make fists)
- Collide (Bag fists together twice, sticking together the second time)
- Split (Spread fingers out)
- Rearrange (Slide hands one in front of the other, then the other way round
- Bond (interlock fingers)
- Become a new substance (roll hands to 'present' new substance)
- Suggested Activity:
- H: SET HOMEWORK:
Revise keyword meaning and concepts for POO.
- W: There is no change of mass during chemical reactions as no particles are destroyed.
- Lesson 10 - What can we learn from Brownian motion? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Brownian motion in gases is the proof of particles too small to see.
The random motion of the large particle can only be explained by smaller particles hitting it. - KS3.P.52- Suggested Activity:
Smoke cells and microscopes if we have them.
http://labs.minutelabs.io/Brownian-Motion/
Atomscope visual demo, but shows smaller particles.
Throw a ball to a student.
Why can you catch a ball? Because the motion is predictable. Is the large particle motion predictable?...
Use dice to model Brownian motionEquipment Required:
Smoke cells (doesn't work, don't give anything other than the dice)
Cover Slips
Microscopes
Taper / smoke matches
dice
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Brownian motion in gases is the proof of particles too small to see.
- Lesson 08 - Why are liquids lighter than their solids? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2C.5
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- REFLECTION
- REFLECTION
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3C.1
- Lesson 01 - What is the difference between pure and impure? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: A pure substance contains only what it is labelled as.
It is not contaminated with something unexpected eg food grade chemicals. - KS3.C.07- Suggested Activity:
Does a pure substance mean:
- contains only one type of chemical eg 24ct Gold
OR:
- only contains what you it says on the label?
eg HCl (aq), Saline
Construct 'Double Bubble' for example chemicals.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: A trace substance is chemical found in very small amounts.
These may make substances impure. - KS3.C.07 - D: Pure substances can be identified by being unable to separate them. - KS3.C.11
- Suggested Activity:
Circus of labelled substances:
- Tap water
- Aluminium
- (Clean) Sand
- Table Salt
- Pond water
- Sea water
- Saline
- Hydrochloric Acid
- White chalk rock
- Bronze (or other alloy)
- Rusty nail
- Steel nail
- Distilled Witchazel
- Deionised water
Students identify if they are pure or not in table and give a reason.
Then show formulae or constituent parts, do they change their minds?
Brainstorm how we could tell if something is pure:
Does it look like there are small amounts of different chemicals?
Can it be separated into different chemicals?
Is there a plus in the chemical formula for the substance?Equipment Required:
Circus of labelled substances:
- Tap water
- Aluminium
- (Clean) Sand
- Table Salt
- Pond water
- Sea water
- Saline
- Hydrochloric Acid
- White chalk rock
- Bronze (or other alloy)
- Rusty nail
- Steel nail
- Distilled Witchazel
- Deionised water
- Suggested Activity:
- W: A pure substance contains only what it is labelled as.
- Lesson 02 - How can we separate the components of salty, sandy water? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- D: To be able to describe simple techniques for separating mixtures: filtration, evaporation. - KS3.C.10
- Suggested Activity:
Separate out sandy salt water.
Equipment Required:
mixtures of salt, sand and water. evaporation dishes, clay triangles. filter paper, conical flasks. distilled water bottles.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Filtration separates by size of particle, normally solid and liquid. - KS3.C.10
- T: The solid left behind in the filter is called the residue. - KS3.C.10
- T: The liquid that has passed through the filter is called the filtrate. - KS3.C.10
- W: Evaporation separates by differences in boiling point, collecting the substance with the higher point. - KS3.C.10
- D: To be able to describe simple techniques for separating mixtures: filtration, evaporation. - KS3.C.10
- Lesson 03 - How can we separate a mixture of liquids? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- D: To be able to describe simple techniques for separating mixtures: Distillation. - KS3.C.10
- Distillation separates by differences in boiling point, collecting the substance with the lower point. - KS3.C.10
- Suggested Activity:
Demo: Liebig condenser with inky water.
Equipment Required:
Liebig condenser with inky water.
- Suggested Activity:
- D: To be able to describe simple techniques for separating mixtures: Distillation. - KS3.C.10
- Lesson 01 - What is the difference between pure and impure? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3C.2
- Lesson 04 - Chromatography Enquiry - Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Lesson 05 - Chromatography Enquiry - Data collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Chromatography enquiry
DATA COLLECTION:
Aim: To found out how many colours make up the different coloured M&Ms - KS3.C.10
- Chromatography enquiry
- Lesson 06 - Chromatography Enquiry - Analysis and Evaluation Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Chromatography enquiry
ANALYSIS & EVALUATION:
Aim: To found out how many colours make up the different coloured M - KS3.C.10
- Chromatography enquiry
- 3C.3
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 3C.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/3C.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 3C.1
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3C.4
- Lesson 08 - What is the difference between soluble and insoluble? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: If a solid can dissolve in particular liquid then it is know as 'soluble'. - KS3.C.08
- T: If a solid cannot dissolve in particular liquid then it is know as 'insoluble' - KS3.C.08
- W: Solutions are mixtures of solids and liquids, in which the solid breaks down and behaves like a liquid. - KS3.C.08
- T: The solid added is called the solute. - KS3.C.08
- T: The liquid added is called the solvent. - KS3.C.08
- T: The large solute (solid) crystal break down into smaller molecules which fit between the particles of the solvent. - KS3.C.08
- W: The solid can now behave like a liquid as the small molecules can move relative to each other. - KS3.C.08
- T: A saturated solution is one that can not dissolve any more solute. - KS3.C.08
- W: When all the gaps between particles are full, no more solute can be dissolved. - KS3.C.08
- W: Increasing the temperature of the solvent, increases the speed the particles collide, creating bigger gaps.
This allows more solute to dissolve in the solvent. - KS3.C.08- Suggested Activity:
Investigating solubility by finding out the saturation point for water and salt. recrod mass of salt added. Consider changing one variable such as temperature of water, stirring etc.
Demo:
once salt saturation has been reached, filter one sample add some sugar and ask students why the sugar has dissolved?
EW: Explain what happened using the big ideas
GF: Compare the structure and bonding of salt and sugar particles to explain why the sugar can be dissolved even though the salt saturation point has been reachedEquipment Required:
250ml beakers
stirring rods
kettles
thermometers
salt
spatulas
weighing boats
(range of non-hazardous solids to test whether soluble or insoluble e.g. - sodium chloride, Silicon dioxide, sugar, calcium carbonate )
balances
stop clocks
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Solubility is a measure of how much solute can be dissolved in a solvent. - KS3.C.08
- T: If a solid can dissolve in particular liquid then it is know as 'soluble'. - KS3.C.08
- Lesson 09 - Where do particles go when they are dissolved? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- When dissolving no particles are destroyed so there is a conservation of material and mass. - KS3.P.50
- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
conservation of mass for dissolving substances. Weigh out some salt. Measure the mass of some water.
dissolve the salt into the water and reweigh the mixture.Equipment Required:
small balances
small beakers of salt
spatulas
stop clocks
250mL beakers
stirring rods
- Suggested Activity:
- The reverse of dissolving is crystallisation. - KS3.P.50
- When dissolving no particles are destroyed so there is a conservation of material and mass. - KS3.P.50
- Lesson 10 - What is diffusion and how does it work? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Concentration is the number of a particular type of particle in a volume of space. - KS3.C.09
- Suggested Activity:
Dilute Potassium permanganate in large beaker.
Observe the colour becomes 'weaker' (less concentrated)Equipment Required:
Dilute Potassium permanganate in large beaker
- Suggested Activity:
- Diffusion is the movement of a substance from a region of higher concentration to a region of lower concentration. - KS3.P.53
- Particles in a fluid are always moving. - KS3.C.09
- Suggested Activity:
observe the diffusion of food coloring in M&M's in the water
observe how long it takes for potassium permangement to spread out in cold and warm water in a petri dishEquipment Required:
Perfume
M M's
petrie dishes
stopwatches
Petri dishes
measuring cylinders
kettles for warm water
Potassium permanganate crystals
graph paper
timers
- Suggested Activity:
- Horizontally, half the particles will be moving to the left and half to the right. - KS3.C.09
- Half of a large number is more than half of a smaller number.
So more particles will travel from a larger number of particles (high concentration), than are replaced by the smaller number moving form the smaller number of particles (lower concentration). - KS3.C.09
- Concentration is the number of a particular type of particle in a volume of space. - KS3.C.09
- Lesson 08 - What is the difference between soluble and insoluble? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3C.5
- Lesson 11 - Assessment Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- REFLECTION
- REFLECTION
- Lesson 11 - Assessment Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4C.1
- Lesson 01 - How is a physical and chemical change different? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The use of word and symbol equations should be used throughout the scheme.
- W: Physical changes are changes of state. - KS3.P.54
- Suggested Activity:
Recall changes of states.
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Physical changes occur when particles are rearranged, but not change themselves. - KS3.P.54
- Suggested Activity:
Role play changes of state, with pupils as atoms.
With homogenous couples (boys with boys, girls with girls or blazers on/off) as molecules. They do not change partners.
- Suggested Activity:
- Chemical changes occur when the make up of individual particles change. - KS3.P.54
- Suggested Activity:
Role play changes of state, with pupils as atoms.
With homogenous couples (boys with boys, girls with girls or blazers on/off) as molecules.
Pupils swap partners to form heterogeneous couples.
Discuss what had to happen for the them to swap partners - Come close (collide)
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Chemical reactions result from the rearrangement of atoms - KS3.C.12
- Suggested Activity:
Learn the chant:
- Molecules (Hands make fists)
- Collide (Bag fists together twice, sticking together the second time)
- Split (Spread fingers out)
- Rearrange (Slide hands one in front of the other, then the other way round
- Bond (interlock fingers)
- Become a new substance (roll hands to 'present' new substance) - Suggested Activity:
Liken role play to the incorrect:
Hydrogen plus Oxygen -> Hydrogen Oxide
H<SUB>2</SUB> plus O<SUB>2</SUB> -> 2HO
If this was a marriage then the women (non-metal) changes the end of her name. (Hydrogen is pretending to be a metal)
Then repeat role play to correct
2H<SUB>2</SUB> plus O<SUB>2</SUB> -> H<SUB>2</SUB>O
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Chemicals that react are call Reactants.
- T: Chemicals that are produce are call Products.
- A: The difference between chemical and physical changes. - KS3.P.54
- Suggested Activity:
Draw particle diagrams to show physical changes and chemical changes.
- Suggested Activity:
- The use of word and symbol equations should be used throughout the scheme.
- Lesson 02 - What happens to the atoms in a chemical reaction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- D: Chemical reactions result from the rearrangement of atoms - KS3.C.12
- Suggested Activity:
Demo: Lead Iodide and Potassium Nitrate
.
Discuss (Think-Pair-Share) what is happening using vocab and ideas from previous lesson.Equipment Required:
Lead Iodide and Potassium Nitrate
one set for demo
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Learn the signs of chemical reactions:
1. Change of colour
2. Formation of gas
3. Formation of precipitate
4. Change of temperature (energy released) - A: Representing chemical reactions using word equations.
- Suggested Activity:
Complete the following word equation:
Lead Iodide 'plus' Potassium Nitrate 'becomes' ->
- Suggested Activity:
- D: There is a 'Conservation of mass' during chemical reactions as atoms are rearranged not destroyed. - KS3.C.06
- Suggested Activity:
Lead Iodide and Potassium Nitrate:
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/content/filerepository/CMP/00/000/515/cce-61.pdfEquipment Required:
Jewelry balance (0.01g).
Potassium iodide solution 0.01 mol dm^–3
Lead nitrate solution 0.009 mol dm^–3
- Suggested Activity:
- Representing chemical reactions using formulae and using equations. - KS3.C.13
- Suggested Activity:
Draw particle diagram for reaction under word equation.
Write symbol equation using formulae under particle diagram.
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Chemical reactions result from the rearrangement of atoms - KS3.C.12
- Lesson 03 - Why is combustion an oxidation reaction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Combustion is the chemical reaction of burning. - KS3.C.14
- During combustion the fuel joins with oxygen. - KS3.C.14
- Suggested Activity:
Fire Triangle.
Extinguish a candle in a upturned beaker.Equipment Required:
Candle
Large beaker
Plastercine
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Combustion is an oxidation reaction. - KS3.C.14
- Rusting is another example of an oxidation reaction - KS3.C.14
- Tarnish of metals is oxidation. - KS3.C.14
- Suggested Activity:
Heating metal folded metal foils.
The outside will tarnish, the inside does not.Equipment Required:
Aluminium foil 10 x 10 cm class set. doesnt work
- Suggested Activity:
- Combustion is the chemical reaction of burning. - KS3.C.14
- Lesson 04 - What happens to the energy in a chemical reaction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Exothermic chemical reactions give out heat, warming the surroundings. They feel hot. - KS3.C.21
- Suggested Activity:
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000406/exothermic-or-endothermic?cmpid=CMP00005103
Equipment Required:
Copper(II) Sulfate solution
Magnesium Pow.
Magnesium Rib.
Dilute Hydrochloric Acid
solution
Sodium hydroxide
Dilute sulphric acid
Thermometer
Polystyrene cups
10ml cylinders
pipettes
forceps
- Suggested Activity:
- Endothermic chemical reactions take in heat, cooling the surroundings. They feel cold. - KS3.C.21
- Suggested Activity:
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000406/exothermic-or-endothermic?cmpid=CMP00005103
Equipment Required:
Sodium hydrogencarbonate Citric Acid
Thermometer
Polystyrene cups 10ml cylinders
- Suggested Activity:
- Exothermic chemical reactions give out heat, warming the surroundings. They feel hot. - KS3.C.21
- Lesson 05 - What happens during 'Thermal Decomposition' reactions? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- In thermal decomposition reactions, large molecules break down into smaller molecules when heated. - KS3.C.14
- Suggested Activity:
Heating Carbonates
Only demo unless class will be able to complete it without suck back happening.
Use boiling tubes rather that test tubes as we have large diameter delivery tubes.
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000450/thermal-decomposition-of-metal-carbonates?cmpid=CMP00005971Equipment Required:
Copper, Lead, Potassium, Sodium, Zinc Carbonates
Boiling tubes (2 per setup)
Delivery tubes
Spatulas
Lime water
- Suggested Activity:
- In thermal decomposition reactions, large molecules break down into smaller molecules when heated. - KS3.C.14
- Lesson 06 - What happens during Displacement reactions? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: In a displacement reaction, a more reactive chemical will take the place of less reactive chemical. - KS3.C.14
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO
ThermiteEquipment Required:
http://science.cleapss.org.uk/Resource/SRA026-Thermite-reaction-in-flower-pots.pdf
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Copper is more reactive than silver. - KS3.C.14
- Suggested Activity:
Copper wire in Silver nitrate.
Smaller scale of
http://thehomescientist.blogspot.co.uk/2010/04/experimehnt-silver-tree.html
Clean copper wire with sand paper so it will react quickly.Equipment Required:
Silver nitrate sol. copper wire.
small cuvettes with lids.
pipettes.
ohp pens.
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Use the writing frames to explain what is happening in reaction - KS3.C.14
- T: In a displacement reaction, a more reactive chemical will take the place of less reactive chemical. - KS3.C.14
- Lesson 01 - How is a physical and chemical change different? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4C.2
- Lesson 07 - Enquiry: Planning and Data Collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- PLANNING & DATA COLLECTION:
Aim: To find out how the number drops of acid added affect the pH of the solution.- Suggested Activity:
Micro titration - pipettes in clamp stands.
Equipment Required:
0.5M hcl
0.5 sod hydroxide
universal soln
ph scales
test tubes
pipettes
- Suggested Activity:
- PLANNING & DATA COLLECTION:
- Lesson 08 - Enquiry: Conclusions and Evaluations Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Lesson 07 - Enquiry: Planning and Data Collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4C.3
- Lesson 09 - Review of 4C.1 Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 4C.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/4C.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 4C.1
- Lesson 09 - Review of 4C.1 Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4C.4
- Lesson 10 - What do catalysts do? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Catalysts speed up a reaction without being used up themselves. - KS3.C.19
- Suggested Activity:
Hydrogen peroxide with catalysts.
Demo
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000831/hydrogen-peroxide-decompositionEquipment Required:
DEMO Apparatus
- 250 cm3
cylinders – one for each catalyst to be used.
- A tray to catch any foam that spills over the top of the cylinders.
Stopwatch
washing up liquid 1cm
Chemicals
The quantities given are for one demonstration.
-25ml of 50 vol. hydrogen peroxide solution for each demo.
- About 0.5 g of powdered manganese(IV) oxide (manganese dioxide, MnO2).
- About 0.5 g of lead(IV) oxide (lead dioxide, PbO2).
- About 0.5 g of iron(III) oxide (red iron oxide, Fe2O3).
- A small piece of potato.
- A small piece of liver.
20Vol can be given for a slower reaction which is easier to time.
- Suggested Activity:
- Catalysts speed up a reaction without being used up themselves. - KS3.C.19
- Lesson 10 - What do catalysts do? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4C.5
- Lesson 11 - POO Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity - KS3.C.19
- Progress Observation Opportunity - KS3.C.19
- Lesson 12 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Reflection - KS3.C.19
- Reflection - KS3.C.19
- Lesson 11 - POO Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5C.1
- Lesson 01 - Do earthquakes happen everywhere? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- D: Students locate on a map locations of largest earthquakes and volcanic eruptions.
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lists_of_earthquakes#Largest_earthquakes_by_magnitude - W: Earthquakes and volcanic eruptions only happen in certain places on Earth.
- T: The Earth's crust and the upper part of the mantle are cracked into a number of large pieces (tectonic plates).
- W: The crust is relatively very thin. - KS3.C.32
- D: Students locate on a map locations of largest earthquakes and volcanic eruptions.
- Lesson 02 - How do earthquakes happen? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Alfred Wegener observed
- Matched coastlines of Africa and S.America,
- Matched rock formations,
- Common fossils. - W: This could be explained if the continents drifted apart.
- Alfred Wegener theory of crustal movement (continental drift) was not generally accepted for many years because he couldn't explain how it could happen.
We now believe... - W: Convection currents within the Earth's mantle cause the plates.
- Suggested Activity:
Demo convection current in flat tray with paper continents floating on water.
modelling diffusion using potassium permanganate in water could be a different temperatures for ratesEquipment Required:
Demo continents floating in tray of water.#
Wax volcano demo
Potassium permanginate
250ml beakers
forceps
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The heat energy drives convection currents in the mantle, through the changing density (particle movement) of the heated mantle.
- T: The heat in the core is released by natural radioactive processes.
- W: Nuclear energy is transformed into heat energy.
- W: The plates move at relative speeds of a few centimetres per year.
- Suggested Activity:
This fence was put up 50 years ago:
http://static.flickr.com/134/355247789_c290ad8e7d.jpg
Do tectonic plates move at metres, centimetres or millimetre a year?
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The movements can be sudden and disastrous. Earthquakes and / or volcanic eruptions occur at the boundaries between tectonic plates.
- Suggested Activity:
Modelling earthquakes demo heating the Bunsen burner
Equipment Required:
large beaker filled with water and red wax covering the top
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Alfred Wegener observed
- Lesson 03 - What is the structure of the Earth and how do we know? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The Earth consists of a core, mantle and crust, and is surrounded by the atmosphere. - KS3.C.32
- Suggested Activity:
modelling the structure of the Earth
Equipment Required:
cream egg
Knife
white tile
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The Core is about half the diameter of the Earth, with the Mantle making up the other half. - KS3.C.32
- DESIRABLE:
Our knowledge of the structure of the Earth comes mainly from studying how the shockwaves from earthquakes (seismic waves) travel through it.
Earthquakes produce two types of waves that can travel through the Earth:
- Longitudinal faster travelling Primary, P (pressure) waves, which move through liquids as well as solids;
- Transverse slower travelling Secondary, S waves, which travel only through solids.
The S-wave shadow is what give rise to the idea of a core.
http://www.mrcorfe.com/KS4/Edexcel/Physics/P1-11-NowYouSeeIt/EarthStructure.php
- The Earth consists of a core, mantle and crust, and is surrounded by the atmosphere. - KS3.C.32
- Lesson 04 - What makes up the Earth? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The Earth is composed of mainly of:
- iron (32.1%),
- oxygen (30.1%),
- silicon (15.1%),
- magnesium (13.9%). - KS3.C.31 - D: Draw a pie chart to display the Earth's composition data. - WS
- The Earth's core is composed of mainly of iron (88.8%) with smaller amounts of nickel (5.8%). - KS3.C.31
- The Earth's crust is composed of mainly of oxygen (47%), chemically locked up in rocks. The most common of which are Silica, Silicon Dioxide (54%) and Alumina, Aluminum oxide (16%).
- Something to do with revising Elements and compounds. - KS3.C.31
- T: The Earth is composed of mainly of:
- Lesson 01 - Do earthquakes happen everywhere? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5C.2
- Lesson 05 - Skill Focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Planning
- Aim: To find the best location for a new copper mine.
SET C 2014: Carbonates ISA
5 Samples of copper ore (copper carbonate and sand) from different locations.
Testing samples to determine the highest concentration of copper ore.
ISA method: Time how long it takes to stop fizzing.
Alternative method: How high the fizz rises.
Focus:
Controlling control variables - measuring reactants.
Evaluation: How representative is a small sample from a potential mining area.
- A: ENQUIRY: Planning
- Lesson 06 - Skill Focus: Data collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Data collection
- A: ENQUIRY: Data collection
- Lesson 07 - Skill Focus: Analysis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Analysis
- A: ENQUIRY: Analysis
- Lesson 05 - Skill Focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5C.3
- Lesson 08 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Review of 5C.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/5C.1
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Review of 5C.1
- Lesson 08 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5C.4
- Lesson 09 - What is in the Atmosphere? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: The air in the atmosphere is a mixture. - KS3.C.35
- Suggested Activity:
Show atomscope air simulation.
- Suggested Activity:
- The atmosphere is composed of:
- about four-fifths nitrogen (80%)
- about one-fifth oxygen (20%)
- small proportions of various other gases, including carbon dioxide, water vapour and noble gases. - KS3.C.35 - The gas test for oxygen is it relights a glowing spill. - KS3.C.35
- Suggested Activity:
Test gas with spill and lime water.
Identify mystery gas samples.
- Suggested Activity:
- The gas test for carbon dioxide is it turns lime water cloudy. - KS3.C.35
- Suggested Activity:
Test gas with spill and lime water.
Identify mystery gas samples.Equipment Required:
magnesium hydrochloric acid
test tubes
pipette
- Suggested Activity:
- The gas test for hydrogen is it makes a squeaky pop when lit. - KS3.C.35
- Suggested Activity:
Test gas with spill and lime water.
Identify mystery gas samples.Equipment Required:
marble chips
hydrochloric acid
test tubes
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Something to do with revising Elements and compounds again:
Draw the substances to show its a mixture. - KS3.C.35
- W: The air in the atmosphere is a mixture. - KS3.C.35
- Lesson 10 - How is the Oxygen level maintained? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The oxygen and carbon dioxide levels in the atmosphere are maintained by photosynthetic organisms, such as plants and algae. - KS3.B.24
- Suggested Activity:
Draw (a simplified) carbon cycle.
What would happen if there was more oxygen in the air?
- Suggested Activity:
- Photosynthetic organisms, such as plants and algae, use sunlight in photosynthesis to build organic molecules that are an essential energy store. - KS3.B.24
- Suggested Activity:
Draw energy Energy transfer diagram from sun to plant to chemical store.
Word / symbol / particle equation for photosynthesis.
Describe reaction in terms of POO writing scaffold.
- Suggested Activity:
- Oxygen is need for respiration which releases energy from glucose. This is essential for all life. Therefore all life depends on the energy from the sun and the photosynthetic - KS3.B.24
- Suggested Activity:
Word / symbol / particle equation for respiration.
Describe reaction in terms of POO writing scaffold.Equipment Required:
Jelly baby demo:
jelly baby
boiling tube
face mask
Potassium Chlorate
- Suggested Activity:
- In the search for life on other planets, looking for oxygen is a sign that life is on the planet. - KS3.B.24
- The oxygen and carbon dioxide levels in the atmosphere are maintained by photosynthetic organisms, such as plants and algae. - KS3.B.24
- Lesson 09 - What is in the Atmosphere? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5C.5
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: REFLECTION
- A: REFLECTION
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6C.1
- Lesson 01 - How did Mendeleev design the Periodic Table? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- the varying physical and chemical properties of different elements
- Melting points.
- Boiling points.
- Densities.
- Hardness.
- Reactivity. - KS3.C.22- Suggested Activity:
Until I can put it one the T drive download plan a resources from:
http://www.mrcorfe.com/LeadingTeachers/PeriodicTable/
Note this original plan is split over two lessons.
Through the use of the words and engaging in the top trump activity, they will have been introduced to the properties list above.
- Suggested Activity:
- That repeating properties were used to form the groups in the Mendeleev periodic table. - KS3.C.23
- Suggested Activity:
By the construction of selected groups.
The predicting patterns of reaction in those groups.
- Suggested Activity:
- the varying physical and chemical properties of different elements
- Lesson 02 - How to do we use the Periodic Table? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: The reactivity of elements increases as group one is descended in the periodic table. - KS3.C.25
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO:
Alkali metals and magnesium with water as per SoP.Equipment Required:
DEMO:
Alkali metals and magnesium with water as per SoP.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The reactivity of elements increases as group seven is ascended in the periodic table. - KS3.C.25
- T: Group zero do not react. - KS3.C.25
- The closer elements are to each other on the periodic table, the more likely they are to react in a similar way. - KS3.C.25
- The groups (columns) are more important to predicting reactions than periods (rows). - KS3.C.25
- A: How patterns in reactions can be predicted with reference to the periodic table - KS3.C.25
- Suggested Activity:
The solo task of answering question on the worksheet.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The reactivity of elements increases as group one is descended in the periodic table. - KS3.C.25
- Lesson 03 - How are metals and non-metals different from each other? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The rows in the periodic table are called periods. - KS3.C.24
- Suggested Activity:
Label a copy of the periodic table.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The columns in the periodic table are called groups - KS3.C.24
- Suggested Activity:
Label a copy of the periodic table.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Metals are found to the lower left on the periodic table. - KS3.C.24
- Suggested Activity:
Colour zones on a copy of a periodic table.
Start with elements they know.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Nonmetals are found to the upper right on the periodic table. - KS3.C.24
- Suggested Activity:
Colour zones on a copy of a periodic table.
Start with elements they know
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Metals make up the majority of the elements on the periodic table. - KS3.C.24
- The properties of metals include:
- Lustrous (shiny)
- Sonorous (makes a ringing sound)
- Hard.
- High density (are heavy for their size)
- High tensile strength (resist being stretched)
- High melting and boiling points.
- Good conductors of heat and electricity. - KS3.C.26 - The properties of non-metals include:
- Low melting and boiling points.
- Insulators of - KS3.C.26
- T: The rows in the periodic table are called periods. - KS3.C.24
- Lesson 01 - How did Mendeleev design the Periodic Table? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6C.2
- Lesson 04 - Skill Focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Planning
- Suggested Activity:
That the more base added to an acid to neutralise it, the higher the concentration of the acid
Equipment Required:
1xdemo
Burette
Clamp stand
White tile
Conical flaks
Measuring cylinders
Indicators (methyl orange or)
Unknown concentration of acid solution
0.5M base solution
- Suggested Activity:
- A: ENQUIRY: Planning
- Lesson 05 - Skill Focus: Data collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Data collection
- Suggested Activity:
That the more base added to an acid to neutralise it, the higher the concentration of the acid
Equipment Required:
Class
Burette
Clamp stand
White tile
Conical flaks
Measuring cylinders
Indicators (methyl orange or)
0.5M, 1.0M and 1.5M concentrations o
Unknown concentration of acid solution
0.5M base solution
- Suggested Activity:
- A: ENQUIRY: Data collection
- Lesson 06 - Skill Focus: Analysis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Analysis
- A: ENQUIRY: Analysis
- Lesson 04 - Skill Focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6C.3
- Lesson 07 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Review of 6C.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/6C.1
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Review of 6C.1
- Lesson 07 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6C.4
- Lesson 08 - What happens when acids and metals react? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- reactions of acids with metals to produce a salt plus hydrogen - KS3.C.17
- Suggested Activity:
Collect gas from metal and acid. Use a variety of metals.
Perform gas tests to identify hydrogen.
Concentrate solution.
Go through word and formula equations.Equipment Required:
DEMO - Hydrochloric acid, magnesium, test tube, splints (gas test for hydrogen)
- Suggested Activity:
- reactions of acids with metals to produce a salt plus hydrogen - KS3.C.17
- Lesson 09 - What happens when acids and alkalis react? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- reactions of acids with metals to produce a salt plus hydrogen - KS3.C.17
- Suggested Activity:
Examine evaporated solution to find Salt.
- Suggested Activity:
- reactions of acids with alkalis to produce a salt plus water - KS3.C.18
- Suggested Activity:
Students plan method based on previous lesson.
Collect gas from metal and acid.
Perform gas tests to identify hydrogen.
Concentrate solution.
Go through word and formula equations.
- Suggested Activity:
- reactions of acids with metals to produce a salt plus hydrogen - KS3.C.17
- Lesson 10 - Which oxides form acids? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- reactions of acids with alkalis to produce a salt plus water - KS3.C.18
- Suggested Activity:
Examine evaporated solution to find Salt
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Metal oxides dissolve to form alkali solutions. - KS3.C.27
- Suggested Activity:
Burn magnesium in bottle caps.
Dissolve magnesium oxide in distilled water.
Test solution with UI.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Non-metal oxides dissolve to form acid solutions. - KS3.C.27
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO
Burning sulfur on deflangenated spoon in gas gar of oxygen.Equipment Required:
Burn magnesium in bottle caps.
Blue glass.
Dissolve magnesium oxide in distilled water.
universal indicator
Test tubes
Pipette
Provide solutions of :
Nitric acid (labelled Nitrogen oxide and water) 0.2 mol dm–3 (Irritant)
Sodium hydroxide (labelled Sodium oxide and water) 0.2 mol dm–3 (Irritant)
Potassium hydroxide (labelled Potassium oxide and water) 0.2 mol dm–3 (Irritant)
Phosphoric acid (labelled Phosphorus (V) oxide and water) 0.2 mol dm–3
Calcium hydroxide (labelled Calcium oxide and water) 0.2 mol dm–3
Universal Indicator (in bottle with dropping pipette).
Test tubes
Pipettes
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Identify types of oxides by testing pH - KS3.C.27
- Suggested Activity:
RSC Classic Chemistry Experiments: 21 Testing the pH of oxides.
But label samples A to E
- Suggested Activity:
- reactions of acids with alkalis to produce a salt plus water - KS3.C.18
- Lesson 08 - What happens when acids and metals react? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6C.5
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: REFLECTION
- A: REFLECTION
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 7C.1
- Lesson 01 - What happens when metals react with acid? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Predict the outcome of reactions with metals and metal salt solutions given the reactivity series. - KS3.C.28
- In displacement reactions the more reactive metal displaces (takes the place) of the less reactive metal. - KS3.C.28
- Suggested Activity:
Micro chemistry displacement reactions on laminated sheet:
Metals and metal sulphatesEquipment Required:
Displacement reactions, in tray & laminated sheets
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals will react with acid at different rates. - KS3.C.28
- Suggested Activity:
Metals in acid
as per lesson 1:
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000446/metals-and-acids-experiment?cmpid=CMP00005351
DEMO
Group 1 metalsEquipment Required:
Magnesium Ribbon
Iron filings
Copper Turnings
Zinc granules
Test tubes
bungs
0.5M HCl
0.5M Sulphuric
DEMO
Group 1 metals as SoP
- Suggested Activity:
- When Metals react with acid with they produce (a salt and) hydrogen gas. - KS3.C.28
- Suggested Activity:
Test the gas produced.
Equipment Required:
Spills
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Acids contain hydrogen (ions) particles. - KS3.C.28
- Metals can be put into order of reactivity called the 'the reactivity series' - KS3.C.28
- When Metals react with acid with they produce a salt (and hydrogen gas). - KS3.C.28
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=arlYPz3EP7A#t=1m41s
Explain that the electricity is needed as copper is so unreactive.Equipment Required:
DEMO
Copper electrodes
Sulphuric acid ?M
Power supply
Croc Clip to Banana plug leads
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Draw particle diagrams for metals reacting with acid. - KS3.C.28
- A: Write word equations for metals reacting with acid. - KS3.C.28
- A: Write symbol equations for metals reacting with acid. - KS3.C.28
- A: Predict the outcome of reactions with metals and metal salt solutions given the reactivity series. - KS3.C.28
- Lesson 03 - How do we get metals from rocks? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Carbon and Hydrogen are often added to the reactivity series for comparison. - KS3.C.29
- Suggested Activity:
Show old chem data sheet and ask which two are the odd ones out. They are in italics and they are identified as non-metals.
Complete the card sort of reactivity series using the reactivity fact sheetEquipment Required:
Extracting metals card sort
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals more reactive than hydrogen will react with water as they will displace the hydrogen forming metal oxides. - KS3.C.29
- The rocks that have significant amounts of metal oxides in are known as ores. - KS3.C.29
- In order to obtain useable metal it needs to be chemically separated from the oxygen. - KS3.C.29
- The blast furnace is used to obtaining some metals from metal oxides using carbon.
eg Iron from iron oxide. - KS3.C.29- Suggested Activity:
Extracting metal on a match head: http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000722/extraction-of-iron-on-a-match-head?cmpid=CMP00005113
Equipment Required:
Match head extraction kit:
iron (III) oxide powder
hydrogen carbonate powder
matches
watch glass
magnets
- Suggested Activity:
- Carbon is more reactive than iron so the carbon displaces the iron to form carbon dioxide leaving the iron by itself. - KS3.C.29
- A: Carbon can only displace metals that are less reactive than itself. - KS3.C.29
- Suggested Activity:
Using reactivity series student to predict which metals are obtained using carbon.
- Suggested Activity:
- Carbon and Hydrogen are often added to the reactivity series for comparison. - KS3.C.29
- Lesson 01 - What happens when metals react with acid? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 7C.2
- Lesson 04 - Skill Focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Gas can be collected over water using a delivery tube.
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.google.co.uk/images?q=collecting gas over water
Equipment Required:
DEMO:
Troughs
Measuring cylinders
Delivery tubes conical flasks
OPTIONAL
1M Hydrochloric acid
2cm Magnesium ribbon
- Suggested Activity:
- PLANNING
Gas produced by metal & acid.- Suggested Activity:
Ideally use AQA required practical proforma.
Students to develop their own hypothesis and therefore plan
Possible IVs:
Concentration of acid
Volume of acid
Type of acid
Mass of metal
Shape (Surface Area) of metal
Type of metal
- Suggested Activity:
- Gas can be collected over water using a delivery tube.
- Lesson 05 - Skill Focus: Data collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- DATA COLLECTION
Gas produced by metal & acid.
- DATA COLLECTION
- Lesson 06 - Skill Focus: Analysis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- CONCLUSION and EVALUATION
Gas produced by metal & acid. - Gas can be collected using a gas syringe. This is an improved method to measure the volume of gas.
- CONCLUSION and EVALUATION
- Lesson 04 - Skill Focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 7C.3
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 7C.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/7C.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 7C.1
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 7C.4
- Lesson 08 - What is the difference between metals and ceramics? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Ceramic materials are solids made by baking a starting material like clay, in a very hot oven or kiln. - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
Define keywords then sort in a tree map for ceramic and metals. Or compare using double bubble.
Mark by watching videos.Equipment Required:
Material samples
- Suggested Activity:
- Ceramic materials include: Pottery; Bricks; Glass; Cement; Diamond - KS3.C.30
- Ceramic materials are hard, so not easy to scratch. - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=R-bw7_u3gSQ
- Suggested Activity:
- Ceramic materials are strong under compression. - KS3.C.30
- Ceramics are brittle. - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tYJeNKK9PEA
Quickly stretch blu tackEquipment Required:
blu tack
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals have a high Tensile Strength - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.google.co.uk/images?q=suspension bridge
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals are Sonorous - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gYpiRVzlsa4
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VdG_OPv91-c
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QxCeHLTfN1k
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals are malleable - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4pS13X3up_o
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals are ductile - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QKAg1yMZIpY
Slowly stretch blu tackEquipment Required:
blu tack
- Suggested Activity:
- Metals are lustrous - KS3.C.30
- Metals are good conductors of heat and electricity. - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=14U58r8D4Qg
- Suggested Activity:
- These are the general properties of ceramics and metals, but there are exceptions. - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MJgy8_AV8ok
- Suggested Activity:
- Ceramic materials are solids made by baking a starting material like clay, in a very hot oven or kiln. - KS3.C.30
- Lesson 09 - What is the difference between polymers and compostites? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Plastics are polymers. - KS3.C.30
- There are many different polymers. Their properties determine how they are used. - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
Do any of last lessons keywords apply to plastics?
- Suggested Activity:
- Polymers can be flexible, cheap, electrical insulator, strong, tough resistant to chemicals and generally have a low density. - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
Which material properties are the opposite of each other?
Tough : Brittle
Flexible : Brittle
Conductor : Insulator
- Suggested Activity:
- Composites are made up of more than type of material. - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=WYqCnEvTRUQ
- Suggested Activity:
- Composites have a mixture of properties from the materials that make them up. - KS3.C.30
- Reinforced concrete is a composite of concrete (ceramic) and metal bars. - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
Testing reinforced and not reinforced ceramic bars.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vuZcPTp51ZkEquipment Required:
Premade bars
Weights
Newspaper
- Suggested Activity:
- Glass Reinforced Plastics (GRP) are a composite of glass fibres (ceramic) and a plastic (polymer). - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S1RWEGhuQqw
- Suggested Activity:
- Plastics are polymers. - KS3.C.30
- Lesson 10 - What type of material should we use? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Particles in a solid are arranged in a lattice (pattern). - KS3.C.30
- T: Different types of solid are have their particles arranged in a differnet shaped lattices (patterns). - KS3.C.30
- T: Metals are malleable and ductile because their particles are arranged in layers with weakish bonds between them.
(This is an oversimplification as dislocations and grain boundaries are the true weaknesses) - KS3.C.30- Suggested Activity:
Show magnetic balls in layers as http://www.the-buckyballs.com/upload/201303/1363691684369348556.jpg
Yet to be bought!!!!!
Less printing means more toys.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: When a force is applied to the metal layers they slide over each other changing the material's shape. - KS3.C.30
- W: Metals are tough because when there is a shock of energy, it can be absorbed in the flexibility of these weak bonds. - KS3.C.30
- T: Ceramics are brittle because when there is a shock of energy, it can not be absorbed as there is no flexibility in the strong bonds. - KS3.C.30
- T: Ceramics are hard and brittle because their particles are held in a lattice shape such as a tetrahedral. - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
Show Molymod model of diamond.
Equipment Required:
Molymod model of diamond.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Tetrahedrals are strong shapes as each particle is held in place by triangles of bonds. - KS3.C.30
- W: The strong structure means that particles will not move as much as others so can scratch the softer material. But it also means that a shock of energy can not be absorbed by the bonds as there is no flexibility in the structure. - KS3.C.30
- W: The particles in polymers are a arranged in chains. - KS3.C.30
- W: The bonds in the chain are very strong, but the force between chains are relatively weak. - KS3.C.30
- W: The length of the particle chain affects how the chains interact with each other and so the properties of the polymer. - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
Pour long tangled string and short lengths
Equipment Required:
1xlong piece of string in a beaker.
Lots of 1cm pieces of string cut up, in a beaker
- Suggested Activity:
- Application of ceramics, polymers and composites (qualitative) - KS3.C.30
- Suggested Activity:
Why don't we use chocolate tea pots?
Think of a situation and workout the material requirements are. Then match them to a type of material.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Particles in a solid are arranged in a lattice (pattern). - KS3.C.30
- Lesson 08 - What is the difference between metals and ceramics? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 7C.5
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- REFLECTION
- REFLECTION
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8C.1
- Lesson 01 - Where do rocks come from? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- There are lots of different rocks of all sorts of ages. - KS3.C.33
- The oldest rocks are found in Africa, Canada and Australia. - KS3.C.33
- The youngest rocks are found around volcanoes. - KS3.C.33
- There has been no new rock material added to the earth since it was created apart from a small amount of meteorites. - KS3.C.33
- New rocks are made from recycled material. - KS3.C.33
- Igneous rocks are formed when molten rocks freeze. - KS3.C.33
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.geolsoc.org.uk/ks3/webdav/site/GSL/shared/pdfs/education and careers/RockCycle/Salol Experiment.pdf
Equipment Required:
Stearic acid
Kettles
Magnify glasses
Pipettes
Slides in warm
Slides in ice bath
- Suggested Activity:
- When frozen, the particles in the rocks are fixed in a lattice, that is why the rocks hold their shape. - KS3.C.33
- Solids are made up of crystals. Crystals are regions of a single lattice orientation. - KS3.C.33
- When solids freeze quickly the crystals are small. - KS3.C.33
- The crystals are large because the particles have more time to line up before freezing. - KS3.C.33
- The crystals are small because the particles have less time to line up before freezing. - KS3.C.33
- When solids freeze slowly the crystals are large. - KS3.C.33
- When igneous rocks are formed under the ground they cool slowly so the crystals are large. - KS3.C.33
- When igneous rocks are formed above ground or in water they cool quickly so the crystals are small. - KS3.C.33
- The size of crystals affects some of the properties of the rock. - KS3.C.33
- There are lots of different rocks of all sorts of ages. - KS3.C.33
- Lesson 02 - How are rocks broken up? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Weathering is breaking up of rock where it stands. - KS3.C.33
- Rocks are broken down into increasing smaller particles: Gravel; Sand; Silt; Clay - KS3.C.33
- Weathering can be chemical weathering, in which rocks are broken down when the particles that make them up are changed. - KS3.C.33
- Weathering can be physical weathering, in which rocks are broken down when the particles that make them up are not changed. But the forces between the particles are overcome to separate them into small pieces of rock. - KS3.C.33
- Sedimentary rocks are formed when sediment (little pieces of weathered rock) is laid down in layers under water and then compressed by layers above.
The water between the sediment is squeezed out and the sediment bonds together. - KS3.C.33 - If organisms fall into the sediment then the rock can take the shape of the organism. These formations are fossils. - KS3.C.33
- Metamorphic rocks are formed when either igneous or sedimentary rocks are heated under great pressure. - KS3.C.33
- Weathering is breaking up of rock where it stands. - KS3.C.33
- Lesson 01 - Where do rocks come from? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8C.3
- Lesson 03 - How do we use the Earth's resources? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- All resources come form come from the Earth's crust or the atmosphere. - KS3.C.34
- Coal contains more energy per kilogram than wood as it is a concentrated form of wood without moisture in. - KS3.C.34
- Crude oil (and natural gas) is formed when sea creatures (mainly microscopic) are compressed under layers of sediment. - KS3.C.34
- Coal is a sedimentary rock formed when trees and plants are compressed under layers of sediment.
(The highest grade coal, Anthracite, is actually metamorphic) - KS3.C.34 - Crude oil can be processed into fuels, chemicals and plastics. - KS3.C.34
- Metals are dug up from the earth in the form of ores. - KS3.C.34
- Ceramics are made from muds that are dug up from the earth - KS3.C.34
- All resources come form come from the Earth's crust or the atmosphere. - KS3.C.34
- Lesson 03 - How do we use the Earth's resources? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8C.4
- Lesson 04 - What is the human impact on the Earth? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- the efficacy of recycling - KS3.C.34
- the production of carbon dioxide by human activity and the impact on climate - KS3.C.36
- A: ENQUIRY: Planning
Aim: To find out how the concentration of acid (rain) affects the rate of reaction with marble chips - A: The test for carbon dioxide is to bubble the gas through lime water. If it turns cloudy this is a positive result.
- Earth as a source of limited resources - KS3.C.34
- Suggested Activity:
Circus of objects made of different materials.
Students identify the material and the source - ie Earth or Atmosphere.Equipment Required:
Sand in a jar
Something metal
Something plastic
Something pottery
Vaseline
Gas cylinder (CO2 Fire extinguisher)
FAKE petrol bottle
Diamonds TO BE COUNTED IN AND OUT
Gravel somthing
Fish / Shellfish
Meat
- Suggested Activity:
- the efficacy of recycling - KS3.C.34
- Lesson 04 - What is the human impact on the Earth? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8C.5
- Lesson 05 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 8C
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/8C
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 8C
- Lesson 05 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- del
- Lesson del - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required practical activity 6 (Part 2) -force and extension for a spring. (AT skills 1 and 2)
- Required practical activity 6 (Part 2) -force and extension for a spring. (AT skills 1 and 2)
- Lesson del - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Del
- Lesson Del - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- - del
- - del
- Lesson Del - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- DEL
- Lesson DEL - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
-
- Lesson DEL - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- del
- Lesson del - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Required practical 15:
Use circuit diagrams to set up and check appropriate circuits to investigate the
factors that affect the resistance of an electrical circuit - Required Practical 2 - Titrations (chemistry only) (AT skills 1,8) - del
- Required practical 15:
- Lesson del - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- DEL
- Lesson DEL - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
-
- Lesson DEL - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- BI
- TBA
- W: Forces
- W: Particles
- W: Cells
- W: Energy
- W: Interdependence
- W: Forces
- TBA
- 1P.1
- Lesson 01 - What is a Force? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Forces can be either pushes or pulls, which can be combined to form a twist. - KS3.P.15
- W: Force arrows in free body diagrams are used to show the direction of forces and the size of the force by its length or label.
Force arrows have a solid arrow head. - KS3.P.16 - T: Forces are measured in newtons with the symbol 'N'. - KS3.P.19
- T: A newton is the weight of a small apple. - KS3.P.19
- W: Forces can be combined to help or cancel each other. - KS3.P.16
- Suggested Activity:
Role play combining forces with Force arrow props.
Equipment Required:
Large (Force) Arrows on metre rules.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Adding forces in 1 dimension, allows to calculate whether forces are balanced or unbalanced.
Forces in the a backwards direction are considered negative.
The combined force is is called the 'Resultant force' and is the result of adding all the forces together. - KS3.P.16
- T: Forces can be either pushes or pulls, which can be combined to form a twist. - KS3.P.15
- Lesson 02 - What is Momentum? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Momentum is the tendency for an object to keep moving as it was. - KS3.P.27
- Suggested Activity:
Table cloth trick with beaker of water
Equipment Required:
A5ish Scrap paper
Plastic beakers
- Suggested Activity:
- T: It takes a force to change the momentum of an object. - KS3.P.27
- T: Changing the momentum of an object could be by changing its speed or its direction. - KS3.P.27
- W: Unbalanced forces are needed to cause objects to:
- stop or start moving,
- change their speed,
- direction of motion
These are all forms of acceleration (qualitative only). - KS3.P.27 - W: The acceleration is in the direction of resultant force and the speed of the change is dependent on the size of the force. - KS3.P.28
- T: Momentum is the tendency for an object to keep moving as it was. - KS3.P.27
- Lesson 03 - What is Friction? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Rubbing causes friction between surfaces. - KS3.P.18
- W: The amount of friction depends on the roughness of the surfaces (and closing force). - KS3.P.18
- Suggested Activity:
Different grit sandpaper Blu-tacked to planks.
Raise one end of the plank until a 100g mass on the sandpaper starts to slide.
Measure the height of the end of the ramp (or angle) analogous to magnitude of friction.
Repeat with 1kg mass to show closing forceEquipment Required:
Planks
5 different grits of sand paper, blu-tack
100g masses
1Kg masses
Meter rules
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Friction always acts to resist motion and therefore acts in the opposite direction to the (potential) motion. - KS3.P.18
- T: Rubbing causes friction between surfaces. - KS3.P.18
- Lesson 04 - What happens when two forces interact? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: When an object applies a force to a second object, the second object applies and force equal in size but opposite in direction back. - KS3.P.15
- T: The force an object applies back is called the Reaction force. - KS3.P.15
- T: Unbalanced forces can also change the shape of an object: deformation. - KS3.P.18
- T: When solid objects are stretched there is a force of tension created with in it. - KS3.P.18
- W: A spring will deform (stretch or compress) until the tension balances the load placed upon it. - KS3.P.26
- Suggested Activity:
Student use Newton Meters to weigh objects in the room
Equipment Required:
Newton Meters
selection of items to weigh
- Suggested Activity:
- W: When an object floats there is a force of upthrust. - KS3.P.26
- Suggested Activity:
Look at the Hamble science logo - What forces are acting on the boat?
- Suggested Activity:
- W: When an a fluid flows over a wing (aerofoil) it generates lift. - KS3.P.26
- Suggested Activity:
Look at the Hamble science logo - What forces are acting on the boat?
- Suggested Activity:
- W: When an object applies a force to a second object, the second object applies and force equal in size but opposite in direction back. - KS3.P.15
- Lesson 01 - What is a Force? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1P.2
- Lesson 05 - Planning: Hooke's Law Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Hooke's law enquiry - PLANNING:
- Aim: To find out how the length of a spring is affected by load exerted on it.
- Hypothesis: That the length of a spring is directly proportional to load.
NB: Hypothesis is to be proved false as extension is proportional to load rather than length. Students learn that directly proportional is shown on a graph as linear line through origin. - KS3.P.19
- Hooke's law enquiry - PLANNING:
- Lesson 06 - Data Collection: Hooke's Law Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Hooke's law enquiry - DATA COLLECTION:
- Aim: To find out how the length of a spring is affected by load exerted on it.
- Hypothesis: That the length of a spring is directly proportional to load.
NB: Hypothesis is to be proved false as extension is proportional to load rather than length. Students learn that directly proportional is shown on a graph as linear line through origin. - KS3.P.19
- Hooke's law enquiry - DATA COLLECTION:
- Lesson 07 - Analysis: Hooke's Law Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Hooke's law enquiry - ANALYSIS & EVALUATION:
- Aim: To find out how the length of a spring is affected by load exerted on it.
- Hypothesis: That the length of a spring is directly proportional to load.
NB: Hypothesis is to be proved false as extension is proportional to load rather than length. Students learn that directly proportional is shown on a graph as linear line through origin. - KS3.P.19
- Hooke's law enquiry - ANALYSIS & EVALUATION:
- Lesson 05 - Planning: Hooke's Law Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1P.3
- Lesson 08 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 1P.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/1P.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 1P.1
- Lesson 08 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1P.4
- Lesson 09 - How are Forces classified? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Forces can also be classified as either:
- non-contact forces:
- gravity forces acting at a distance on Earth and in space,
- forces between magnets,
- Electrostatic forces due to static electricity: Rubbed balloon - KS3.P.22- Suggested Activity:
Students experience non contact forces with the magnets
Equipment Required:
class set magnets
Balloon
Duster and Rod (Statics tray)
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Pushing things out of the way also creates a type of friction:
- ball pit balls
- air (particles): air resistance
- water (particles): water resistance
These forces are also called drag. - KS3.P.18- Suggested Activity:
DEMO: Dropping flat paper and screwed up paper. Which accelerates fastest? Which has the greatest resultant force? But they have the same weight.
DEMO: Dropping Plasticine ball in water and pasteEquipment Required:
DEMO: two large measuring cylinders one filled with water, one with wallpaper paste. two balls of Plasticine
(same size)
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Forces can also be classified as either:
- Lesson 10 - Why do cars have a top speed? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Cars have a top speed because:
- As they get faster they hit more air particles (harder)
- When the car hits the particles the particles hit the car causing drag
- The thrust from the engine force is constant
- When the drag balances the engine force there is no resultant force
- So no acceleration
- So car travels at a constant (top) speed - KS3.P.18- Suggested Activity:
DEMO: Toy car to prompt students to think about its shape and drag
CLASS: Students each have a measuring cylinder and time how long it takes different shapes to fall through wall paper pasteEquipment Required:
DEMO: Toy car
CLASS: per group:
1 x large measuring cylinder filled with wall paper paste. plasticine to make into different shape, 1 timer.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Engines and motors produce a force called Thrust. - KS3.P.18
- W: Cars have a top speed because:
- Lesson 09 - How are Forces classified? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 1P.5
- Lesson 11 - POO Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- REFELECTION
- REFELECTION
- Lesson 11 - POO Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2P.1
- Lesson 01 - What is Energy? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: It takes energy to do anything. - KS3.P.08
- Suggested Activity:
Think of an object that does something, describe the energy it is showing.
eg:
- to move
- give out light,
- make sound or
- get hotter
it requires energyEquipment Required:
energy circus
Techs one & Lan's new one
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The 8 simple forms of energy:
Light
Sound
Chemical potential
Kinetic (Movement)
Electrical
Gravitational potential
Elastic potential
Thermal (Heat)
(Nuclear)
(Magnetic) - KS3.P.08- Suggested Activity:
Circle Map Energy names
Identify the best terms.
Explain the difference between forms of energy and energy resources.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: These can be categorised into stores and flows of energy.
Stores of energy can be left and returned to and the energy still be there.
Flows of energy travel from one place to another. - KS3.P.08 - W: The Stores of energy:
- Gravitational potential
- Elastic potential
- Chemical potential
- (Nuclear potential)
The Flows of energy are
- Light
- Sound
- Kinetic (Movement)
- Electrical
- Thermal (Heat) - movement of particles - KS3.P.08- Suggested Activity:
Tree Map to classify
- Suggested Activity:
- H: SET HOMEWORK: Wordsearch - KS3.P.29
- T: It takes energy to do anything. - KS3.P.08
- Lesson 02 - How can Energy be used? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Energy can be transferred from place to place. - KS3.P.08
- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
Gear wheels or show picture of bicycle pedals and wheel.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Energy can be transformed from one form to another.
Usually into more than one form. - KS3.P.08- Suggested Activity:
Demo:
Light bulb or speaker.Equipment Required:
lamp
speaker and sig gen
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Energy cannot be created or destroyed but can be transformed or transferred from place to place. - KS3.P.08
- Suggested Activity:
use water to model conservation of energy by labeling suitable sized beakers and showing all water conserved.
Pour water from large beaker into the different smaller beakers. Then back into the large beaker to show there is the same amount of 'energy' as you started.Equipment Required:
Tray labelled the surroundings.
2x 250mL beaker one labelled heat, one light.
1x 500mL beaker filled with colored water labelled electricity
Clear tubing to siphon from beaker to beaker.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Energy transfer diagrams are used to transfers (and transforms) of energy.
Energy transfer diagrams:
- Stores of energy are written in boxes.
- Flows of energy are written on arrows.
- Places / objects are written at the end of arrows.
- The final arrows need to point word 'surroundings' - KS3.P.08 - T: Energy flows from high energy (the store) to areas of low energy (the surroundings). - KS3.P.08
- W: When energy is transferred it is always dispersed until it is evenly distributed in all places. - KS3.P.08
- T: We can harness this flow to do something.
Analogy: water wheel - KS3.P.08 - comparing the starting with the final conditions of a system and describing increases and decreases in the amounts of energy associated with:
- movements,
- temperatures,
- changes in positions in a field,
- in elastic distortions and
- in chemical compositions - KS3.P.10
- W: Energy can be transferred from place to place. - KS3.P.08
- Lesson 03 - How do machines use Energy? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Processes that involve energy transfer:
- changing motion,
- dropping an object,
- completing an electrical circuit,
- stretching a spring,
- metabolism of food,
- burning fuels - KS3.P.08- Suggested Activity:
Draw energy transfer diagrams for a circus of machines.
Equipment Required:
circus of machines:
1. pulley demo
2. stretched spring (hooke's law)
3. moments see saw
4. toy car or trolley
5. burning crisp on pin
6. lamp
7. resistance in wire (glowing wire)
8. Match to strike
10. Tennis ball to drop
11. blocks to hit together
12. two marbles on track to collide
- Suggested Activity:
- Some energy is useful and some is not useful, more efficient devices have more useful energy - KS3.P.08
- Processes that involve energy transfer:
- Lesson 01 - What is Energy? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2P.2
- Lesson 04 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: What has more energy 1g of food or 1g of fuel? - KS3.P.08
- Suggested Activity:
Planning
DEMO SET
Equipment:
Metafuel block
Cheese puff
Burning Pins
Thermomenters
Copper calorimeter (with lids)
(Jewellery) balance
- Suggested Activity:
- A: What has more energy 1g of food or 1g of fuel? - KS3.P.08
- Lesson 05 - Skill focus: Data Collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: What has more energy 1g of food or 1g of fuel? - KS3.P.08
- Suggested Activity:
Data Collection
Equipment Required:
per group:
Metafuel pieces
Cheese puffs
Burning Pins
Thermomenters
Copper calorimeters (with lids)
(Jewellery) balances
- Suggested Activity:
- A: What has more energy 1g of food or 1g of fuel? - KS3.P.08
- Lesson 06 - Skill focus: Analysis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Lesson 04 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2P.3
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Review of 2P.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/2P.1
- Suggested Activity:
- H: SET HOMEWORK:
Learn Definitions of keywords
(Crossword) and revise (Flashcards)
- A: Review of 2P.1
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2P.4
- Lesson 08 - What direction does Heat travel? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Hot objects have more heat energy than cooler ones. - KS3.P.07
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO:
conductivity tray which lights matches
Class:
Conduction of metal rodsEquipment Required:
conductivity tray that lights matches
Class:
different metal rods
vaseline
drawing pins
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Heat energy flows from hot objects to cooler ones. - KS3.P.07
- W: Heat energy stops flowing when objects are the same temperature. - KS3.P.07
- Heat energy can transfer through contact known as conduction. - KS3.P.07
- Conduction occurs when fast moving (hot) particles collide with slower (cooler) particles. - KS3.P.07
- Energy is passed on as the fast moving particles slow down as the slower particles speed up. - KS3.P.07
- W: Hot objects have more heat energy than cooler ones. - KS3.P.07
- Lesson 09 - How else can Heat travel? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Heat energy can transfer through radiation. - KS3.P.07
- Radiation is heat energy in the form of light. - KS3.P.07
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO:
Infrared lamp
class:Equipment Required:
DEMO:
irfrared lamp x 1
Class:
250mL beakers
100ml beakers
1 colour of food colouring, put a small amount of food colouring into the 100ml beakers
pipettes
timers
Thermometers
- Suggested Activity:
- Convection is the (mass) movement of particles with heat energy.
- H: SET HOMEWORK:
Revise keyword meaning and concepts for POO.
- T: Heat energy can transfer through radiation. - KS3.P.07
- Lesson 10 - What is an insulator? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Hot objects always cool down until they reach the same temperature as their surroundings. - KS3.P.07
- Insulators reduce the speed (rate of) energy transfer. - KS3.P.07
- A gas is a better insulator than a solid. - KS3.P.07
- A gas is a better insulator than a solid because gas particles are further apart than in a solid. Therefore the collision of particles are less frequent. - KS3.P.07
- Suggested Activity:
class - what material makes the best insulator?
Equipment Required:
250mL beakers
150mL beakers
kettles
thermometers
mixture of materials for insulators
timers
- Suggested Activity:
- Vacuums are the best insulators. - KS3.P.07
- Vacuums are the best insulators because there are no particles to collide in a vacuum. - KS3.P.07
- Layers of clothes or fur, trap air so that the particles can not convect away, while the air still reduces conduction by reducing collisions.
- Hot objects always cool down until they reach the same temperature as their surroundings. - KS3.P.07
- Lesson 08 - What direction does Heat travel? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 2P.5
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity - KS3.P.29
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity - KS3.P.29
- Lesson 12 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Reflection - KS3.P.29
- W: Reflection - KS3.P.29
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3P.1
- Lesson 01 - What is speed? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Speed is how far an object travels in a bit of time.
To travel fast is to cover more distance in the same time, or the same distance in less time. - KS3.P.12 - T: The average speed for a journey is the distance traveled ÷ total time. - KS3.P.12
- Suggested Activity:
Class practical:
Measure the speed of students doing different activities: walking/running/scootering/cycling (outside or pre book hall or sports hall)Equipment Required:
Long measuring tapes
trundle wheel
timers
giant chalk
- Suggested Activity:
- W: This is the average speed as you may have changed speed during the journey. - KS3.P.12
- T: The speed and any one moment in time is called the instantaneous speed. - KS3.P.12
- A: Which make for safer roads: GATSO or SPECS speed cameras?
http://www.speedcamerasuk.com/gatso.htm
http://www.speedcamerasuk.com/specs.htm - KS3.P.12 - speed and the quantitative relationship between average speed, distance and time (speed = distance ÷ time) - KS3.P.12
- T: The SI unit for distance is metres (m).
The SI unit for time is seconds (s). - KS3.P.12 - W: The SI unit for speed is metres per second (m/s). - KS3.P.12
- A: Calculate the average speed of some objects.
G5: rearrange equations - KS3.P.12
- W: Speed is how far an object travels in a bit of time.
- Lesson 01 - What is speed? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3P.2
- Lesson 02 - Planning: Height of the ramp vs average speed of the car. Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: PLANNING:
- Aim: The height of the ramp affects the average speed of the car.
- Hypothesis: That as the height of the ramp is increased the average speed of the car will increase. - KS3.P.12
- A: PLANNING:
- Lesson 03 - Data Collection: Height of the ramp vs average speed of the car. Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: DATA COLLECTION:
- Aim: The height of the ramp affects the average speed of the car.
- Hypothesis: That as the height of the ramp is increased the average speed of the car will increase. - KS3.P.12
- A: DATA COLLECTION:
- Lesson 04 - Analysis: Height of the ramp vs average speed of the car. Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ANALYSIS AND EVALUATION:
- Aim: The height of the ramp affects the average speed of the car.
- Hypothesis: That as the height of the ramp is increased the average speed of the car will increase. - KS3.P.12
- A: ANALYSIS AND EVALUATION:
- Lesson 02 - Planning: Height of the ramp vs average speed of the car. Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3P.3
- Lesson 05 - How do we represent motion? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: A journey can be represented on a distance-time graph.
Time is the independent variable as it is always changing, all be it not under our control. - KS3.P.13 - W: On a distance-time graph:
- A rising straight line from left to right indicates a steady increase in distance, ie a constant speed.
- A 'horizontal' line from left to right indicates no change in distance and therefore the object is stationary. - KS3.P.13- Suggested Activity:
Modelling distance time graphs, use a timer to time expired:
step/jump forward for away from home.
Stand still for stationary.
step/jump back for returning to home.Equipment Required:
stopclocks
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Students draw a distance time graph and analysis it eg:
http://www.mrcorfe.com/KS4/AQA/Phy2/Movement/Dist-TimeGraphsWS.html - KS3.P.13
- T: A journey can be represented on a distance-time graph.
- Lesson 06 - What do we mean by relative motion? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: What is the difference in speed between a car travelling a 30 m/s and a lorry travelling at 20 m/s? => 10 m/s
How did you work this out? => 30 take away 20
This is the relative motion between the car and the lorry. - KS3.P.14 - T: The relative motion is the 'motion' (movement) of one object measured 'relative' (from) another. - KS3.P.14
- T: How much further does the car get away from the lorry in one second? => 10 m/s
What if the car starts behind the lorry? => The car would get closer, maybe collided at 10 m/s. - KS3.P.14 - W: At what speed would they collide at if they were travelling towards each other? => 50 m/s
How did you work this out? => 30 plus 20 - KS3.P.14 - T: Velocity is speed in a direction.
A negative velocity is in the opposite direction to a positive one. - KS3.P.14 - W: If the lorry is travelling at 20 m/s and a car at -30 m/s what speed do they collide at? => 50 m/s
How did you work this out? => 20 take away minus 30 - KS3.P.14 - A: Answer question on relative motion eg: trains and cars passing one another - KS3.P.14
- W: What is the difference in speed between a car travelling a 30 m/s and a lorry travelling at 20 m/s? => 10 m/s
- Lesson 05 - How do we represent motion? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3P.4
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 3P.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/3P.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 3P.1
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3P.5
- Lesson 08 - What is the difference between mass and weight? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The force due to gravity is called weight. - KS3.P.59
- Suggested Activity:
compare mass and weight on different planets
Equipment Required:
human scales (kg) class set
- Suggested Activity:
- Gravity is an attraction between objects of mass. - KS3.P.59
- The weight of an object will increase if the mass of the object is increased. - KS3.P.59
- The weight of an object will increase if the gravitational pull on the object is increased. - KS3.P.59
- The gravitational pull is measured as gravitational field strength. - KS3.P.59
- Weight = mass x gravitational field strength (g). - KS3.P.59
- gravity produces a non-contact force - KS3.P.59
- gravity forces between Earth and Moon, and between Earth and sun (qualitative only) - KS3.P.59
- The force due to gravity is called weight. - KS3.P.59
- Lesson 09 - What is our place in the universe? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- our sun as a star, other stars in our galaxy, other galaxies - KS3.P.60
- Suggested Activity:
Modelling planets - outside
3P lesson 7 scavenger hunt card activityEquipment Required:
Large inflatable planets (blown up for lesson)
3P lesson 7 scavenger hunt card activity
- Suggested Activity:
- the light year as a unit of astronomical distance - KS3.P.62
- our sun as a star, other stars in our galaxy, other galaxies - KS3.P.60
- Lesson 10 - Why do we have different weather throughout the year? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- the seasons and the Earth's tilt, day length at different times of year, in different hemispheres - KS3.P.61
- Suggested Activity:
Modelling seasons
Equipment Required:
various sized balls
torches / desk lamps
- Suggested Activity:
- the seasons and the Earth's tilt, day length at different times of year, in different hemispheres - KS3.P.61
- Lesson 08 - What is the difference between mass and weight? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 3P.6
- Lesson 11 - POO Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- REFELECTION
- REFELECTION
- Lesson 11 - POO Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4P.1
- Overview
- T: Key Learning points:
- Waves transfer energy from one place to another.
- When a object absorbs a wave it gains energy.
- The gained energy will either make it hotter or make it vibrate.
DESIRABLE:
- The amount of energy absorbed is affected by the frequency of wave.
- T: Key Learning points:
- Lesson 01 - What is a wave? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Waves transfer energy from one place to another, but generally not matter (particles). - KS3.P.29
- Suggested Activity:
Use lengths of string to model the movement of waves
Equipment Required:
1 meter lengths of string x16 for class
1 large slinky
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Without energy the water level is said to be at the equilibrium point. - KS3.P.29
- W: When the energy is increased the displacement from equilibrium point will increase. - KS3.P.29
- T: The maximum displacement is called the amplitude. - KS3.P.29
- T: The highest points of a (transverse) wave are known as peaks, the lowest points are called troughs. - KS3.P.29
- T: The distance between like places on a wave, such as peak-to-peak or trough-to-trough, is known as the wavelengths. Wavelength is measured in metres (m). - KS3.P.29
- H: SET HOMEWORK: Wordsearch - KS3.P.29
- T: Waves transfer energy from one place to another, but generally not matter (particles). - KS3.P.29
- Lesson 02 - How can waves behave? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Ripple tanks can be used to see how water waves behave. This allows us to predict how other waves will behave.
- Suggested Activity:
Use mini ripple tank with webcam.
Equipment Required:
Mini ripple tank
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The peaks can be seen as wave fronts in a ripple tank.
- T: Waves on water as undulations which travel through water with transverse motion as the wave moves horizontally but the water moves up and down. - KS3.P.29
- Suggested Activity:
Mexican Waves
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Water waves can be reflected. This is when waves bounce off an object. - KS3.P.29
- Suggested Activity:
Metal strip at an angle in ripple tank.
Equipment Required:
Mini ripple tank etc
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Water waves can be refracted. This is when waves change direction.
- Suggested Activity:
Perspex shape in ripple tank
Equipment Required:
Mini ripple tank etc
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Water waves can be diffracted. This is when waves spread out through a gap.
- Suggested Activity:
Two metal strips in line with small gap between in ripple tank
Equipment Required:
Mini ripple tank etc
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Research rogue waves.
https://www.google.co.uk/search?q=rogue waves - KS3.P.29- Suggested Activity:
Use computers in S7
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Water waves can add or cancel - superposition:
When peaks meet you get bigger peaks. When a peak meets a trough then they cancel out. - KS3.P.29- Suggested Activity:
http://www.acs.psu.edu/drussell/Demos/superposition/superposition.html
http://www.acs.psu.edu/drussell/Demos/superposition/pulses.gif
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Ripple tanks can be used to see how water waves behave. This allows us to predict how other waves will behave.
- Overview
- 4P.2
- Lesson 03 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Planning
- Aim: To find out how the depth of water affects the speed of a wave.
- Hypothesis: That the depth of water affects the speed of a wave.- Suggested Activity:
Demo enquiry
Equipment Required:
1 x tray with no lip filled with water
1 x stop clock
- Suggested Activity:
- A: ENQUIRY: Planning
- Lesson 04 - Skill focus: Data collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Data collection
Drop one end of a tray of water and time how long it takes for the wave to travel 5 lengths of the tray. - T: Zero Error: Most rulers do not start at zero on their end.
Zero is a type of systematic error as the error is the same for every measurement (if same ruler is used) - H: SET HOMEWORK:
eg. Finish graph
- A: ENQUIRY: Data collection
- Lesson 05 - Skill focus: Analysis Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Analysis
- A: ENQUIRY: Analysis
- Lesson 03 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4P.3
- Lesson 06 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Review of 4P.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/4P.1
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Review of 4P.1
- Lesson 06 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4P.4
- Lesson 07 - What is sound? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Sound is produced by vibrations of objects. - KS3.P.32
- Suggested Activity:
Tuning forks in water.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VCERs0v1OoIEquipment Required:
Tuning forks
Plastic beakers of water
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The number of vibrations (waves) in a bit of time is known as the frequency of a wave. - KS3.P.30
- T: Frequency is measured in hertz (Hz) which means number per second. - KS3.P.30
- W: The higher the frequency of sound, the higher the pitch. - KS3.P.30
- Suggested Activity:
http://onlinetonegenerator.com/hearingtest.html
- Suggested Activity:
- T: An oscilloscope can be used to view the the very fast changing signals produced by a microphone or signal generator.
- Suggested Activity:
https://i.ytimg.com/vi/52zUwQsJqM8/maxresdefault.jpg
Equipment Required:
Oscilloscope, sig gen,
speaker
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The closer the peaks on an oscilloscope the higher the frequency of the signal and therefore the wave.
- T: The taller the peaks on an oscilloscope the higher the amplitude of the signal and therefore wave.
- W: The higher the amplitude of the wave, the more energy in the wave and therefore the louder the sound.
- A: Students can describe both the wave and the sound from a oscilloscope trace.
- Suggested Activity:
CRO.ppt
- Suggested Activity:
- H: SET HOMEWORK:
Learn Definitions of keywords
(Crossword) and revise (Flashcards)
- W: Sound is produced by vibrations of objects. - KS3.P.32
- Lesson 08 - Do all animals hear the same? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The auditory range of humans is from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. - KS3.P.33
- Suggested Activity:
http://onlinetonegenerator.com/hearingtest.html
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Animals have different auditory ranges to that of humans. - KS3.P.33
- Suggested Activity:
make different sized ears from cardboard to represent adaptations to hearing
Equipment Required:
Hearing Range Powerpoint
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Sound frequencies above the hearing range of humans are called ultrasound. - KS3.P.34
- T: Ultrasound can be used to pass on energy and therefore be used for cleaning and physiotherapy. - KS3.P.34
- T: The sound energy is absorbed by the dirt, setting it vibrating and is so is shaken off.
In physiotherapy the sound energy is absorbed by deep tissue injuries and stimulates blood circulation and cell activity. - KS3.P.30 - W: Ultrasound reflections can be used to image unborn babies. - KS3.P.30
- T: The auditory range of humans is from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. - KS3.P.33
- Lesson 09 - How does Sound travel? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Sound is produced by the back and forth vibrations of objects such as loudspeaker diaphragm. - KS3.P.32
- Suggested Activity:
Signal generator and speaker with polystyrene balls on top.
Equipment Required:
Signal generator and speaker with polystyrene balls on top
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Sound waves are longitudinal as the motion of the particles is along the direction the wave is travelling. - KS3.P.32
- Suggested Activity:
Hawaiian-Mexican wave
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Sound needs a medium of particles to travel, as the energy in sound waves is passed on by the collision of particles. - KS3.P.31
- Suggested Activity:
Airzooka to extinguish candle
Bell in Bell jar with vacuum pump.Equipment Required:
Airzooka
Candle
Bell in Bell jar with vacuum pump.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Sound travels fastest in solids and slowest in gasses. - KS3.P.31
- Suggested Activity:
Thought exp:
Long plastic tube filled with water hit at one end.
Three separate sounds
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Sound travels fastest in solids as the particles are closest together and so the collisions are passed on faster.
Sound travels slowest in gasses as the particles are farthest apart and so the collisions are passed on slower. - KS3.P.31 - W: When air particles vibrating with sound energy collide with a microphone diaphragm or an ear drum, their energy is passed on. - KS3.P.32
- Suggested Activity:
Build diagram from loudspeaker to ear, with air particles in between.
- Suggested Activity:
- D: The sound energy is absorbed by the diaphragm and ear drum. - KS3.P.30
- The microphone and the inner ear transform the sound energy into electrical signals. - KS3.P.34
- H: SET HOMEWORK:
Revise keyword meaning and concepts for POO.
- W: Sound is produced by the back and forth vibrations of objects such as loudspeaker diaphragm. - KS3.P.32
- Lesson 10 - What is the speed of sound? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- D: Echoes are just the reflection of a sound wave with an big enough time delay, such that your brain separates the sound into two distinct events. - KS3.P.30
- D: Measuring the speed of sound (using echoes). - KS3.P.30
- Suggested Activity:
Starting pistol and flag or
Clapper board / trays on field.
OR
http://www.nuffieldfoundation.org/practical-physics/measuring-speed-sound-using-echoes
Order trundle wheelEquipment Required:
wooden blocks (sound)
Trundle wheel
Stopclocks
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Speed = distance / time
With reflections / echoes the sound travels twice the distance of the person making the sound and the wall. - KS3.P.31- Suggested Activity:
To set up the task:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7YmuOD5X4L8
To explain:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bJj4Wjjf0WI
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Echoes are just the reflection of a sound wave with an big enough time delay, such that your brain separates the sound into two distinct events. - KS3.P.30
- Lesson 07 - What is sound? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 4P.5
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity - KS3.P.29
- Suggested Activity:
Breaking wineglass with voice, to set up the task. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7YmuOD5X4L8
To explain:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bJj4Wjjf0WI&t=126s
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity - KS3.P.29
- Lesson 12 - Progress Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Reflection - KS3.P.29
- W: Reflection - KS3.P.29
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5P.1
- Lesson 01 - How do we store energy in a spring? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: A spring will deform (stretch or compression) until the tension balances the load placed upon it. - KS3.P.26
- Suggested Activity:
How does a spring balance (Newton Meter) work?
Why does it go to the same place on the scale each time the same force is applied?
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Make measurements of spring in compression as force is changed - KS3.P.19
- Suggested Activity:
Thread a compression spring over a weight hanger and then put weights on top.
Equipment Required:
Compression spring
Weight hanger
- Suggested Activity:
- W: When a spring (or any object) is deformed elastically it will go back to its original shape. - KS3.P.21
- T: When a spring (or any object) is deformed elastically, there is work done as kinetic energy is transformed into elastic (strain) potential energy. - KS3.P.21
- Suggested Activity:
Energy transfer diagram for stretching a Y - shaped catapult.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The elastic (strain) potential energy can be retrieved as the object returns to it shape, normally in the form of kinetic energy. - KS3.P.21
- Suggested Activity:
Energy transfer diagram for releasing a Y - shaped catapult.
- Suggested Activity:
- When a spring (or any object) is deformed plastically it will not go back to its original shape. - KS3.P.20
- When a spring (or any object) is deformed plastically kinetic energy is used to overcome the forces between particles.
This energy ends up as thermal energy as the particles are vibrating more. - KS3.P.20 - While in the linear region of a force-extension graph, the spring is obeying Hooke's Law and the deformation is elastic.
Past the limit of proportionality, the spring does not obey Hooke's Law and is being plastically deformed. - KS3.P.20- Suggested Activity:
Show:
http://www.a-levelphysicstutor.com/matter-elasticity.php
YES THIS WAS A' LEVEL!
- Suggested Activity:
- W: A spring will deform (stretch or compression) until the tension balances the load placed upon it. - KS3.P.26
- Lesson 02 - What is a machine? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A machines transmits a force from one place or object to another. - KS3.P.06
- Simple machines give bigger force but at the expense of smaller movement (and vice versa) - KS3.P.06
- Simple machines include:
- Ramps
- Levers
- Pulleys
- Wedge
- Screw - KS3.P.06- Suggested Activity:
Identify common place devices as the type of simple machine.
eg. Scissors as a double level.Equipment Required:
Scissors
Claw hammer and nail
Screwdriver and paint tin
Corkscrew and bottle opener
Nut cracker
Tin opener
Door Wedge(Wood)
Ramp and wooden block
Block and tackle
- Suggested Activity:
- The product of force and displacement is work done.
Work done is also known as energy transferred.
The unit of work done is therefore Joules. - KS3.P.06 - The 'energy transferred in' is equal to the work done. - KS3.P.06
- Aim: To find out how the number of pulleys affects the force required to lift a 6N load.
Secondary Aim: To find out how the number of pulleys affects the distance moved of Effort and Load.
Tertiary Aim: To find out how the number of pulleys affects the input work done vs output work done.- Suggested Activity:
Pulleys and masses on retort stand.
Change:
- Number of pulleys
Measure:
- Input force
- (Output force)
- Distance Effort moves
- Distance Load moves
Calculate:
- Input work done
- Output work done
- Efficiency perhaps
This is best set up as a circus with different numbers of pulleys, so that the students do not have to rethread pulley systems.Equipment Required:
Pulleys and masses on retort stand.
One each of
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:4
1:5 ratios of pulleys
with 6N on the load end and Newton meter on the effort end.
- Suggested Activity:
- Use physical processes and mechanisms, and energy changes, to explain the intermediate steps that bring about changes conditions of a system - KS3.P.11
- Suggested Activity:
Use forces and force loops and energy to describe:
- Rollercoasters
- Breaking (of a car)
- Internal combustion engine
- Suggested Activity:
- A machines transmits a force from one place or object to another. - KS3.P.06
- Lesson 03 - What is a lever? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- When a force is applied offset from a pivot, the force produces a turning effect.
This turning effect is known as a 'moment'. - KS3.P.17 - W: The size of a moment proprtional to two factors:
-the size of the force applied
-the perpendicular distance from the pivot to the line of action of the force - KS3.P.17- Suggested Activity:
Experiment with levers and pivots.
Turning effect w/s Page 1
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The size of a moment is the product of the size of the force applied and the perpendicular distance from the pivot to the line of action of the force - KS3.P.17
- Suggested Activity:
Turning effect w/s Page 2: Will the levers balance?
Equipment Required:
moments hangers
yellow masses
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The SI units of a moment are Newton Metres (Nm), although Ncm are commonly used. - KS3.P.17
- When a force is applied offset from a pivot, the force produces a turning effect.
- Lesson 04 - What is Atmospheric Pressure? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Pneumatic machines use gas pressure to create movement. - KS3.C.01
- Suggested Activity:
Look at steam engine pistons.
Demo with syringeEquipment Required:
Different diameter syringes connected with tube (air filled). One syringe in while the other is out.
- Suggested Activity:
- Gas pressure is caused by particles (in a gas) bouncing off a surface. - KS3.C.01
- Atmospheric pressure is caused by the weight of air above. - KS3.P.23
- Suggested Activity:
Crushing can
Equipment Required:
Pepsi can
Bowl of water
- Suggested Activity:
- Atmospheric pressure, decreases with increase of height as weight of air above decreases with height - KS3.P.23
- Suggested Activity:
Show graph:
https://www.google.co.uk/images?q=atmospheric pressure vs altitude
Write conclusion, and explain in terms particles.
- Suggested Activity:
- Pressure measured by ratio of force over area - acting normal to any surface. - KS3.P.25
- Suggested Activity:
Pupils calculate the pressure they exert on the floor.
Drawing around shoes on square paper to measure contact area.
Weighting students on newton scales.Equipment Required:
Newton calibratated weight scales
Square paper
- Suggested Activity:
- Pneumatic machines use gas pressure to create movement. - KS3.C.01
- Lesson 05 - How do Cartesian Divers work? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Hydraulic machines use liquid pressure to create movement. - KS3.P.23
- Pressure in fluids is caused by the collision of particles on the surface of an object. - KS3.P.23
- Suggested Activity:
Make Cartesian Divers
Equipment Required:
Straws
Plasticine
2l Bottles and lids
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Make a Cartesian Diver<OL>
Cut a straw 3-4 cm long
Block one end with plastince
Make a weight belt of plasticine so that the diver just float under the surface of water</OL>
Record observations for Diver.
Explain the observations. - KS3.P.23- Suggested Activity:
Observations:
When the bottle is squeezed the diver sinks.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The magnitude of the pressure in liquids is equal to the weight of water above the object. - KS3.P.24
- W: The pressure in liquids increases with depth. - KS3.P.24
- Suggested Activity:
Draw a sketch graph of the relationship.
- Suggested Activity:
- The size of the upthrust force is equal to the weight of the water displaced by the object. - KS3.P.24
- An object will sink until enough water is displaced to produce an upthrust to balance it's weight. - KS3.P.24
- If the weight of the object is greater than the upthrust produced the object will sink. - KS3.P.24
- If the weight of the object is equal to the upthrust produced the object will float. - KS3.P.24
- The density of water is 1kg/l = 1g/ml - KS3.P.24
- Suggested Activity:
Measure a measuring cylinder of water after taring with just the cylinder on Jewelry balances.
Equipment Required:
(Jewelry) balances
- Suggested Activity:
- Objects which are less dense than water will displace a greater weight of water than they have. Therefore they will float. - KS3.P.24
- Suggested Activity:
Sample calculations.
- Suggested Activity:
- Objects which are more dense than water will displace a smaller weight of water than they have. Therefore they will sink. - KS3.P.24
- Suggested Activity:
Sample calculations.
Predict if objects will float given weights and volumes.
How much of an object will be submerged.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Hydraulic machines use liquid pressure to create movement. - KS3.P.23
- Lesson 01 - How do we store energy in a spring? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5P.2
- Lesson 06 - Skill focus: Planning and Data Collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- PLANNING & DATA COLLECTION
Aim: To find out how the load in a boat affects the boat's draft (amount of boat under water).- Suggested Activity:
Plastic beaker inside glass beakers.
Equipment Required:
250 ml beakers
galley pots
10g masses
rulers
- Suggested Activity:
- PLANNING & DATA COLLECTION
- Lesson 07 - Skill focus: Conclusions and Evaluations Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- CONCLUSIONS and EVALUATION:
Aim: To find out how the load in a boat affects the boat's draft (amount of boat under water).- Suggested Activity:
Gradient of line should relate to the diameter of the boat beaker.
- Suggested Activity:
- CONCLUSIONS and EVALUATION:
- Lesson 06 - Skill focus: Planning and Data Collection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5P.3
- Lesson 08 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 5P.1 - KS3.P.03
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/5P.1
Equipment Required:
x
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 5P.1 - KS3.P.03
- Lesson 08 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5P.4
- Lesson 09 - How do we power our homes? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Most homes are heated with natural gas. This is piped to most homes through a national grid, although Rural homes may have a gas tank. - KS3.P.05
- T: Non-Renewable Energy Resources include:
- Coal
- Oil
- Gas
- Nuclear - KS3.P.05 - Homes used to be powered by oil. Some homes are still are. There is no national oil pipe network. - KS3.P.05
- Most of the other appliances in the home are powered by electricity. - KS3.P.05
- Electricity is generated in Power Stations which harness an 'Energy Resource'. - KS3.P.05
- T: Renewable Energy Resources include:
- Wind
- Wave
- Hydro
- Tidal
- Solar
- Biomass
- Geothermal - KS3.P.05 - W: Most thermal power stations convert Chemical (or Nuclear) Energy into thermal by burning and then into Electrical Energy
(Intermediate steps optional). - KS3.P.05- Suggested Activity:
Draw an Energy Transfer Diagram for a thermal power station.
Steam engine attached to SEP demo board.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Most non-thermal power stations convert Kinetic Energy into Electrical Energy
(Intermediate steps optional). - KS3.P.05- Suggested Activity:
Draw an Energy Transfer Diagram for a non-thermal power station.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Solar power stations convert Light Energy into Electrical Energy directly. - KS3.P.05
- Suggested Activity:
SEP demo board & lamp.
Equipment Required:
SEP demo board & lamp.
(Energy transfer kit)
Steam engine
- Suggested Activity:
- Most homes are heated with natural gas. This is piped to most homes through a national grid, although Rural homes may have a gas tank. - KS3.P.05
- Lesson 10 - How much does the energy we use cost? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- D: Comparing power ratings of domestic appliances in watts (W, kW) - KS3.P.02
- Suggested Activity:
Can we see any patterns in the data in the memory anchor?
Sort into categories based on power rating or use.
Excel file to sort on power rating.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Heating appliances use a lot of energy. - KS3.P.02
- W: The amount of energy transferred by an appliance depends on the power rating of the appliance and the duration. - KS3.P.03
- W: Energy = power x time - KS3.P.03
- Suggested Activity:
Combine and convert proportionalities to an equality.
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Sample calculations to include: J, kJ, kWhour units. - KS3.P.03
- Suggested Activity:
Cost of energy worksheet
- Suggested Activity:
- T: A unit of electrical energy is the same as a kilowatt hour (kWh). - KS3.P.04
- T: The amount of electrical energy used by a customer is measured by an electrical meter. - KS3.P.04
- Suggested Activity:
Meter readings
Equipment Required:
Energy meters
Examples of electrical items
hairdryers, cd player, toaster, kettles etc
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The cost of electricity is equal to number of units x cost per unit. - KS3.P.04
- T: The cost of an electrical unit is around 15p.
The cost of Gas is around 4p per kWh, which is why it is preferred for heating applications. - KS3.P.04- Suggested Activity:
https://www.confusedaboutenergy.co.uk/index.php/domestic-fuels/fuel-prices
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Comparing power ratings of domestic appliances in watts (W, kW) - KS3.P.02
- Lesson 09 - How do we power our homes? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 5P.5
- Lesson 11 - Assessment Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Progress Observation Opportunity
- Lesson 12 - Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Reflection
- Reflection
- Lesson 11 - Assessment Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6P.1
- Lesson 01 - How do magnets behave? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Magnets are strongest on their ends. - KS3.P.46
- Suggested Activity:
Play with some bar magnets.
Equipment Required:
bar magnets
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The ends are called magnetic poles. - KS3.P.46
- W: Opposite poles attract and similar poles repel. - KS3.P.46
- Suggested Activity:
Demo circular levitation magnets on stick.
Equipment Required:
floating circular (coloured ring magnets on a pole)magnets
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Magnets can be made by stroking an magnetic material in the same direction with the same pole.
- Suggested Activity:
Research the history of magnets.
Magnetise a test tube of iron by stroking it horizontally and testing with plotting compass:
As: http://www.cmste.uregina.ca/Quickstarts/pdf/testtubemagnet.pdfEquipment Required:
Test tubes iron filings
magnets
plotting compasses
iron nails
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Magnetic materials become magnetic when the domains inside are lined up in the same direction.
- T: Magnetic domains are small regions within the material that act like a magnet.
- T: Domains are created by the spinning electrons in particles.
- H: SET HOMEWORK: Wordsearch - KS3.P.29
- W: Magnets are strongest on their ends. - KS3.P.46
- Lesson 02 - How do we map a magnet's effect? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The area around a magnet in which a magnetic object experiences a force is called a magnetic field. - KS3.P.47
- W: The magnetic field has a shape based on the shape of the magnet and the magnetic objects abound it. - KS3.P.47
- Suggested Activity:
Bar magnets under paper with iron filings on top.
Single magnet.
Two magnets attracting.
Two magnets repelling.Equipment Required:
Bar magnets, pieces of card, wooden blocks,
iron filings
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Magnetic fields are represented by field lines. - KS3.P.47
- W: The magnetic field is strongest where magnetic field lines are closest together (normally the poles). - KS3.P.47
- T: Magnetic field lines can be plotted with a compass. - KS3.P.47
- Suggested Activity:
Demo plotting compasses around a bar magnet on OHP.
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Magnetic field lines flow from North to South poles outside a magnet. - KS3.P.47
- T: The area around a magnet in which a magnetic object experiences a force is called a magnetic field. - KS3.P.47
- Lesson 03 - How do we use the Earth's magnetic field? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The Earth has a magnetic field with a similar shape to that of a bar magnet. - KS3.P.48
- The Earth's has a magnet field is caused by the spinning of Iron and Nickel core. - KS3.P.48
- The Earth's magnetic field will produce a force on compass needle, aligning the needle with the Earth's field and navigation - KS3.P.48
- Suggested Activity:
Make a survival compass:
Unfold a paper clip, stroke in one direction with a bar magnet. Float the straight paper clip on a leaf or cork.Equipment Required:
Straightened paper clips, bar magnets, petrie dishes, cork disks, water
- Suggested Activity:
- The Earth has a magnetic field with a similar shape to that of a bar magnet. - KS3.P.48
- Lesson 01 - How do magnets behave? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6P.2
- Lesson 04 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Planning
- Aim: To find out which materials are magnetic.- Suggested Activity:
Floating paper clip.
http://www.sciwebhop.net/sci_web/science/ks3/year8/8j/sow.ht1.gif
Material samples placed between paper clip and magnet, to classify them as magnetic or non-magnetic.Equipment Required:
paper clips, cotton, magnets, material samples to disrupt magnetic force.
(intray in racking)
- Suggested Activity:
- A: ENQUIRY: Planning
- Lesson 05 - Skill focus: Data collection & simple conclusions Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: ENQUIRY: Data collection & Conclsion
- A: ENQUIRY: Data collection & Conclsion
- Lesson 06 - Skill focus: Inferred Conclusions Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Magnetism flows more easily through a magnetic material and so magnetic materials change the location of magnetic field lines.
- Suggested Activity:
Draw diagrams to show the predicted flow of field lines.
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Magnetism flows more easily through a magnetic material and so magnetic materials change the location of magnetic field lines.
- Lesson 04 - Skill focus: Planning Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6P.3
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Review of 6P.1
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/6P.1
- Suggested Activity:
- H: SET HOMEWORK:
Learn Definitions of keywords
(Crossword) and revise (Flashcards)
- A: Review of 6P.1
- Lesson 07 - Halfway Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6P.4
- Lesson 08 - Why does a rubbed balloon stick to the wall? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Objects can become charged when objects are rubbed together. - KS3.P.44
- Suggested Activity:
Demo balloon rubbed on jumper sticking to wall.
Equipment Required:
1 X balloon
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Charged objects create forces between themselves. - KS3.P.44
- Suggested Activity:
Play with clothes and rods.
- Bend water
- attract suspended charged rods
- attract hole punches?
repel a drinks canEquipment Required:
static rods, cloths, paper hole punches
drinks cans
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Objects charged in the same way repel each other. - KS3.P.44
- Suggested Activity:
Two rods of same material rubbed with same cloth. Will repel each other.
- Suggested Activity:
- D: Objects used to charge each other will attract each other. - KS3.P.44
- Suggested Activity:
Use the cloth to attract the rod.
- Suggested Activity:
- A: Separation of positive or negative charges when objects are rubbed together. - KS3.P.44
- Suggested Activity:
Draw diagram showing the movement of negative charges, leaving a positive object.
NB: Must be a movement of negative charges.
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Objects can become charged when objects are rubbed together. - KS3.P.44
- Lesson 09 - How does a Van de Graaff generator work? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The negative charges which are transferred are electrons. - KS3.P.44
- Suggested Activity:
Explain how a Van de Graaff generator works.
- Suggested Activity:
- There are electrostatic forces between charged objects. - KS3.P.44
- Suggested Activity:
Use Van de Graaff to demo forces between
Equipment Required:
Van de Graaf
- Suggested Activity:
- DESIRABLE:
Electrons are able to be transferred because they are on the outer edge of an atom. - KS3.P.44 - H: SET HOMEWORK:
Revise keyword meaning and concepts for POO.
- The negative charges which are transferred are electrons. - KS3.P.44
- Lesson 10 - How do we map a charge's effect? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Lesson 08 - Why does a rubbed balloon stick to the wall? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 6P.5
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity - KS3.P.29
- A: Progress Observation Opportunity - KS3.P.29
- Lesson 12 - Progress Reflection Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: Reflection - KS3.P.29
- W: Reflection - KS3.P.29
- Lesson 11 - Progress Observation Opportunity Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 7P.1
- Lesson 01 - Is light a wave and what determines the colour of light? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: The maximum displacement is called the amplitude. - KS3.P.29
- T: The distance between like places on a wave, such as peak-to-peak or trough-to-trough, is known as the wavelengths. Wavelength is measured in metres (m). - KS3.P.29
- Suggested Activity:
Starter: draw and label a transverse wave (recall from previous topic)
- Suggested Activity:
- T: Waves transfer energy from one place to another, but generally not matter (particles). - KS3.P.29
- Water waves and light waves are transverse waves, because the displacement is perpendicular to the direction of the wave. - KS3.P.35
- Suggested Activity:
Use string to model the movement of transverse waves (link back to sound waves being transverse)
Equipment Required:
long lengths of string for paired work
selection of slinkies
- Suggested Activity:
- When light (or waves) waves change speed they change direction. This is called refraction. - KS3.P.40
- Suggested Activity:
Refraction light
Equipment Required:
prisms
ray boxes
slit cards
power supplies
- Suggested Activity:
- Light waves can travel through a vacuum. - KS3.P.36
- Light is called electromagnetic radiation. - KS3.P.35
- When all colours of light mix they add up to form white light. - KS3.P.40
- Suggested Activity:
Splitting white light class set
Equipment Required:
60 deg triangle prisms
ray boxes
slit cards
power supplies
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The different colours of light are refracted (bend) different amounts.
Red is refracted the least, Violet is refracted the most. - KS3.P.40 - T: The different colours have different frequencies of light. - KS3.P.40
- T: The higher the frequency of light, the more it is refracted by the prism. - KS3.P.40
- Light waves do not involve particles, they are displacements in electrical and magnetic fields. - KS3.P.35
- Suggested Activity:
Bell in Bell jar and vacuum pump
focus on object in the jar as still being able to be seen by the lightEquipment Required:
Electric Bell in Bell jar
Power supply
Vacuum pump
Lamp on other side of bell jar
- Suggested Activity:
- W: The higher the frequency the higher the energy of the wave. - KS3.P.40
- Suggested Activity:
Create a wave in a rope or rubber tubing. Which takes more energy to create, a rapidly changing wave (high frequency) or a slowly changing wave
Equipment Required:
Long (~3m) Rope or rubber tube
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Red has the lowest frequency (of visible light).
Violet has the highest frequency (of visible light) - KS3.P.40 - The speed of light through a vacuum is always 3x10^8 m/s - KS3.P.36
- W: Red has the lowest energy (of visible light).
Violet has the highest energy (of visible light) - KS3.P.40 - When colours of paint are mix they subtract, forming brown. - KS3.P.40
- Suggested Activity:
https://phet.colorado.edu/sims/html/color-vision/latest/color-vision_en.html
- Suggested Activity:
- T: The maximum displacement is called the amplitude. - KS3.P.29
- Lesson 01 - Is light a wave and what determines the colour of light? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 7P.2
- Lesson 02 - What happens when light bounces off a surface? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- W: When a wave encounters a material it is either:
reflected;
absorbed or;
transmitted - KS3.P.37- Suggested Activity:
Thought exp:
What could happen when an attacking rugby player becomes comes in contact with a defensive player. NB Stopped means energy is absorbed
- Suggested Activity:
- Light (waves) travels in straight lines. We use rays to show this. - KS3.P.38
- W: When a wave is reflected from an object like a mirror, the angle of reflection equals the angle of incidence. - KS3.P.37
- Suggested Activity:
Ray diagrams with mirrors
Equipment Required:
Ray boxes
Slit cards
Protractors
Mirrors
Mirror holders
Power packs
- Suggested Activity:
- W: Use of ray model to explain imaging in mirrors - KS3.P.38
- Suggested Activity:
Ray diagrams with mirrors to form image.
- Suggested Activity:
- When a wave is reflected from an object like a mirror, it is called specular reflection. - KS3.P.37
- In specular reflection rays are reflected at a consistent angle, allowing an image to be formed. - KS3.P.37
- Diffuse scattering occurs when rays are reflected from a surface in a variety of angles. - KS3.P.37
- Suggested Activity:
Discuss the viewing angle of a projector screen - people can see what is reflecting from the screen all around the room. So the rays of light must be reflecting in all directions.
Is there a particular angle it is brighter? There is probably a bright spot if the projector is illuminating a whiteboard.
- Suggested Activity:
- Differential colour effects in absorption and diffuse reflection - KS3.P.40
- Suggested Activity:
Light from a ray box reflecting of different colour paper
NB: We only have 5 data loggers so it advisable to have half the class doing the previousEquipment Required:
Ray boxes
Power supplies
Data loggers light meters
10 Different colours of paper sqaures
- Suggested Activity:
- W: When a wave encounters a material it is either:
- Lesson 02 - What happens when light bounces off a surface? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 7P.3
- Lesson 03 - What happens when light travels through a surface? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Mini enquiry into the effects of refraction. - KS3.P.37
- Suggested Activity:
Light from a ray box through tracing paper as it travels through glass block.
students plan, carry out and write a conclusion for the data.Equipment Required:
Ray boxes
Power supplies
Data loggers light meters
Tracing paper
- Suggested Activity:
- Mini enquiry into the effects of refraction. - KS3.P.37
- Lesson 03 - What happens when light travels through a surface? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 7P.4
- Lesson 04 - How does light get into the eye? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- The eye consists of an: iris; pupil; cornea; lens; retina; and optic nerve. - KS3.P.38
- Light enters the eye through the pupil. - KS3.P.38
- The pupil changes size to keep the amount of light energy entering the eye constant. - KS3.P.38
- Suggested Activity:
In pairs one cover an eye for 15s then uncover so partner can see pupil shrink.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DW2iwEshWME
- Suggested Activity:
- Light is refracted so that rays of light from the one place on the object reaches only one place on the retina. This creates a focused (clear) and bright image. - KS3.P.38
- The cornea and the lens are convex in shape and so focus the light. - KS3.P.38
- A lens can collect the rays that enter it and concentrate them to a single point on the screen, forming a bright, focused image. - KS3.P.38
- The retina has specialised cells that sense / detect light energy by having chemicals that are destroyed when they absorb the light energy. - KS3.P.38
- Suggested Activity:
Look at a bright light and then close eyes to 'see' coloured shapes.
- Suggested Activity:
- D: The cell uses the amount of chemical left to send a message to the brain in the form of electrical energy. - KS3.P.38
- The eye consists of an: iris; pupil; cornea; lens; retina; and optic nerve. - KS3.P.38
- Lesson 04 - How does light get into the eye? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 7P.5
- Lesson 05 - Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review - KS3.P.29
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/7P
- Suggested Activity:
- Review - KS3.P.29
- Lesson 05 - Review Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 7P.6
- Lesson 06 - Homework Questions Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- ES H: Use of ray model to explain imaging in pinhole cameras. - KS3.P.38
- Suggested Activity:
Making Pin hole cameras:
1 small hole
3 small holes
1 large hole
1 large hole lensEquipment Required:
Pin hole camera
12V filament bulbs
power packs
Optical Pins
- Suggested Activity:
- Light transfers energy from source to absorber. - KS3.P.39
- The energy absorbed can lead to chemical effects such photosensitive chemicals in photo films. - KS3.P.39
- Suggested Activity:
http://www.rsc.org/learn-chemistry/resource/res00000454/making-a-photographic-print?cmpid=CMP00005166
Equipment Required:
Each demonstration (or pair of students) requires 0.1 M solutions of:
Potassium chloride, 10 cm3
Potassium bromide, 5 cm3
Potassium iodide, 5 cm3
Silver nitrate, 10 cm3
Protective gloves (preferably nitrile gloves)
A square of white paper, about 10 x 10 cm, or a filter paper of similar size
Small paint brushes, 2
Test-tubes, 3
Test-tube rack
Hairdryer (Note 1)
- Suggested Activity:
- ES H: With one small hole, a pinhole camera gives a faint image that is in focus.
This is because only a single ray can enter the camera so there is not much light so the image is dim, but only image is formed so it is clear (focused) image - KS3.P.38 - ES H: The energy absorbed can lead to chemical changes in cells such as those in the back of the eye.- the retenia. - KS3.P.39
- ES H: With three small holes, a pinhole camera gives three faint image that are in focus.
It works in the same way as a single hole, but a different angle so the images are offset from each other. - KS3.P.38 - Light is refracted first by the cornea and then by the lens. - KS3.P.38
- H: When light is absorbed by a charged surface, the charge can leak away. - KS3.P.39
- Suggested Activity:
DEMO photovoltaic effect (work function) with gold leaf electroscope, Zinc plate & UV lamp?
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=muxRZ1irsrkEquipment Required:
Gold leaf electroscope
Plastic rod
Duster
Zinc plate
UVC lamp
- Suggested Activity:
- ES H: With a large hole, a pinhole camera gives a bright out of focus image.
A big hole can be thought of as thousands of small holes joined together. So thousand of images are produced on the screen slightly offset from one another forming a blurred, out of focused image. - KS3.P.38 - H: The change in electrical charge can be measured by a circuit to produce a picture. ie a digital camera sensor (CCD) - KS3.P.39
- Suggested Activity:
Explain using visualiser
- Suggested Activity:
- ES H: Use of ray model to explain imaging in pinhole cameras. - KS3.P.38
- Lesson 06 - Homework Questions Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8P.01
- Lesson 01 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Potential difference is the difference in energy between two parts of a circuit, and is measured in volts. - KS3.P.42
- Suggested Activity:
Measuring voltage and current in a series circuit
Equipment Required:
Electricity trolley
voltmeter
ammeter
leads
powerpacks
batteries
- Suggested Activity:
- Electric current is the flow of charge and is measured in amperes.
KS4: Add 'rate of' to definition and then define the coulomb. - KS3.P.41 - The charged particles able to move in a metal are electrons. So in a metal current is the flow of electrons. - KS3.P.41
- Current is measured using an Ammeter which must be placed in series in the circuit. - KS3.P.41
- Potential difference is measured using a Voltmeter which must be placed in parallel with a component. - KS3.P.42
- Charge can not be created, destroyed or be stored on a wire, therefore currents add where branches meet. - KS3.P.41
- Potential difference is a store of energy caused by the compressing of a charge particle's electric field. - KS3.P.42
- Potential differences in series add up, for example adding cells - direction important. - KS3.P.42
- Battery and bulb (p.d.) ratings need to be matched otherwise too much energy transfer will cause the bulbs to melt. - KS3.P.42
- Potential difference is the difference in energy between two parts of a circuit, and is measured in volts. - KS3.P.42
- Lesson 01 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8P.02
- Lesson 02 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Circuits are represented by circuit diagrams in which:
- Wires are drawn as straight lines
- With component symbols
- Right angle corners. - KS3.P.41- Suggested Activity:
Students make simple series circuit.
Equipment Required:
Bulbs
Cells
Connecting wires
Switch
- Suggested Activity:
- Component symbols to know
- Cell
- Battery
- Wire
- Bulb
- Switch
- Voltmeter
- Ammeter - KS3.P.41- Suggested Activity:
DEMO: Electrical components
Equipment Required:
Examples of components:
Cell
Battery
Wire
Bulb
Switch
Voltmeter
Ammeter
- Suggested Activity:
- Series circuits consist of only one branch with component placed one after another. - KS3.P.41
- Parallel circuits consist of more than one branch. - KS3.P.41
- Circuits are represented by circuit diagrams in which:
- Lesson 02 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8P.03
- Lesson 03 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Resistance is a measure of how hard it is for current to flow through a material / set of components and measured in ohms, - KS3.P.42
- Suggested Activity:
Resistance across a copper wire
Equipment Required:
Powerpacks
Large variable resistors
ammeter
voltmeter
leads
- Suggested Activity:
- The differences in resistance between conducting and insulating components can be explained by the amount of charged particles (and how much charge they hold) available to move.
Conductors have more available charge carriers than insulators. - KS3.P.43 - Resistance is the ratio of potential difference (p.d.) to current. - KS3.P.42
- To be able to calculate Resistance given a p.d. and current using R = V / i - KS3.P.42
- To be able to calculate either a p.d. or current given the other and the resistance by rearranging R = V / i - KS3.P.42
- Resistance is a measure of how hard it is for current to flow through a material / set of components and measured in ohms, - KS3.P.42
- Lesson 03 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8P.04
- Lesson 04 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- An electromagnets is consists of:
- a coil
- a current source
- possibly a core - KS3.P.49 - Uses of electromagnets:
- Door bell
- Relay - KS3.P.49 - Electromagnets enquiry:
Aim: To find out how the __________ affects the strength of an electromagnet. - KS3.P.49 - D: The motor effect occurs when a magnetic field created by a flow of current interacts with a magnetic field from a permanent magnet. - KS3.P.49
- D: To use the motor effect to explain:
- a 'ding dong' door bell.
- Speaker - KS3.P.49
- An electromagnets is consists of:
- Lesson 04 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 8P.05
- Lesson 05 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- Review of 8P.1 - KS3.P.03
- Suggested Activity:
https://www.mrcorfe.com/Hamble/Questions/8P.1
- Suggested Activity:
- Review of 8P.1 - KS3.P.03
- Lesson 05 - Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- 0S.1
- Overview
- T: Primary objectives:
- Students to become inspire to study science as they enjoy productive science lessons.
- Students to learn how to be safe in science.
- Students learn that science is about thinking and working things out from observations / evidence.
- Students are empowered for later success by learning co-operative thinking skills. - T: Secondary objective:
- Students are empowered for later success by learning science skills.
- Students learn technical language which can be taught later.
- T: Primary objectives:
- Lesson 01 - What does it take to become a Scientist? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Expectations:
- Where / how to line up.
- Standing for register with blazers on.
- Ready to learn by the end of the register. - T: What is Science?
- Science is the concerted human effort to understand the working and history of the natural world. It is done through observation of natural phenomena, and/or through experimentation that tries to simulate natural processes under controlled conditions. - T: Introduce:
- Think-Pair-Share: Science is about working things out – the thinking is more important than the answer so no one can steal the thinking opportunity from others by calling out the answer.
- Telling someone the answer is not helping them.
- Be teachers: make some think of an answer by asking questions - T: Observations:
- Spot the difference
- Optical Illusions
- Close up pictures
- T: Expectations:
- Lesson 02 - How do we safely light a Bunsen Burner? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: How to light a Bunsen burner.
- T: Risk assessments.
- Suggested Activity:
Unsafe lab: Investigating science w/s 1a
- Suggested Activity:
- T: A hazard is the thing that will cause you harm.
- T: A risk is how you may be harmed.
- T: A control measure is what you keep the same to ensure a fair test.
- T: How to light a Bunsen burner.
- Lesson 03 - How do we safely heat water? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Safety:
- Lab rules / procedures
- Everything STOPS for Safety
- CLP Symbols - T: Measuring time to heat water on roaring blue and half height, half air hole.
Equip:
-Beakers
-Thermometers
-Stopwatches - H: Safety Symbols Match up
- T: Safety:
- Lesson 04 - What are the standard pieces of lab equipment? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Equipment
- Names
- Taking measurements circus - T: Scientific Questions:
- Variables: IV - I change; DV - We Measure; CVs: We keep the same
- Modelling the real world in a simple way - The Independent Variable is the one we change.
- The Dependent Variable is the one we measure.
- The Control Variables are the ones we keep the same to make it a fair test.
- H: Equipment Match up
- We use a measuring cylinder to volumes of liquids.
- We use thermometers to measure the temperature of an object.
- H: Learn the variables
- T: Equipment
- Lesson 05 - How strong is a Toilet Paper? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Enquiry 1:
- Following a detailed method
- Aim: To find out how the number of layers (of different brands) toilet paper affects it strength.
- T: Enquiry 1:
- Lesson 06 - How do we draw a graph? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Continuous data can be any value.
- T: Categoric data can only be from a set of possible values.
- T: For Continuous IV data we plot a scattergraph.
- T: Graph drawing – 8 stage method, flip the flaps.
- T: Continuous data can be any value.
- Lesson 07 - How do we read graphs? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: Conclusions
- Reading graphs and putting it into a relationship
- Back it up with data - T: Give out ‘Ladders’ and tracking sheet.
- T: Set targets for graphs and conclusions.
- T: Conclusions
- Lesson 08 - How good is your data? Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- T: DESIRABLE:
Evaluations
- All class time the same event
- Find variations
- Discuss random error - T: DESIRABLE:
Calculating means
- Discard anomalies
- Add up remaining numbers for the same measurement
- Press equals
- Divide by the number of numbers
- Round to the same number of decimal places as the original measurements.
- T: DESIRABLE:
- Lesson 09 - Baseline Assessment Lesson Plan Lesson Title
- A: Baseline assessment / teach the sheets for enquiry
- A: Baseline assessment / teach the sheets for enquiry
- Overview